[CONFIDENTIAL]

Cover r

TASKalfa 307ci
PF-5120/5130/5140
DF-5100/JS-5100
AK-5100/MT-5100
FAX System 11

SERVICE MANUAL
Published in March 2020
Rev.3
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

Caution

CONFIDENTIAL
FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PARTIES.

CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.
METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

Revision history

Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1 4 March 2019 4-19Page Added: Attention on installation
2 31 May 2019 6-11Page Correction: Correct the description of toner log

7-157Page Added: System error F60X

3 30 March 2020 4-138Page Correction: Correct the procddure

 [CONFIDENTIAL]

1-1-1 Safety precautions

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols

The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

 [CONFIDENTIAL]

1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
Contents
Contents

1 Specifications ................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
(1) Common function...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
(2) Copy Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
(3) Printer Functions....................................................................................................................................... 1-3
(4) Scanner Functions .................................................................................................................................... 1-4
(5) Document Processor: 30ppm model standard ......................................................................................... 1-4
(6) Option ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
(6-1)Paper feeder (PF-5120) ................................................................................................................... 1-4
(6-2)Paper feeder (PF-5130) ................................................................................................................... 1-5
(6-3)Paper feeder (PF-5140) ................................................................................................................... 1-5
(6-4)Inner finisher (DF-5100) ................................................................................................................... 1-5
(6-5)Mailbox (MT-5100) ........................................................................................................................... 1-6
(6-6)Job separator(JS-5100) ................................................................................................................... 1-6
(6-7)FAX System11 ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-2 Part Names ............................................................................................................................................... 1-8
(1) Machine Exterior ....................................................................................................................................... 1-8
(2) Connectors/Interior ................................................................................................................................. 1-10
(3) With Optional Equipments Attached ....................................................................................................... 1-11
(4) FAX System 11 ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
(5) Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................................................. 1-13
1-3 Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 1-14
(1) MT-5100 "Mailbox".................................................................................................................................. 1-16
(2) PF-5120 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet)" ..................................................................................................... 1-16
(3) PF-5130 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)" ................................................................................................ 1-16
(4) PF-5140 "Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet)".................................................................................... 1-16
(5) JS-5100 "Job Separator" ........................................................................................................................ 1-16
(6) DF-5100 "Inner Finisher" ........................................................................................................................ 1-16
(7) FAX System 11 "FAX Kit" ....................................................................................................................... 1-16
(8) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit" .................................................................................................................. 1-16
(9) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit".................................................................................................... 1-16
(10) HD-6/HD-7 "SSD" ................................................................................................................................... 1-16
(11) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" .............................................................................. 1-17
(12) DT-5100 "Document Table" .................................................................................................................... 1-17
(13) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"........................................................................................................................ 1-17
(14) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit" .................................................................................................. 1-17
(15) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"............................................................................................................. 1-17
(16) "Expansion Memory"............................................................................................................................... 1-17
(17) "SD/SDHC Memory Card" ...................................................................................................................... 1-17
1-4 Unit Compatibility .................................................................................................................................... 1-18

2 Installation ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Environment.............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items ................................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Notes on main unit transportation ............................................................................................................. 2-4
(3) Attaching the sub tray ............................................................................................................................... 2-4
(4) Setting up the Toner Container................................................................................................................. 2-5
(5) Loading Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 2-5
(5-1)Precaution for Loading Paper .......................................................................................................... 2-5
(5-2)Set paper in the cassette ................................................................................................................. 2-6
(5-3)Set paper in the high capacity feeder ............................................................................................... 2-7
(6) Connecting the Power Cord...................................................................................................................... 2-9
(7) Turn the power on................................................................................................................................... 2-10
(8) Default Setting ........................................................................................................................................ 2-10
(8-1)Setting Date and Time ................................................................................................................... 2-10
(8-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ........................................................................................ 2-11
(8-3)Altitude Adjustment Setting ............................................................................................................ 2-11
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(8-4)Paper size and media type setting ................................................................................................. 2-12

(9) Installing Software .................................................................................................................................. 2-12
(10) Maintenance mode workflow (Maintenance mode U952 )...................................................................... 2-12
(10-1)Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464) ................................................... 2-12
(10-2)Color registration adjustment (Maintenance mode U469) ............................................................ 2-13
(10-3)Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410) ................................................. 2-13
(10-4)Output an own-status report (Maintenance mode U000) ............................................................. 2-13
(10-5)Clearing the counts (maintenance mode U927) ........................................................................... 2-13
(10-6)Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278) ................................................................... 2-14
(11) Checking LSU cleaning operation (Maintenance mode U474) ............................................................... 2-14
(12) Exiting from the maintenance mode ....................................................................................................... 2-14
(13) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)................................................................ 2-14
2 - 3 Installing the optional devices ................................................................................................................. 2-15
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items(option units) ............................................................................ 2-15
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-5120) ................................................................................................................ 2-15
(1-2)Paper Feeder (PF-5130) ................................................................................................................ 2-16
(1-3)Paper Feeder (PF-5140) ................................................................................................................ 2-17
(1-4)Inner Finisher (DF-5100) ................................................................................................................ 2-18
(1-5)Mailbox (MT-5100) ......................................................................................................................... 2-19
(2) Optional unit installation.......................................................................................................................... 2-20
(3) Connecting the Interface Cable .............................................................................................................. 2-20
(4) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only) .................................................................................. 2-22
2 - 4 Installing the optional equipment ............................................................................................................ 2-24
(1) Memory Module ...................................................................................................................................... 2-24
(2) SD/SDHC Memory Card ......................................................................................................................... 2-26
(3) SSD (HD-6/HD-7) ................................................................................................................................... 2-28
(4) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50) ..................................................................................................... 2-28
(5) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51) ............................................................................................................... 2-28
(6) Document table DT-5100........................................................................................................................ 2-30
(7) ID card reader ......................................................................................................................................... 2-33
(8) USB Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................ 2-38
(9) Cassette heater ...................................................................................................................................... 2-44
(9-1)In case of the main unit cassette .................................................................................................... 2-44
(9-2)In case of paper feeder (PF-5120) ................................................................................................. 2-47
(9-3)In case of paper feeder (PF-5130) ................................................................................................. 2-50
(9-4)In case of paper feeder (PF-5140) ................................................................................................. 2-52
2 - 5 About Optional Applications.................................................................................................................... 2-55
2 - 6 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ........................................................................... 2-56

3 Machine Design ............................................................................................. 3-1

3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view.................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................................... 3-2
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5120) ............................................................................................. 3-2
(2) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5130) ............................................................................................. 3-2
(3) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5140) ............................................................................................. 3-3
(4) Job separator cross-section view (JS-5100)............................................................................................. 3-3
(5) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-5100) ........................................................................................... 3-4
(6) Finisher cross-section view (DF-5100) ..................................................................................................... 3-4
(7) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100) ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3 Electric parts ............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
(1) Wire connection ........................................................................................................................................ 3-6
(1-1)(Machine rear side) .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
(1-2)Backside of the High-voltage PWB .................................................................................................. 3-7
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs ......................................................................................................... 3-8
(2-1)Main PWB ........................................................................................................................................ 3-8
(2-2)Engine PWB ..................................................................................................................................... 3-8
(2-3)High-voltage PWB ............................................................................................................................ 3-9
(2-4)Power source PWB .......................................................................................................................... 3-9
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-5)Operation panel PWB .................................................................................................................... 3-10

(3) PWBs ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
(3-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-11
(3-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-12
(4) Sensors and Switches ............................................................................................................................ 3-14
(4-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14
(4-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-16
(5) Motors ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-18
(5-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-18
(5-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-20
(6) Others ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
(6-1)Layout ............................................................................................................................................ 3-22
(6-2)Part name table .............................................................................................................................. 3-23
3-4 Electric parts (option) .............................................................................................................................. 3-25
(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120) .......................................................................................................................... 3-25
(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130) .......................................................................................................................... 3-26
(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140) .......................................................................................................................... 3-28
(4) Attachment kit (AK-5100)........................................................................................................................ 3-29
(5) Inner finisher (DF-5100).......................................................................................................................... 3-30
(6) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100) ................................................................................................... 3-31
(7) Job separator(JS-5100) .......................................................................................................................... 3-32
3-5 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................... 3-33
(1) Drive system for the paper conveying .................................................................................................... 3-33
(2) Drive location .......................................................................................................................................... 3-34
(3) Drive unit................................................................................................................................................. 3-35
(3-1)Driving feed unit. ............................................................................................................................ 3-35
(3-2)Main drive unit ................................................................................................................................ 3-35
(3-3)Toner supply drive unit ................................................................................................................... 3-35
3-6 Mechanical construction ......................................................................................................................... 3-36
(1) Paper feed and conveying section.......................................................................................................... 3-36
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-36
(1-2)MP tray paper feed section ............................................................................................................ 3-38
(1-3)Paper conveying section ................................................................................................................ 3-40
(2) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 3-42
(2-1)Image scanner section ................................................................................................................... 3-42
(2-2)Laser scanner unit .......................................................................................................................... 3-44
(3) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 3-46
(3-1)Developer unit ................................................................................................................................ 3-46
(4) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 3-48
(4-1)Charger roller unit .......................................................................................................................... 3-48
(4-2)Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 3-50
(5) Transfer and separation section ............................................................................................................. 3-52
(5-1)Primary transfer unit ....................................................................................................................... 3-52
(5-2)Secondary transfer unit .................................................................................................................. 3-53
(6) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 3-55
(6-1)Fuser unit ....................................................................................................................................... 3-55
(7) Exit and feedshift section ........................................................................................................................ 3-57
(7-1)Exit unit .......................................................................................................................................... 3-57
(7-2)exit paper jam ................................................................................................................................. 3-58
(8) Duplex conveying section ....................................................................................................................... 3-60
(8-1)Duplex conveying unit .................................................................................................................... 3-60
(9) Document processorOriginal .................................................................................................................. 3-62
(9-1)paper feed section .......................................................................................................................... 3-62
(9-2)Original conveying section and Original switchback and exit section ............................................ 3-64
(9-3)Reversing duplex scanning ............................................................................................................ 3-66
3-7 Extension device construction (option) ................................................................................................... 3-67
(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120) .......................................................................................................................... 3-67
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-67
(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130) .......................................................................................................................... 3-69
(2-1)Cassette paper feed section .......................................................................................................... 3-69
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140) .......................................................................................................................... 3-71

(3-1)Paper deck feed section ................................................................................................................. 3-71
(4) Inner finisher (DF-5100).......................................................................................................................... 3-73
(4-1)Paper conveying section ................................................................................................................ 3-73
(4-2)Bundle exit operation ..................................................................................................................... 3-76
(5) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100) ................................................................................................... 3-78
(5-1)Exiting to the mailbox tray .............................................................................................................. 3-80

4 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ............................................................................................................ 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container .................................................................................................................. 4-1
(4) Screening of the toner container............................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
(1) Maintenance kits ....................................................................................................................................... 4-3
(2) Maintenance kit for the document processor ............................................................................................ 4-3
(3) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit .................................................... 4-4
(4) Maintenance parts list ............................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................................ 4-5
(1) Cassette paper feed section ..................................................................................................................... 4-5
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup roller and paper feed roller ................................................... 4-5
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller ...................................................................................... 4-7
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner ................................................................................... 4-9
(2) MP tray paper feed section ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed roller ...................................................................... 4-11
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the MP separation pad ........................................................................ 4-12
(3) Transfer section ...................................................................................................................................... 4-13
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit ...................................................................... 4-13
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller unit ......................................................... 4-14
(4) Drum section........................................................................................................................................... 4-15
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ....................................................................................... 4-15
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit ................................................................... 4-18
(5) Developer section ................................................................................................................................... 4-21
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit ................................................................................ 4-21
(6) Fuser section .......................................................................................................................................... 4-25
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit ....................................................................................... 4-25
(7) Document processor............................................................................................................................... 4-27
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller ................................... 4-27
(7-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pad ........................................................................ 4-28
4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ............................................................................. 4-29
(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120) .......................................................................................................................... 4-29
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ............................................... 4-29
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller .................................................................................... 4-31
(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130) .......................................................................................................................... 4-33
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ............................................... 4-33
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller .................................................................................... 4-35
(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140) .......................................................................................................................... 4-37
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ............................................... 4-37
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller .................................................................................... 4-39
4 - 5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit ................................................................... 4-41
4 - 6 Disassembly and Reassembly................................................................................................................ 4-42
(1) Outer covers ........................................................................................................................................... 4-42
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover ..................................................................................... 4-42
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the rear left cover, rear right cover, rear lower cover,
right top cover and right rear cover ........................................................................................................ 4-44
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover ............................................................................... 4-47
(1-4)Detaching and reattaching the left cover ........................................................................................ 4-47
(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the right cover assembly ..................................................................... 4-48
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Optical section ........................................................................................................................................ 4-53

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU ............................................................................................... 4-53
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU) .............................................................. 4-65
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU) upper assembly .................................... 4-70
(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage assembly ........................................................... 4-72
(3) PWBs ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-77
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB .................................................................................. 4-77
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB ................................................................................ 4-81
(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB .......................................................................... 4-85
(3-4)Detaching and reattaching the power source PWB ....................................................................... 4-89
(3-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB .................................................................... 4-94
(4) Drive section ........................................................................................................................................... 4-99
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit ................................................................................ 4-99
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit ............................................................................. 4-109
(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the transfer motor .............................................................................. 4-119
(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit ................................................................. 4-125
(5) Document processor............................................................................................................................. 4-133
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor .................................................................... 4-133
(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover .............................................................................. 4-134
(6) Others ................................................................................................................................................... 4-135
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the lift motor ...................................................................................... 4-135
(6-2)Detaching and reattaching the eject unit ...................................................................................... 4-137
(6-3)Replacing the language sheet ...................................................................................................... 4-140
(6-4)Fan motor attachment direction ................................................................................................... 4-141
4 - 7 Disassembly & Reassembly (option) .................................................................................................... 4-142
(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120) ........................................................................................................................ 4-142
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit ................................................................................ 4-142
(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ................................................................................. 4-143
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB ...................................................................................... 4-145
(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130) ........................................................................................................................ 4-146
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit ................................................................................ 4-146
(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ................................................................................. 4-147
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB ...................................................................................... 4-149
(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140) ........................................................................................................................ 4-150
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit ................................................................................ 4-150
(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ................................................................................. 4-151
(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB ...................................................................................... 4-152
(4) Finisher (DF-5100)................................................................................................................................ 4-153
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB ...................................................................................... 4-153
4 - 8 Periodic maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................................ 4-155
(1) Main unit ............................................................................................................................................... 4-155
(2) Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 4-157
(3) PF-5120 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-158
(4) PF-5130 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-159
(5) PF-5140 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-160
(6) AK-5100 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-161
(7) JS-5100 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-161
(8) DF-5100 (Option) .................................................................................................................................. 4-162
(9) MT-5100 (Option) ................................................................................................................................. 4-163

5 Firmware update ............................................................................................ 5-1

6 Maintenance mode ........................................................................................ 6-1

6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ............................................................................................................ 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ............................................................................................................................ 6-2
(3) Content of the maintenance mode............................................................................................................ 6-6
6-2 Service mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-219
(1) Executing the service mode.................................................................................................................. 6-219
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Service mode list .................................................................................................................................. 6-220

(3) Descriptions of service modes .............................................................................................................. 6-220

7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 7-1

7 - 1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure .............................................................................................................. 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side or back side through the DP) ........................................ 7-2
(2-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-2)Background is colored ...................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-3)Black dots or color dots .................................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-4)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................... 7-5
(2-5)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color) ............................................................................................ 7-5
(2-6)Vertical streaks or bands (white) ...................................................................................................... 7-6
(2-7)Entire blank image (white or black) .................................................................................................. 7-6
(2-8)Image is blurred ............................................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-9)Part of the image is not copied ......................................................................................................... 7-7
(2-10)The entire image is light ................................................................................................................. 7-7
(2-11)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image ................................................. 7-8
(2-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and copy image ............................... 7-9
(2-13)Skewed image ................................................................................................................................ 7-9
(2-14)Blurred characters ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
(2-15)Color shift ..................................................................................................................................... 7-10
(2-16)Moire ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11
(2-17)A part of the image is dark or light ............................................................................................... 7-11
(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass) ......................................................................... 7-12
(3-1)Abnormal image ............................................................................................................................. 7-14
(3-2)Background is colored .................................................................................................................... 7-14
(3-3)Black dots or color dots .................................................................................................................. 7-14
(3-4)Horizontal black streaks ................................................................................................................. 7-14
(3-5)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color) .......................................................................................... 7-15
(3-6)Vertical streaks or bands (white) .................................................................................................... 7-15
(3-7)Entire blank image (white or black) ................................................................................................ 7-16
(3-8)Image is blurred ............................................................................................................................. 7-16
(3-9)Part of the image is not copied ....................................................................................................... 7-17
(3-10)The entire image is light ............................................................................................................... 7-17
(3-11)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image ............................................... 7-18
(3-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and copy image ............................. 7-18
(3-13)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-18
(3-14)Blurred characters / Color Shift .................................................................................................... 7-19
(3-15)Moire ............................................................................................................................................ 7-19
(3-16)A part of the image is dark or light ............................................................................................... 7-19
(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation) ........................................... 7-20
(4-1)Background is colored .................................................................................................................... 7-22
(4-2)Black dots or color dots .................................................................................................................. 7-23
(4-3)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color) ............................................................................ 7-23
(4-4)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color) .......................................................................................... 7-23
(4-5)Vertical streaks or bands (white) .................................................................................................... 7-24
(4-6)Entire blank image (white) .............................................................................................................. 7-24
(4-7)Image is blurred ............................................................................................................................. 7-24
(4-8)The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots) .................................................................... 7-25
(4-9)The entire image is light ................................................................................................................. 7-25
(4-10)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image ............................................... 7-25
(4-11)Irregular mismatch between the original and copy image (paper leading edge timing variation) . 7-26
(4-12)Skewed image .............................................................................................................................. 7-26
(4-13)Blurred characters ........................................................................................................................ 7-26
(4-14)Color shift in the main scanning direction .................................................................................... 7-27
(4-15)Color shift in the sub scanning direction ...................................................................................... 7-27
(4-16)Offset image ................................................................................................................................. 7-27
(4-17)Color reproduction is poor ............................................................................................................ 7-28
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-18)Uneven transfer ............................................................................................................................ 7-28

(4-19)Paper creases .............................................................................................................................. 7-28
(4-20)Dirt with toner on the paper edge ................................................................................................. 7-29
(4-21)Dirty reverse side ......................................................................................................................... 7-29
(4-22)Fusing failure ................................................................................................................................ 7-29
(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)................................................................................................... 7-30
(5-1)Background is colored .................................................................................................................... 7-32
(5-2)Black dots ....................................................................................................................................... 7-32
(5-3)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color) ............................................................................ 7-33
(5-4)Entire blank image (black) .............................................................................................................. 7-33
(5-5)Vertical streaks or bands (white) .................................................................................................... 7-34
(5-6)Vertical streaks and bands (black) ................................................................................................. 7-34
(5-7)Entire blank image (white) .............................................................................................................. 7-34
(5-8)Image is blurred ............................................................................................................................. 7-35
(5-9)Part of the image is not copied ....................................................................................................... 7-35
(5-10)The entire image is light ............................................................................................................... 7-35
(5-11)Offset image ................................................................................................................................. 7-36
(5-12)Color reproduction is poor ............................................................................................................ 7-36
(5-13)Poor grayscale reproduction ........................................................................................................ 7-37
(5-14)Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white) ................................................................................ 7-37
(5-15)Horizontal uneven density ............................................................................................................ 7-37
(5-16)Vertical uneven density ................................................................................................................ 7-38
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................................... 7-39
(1) Prior standard check items ..................................................................................................................... 7-39
(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ................................................................................... 7-39
(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper .................................... 7-39
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl .......... 7-40
(1-4)Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feed-shift guide ................... 7-40
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette ..................................................... 7-40
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper ................................................................................................ 7-40
(1-7)Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys ........................................... 7-40
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor .......................................................................................................... 7-41
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure .............................................................................. 7-41
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity .......................................................................................... 7-42
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.) ..................................................................................... 7-42
(2) Paper misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................... 7-43
(2-1)Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 7-43
(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................. 7-44
(3) Jam Codes.............................................................................................................................................. 7-48
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures ......................................................................................................... 7-94
(4-1)Original dog-ear ............................................................................................................................. 7-94
7 - 3 Self Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................ 7-95
(1) Self diagnostic function ........................................................................................................................... 7-95
(2) Self diagnostic error codes ..................................................................................................................... 7-95
(2-1)Error codes list ............................................................................................................................... 7-95
(2-2)Content of Self Diagnostic .............................................................................................................. 7-98
(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline................................................................................................................ 7-151
(3-1)System Error code list .................................................................................................................. 7-151
(3-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ..................................................................................... 7-151
(3-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ....................................................................................................... 7-153
7 - 4 FAX Related Errors............................................................................................................................... 7-159
(1) FAX Related Errors............................................................................................................................... 7-159
(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error ................................................................................................... 7-159
(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ........................................................................... 7-159
(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error ................................................................ 7-159
(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ........................................................................... 7-160
(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error ....................................................................................................... 7-160
(1-6)C0950: FAX job stay error ............................................................................................................ 7-160
(1-7)FAX cannot be sent ...................................................................................................................... 7-160
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-8)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished .......................................................... 7-161
(1-9)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data. ........................................................................................... 7-161
(2) Communication Errors .......................................................................................................................... 7-162
7-5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-181
(1) Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................................. 7-181
(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name
or the security software settings .......................................................................................................... 7-181
(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear. ...................................................................................... 7-181
(1-3)Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent ......................................................... 7-181
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes) ............................................................................................................... 7-182
(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-182
(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 7-186
(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes ............................................................................................................ 7-190
7-6 Print Errors............................................................................................................................................ 7-192
(1) The paper loading message appears ................................................................................................... 7-193
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set .................................... 7-193
(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different............................................................................................ 7-193
(4) The paper direction is incorrect ............................................................................................................ 7-194
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray ............................................................................................................... 7-194
(6) Garbled characters ............................................................................................................................... 7-195
(7) Data is output in monochrome .............................................................................................................. 7-195
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray ......................................................................................................... 7-195
(9) The same data is printed out endlessly ................................................................................................ 7-196
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is displayed
on the printer properties........................................................................................................................ 7-196
(11) [Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit while the printer standby message is displayed ............ 7-196
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error ............................................. 7-196
(13) Print stops after printing several pages (machine lock-up) ................................................................... 7-196
(14) Print out is not available from the network factor (1) ............................................................................ 7-197
(15) Print out is not available from the network factor (2) ............................................................................ 7-197
(16) Print out is not available from the network factor (3) ............................................................................ 7-198
(17) Print out is not available from the network factor (4) ............................................................................ 7-198
(18) Print out is not available from the network factor (5) ............................................................................ 7-198
(19) Print out is not available from the network factor (6) ............................................................................ 7-199
(20) Print out is not available from the network factor (7) ............................................................................ 7-199
(21) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1) ......................................................... 7-200
(22) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (2) ......................................................... 7-200
(23) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (3) ......................................................... 7-200
(24) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (4) ......................................................... 7-200
(25) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (5) ......................................................... 7-201
(26) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (6) ......................................................... 7-201
(27) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (7) ......................................................... 7-201
(28) A part of the image is missing............................................................................................................... 7-201
(29) Paper Mismatch Error' appears ............................................................................................................ 7-202
7-7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................................... 7-203
(1) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray........................................ 7-203
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................................... 7-204
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic treatment) ........................................................................................................ 7-204
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section ............................................................................ 7-204
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ........................................................................................ 7-205
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor .................................................................................... 7-205
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section .................................................................................................. 7-205
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy. ............................................................................................................. 7-205
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section .......................................................................... 7-206
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side ....................................................................................... 7-206
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section .......................................................... 7-206
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section.............................................................. 7-206
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section ................................................................................................ 7-207
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-207
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-207

(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ............................................................................................ 7-208
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds) ................................................................ 7-208
(16) The driving sound is noisy during printing ............................................................................................ 7-208
7-9 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................... 7-209
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card ............................................................................................ 7-209
(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on ........................................ 7-209
(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section..................................................................................... 7-209

8 PWBs .............................................................................................................. 8-1

8 - 1 Description for PWB ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-1)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................................................. 8-2
(2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................................................. 8-7
(2-1)Connector position ........................................................................................................................... 8-7
(2-2)PWB photograph .............................................................................................................................. 8-7
(2-3)Connector lists ................................................................................................................................. 8-8
(3) High voltage PWB................................................................................................................................... 8-18
(3-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-18
(3-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-18
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-19
(4) Power source PWB................................................................................................................................. 8-20
(4-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-20
(4-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-20
(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-21
(5) Operation panel PWB ............................................................................................................................. 8-22
(5-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-22
(5-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-22
(5-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-23
8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION) .............................................................................................................. 8-26
(1) PF PWB for PF-5120 .............................................................................................................................. 8-26
(1-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-26
(1-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-26
(1-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-27
(2) PF PWB for PF-5130 .............................................................................................................................. 8-29
(2-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-29
(2-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
(2-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-30
(3) PF PWB for PF-5140 .............................................................................................................................. 8-33
(3-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-33
(3-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-33
(3-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-34
(4) DF PWB for DF-5100.............................................................................................................................. 8-36
(4-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-36
(4-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-36
(4-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-37
(5) MT PWB for MT-5100 ............................................................................................................................. 8-40
(5-1)Connector position ......................................................................................................................... 8-40
(5-2)PWB photograph ............................................................................................................................ 8-40
(5-3)Connector lists ............................................................................................................................... 8-40

9 Appendixes .................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1 Repetitive defects gauge .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9-2 Firmware environment commands ........................................................................................................... 9-2
9-3 Chart of image adjustment procedures..................................................................................................... 9-9
9-4 Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................ 9-12
(1) No.1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-12
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) No.2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-13

(3) No.3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-14
(4) No.4 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-15
(5) No.5 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-16
(6) No.6 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-17
(7) No.7 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-18
(8) No.8 ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-19
9-5 Wiring diagram (Options) ........................................................................................................................ 9-20
(1) Paper Feeder (PF-5120)......................................................................................................................... 9-20
(2) Paper Feeder (PF-5130)......................................................................................................................... 9-21
(3) Paper Feeder (PF-5140)......................................................................................................................... 9-22
(4) Inner finisher (DF-5100).......................................................................................................................... 9-23
(5) Mailbox (MT-5100).................................................................................................................................. 9-24
9-6 Installation guide ....................................................................................................................................... 9-1
(1) PF-5120 .................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
(2) PF-5130 .................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
(3) PF-5140 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-16
(4) DF-5100 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-24
(5) AK-5100 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-29
(6) MT-5100 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-32
(7) JS-5100 .................................................................................................................................................. 9-35
(8) FAX System 11 ....................................................................................................................................... 9-38
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

1Specifications
1 - 1 Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Description
Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 220 g/m2

Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock), 129 to 163 g/m2(Banner sheet)
Tray

Media types Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Vellum, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Envelope, Custom 1 to 8(Duplex: Same as
Simplex)

Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,Preprinted,
Tray Bond, Cardstock, Coated, Color (Colour), Prepunched,Letterhead, Envelope,
Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette A4, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (92 × 148 mm to
216 × 356 mm)

Multi Purpose A4, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement, Executive,
Tray Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return
postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm

Warm-up Time Power on 20 seconds or less

(23°C/ 73.4°F,
Low Power 10 seconds or less
60%)
Sleep 17.6 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets(64g/m2), 500 sheets(80g/m2)*1

Multi Purpose 110 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (64g/m2)

Tray 27 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (64g/m2)
100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2)
25 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)

Output Tray Inner Tray 550 sheets(64g/m2), 500 sheets(80g/m2)

Capacity

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Light source LED

Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor

Photoconductor OPC drum (diameter 30 mm)

Charging system Contact charger roller method

Developer system Touch down developing system

Developer: 2-component
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container

Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method

Secondary: Transfer roller method

1-1
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Description
Separation system Small diameter separation, separation needle

Cleaning Drum Counter blade

system
Primary transfer Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system

Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)

Fusing system Heat and pressure fusing with the fuser heat roller and the press roller
Heat source: halogen heater
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat

Standard Memory (Max 2GB) 1.0GB

High capacity Standard -

storage
Option SSD 32 GB/128 GB

Interface Option USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Hi-Speed USB: 2 (USB Memory Slot)

eKUIO: 1 (Upper slot) FAX: 1 (Lower slot)

Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 10 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.66" × 19.99" × 29" / 550 × 507.5 × 736.6 mm

(Including the Document Processor)

Weight (without toner container) Approx. 105.9 lb/Approx. 48 kg (Including the Document Processor)

Space Required (W × D) 31.82" × 19.97" / 808 × 507 mm (Using multi purpose tray)
48.78" × 20.94" / 1239 × 532 mm (Using 3000-sheet finisher)

Power source 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 8.5 A

220 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz, 5.3 A

The power consumption of the 120 V AC : 1100W

product in networked standby (If 220 to 240 V AC : 1100W
all network ports are connected.)

*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2: When one network interface is installed, only one fax line can be installed.

1-2
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Copy Functions

Items Description
Copy Speed B/W A4 30 sheets/min
Letter 32 sheets/min
Legal 26 sheets/min
B5 27 sheets/min
A5 27 sheets/min
A6 27 sheets/min

Color A4 30 sheets/min
Letter 32 sheets/min
Legal 26 sheets/min
B5 27 sheets/min
A5 27 sheets/min
A6 27 sheets/min

First Copy Time B/W 6.4 seconds or less

(A4)
Color 7.8 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/Folio)

Original Feed System Fixed

(3) Printer Functions

Items Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.

First Print Time B/W 7.0 seconds or less

(A4)
Color 8.0 seconds or less

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi,

9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi

Operating System Windows 10, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5
or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, OpenXPS

1-3
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Scanner Functions

Items Description
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi

File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), XPS,
PDF/A, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF, Open XPSG

Scanning Speed*1 1-sided: B/W 40 images/min Color 30 images/min

(A4, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/ 2-sided B/W 17 Images/min Color 13 images/min
Photo original)

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB

Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD

*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Win-
dows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/
Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2

(5) Document Processor: 30ppm model standard

Items Description
Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Document Size Maximum: Legal/Folio

Minimum: Statement/A6

Paper Weight 1-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

Loading Capacity 75 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 21.54" × 13.64" × 5.16" / 548 × 346.5 × 131 mm

Weight Approx. 8.8 lbs / Approx. 4kg

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

(6) Option

(6-1)Paper feeder (PF-5120)

Items Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. of sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 1 cassette) (No. of sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 1
cassette)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
youkei 4, youkei 2, Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 21.66" × 19.97" × 6.19" / 550 × 507 × 157 mm

Weight Approx. 21.0 lbs / Approx. 9.5 kg

1-4
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-2)Paper feeder (PF-5130)

Items Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m², 2 cassette/ No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m², 2 cassette)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
youkei 4, youkei 2, Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 21.66" × 19.97" × 13.51" / 550 × 507 × 343 mm

Weight Approx. 39.7 lbs / Approx. 18 kg

(6-3)Paper feeder (PF-5140)

Items Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 2,200, 64 g/m²/No. 2,000, 80 g/m²)

Paper Size A4, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 21.66" × 19.97" × 13.51" / 550 × 507 × 343 mm

Weight Approx. 44.1 lbs / Approx. 20 kg

(6-4)Inner finisher (DF-5100)

Items Description
Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size(80 g/m²) Legal, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Custom (70 x 298 to 210 x 1020 mm): 250 sheets
Finisher tray equivalent or 42 mm height (Thick: 20 sheets (129 to 220 g/m2))
(no stapling) A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard),
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, youkei 4, youkei 2, Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x 297 mm): 300
sheets equivalent or 42 mm height (Thick: 20 sheets (129 to 220 g/m²))

Stapling Number of Legal, Oficio II, 216 x340 mm 30 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
sheets to limit 20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m² to 128 g/
m²)

A4, B5, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m² to 128 g/
m²)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color,Coated,

Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

1-5
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Description
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 25.08" × 15.60" × 6.23" / 637 × 396 × 158 mm
(when pulling out the tray)

Weight Approx. 26.5 lbs / Approx. 12 kg

(6-5)Mailbox (MT-5100)
Items Description
Number of Trays 6 trays

Paper Size(80 g/m²) Tray 1 (to 5)

216 x 340mm, OficioII, Foolscap (8.5 x 13.5"), Legal, Folio: 50 sheets
A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, 16K, Statement: 100 sheets
Tray A
216 x 340 mm, OficioII, Foolscap (8.5 x 13.5"), Legal, Folio,
Custom (70 x 298 to 210 x 1220 mm): 250 sheets
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Letter, Executive, 16K, Statement, B5 (ISO),
Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x
297 mm): 500 sheets

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 16.3" × 14.18" × 29.93" / 414 × 360 × 760 mm

Weight Approx. 17.7 lbs / Approx. 8 kg

(6-6)Job separator(JS-5100)
Items Description
Number of Trays 1 tray

Loadable sheets limit (80g/m²) 100 Sheets

Paper Size(80 g/m²) A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, youkei 4, youkei 2, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x 1220 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 14.18" × 12.56" × 6.07" / 360 × 319 × 154 mm

Weight Approx. 0.9 lbs / Approx. 0.4 kg

(6-7)FAX System11
FAX function
Items Description
Compatibility G3

Communication Line Subscriber telephone line

Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)

Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/

9600/7200/4800/2400 bps

Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

1-6
Specifications > Specifications [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Description
Error Correction ECM

Document Size Max. width: 8 1/2"/216 mm, Max. length: 14 1/32"/356 mm

Number of originals to auto feed Max. 75 sheets (with document processor)

Resolution Scan: 200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)

200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
Print: 600 × 600 dpi

Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)

One Touch Key 100 keys

Multi-Station Transmission Max. 100 destinations

Substitute Memory Reception 256 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)

Image Memory Capacity 3.5 MB (standard)(For fax transmission and reception)

Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page

Option -

Network FAX functions

Items Description
Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer

Interface 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T

Operating system Windows 10, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2/2012, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 8.1

Transmission Resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi)

Document Size Letter, Legal, Statement, A4, A5, Folio, B5(JIS)

Scheduled job Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)

Transmit and Print Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available

Broadcast Transmission Max. 100 destinations

Job Accounting Requires the input of a Login User Name and Password in the Network FAX
Driver when User Login, is turn ON in the fax machine.
Requires the input of an Account ID in the Network FAX Driver when Job
Accounting, is turned ON in the fax machine.

Cover Page A format can be selected using the Network FAX Driver or a template can be
created.

1-7
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 - 2 Part Names
(1) Machine Exterior

10 9 8 16

1
7
2
6
15
11

12
5
14

4 13

1 Document processor 9 Original tray

2 Operation Panel 10 Original Width Guides
3 Power switch 11 Slit glass
4 Cassette 1 12 Inner Tray
5 Multi Purpose Tray 13 Handles
6 USB Memory Slot 14 Front Cover
7 Original Stopper 15 Platen
8 Original Eject Table 16 Original Size Indicator Plates

1-8
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

18 17

19 24

23

22
21
20

17 Paper width guides 21 Multi Purpose Tray

18 Paper length guide 22 Paper Width Guides
19 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 23 Right Cover 1 Lever
20 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 24 Right Cover 1

1-9
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Connectors/Interior

1
2
B1

7
6
5
4

1 Network Interface Connector 5 Toner Container (Cyan)

2 USB Interface Connector (option) 6 Toner Container (Magenta)
3 Option Interface Slot 7 Toner Container (Black)
4 Toner Container (Yellow) 8 Waste Toner Box

1-10
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) With Optional Equipments Attached

3 6

1 Mailbox (MT-5100) 5 Cassette3 (PF-5130)

2 Inner finisher (DF-5100) 6 Cassette4 (PF-5130)
3 Job separator(JS-5100) 7 High capacity paper feeder (PF-5140)
4 Cassette3 (PF-5120)

1-11
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) FAX System 11

1
2

1 LINE Connector 2 TEL Connector

Connect the modular cords for telephone line. When using an available telephone, connect it here.

1-12
Specifications > Part Names [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Operation Panel Keys

Displays the Home screen. Puts the machine into

Sleep Mode. Recovers
from Sleep if in Sleep
Mode.
Displays the Status screen. Displays the Copy screen.
Authenticates user
switching, and exits the
operation for the current
user (i.e. log out).
Displays the System Menu Displays the screen for Displays the Interrupt
screen. sending. You can change it Copy screen.
to display the Address
Book screen.
Displays the FAX screen.

Touch panel.
Displays buttons for
configuring machine settings.

Lights when there is paper Lights or blinks when an error occurs

in the job separator tray. and a job is stopped.
Blinks while printing Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk,
or sending/receiving. fax memory or USB memory (general purpose item).
Numeric keys. Clears entered numbers and Returns settings to their
Enter numbers and characters. default states.
symbols.
Specifies registered information Cancels or pauses the job
such as address numbers, user IDs in progress.
and program numbers by number.

Finalizes numeric key entry, and Starts copying and

finalizes details during setting of scanning operations and
functions. Operates linked with the processing for setting
on-screen [OK]. operations.

1-13
Specifications > Optional Equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 - 3 Optional Equipment
The following options are available for this machine.

(6) DF-5100 (5) JS-5100

(2) PF-5120

(1) MT-5100

(3) PF-5130* (4) PF-5140*

1-14
Specifications > Optional Equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(12)DT-5100
(7)Fax System 11

(8)IB-50 (9)IB-51 (10)HD-6/HD-7 (11)Card Authentication Kit(B)

Software option
(13) UG-33

(14) Data Security kit(E)

(15) USB Keyboard

(16) Expansion Memory

(17) SD/SDHC Memory Card

1-15
Specifications > Optional Equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1) MT-5100 "Mailbox"

This equipment separates the paper output tray destination to easily sort documents. Installing this option adds 6 output
trays. When multiple computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray.

Note
It is necessary to install AK-5100 when installing MT-5100.

(2) PF-5120 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet)"

The number of sheets and setting method is same as for the standard cassette.

(3) PF-5130 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"

The number of sheets and setting method is same as for the standard cassette.

(4) PF-5140 "Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet)"

In addition to the standard cassette, the high capacity feeder can be installed to load A4 or Letter 2,000 sheets of paper.

(5) JS-5100 "Job Separator"

This equipment separates the paper output tray destination to easily sort documents. Specify as the output tray for copy
or print jobs. Or, specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the
PC, and printing of the received fax data.

Note
Select the output tray at the copy screen or set the default setting to output documents to the job separator.

(6) DF-5100 "Inner Finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be
stapled.

(7) FAX System 11 "FAX Kit"

The FAX kit can be used as a FAX and network FAX that enables document transmission and reception from a PC.

(8) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Network printing is
available with the network protocols such as TCP/IP and NetBUEI for a variety of OS of Windows, Macintosh and UNIX.

(9) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300Mbps) and
11g/b. With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.

(10) HD-6/HD-7 "SSD"

With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-speed
printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.

1-16
Specifications > Optional Equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(11) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list. Refer to the operation guide of the ID card authentication kit for how to register.

(12) DT-5100 "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine. And some of the options are installed on the platen table.

(13) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

Direct printing without a printer driver is also available.

(14) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data
cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.

(15) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also
available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on
keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

(16) "Expansion Memory"

The machine can perform more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memory. You can increase the machine's
memory up to 2,048MB by plugging in the optional memory modules (2,048MB).

(17) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"

SD/SDHC memory card is a micro chip card that can save optional fonts, macros, forms.

1-17
Specifications > Unit Compatibility [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 - 4 Unit Compatibility
Unit configuration of each model is as follows.
Unit Machine Design
Cassette, primary CASSETTE ASSY (302R45872_)
feed PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP (302R49421_)
Common module

Conveying, Duplex PARTS CONVEYING ASSY SP (302R49406_)

Common path line, 100% duplex productivity module

Primary transfer TR-5195 (302R49302_)

4-color developer separation module with primary transfer belt

Secondary transfer PARTS 2ND TRANS ASSY SP (302R49407_)

Separation GND common module

LSU LK-5195 (302R49315_) One-way single polygon motor with a

single beam

Exit PARTS EXIT ASSY SP (302R49405_) 500-sheet stack

Drum DK-5195 (302R49305_)

OPC drum module

Developer DV-5195K (302R49307_)

DV-5195M (302R49308_)
DV-5195C (302R49309_)
DV-5195Y (302R49310_)

Fuser FK-5315 (302SZ9301_): 240V

FK-5317 (302SZ9302_): 120V
Twin heater module

MPF PARTS MPF TABLE ASSY L SP (302R49409_)

100 stack (without size detection)

ISU ISU ASSY L SP (302R49314_)

All-in-one carriage module Polaris common CCD equipped

Operation section PARTS OPERATION UNIT L SP (302R49410_)

Tiltable 7inch color touch panel Color Touch Panel

Container For 220-240 V model

TK-5195K (1T02R40NL_)
TK-5195M (1T02R4BNL_)
TK-5195C (1T02R4CNL_)
TK-5195Y (1T02R4ANL_)

For 120 V model

TK-5197K (1T02R40US_)
TK-5197M (1T02R4BUS_)
TK-5197C (1T02R4CUS_)
TK-5197Y (1T02R4AUS_)

For Australia
TK-5199K (1T02R40AS_)
TK-5199M (1T02R4BAS_)
TK-5199C (1T02R4CAS_)
TK-5199Y (1T02R4AAS_)
Compatibility Toner capacity (K:15K/CMY:7K)

1-18
Installation > Environment [CONFIDENTIAL]

2Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1 Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or
less when the temperature is 90.5°F (32.5°C).)
2 Humidity: 10 to 80% (But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less
when humidity is 80%.)
3 Power requirements: 110 V AC 60Hz 8.7 A or more
120 V AC 60Hz 8.5 A or more
220 to 240 V AC 50Hz 5.3 A or more
4 Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%

Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:

Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows:
Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
• Avoid locations with vibrations
• Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations
If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters.
During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space

400mm

300mm 350mm 1000mm 100mm

2-1
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 - 2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures

START

Unpacking and checking bundled items

Maintenance mode workflow
(Maintenance mode U952 )
Attaching the sub tray
Setting the ID correction operation
(Maintenance mode U464)
Setting up the Toner Container

Color registration adjustment

(Maintenance mode U469)
Optional unit installation

ID adjusting the halftone automatically

Connecting the Interface Cable (Maintenance mode U410)

Output an own-status report

Connecting the FAX cable
(Maintenance mode U000)
(FAX installation only)

Clearing the counts

Loading Paper (maintenance mode U927)

Setting the delivery date

Connecting the Power Cord (Maintenance mode U278)

Turn the power on Checking LSU cleaning operation

(Maintenance mode U474)

Default Setting *1
Exiting from the maintenance mode

Installing Software
Completion of installing the main unit

Important
*1: Default setting: It will take about 6 minutes for 30 ppm models since the drum initial setting is necessary.
Do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting drive.

2-2
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items

Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.

2
1
3

9
6
14 7
8
11

20 10

4
5
13
12
15

16
17

19 17 19

18

19 19

1 Outer case 8 Size label 15 Bottom case

2 Left upper pad 9 Power cord 16 Left bottom pad
3 Right upper pad 10 Original tray pad 17 Right bottom pad
4 Right frame 11 Left middle pad 18 Skid
5 Left frame 12 Right front pad 19 Hinge
6 Accessories box 13 Operation cover 20 Dp sheet
7 Inner tray 14 Main unit

Caution

Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.

2-3
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Notes on main unit transportation

When transporting the main unit, lift the left and right of the lower part the main unit base (as marked by
red circles) with four people as shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation unit because it will cause damage.

(3) Attaching the sub tray

1 Attach the bundled sub tray to the inner tray.

No sub tray is required when installing the DF-5100 inner finisher.

1 Slide the sub tray (a) and insert four protrusions (b) into four apertures (c) on the inner tray.

2 Check two projections (d) are locked at two apertures (e) of the inner tray.

b c

b c

e
e c
b
d a
d c
b

2-4
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Setting up the Toner Container

Set up 4 color toner containers of C, M, Y, and K. 0

5-6
5-6

1 2 3 4
C K
Y M

(5) Loading Paper

(5-1)Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.

Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Such paper may cause a jam.
• If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
• If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

Important
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This
may cause poor image quality or malfunctions.

2-5
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-2)Set paper in the cassette

The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, etc.
The cassette can hold 550 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
The cassette can hold paper with the weight of 60 to 220g/m2.
Do not hold paper heavier than 220g/m2 in the cassette. Use the MP tray for a postcard of 230g/m2 weight.

1 Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.

2 Adjust the position of the paper guides.

1 Adjust the paper width guides. Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.

2 Adjust the paper length guide. Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.

4
2

3
1

2-6
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.

2 Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.

Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (See page ,2-5)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use,
the paper may skew or become jammed.

4 Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.

(5-3)Set paper in the high capacity feeder

The high capacity feeder can hold A4/Letter size plain paper, recycle paper or color paper.
The high capacity feeder can load 2,200 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 2,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
The cassette can hold paper with the weight of 60 to 220g/m2.

2-7
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.

2 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.

2 Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.

Note
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Before loading paper in the high capacity paper feeder, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate
it. (See page ,2-5)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use,
the paper may skew or become jammed.

2-8
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Gently insert the high capacity feeder all the way.

Caution

Do not pull out multiple cassettes at same time, when PF is installed.

(6) Connecting the Power Cord

1 Connect one end of the supplied power cord to the main unit and the other end to a
power outlet.
• Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit.
• 30ppm model due to its construction may indicate the operation display momentarily when connecting the power
cord.

2-9
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) Turn the power on

1 Turn the power switch on.

Important
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more,
and then turn on the power switch.

(8) Default Setting

Set up necessary items in the following procedures.
• The set-up wizard starts up at the first power-up.

[System Menu/Counter]

(8-1)Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

1 Display the screen

[System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

2 Configure the settings

Select [Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format] in this order for settings.
Item Descriptions
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If
you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

2-10
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

Item Descriptions
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform
Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute
(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

(8-2)Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• • TCP/IP: On
• • DHCP: On
• • Auto-IP: On
• • IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• • Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• • Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0

1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting].

2 Select [IPv4] for setting.

3 Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.

When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On]

When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off]
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When setting Auto IP, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.

Note
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login User Name/Login Password (30ppm model): 3000 / 3000
•

(8-3)Altitude Adjustment Setting

Execute [Altitude Adjustment] from the Maintenance mode when setting up at a high altitude place.
When the printing quality declines in the environment of an altitude higher than 1500m sea level, the setting of [Altitude
Adjustment] mode can recover the printing quality.

2-11
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

Maintenance mode U140

1 Input "140" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Altitude Adjustment].

3 Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].

4 Press the [Start] key.

5 Press the [Stop] key.

(8-4)Paper size and media type setting

1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key >[Cassette/MP tray Settings].

2 Select [Cassette Setting] > [Cassette 1 (- 4) ] or [MP Tray Setting].

3 Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.

(9) Installing Software

Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)

(10) Maintenance mode workflow (Maintenance mode U952 )

1 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.

2 Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

3 Select the place to save the data to execute.

4 Select the item to execute.

5 Press the [Start] key to execute the process.

6 Press the [Stop] key.

• If not executing the U952, set it in the procedures below.

(10-1)Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)

1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Calib].

3 Select [Full].

4 Press the [Start] key.

Calibration starts.

5 Press the [Stop] key.

2-12
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(10-2)Color registration adjustment (Maintenance mode U469)

1 Input "469" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Auto]. Outputs the automatic adjustment chart.

3 Select [Execute].

4 Set the chart on the table and press the [Start] key.
Execute the automatic adjustment. [OK] is indicated when adjustment is completed.

5 Press the [Stop] key.

(10-3)Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)

1 Input "410" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [Start] key.

Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.

3 Set the output Test Pattern 1 as the original.

Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

4 Press the [Start] key.

The 1st auto adjustment is executed.

5 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

6 Press the [Start] key.

The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.

7 [Finish] appears after normal completion.

8 Press the [Stop] key.

(10-4)Output an own-status report (Maintenance mode U000)

1 Input "000" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the status report.

3 Press the [Stop] key.

(10-5)Clearing the counts (maintenance mode U927)

1 Input "927" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

2-13
Installation > Installing the main unit [CONFIDENTIAL]

(10-6)Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278)

1 Input "278" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Today].

3 Press the [Start] key to set the delivery date.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

(11) Checking LSU cleaning operation (Maintenance mode U474)

1 Input "474" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key. Cleaning the LSU slit glass.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

(12) Exiting from the maintenance mode

1 Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
The maintenance mode is exited.

(13) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)
1 Make sure that each indicator is not flashing, and then turn the power switch off.

Check that the indicators are off.

Important
When the "Processing" indicator or "Memory" indicator is lit up or blinking, the main unit is operating. Turning
the power switch off while the main unit is operating may cause malfunctions.

2-14
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 - 3 Installing the optional devices

(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items(option units)
(1-1)Paper Feeder (PF-5120)

9
10

7 1

5 6

3 4
2

11

1 Main unit 5 Left of the inner frame 9 Pin/Screw

2 Outer case 6 Right of the inner frame 10 Size label
3 Left bottom pad 7 Main unit cover 11 Guide protection plate
4 Right bottom pad 8 Upper pad

2-15
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-2)Paper Feeder (PF-5130)

13

15

12
10
14
11

9 8

5 6

4 3
2

16

16

1 Main unit 7 Main unit cover 13 Rear left upper pad

2 Outer case 8 Upper pad 14 Front right upper pad
3 Left bottom pad 9 Reinforcement plate 15 Rear right upper pad
4 Right bottom pad 10 Size label 16 Guide protection plate
5 Front of the inner frame 11 Screw
6 Rear of the inner frame 12 Front left upper pad

2-16
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Paper Feeder (PF-5140)

13

15

12
10
14
11

9 8

5 6

3 16
4
2

17

1 Main unit 7 Main unit cover 13 Rear left upper pad

2 Outer case 8 Upper pad 14 Front right upper pad
3 Left bottom pad 9 Reinforcement plate 15 Rear right upper pad
4 Right bottom pad 10 Size label 16 Guide protection plate
5 Front of the inner frame 11 Screw 17 Cushion
6 Rear of the inner frame 12 Front left upper pad

Carry the paper feeder (PF-5130/5140) with two people by holding the parts as shown in the figure.

2-17
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-4)Inner Finisher (DF-5100)

7
8
12
6
11

2 5
10

4 1

1 Outer case 5 Right bottom pad 9 Upper pad

2 Rear bottom pad 6 Main pad 10 Right front cover
3 Front bottom pad 7 Inner finisher 11 Cartridge
4 Left bottom pad 8 Main unit cover 12 Screw

2-18
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-5)Mailbox (MT-5100)
11
10

11

7 9

2 2
3

1
4

1 Outer case 5 Mailbox 9 Eject tray

2 Right lower spacer 6 Poly sheet 10 Upper pad
3 Left lower spacer 7 Left upper spacer 11 Side cover
4 Lower cover 8 Right upper spacer

2-19
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Optional unit installation

Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Product name Refer to
installation
procedures
PF PF-5120 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet, 1 cassette)" PF-5120

PF-5130 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet, 2 cassettes)" PF-5130

PF-5140 "Paper Feeder (20000-sheet)" PF-5140

DF DF-5100 "Inner Finisher" DF-5100

MT MT-5100 "Mailbox" MT-5100

AK-5100 "Bridge Unit" AK-5100

JS JS-5100 "Job Separator" JS-5100

Fax kit FAX System 11 "FAX Kit" FAX System 11

Important
When not in use of the optional paper feeder, attach the bundled shield plate as shown below.

1 Fit two hooks (a) into two holes (b) on the rear lower cover.

2 Secure the shield plate (d) with the screw (c) (M4x20).

d
c

(3) Connecting the Interface Cable

Connection Functions Necessary Cable

environment
Connect a LAN cable to Printer/Scanner/Network FAX LAN cable
the main unit (10Base-T, 100Base-TX or100Base-T)

Connect a USB cable to Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/ USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max.
the main unit WIA) 5.0m long)

2-20
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

In the case of the LAN connection

1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

B1

B1

In the case of the USB connection

2-21
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove interface connector seal and connect the USB cable to the USB interface
connector located on the rear side of the main unit.

4 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

B1

B1

(4) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)

General FAX connection example
In the case of the general telephone line

a. Modular jack

ADSL

1 Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.

a c

a. Modular jack c. Splitter (PHONE port)

b. ADSL modem d. PC

ISDN

2-22
Installation > Installing the optional devices [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.

a
b
a. Modular jack c. PC
b. Terminal adapter (Analog port)

Modular cord connection

1 Connect a modular cord to the LINE connector of the main unit.
When using a commercially available telephone set, connect a modular cord to the TEL connector of the main
unit.

b c

2-23
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 - 4 Installing the optional equipment

(1) Memory Module
The machine can perform more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memory. You can increase the machine's
memory up to 2,048 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules (512 MB or 1024 MB).
Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules

Important
Static electricity that accumulates in your body through clothing or carpets may damage memory. To protect a
memory, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large metal object.
Wear the anti-static wrist band on the wrist.

1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.

2 Remove the two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear left cover (b).

a
a

3 Remove the memory module (a) from it’s package.

Attach the expansion memory

Important
Before inserting the memory module (a), make sure that the power switch is turned off.

2-24
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 With the memory (a) connection terminal pointing toward the socket (b), align the cut-out part with the socket
terminal and insert it straight in on an angle.

2 Carefully press the inserted memory module toward the main unit.

3 Reattach the covers.

Note
Removing the Memory Module
To remove the memory module, remove the rear left cover and the memory slot cover from the main unit. Then,
carefully push the two stoppers so that the memory module pops up from the socket.
Verifying the Memory Module
To verify that the memory module is working properly, print out a status page and check its content.

2-25
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) SD/SDHC Memory Card

Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
• The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.

SD/SDHC memory card installation

1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.

Important
Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is turned off.

2 Remove the screw (a) (M3x8).

3 Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the controller cover
(c).

4 Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).

5 Reattach the covers.

Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it with the main unit.

2-26
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card. If you have installed an application, do not format the SD
card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD card.

All models common

Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.

Note
30 ppm model can format it from [System Menu].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login User Name/Login Password (30ppm model): 3000 / 3000

1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Format SD Card]

2 Format the SD/SDHC memory card.

2-27
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) SSD (HD-6/HD-7)

(4) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)
(5) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)

1 Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.

2 Remove two screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).

3 Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).

4 Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) once removed.

a
a
b

Note

When installing a new SSD, it is automatically formatted at the first start-up.

2-28
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

Formatting an SSD
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Format SSD]

2 Format an optional SSD.

Note
When an optional SSD is inserted into the main unit for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
Formatting will delete all existing data on an SSD.
This setting does not appear if the optional security kit is installed.

2-29
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) Document table DT-5100

Document table installation requires the following parts:

Bundled parts of Document table DT-5100
(1902R60UN1)

• Original tray 1 pc

• Tray lower cover 1 pc

• Tray mounting plate 1 pc

• Reinforcement plate 1 pc

• Hook-and-loop fastener*1 2 pc

• Label 2 pc

• Edgings*1 1 pc

• Wire saddles*1 2 pc

• Screw (M3x8 screw with the binding head) 3 pc

• Screw (M3x20 screw with the binding head) 2 pc

*1: Not used in this model.

1 Remove the right cover (a).

2 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).

3 Slide the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

2-30
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Hang the hook (c) of the reinforcement plate (b) at the backside of the right upper stay
(a) and secure it with the screw (d) (M3x8).

b
c

5 Cut out two cut-out pieces (c) from the right upper cover (a) with pliers (b).

b
a

6 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.

7 Hang two hooks(b) of the tray fixing plate (a) and secure it to the main unit (d) with two
screws (c) (M3x20).

c
a

2-31
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Hang two hooks (b) of the document tray (a) on the tray mounting plate (c) and secure it
with the screw (d) (M3x8).

c
b a

9 Hang six hooks of the tray lower cover (a) on the document tray (c) and secure it with
the screw (d) (M3x8).

a c d

10 Affix the concealing labels (b) to two concaves of the document tray (a).

b a b

2-32
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) ID card reader

ID card reader installation requires the following parts:

• ID card reader holder (1702R60UN1) 1 pc

Supplied parts of ID card reader holder (1702R60UN1)

• ID card reader holder 1 pc

• ID card cover 1 pc

• Sponge 1 pc

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Attach the ID card reader (a) to the ID card reader holder (b) while aligning the USB
cable (d) aligning the rib (d).

3 Hung the USB cable (c) on the hook (e).

a
c c

e
d

2-33
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Pull up the operation unit (a).

5 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).

6 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.

c b

7 Remove one screw (b) (M3x8) and then remove the upper exit cover (c).

a
b

8 Remove the right cover (a).

9 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).
10 Slide the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

2-34
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Release two hooks (b) and remove the auxiliary cover (c) from the right upper cover (a).
12 Attach the ID card cover (d) to the right upper cover (a).
a

c d

13 Insert the ID card reader holder (a) into the right upper stay (b) and attach it.

2-35
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Reattach the right upper cover to the original position.

15 Close the right cover.
16 Connect the USB connector (a).
17 Wind
(c).
the excess portion of the USB cable (b) and push it under the image scanner unit

b
a

18 Cut out the cutout piece (b) on the upper eject cover (a) with pliers (c).
19 Reattach the upper eject cover (a) with the screw (d) (M3x8).

d b c

2-36
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

20 Reattach the operation lid (c) to the operation unit (a) with the screw (b) (M3x8).
a

c b

Activating Card Authentication

To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or
service representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on the
License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
Refer to [2-4 Optional Application] when starting the trial. (See page 2-55)

2-37
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) USB Keyboard

USB keyboard installation requires the following parts:

• Document table DT-5100 (1902R60UN1) 1 pc

• USB Keyboard 1 pc

Bundled parts of Document table DT-5100

(1902R60UN1)

• Original tray 1 pc

• Tray lower cover 1 pc

• Tray mounting plate 1 pc

• Reinforcement plate 1 pc

• Hook-and-loop fastener 2 pc

• Label 2 pc

• Edgings 1 pc

• Wire saddles 2 pc

• Screw (M3x8 screw with the binding head) 3 pc

• Screw (M3x20 screw with the binding head) 2 pc

2-38
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Pull up the operation unit (a).

3 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).

4 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.

c b

5 Remove one screw (b) (M3x8) and then remove the upper exit cover (c).

a
b

2-39
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Remove the right cover (a).

7 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).

8 Slide the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

9 Hang the hook (c) of the reinforcement plate (b) at the backside of the right upper stay
(a) and secure it with the screw (d) (M3x8).

b
c

10 Cut out two cut-out pieces (c) from the right upper cover (a) with pliers (b).
b
a

2-40
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Reattach the right cover to the original position in the main unit.
12 Hang two hooks(b) of the tray fixing plate (a) and secure it to the main unit (d) with two
screws (c) (M3x20).

c
a

13 Cut off the cut-off piece (c) for the aperture (b) of the document tray (a) with pliers (d).
14 Hang two hooks (e) of the document tray (a) on the tray mounting plate (f) and secure it
with the screw (g) (M3x8).

g
d
c
b

f
e a

15 Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (b) to two concaves (a) of the document tray.
16 Affix the concealing label (d) over the apertures (c) of the document tray.
b
d a

2-41
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
18 Pass the USB connector (c) through the aperture(d) of the document tray.

d
a
b

19 Connect the USB connector (a) to the main unit.

20 Align the USB cable (b) through the edging (c) and wind the excess cable to two wire
saddles (d).

21 Affix the concealing label (e) over the apertures (f) of the document tray.
f
a
e

c
b

22 Hang six hooks of the tray lower cover (a) on the document tray (c) and secure it with
the screw (d) (M3x8).

a c d

2-42
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

23 Cut out the cutout piece (b) on the upper eject cover (a) with pliers (c).
24 Reattach the upper eject cover (a) with the screw (d) (M3x8).

d b c

25 Reattach the operation lid (c) to the operation unit (a) with the screw (b) (M3x8).
a

c b

2-43
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9) Cassette heater

(9-1)In case of the main unit cassette

Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

• Cassette heater 120 set (302R49402_) 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 set (302R49403_) 1 pc

Bundled parts of cassette heater 120/240

• Cassette heater 120 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 1 pc

• High temperature caution label 1 pc

• Heater connector cover 1 pc

• Wire saddles 1 pc

• Screw (M3x4 screw with the binding head) 2 pc

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Pull out the cassette (a) from the main unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.
b

2-44
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Press the lock lever (a) and pull out the primary feed unit (c) from the main unit (b).

b
c

4 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base (b) with two screws (c) (M3x4).

5 Connect the heater connector (d) to the main machine side connector (e).

6 Attach the wire saddle (f) to the base (b) and secure the wire.

e d
c
c
a f

g
b

2-45
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Insert two hooks (c) into the square hole (e) and attach the connector cover (a) by
sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

8 Slide the protrusion (b) of the hook back and forth to check it is secured at the round
hole (d).
Make sure the wire (f) does not float.

9 Affix the caution label (g), aligning it with the mark-off line (h) on the base.

a
c

f b
Cross-section view
of the hole

e d

h g

10 Reattach the parts in the original position.

11 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .

2-46
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-2)In case of paper feeder (PF-5120)

Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

• Cassette heater 120 set (303PS9402_) 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 set (303PS9403_) 1 pc

Bundled parts of cassette heater 120/240

• Cassette heater 120 set 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 set 1 pc

• Heater connector cover 1 pc

• Wire saddles 1 pc

• Screw (M3x4 screw with the binding head) 4 pc

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Pull out the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.

2-47
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Press the lock lever (a) and pull out the primary feed unit (c) from the paper feeder (b).

b
c

4 Insert the cassette heater set (b) into the lancing section (g) and secure it to the base (a)
with four screws (c) (M3x4).

5 Connect the heater connector (d) to the main machine side connector (e).

6 Attach the wire saddle (f) to the base (a) and secure the wire.

c e
c

c d
f

c
g
b
a

2-48
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Insert two hooks (c) into the square hole (e) and attach the connector cover (a) by
sliding it in the direction of the arrow.

8 Slide the protrusion (b) of the hook back and forth to check it is secured at the round
hole (d).
Make sure the wire (f) does not float.

a
c

f b
Cross-section view
of the hole

e d

9 Reattach the parts in the original position.

10 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .

2-49
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-3)In case of paper feeder (PF-5130)

Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

• Cassette heater 120 set (303PZ9402_)

• Cassette heater 240 set (303PZ9403_)

Bundled parts of cassette heater 120/240

• Cassette heater 120

• Cassette heater 240

• High temperature caution label 1 pc

• Heater connector cover 1 pc

• Cassette mounting plate set 1 pc

• Wire saddles 5 pc

• Screw (M3x8 screw with the binding head) 4 pc

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of
the arrow.

3 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of
the arrow.

2-50
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).

5 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire
with five wire saddles (d).
Make sure the wire does not float.

c
d

b
b

6 Secure the cassette mounting plate set (b) to the base with a screw (a) (M3x4).

a
b

2-51
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Hang the three projections of the connector cover (a) on the square holes (b) of the side
plate in the direction of the arrow.

8 Secure the connector cover (a) to the rear side plate with the screw (c) (M3x8).

9 Affix the caution label (f), aligning it with the mark-off line (g) on the base.

c
a

10 Reattach the parts in the original position.

11 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .

(9-4)In case of paper feeder (PF-5140)

Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

• Cassette heater 120 set (303PT9403_) 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 set (303PT9404_) 1 pc

Bundled parts of cassette heater 120/240

2-52
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

• Cassette heater 120 1 pc

• Cassette heater 240 1 pc

• High temperature caution label 1 pc

• Heater connector cover 1 pc

• Wire saddles 4 pc

• Screw (M3x8 screw with the binding head) 3 pc

1 Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.

2 Remove the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b).

3 Pull out the paper deck (c) from the paper feeder (d).

a
d

4 Secure the cassette heater (a) to the inclined portion of the end of the base with two
screws (b) (M3x8).

5 Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire
with four wire saddles (d).
Make sure the wire does not float.

c
d

b b

2-53
Installation > Installing the optional equipment [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Hang the three projections of the connector cover (a) on the square holes (b) of the side
plate in the direction of the arrow.

7 Secure the connector cover (a) to the rear side plate with the screw (c) (M3x8).
Hold the excess portion of wires in the connector cover (a).

8 Affix the caution label (d), aligning it with the mark-off line (e) on the base.

c
a

e d

9 Reattach the parts in the original position.

10 Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
Important
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is
switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this
case, execute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .

2-54
Installation > About Optional Applications [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 - 5 About Optional Applications

application
Data Security Kit

Card Authentication Kit*1

ThinPrint Option*1

*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.

Starting Use of an Application

Use the procedure below to start using an application.

1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].

Note
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login User Name/Login Password (30ppm model): 3000 / 3000
•

2 Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

• You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].

Item
Function Name

License

Trial Counts

Date of Trial

Status

3 Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

4 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

Note
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of
activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

2-55
Installation > Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 - 6 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system

1 Connect the power plug of the main unit to the outlet and turn the power on.

2 Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.

3 Input "600" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

4 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.

5 Select [Execute].

6 Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.

Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.

Destination code list

Destinati Destination Destinati Destination
on code on code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European nations)
007 Argentina ↑ Italy
009 Australia ↑ Germany
022 Brazil ↑ Spain
038 China ↑ U.K.
080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands
084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden
088 Israel ↑ France
097 Korea ↑ Austria
181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland
250 Russia ↑ Belgium
108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark
115 Mexico ↑ Finland
126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal
136 Peru ↑ Ireland
137 Philippines ↑ Norway
152 Middle East 254 Taiwan
156 Singapore
159 South Africa
169 Thailand

7 After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.

Important
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps
of FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at
V.34 communication in such a line.

2-56
Installation > Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system [CONFIDENTIAL]

Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off (See page 6-186)
U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed] (See page 6-181)

2-57
Machine Design > Mechanical Configuration [CONFIDENTIAL]

3Machine Design
3 - 1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view
14 13

15

6 8
7
11

10

9
12
3

1
5

Original path / Paper path

Light path / Paper path (option)

1 Cassette paper feed section 6 Developer unit 11 Feedshift and exit section
2 MP paper feed section 7 Toner container 12 Duplex conveying section
3 Paper conveying section 8 Drum unit 13 DP document feed section
4 Image scanner unit 9 Transfer and separation section 14 DP original conveying section
5 Laser scanner unit 10 Fuser section 15 DP original reversing/eject
section

3-1
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 2 Extension device construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5120)

Paper path
Paper path

1 Cassette paper feed section

(2) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5130)

Paper path

1 Upper cassette paper feed section 2 Lower cassette paper feed section

3-2
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-5140)

Paper path

1 Paper deck feed section

(4) Job separator cross-section view (JS-5100)

Paper path

3-3
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-5100)

1

Paper path

1 Exit section 2 Paper conveying section

(6) Finisher cross-section view (DF-5100)

3 2 1

Paper path

1 Paper conveying section 3 Exit section

2 Staple unit

3-4
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100)

2

Paper path

1 Paper conveying section 3 Exit section (main tray)

2 Exit section (mail tray)

3-5
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 3 Electric parts
(1) Wire connection
(1-1)(Machine rear side)

1
2

1 Main PWB 3 High-voltage PWB

2 Engine PWB 4 Controller fan motor

3-6
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-2)Backside of the High-voltage PWB

5
4
7 6

2
1

1 Power source PWB 4 Drum motor K

2 Power source fan motor 5 Drum motor CMY
3 Developer motor K / Paper feed motor 6 Developer motor CMY
7 Clutch cooling fan

3-7
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs

(2-1)Main PWB

It controls the software for the interface and image data processing, and the hardware generating the image scanner
unit and operation section.

(2-2)Engine PWB

3-8
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

It controls the hardware for the generation of the high-voltage and the bias, and the paper conveying system.

(2-3)High-voltage PWB

Generating the main charger high-voltage and the developer bias, the transfer bias, separation bias and the transfer
cleaning bias.

(2-4)Power source PWB

The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed to DC such as DC24V, and it controls the fuser heater.

3-9
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-5)Operation panel PWB

It consists of the wiring relay circuit for the main PWB, the operation panel PWB and the LCD.

3-10
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) PWBs
(3-1)Layout
Laser scanner unit
10 11
Primary transfer unit

Toner container

Document processor

12
Developer unit
12
12
12 8
Main unit
9 1
14
3

16 2

13 6
Drum unit 13 7
5
13
13

Fuser unit

15
4
Front side / Inside / Rear side

3-11
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Main PWB Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC and network and
image data process, etc. Controlling the entire hardware to control the image
scanner unit and operation section.

2 Engine PWB Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high voltage, bias output,
paper conveying, fuser temperature, etc.

3 High-voltage PWB Generating the main charger high-voltage, the developer bias, the transfer bias and
the separation bias.

4 Power source PWB Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to DC24V. It
controls the fuser heater.

5 Drum/Developer relay PWB Consisting of the wiring relay circuit to the engine PWB, drum units and developer
units.

6 Operation panel PWB It consists of the wiring relay circuit for the main PWB, operation panel sub PWB
and LCD.

7 Operation panel sub PWB Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.

8 LED PWB Controlling the LED.

9 CCD PWB Scanning the original image.

10 APC PWB Emitting and controlling the laser beam.

11 PD PWB Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.

12 Developer PWB Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.

13 Drum PWB Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum unique data in an
EEPROM.

14 KUIO relay PWB Consisting of the relay circuit for the engine PWB, FAX PWB, network PWB, etc.

15 Cassette heater PWB Consisting of the relay circuit for the engine PWB, power source PWB and option
cassette heater.

16 RFID PWB Reading the toner container information.

(3-2)Part name table

No. Name used in service Name used in parts list Part.No.
manual
1 Main PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 302SZ9405_
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP 302SZ9412_

2 Engine PWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP 302SZ9406_

3 High-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP 302R59404_

4 Power source PWB PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 100 SP 302SZ9410_

PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200 SP 302SZ9411_

5 Drum/Developer relay PWB PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT ASSY SP 302R69404_

6 Operation panel PWB PARTS OPERATION UNIT L SP 302SZ9401_

PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP 302SZ9404_

7 Operation panel sub PWB PARTS OPERATION UNIT L SP 302SZ9401_

PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP 302SZ9403_

8 LED PWB ISU ASSY L SP 302R49314_

(PWB LED ASSY) (3V2R60115_)

3-12
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Name used in service Name used in parts list Part.No.

manual
9 CCD PWB ISU ASSY L SP 302R49314_
(P.W.BOARD ASSY CCD) (3V2NM0107_)

10 APC PWB LK-5195 302R49315_

(PWB APC ASSY) (302R60112_)

11 PD PWB LK-5195 302R49315_

(PWB PD ASSY) (302NP0105_)

12 Developer PWB DV-5195K 302R49307_

DV-5195M 302R49308_
DV-5195C 302R49309_
DV-5195Y 302R49310_
(PWB DLP K ASSY) (302R60121_)
(PWB DLP M ASSY) (302R60120_)
(PWB DLP C ASSY) (302R60119_)
(PWB DLP Y ASSY) (302R60118_)

13 Drum PWB DK-5195 302R49305_

(PWB DRUM ASSY) (302K00107_)

14 KUIO relay PWB PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP 302K99427_

15 Cassette heater PWB PARTS PWB HEATER RELAY ASSY SP 302R69405_

16 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP 302R69411_

3-13
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Sensors and Switches

(4-1)Layout
Laser scanner unit

Primary transfer unit

42

Toner container

38
39 41
Document processor
37
40

Developer unit 32
31
30
20
29 Main unit 21 19
18
17

24

11
Drum unit 12

23 16
15

4 14
65
13
10

35
33

26 3
36 27 1
2
34 Fuser unit 28 9
22 25 8 7
Front side / Inside / Rear side

3-14
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Paper sensor Detecting the presence of paper in the cassette.

2 Paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette.

3 Paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette.

4 Paper length sensor 1 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

5 Paper length sensor 2 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

6 Paper length sensor 3 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

7 Registration sensor Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.

8 Lift sensor Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the cassette.

9 MP paper sensor Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray.

10 Duplex sensor Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.

11 Upper exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.

12 Lower exit full sensor Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.

13 Front ID sensor Measuring the toner density at the calibration.

14 Rear ID sensor Measuring the toner density at the calibration.

15 TC belt release sensor 1 Detecting the mode of the transfer belt.

16 TC belt release sensor 2 Detecting the mode of the transfer belt.

17 Container sensor K Detecting the toner container rotation. (Black)

18 Container sensor M Detecting the toner container rotation. (Magenta)

19 Container sensor C Detecting the toner container rotation. (Cyan)

20 Container sensor Y Detecting the toner container rotation. (Yellow)

21 Home position sensor Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.

22 Front cover switch 1 Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the front cover is opened and reset.
Interlock switch.

23 Front cover switch 2 Detecting the front cover (left side) open.

24 Right cover switch Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the right cover is opened and reset.
Interlock switch.

25 Waste toner box switch Detecting presence of the waste toner box.

26 Waste toner sensor Detecting the waste toner amount inside the waste toner box.

27 Temperature and humidity Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
sensor

28 Power switch Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB and the operation
panel PWB, etc.

29 Toner sensor K Detecting the toner amount inside developer unit. (Black)

30 Toner sensor M Detecting the toner amount inside developer unit. (Magenta)

31 Toner sensor C Detecting the toner amount inside developer unit. (Cyan)

32 Toner sensor Y Detecting the toner amount inside developer unit. (Yellow)

33 Exit sensor Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.

34 Press-release sensor Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.

3-15
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

35 Fuser thermistor 1 Detecting the fuser heat roller temperature. (Center)

36 Fuser thermistor 2 Detecting the fuser heat roller temperature. (Edge)

37 DP original sensor Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.

38 DP feed sensor Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.

39 DP registration sensor Detecting the timing to convey the original in the document processor.

40 DP feedshift sensor Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document processor.

41 DP open/close sensor Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.

42 LSU thermistor Detecting the LSU temperature.

(4-2)Part name table

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
1 Paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

2 Paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

3 Paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

4 Paper length sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

5 Paper length sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

6 Paper length sensor 3 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

7 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 303NW9404_

8 Lift sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

9 MP paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

10 Duplex sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

11 Upper exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

12 Lower exit full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

13 Front ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302R69406_

14 Rear ID sensor PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302R69406_

15 TC belt release sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

16 TC belt release sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

17 Container sensor K PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

18 Container sensor M PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

19 Container sensor C PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

20 Container sensor Y PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

21 Home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT.SP 302P79401_

22 Front cover switch 1 INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160

23 Front cover switch 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

24 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB27160

25 Waste toner box switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

26 Waste toner sensor SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01

3-16
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
27 Temperature and humidity sensor PARTS PWB THERMISTOR ASSY SP 302R69419_

28 Power switch PARTS PWB SWITCH ASSY SP 302NG9430_

29 Toner sensor K DV-5195K 302R49307_

(TONER SENSOR ASSY K)

30 Toner sensor M DV-5195N 302R49308_

(TONER SENSOR ASSY M)

31 Toner sensor C DV-5195C 302R49309_

(TONER SENSOR ASSY C)

32 Toner sensor Y DV-5195Y 302R49310_

(TONER SENSOR ASSY Y)

33 Exit sensor FK-5315 302SZ9301_

FK-5317 302SZ9302_
(SENSOR OPT.) 302R49313_

34 Press-release sensor FK-5315 302SZ9301_

FK-5317 302SZ9302_
(SENSOR OPT.) 302R49313_

35 Fuser thermistor 1 FK-5315 302SZ9301_

FK-5317 302SZ9302_
(THERMISOR ASSY) 302R49313_

36 Fuser thermistor 2 FK-5315 302SZ9301_

FK-5317 302SZ9302_
(THERMISTOR FUSER) 302R49313_

37 DP original sensor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(SENSOR OPT.) (7NXSG2A241++H01)

38 DP feed sensor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(SENSOR OPT.) (7NXSG2A241++H01)

39 DP registration sensor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(SENSOR OPT.) (7NXSG2A241++H01)

40 DP feedshift sensor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(SENSOR OPT.) (7NXSG2A241++H01)

41 DP open/close sensor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(SENSOR OPT.) (7NXSG2A241++H01)

42 LSU thermistor LK-5195 302R49315_

(PWB THERMISTOR ASSY)

3-17
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Motors
(5-1)Layout
Laser scanner unit
19
Primary transfer unit

18

Toner container

31
Document processor 30
32

29
Developer unit 28
27
26
Main unit 13
12
20
11
8
9

10
5 4
Drum unit 24
23

17
14
7
2
25

Fuser unit

21 1
22
6
15 16 3
Front side / Inside / Rear side

3-18
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Developer motor K / Paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding and developer unit K.

2 Transfer motor Driving the primary transfer unit.

3 Drum motor K Driving the drum unit. (Black)

4 Drum motor CMY Driving the drum unit. (Color)

5 Developer motor CMY Driving the developer units. (Color)

6 Lift motor Operating the bottom plate inside the cassette.

7 Fuser motor Driving the fuser section.

8 Exit motor Driving the exit section.

9 Image scanner motor Driving the optical section.

10 Toner motor K Supplying the toner to developer unit. (Black)

11 Toner motor M Supplying the toner to developer unit. (Magenta)

12 Toner motor C Supplying the toner to developer unit. (Cyan)

13 Toner motor Y Supplying the toner to developer unit. (Yellow)

14 Exit fan motor Cooling the exit section.

15 Developer fan motor 1 Cooling the developer.

16 Developer fan motor 2 Cooling the developer.

17 Transfer release motor Driving the primary transfer roller separation.

18 Polygon motor Driving polygon mirror.

19 Cleaning motor Driving the LSU glass cleaning mechanism.

20 Controller fan motor Cooling the main PWB.

21 Developer fan motor 3 Cooling the developer.

22 Developer fan motor 4 Cooling the developer.

23 Steam removal fan motor Removing the steam.

24 PWB fan motor Cooling the power source PWB and high-voltage PWB.

25 Clutch fan motor Cooling the clutch.

26 Vibration motor K Vibrating the developer unit K.

27 Vibration motor M Vibrating the developer unit M.

28 Vibration motor C Vibrating the developer unit C.

29 Vibration motor Y Vibrating the developer unit Y.

30 DP feed motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.

31 DP conveying motor Driving the original conveying section in the document processor

32 DP feedshift motor Driving the original feed section in the document processor.

3-19
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-2)Part name table

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
1 Developer motor K / Paper feed motor PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_
(MOTOR-BL W20) (302K94414_)

2 Transfer motor IMAGE DRIVE ASSY 302R45841_

(MOTOR-BL W20) (302K94414_)

3 Drum motor K DR-5195 302R49304_

(MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11)

4 Drum motor CMY DR-5195 302R49304_

(MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11)

5 Developer motor CMY DR-5195 302R49304_

(MOTOR-BL W20)

6 Lift motor PARTS LIFT MOTOR ASSY SP 302R49422_

7 Fuser motor PARTS MOTOR-PM FUSER SP 302SZ9408_

8 Exit motor PARTS EXIT ASSY SP 302R49405_

(MOTOR EJECT) (302P74407_)

9 Image scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302LW9406_

10 Container motor K PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

11 Container motor M PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

12 Container motor C PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

13 Container motor Y PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

14 Exit fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_

15 Developer fan motor 1 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_

16 Developer fan motor 2 PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_

17 Transfer release motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

DC MOTOR ASSY B 302R40005_

18 Polygon motor LK-5195 302R49315_

(MOTOR POLYGON)

19 Cleaning motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP 302R49420_

20 Controller fan motor PARTS,FAN COOLING CONVEYING SP 302FZ9442_

21 Developer fan motor 3 PARTS,FAN IMAGE SP 302FZ9466_

22 Developer fan motor 4 PARTS,FAN IMAGE SP 302FZ9466_

23 Steam removal fan motor PARTS EXIT ASSY SP 302R49405_

(FAN COOLING 40-15) (302H04412_)

24 PWB fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_

25 Clutch fan motor FAN COOLING 40-15 302H04412

26 Vibration motor K DV-5195K 302R49307_

(MOTOR VIBRATION)

27 Vibration motor M DV-5195M 302R49308_

(MOTOR VIBRATION)

3-20
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
28 Vibration motor C DV-5195C 302R49309_
(MOTOR VIBRATION)

29 Vibration motor Y DV-5195Y 302R49310_

(MOTOR VIBRATION)

30 DP feed motor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(MOTOR-HB PAPER FEED) (302NM4404_)

31 DP conveying motor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(MOTOR-HB PAPER FEED) (302NM4404_)

32 DP feedshift motor DP ASSY SP 302R49301_

(MOTOR ROTARY) (302KY4409_)

3-21
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) Others
(6-1)Layout
Laser scanner unit

Primary transfer unit

Toner container

Document processor

Developer unit

13
Main unit

7
5
4

10
11
Drum unit 9
8

3
2
12

Fuser unit

6
1

Front side / Inside / Rear side

3-22
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Paper feed clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette.

2 Middle clutch Controlling the conveying section drive.

3 Duplex clutch Controlling the duplex drive.

4 Registration clutch Controlling the secondary paper feeding from the cassette.

5 Developer clutch Controlling the drive to developer unit. (Black)

6 MP solenoid Controlling the primary paper feeding from the MP tray.

7 Feedshift solenoid Operates the feedshift guide.

8 Cleaning lamp K Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum. (Black)

9 Cleaning lamp M Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum. (Magenta)

10 Cleaning lamp C Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum. (Cyan)

11 Cleaning lamp Y Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum. (Yellow)

12 Fuser heater Heating the heat roller.

13 Speaker Outputting sounds.

(6-2)Part name table

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
1 Paper feed clutch PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_
(CLUTCH 35 Z35R) (302NR4404_)

2 Middle clutch PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_

(CLUTCH 35 Z35R) (302NR4404_)

3 Duplex clutch PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_

(CLUTCH 35 Z35R) (302NR4404_)

4 Registration clutch PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_

(CLUTCH 35 Z35R) (302NR4404_)

5 Developer clutch PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_

(CLUTCH 35 Z35R) (302NR4404_)

6 MP solenoid PARTS FEED DRIVE ASSY SP 302R49408_

(SOLENOID MPF) (302HN4416_)

7 Feedshift solenoid PARTS EXIT ASSY SP 302R49405_

(SOLENOID PRIMARY FEED) (302K94417_)

8 Cleaning lamp K DK-5195 302R49305_

(PWB ERASER ASSY)

9 Cleaning lamp M DK-5195 302R49305_

(PWB ERASER ASSY)

10 Cleaning lamp C DK-5195 302R49305_

(PWB ERASER ASSY)

11 Cleaning lamp Y DK-5195 302R49305_

(PWB ERASER ASSY)

3-23
Machine Design > Electric parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part.No.
12 Fuser heater FK-5315 302SZ9301_
FK-5317 302SZ9302_
HEATER LAMP 240
HEATER LAMP 120

13 Speaker PARTS SPEAKER SP 302ND9437_

3-24
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 4 Electric parts (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120)
1
12
15

13
14
11

6
5

10
2
3
4
9
8

Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 PF PWB Controlling the electric parts in the PF.

2 PF paper sensor Detecting the presence of paper in the cassette.

3 PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette.

4 PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette.

5 PF paper length switch 1 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

6 PF paper length switch 2 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

7 PF paper length switch 3 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of cassette.

8 PF lift sensor Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
cassette.

9 PF conveying sensor Detecting the paper conveying after cassette feed.

10 PF right cover switch Detecting the right cover open.

11 PF paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding system.

12 PF lift motor Operating the bottom plate inside the cassette.

13 PF paper feed clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette.

14 PF conveying clutch Controlling the paper conveying section.

15 Cassette heater switch Interlock switch for the cassette heater.

3-25
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130)

1 20 2224

19
21 23
25
16
14
10 9
8 4
5
2
18

13
12
11
6

3
7

17
15
Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 PF PWB Controlling the electric parts in the PF.

2 PF paper sensor 1 Detecting presence of paper in the upper cassette.

3 PF paper sensor 2 Detecting presence of paper in the lower cassette.

4 PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.

5 PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cassette.

6 PF paper gauge sensor 3 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.

7 PF paper gauge sensor 4 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cassette.

3-26
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 PF paper length switch 1 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of upper cassette.

9 PF paper length switch 2 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of upper cassette.

10 PF paper length switch 3 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of upper cassette.

11 PF paper length switch 4 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of lower cassette.

12 PF paper length switch 5 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of lower cassette.

13 PF paper length switch 6 Detecting the cassette paper size and presence of lower cassette.

14 PF lift sensor 1 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the upper
cassette.

15 PF lift sensor 2 Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the lower
cassette.

16 PF conveying sensor 1 Detecting the paper conveying after upper cassette feed.

17 PF conveying sensor 2 Detecting the paper conveying after lower cassette feed.

18 PF right cover switch Detecting the right cover open.

19 PF paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding system.

20 PF lift motor 1 Operating the bottom plate inside the upper cassette.

21 PF lift motor 2 Operating the bottom plate inside the lower cassette.

22 PF paper feed clutch 1 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the upper cassette.

23 PF paper feed clutch 2 Controlling the primary paper feeding from the lower cassette.

24 PF conveying clutch 1 Controlling the paper conveying section.

25 PF conveying clutch 2 Controlling the paper conveying section.

3-27
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140)

3
4

11
12
9

1
6
7
5

8
10
2

Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 PF PWB Controlling the electric parts in the PF.

2 PF paper sensor Detecting presence of paper in the paper deck.

3 PF paper gauge sensor 1 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the deck.

4 PF paper gauge sensor 2 Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the deck.

5 PF deck detection switch Detecting the PF deck installation.

6 PF lift sensor Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the deck.

7 PF conveying sensor Detecting the paper conveying after deck feed.

8 PF right cover switch Detecting the right cover open.

9 PF paper feed motor Driving the paper feeding system.

10 PF lift motor Operating the bottom plate inside the deck.

11 PF paper feed clutch Controlling the primary paper feeding from the deck.

12 PF conveying clutch Controlling the paper conveying section.

3-28
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Attachment kit (AK-5100)

3 1

5
4

Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 BR PWB Controlling the electric parts in the BR.

2 BR conveying sensor 1 Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.

3 BR conveying sensor 2 Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.

4 BR cover switch Detecting the bridge cover open.

5 BR conveying motor Controlling the paper conveying to the bridge.

6 BR fan motor Cooling the paper conveyed in the bridge.

3-29
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Inner finisher (DF-5100)

5 23 22 4
17 2110
8 6
18
14
7

1
24

3
19
16
15
13
12
11
9

20
2
Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 DF PWB Controlling the electric parts.

2 DF staple relay PWB Relaying the staple unit control signals.

3 DF paper entry sensor Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.

4 DF exit paper sensor Detecting presence of paper the exit section.

5 DF side registration sensor 1 Detecting the adjusting plate front home position.

6 DF side registration sensor 2 Detecting the adjusting plate rear home position.

7 DF adjusting sensor Detecting the paper guides home position.

8 DF bundle exit sensor Detecting the bundle exit unit position.

9 DF paddle sensor Detecting the paddle home position.

10 DF tray sensor Detecting the exit tray lower limit.

11 DF slide sensor Detecting the staple unit slide position.

12 DF middle motor Driving the middle roller.

13 DF paddle motor Driving the paper guides.

14 DF exit release motor Driving the bundle exit unit.

15 DF side registration motor 1 Driving the adjusting plate front.

16 DF side registration motor 2 Driving the adjusting plate rear.

3-30
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 DF exit motor Driving the exit roller.

18 DF tray motor Ascending and descending the exit tray.

19 DF slide motor Driving the staple unit.

20 DF staple unit Paper stapler.

21 DF paper press sensor 1 Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure. (Upper limit)

22 DF paper press sensor 2 Detecting the bundle exit paper pressure. (Lower limit)

23 DF paper press solenoid Switching the bundle paper pressure.

24 DF setting switch Detecting the DF setting. (Interlock detection)

(6) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100)

2
3
4
5
1
6
7

12
9

10

11

Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 MT Controlling electric parts of the mailbox.

2 MB overflow sensor 1 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the sub tray 1.

3 MB overflow sensor 2 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the sub tray 2.

4 MB overflow sensor 3 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the sub tray 3.

3-31
Machine Design > Electric parts (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 MB overflow sensor 4 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the sub tray 4.

6 MB overflow sensor 5 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the sub tray 5.

7 MB overflow sensor 6 Detecting overflow of paper exited to the main tray 6.

8 MT exit sensor 1 Detecting paper jam.

9 MT exit sensor 2 Emitting LED pulses.

10 MT home position sensor Controlling the MT drive motor.

11 MT cover sensor Detecting the mailbox cover open/close.

12 MT drive motor. Driving the mailbox paper conveying.

(7) Job separator(JS-5100)

Front side / Inside / Rear side

1 JS exit paper sensor Detecting presence of the job tray paper.

3-32
Machine Design > Drive system [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 5 Drive system
(1) Drive system for the paper conveying

21
Eject unit

Primary transfer unit Fuser unit

20
16 12 13 15 11 9 14 10 7 6 8
19

18

17

5
4

Developer unit Drum unit 2

3

Driveing feed / developer K. Driveing developer CMY

1 Developer motor K / Paper feed motor 13 Developer motor CMY
2 Paper feed roller 14 Developer sleeve roller M
3 MP paper feed roller 15 Developer sleeve roller C
4 DU conveying roller 16 Developer sleeve roller Y
5 registration roller Imaging/transfer drive
6 Developer sleeve roller unit. 17 Transfer motor
Driveing drum K. 18 Transfer belt drive roller
7 Drum motor K Fuser drive
8 Drum K 19 Fuser motor
Driveing drum CMY. 20 Fuser heat roller
9 Drum motor CMY Exit drive
10 Drum M 21 Exit motor
11 Drum C
12 Drum Y

3-33
Machine Design > Drive system [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Drive location

10 11 12 13
15

14
7 8

9
5 6

4
1
3

Driving feed unit. Toner supply drive unit

1 Developer motor K / Paper feed motor 10 Toner motor K
2 Paper feed clutch 11 Toner motor M
3 Middle clutch 12 Toner motor C
4 Duplex clutch 13 Toner motor Y
5 Registration clutch
6 Developer clutch 14 Transfer motor
Main drive unit
7 Drum motor K 15 Fuser motor
8 Drum motor CMY
9 Developer motor CMY

3-34
Machine Design > Drive system [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Drive unit

(3-1)Driving feed unit.

(3-2)Main drive unit

(3-3)Toner supply drive unit

3-35
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 6 Mechanical construction
(1) Paper feed and conveying section
The paper feed and conveying section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper feed section,
and the paper conveying section conveying the fed paper to the transfer and separate section.

(1-1)Cassette paper feed section

The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2). The cassette forwards paper by
rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is
also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.

8 7 6 2 3 1 4

10

9
7 10
8
2 1
8 4
11

10

1 Paper feed roller 5 Retard holder 9 Paper length guide

2 Pickup roller 6 Friction pad 10 Cassette base
3 Pickup holder 7 Lift plate 11 Width guide release lever
4 Retard roller 8 Paper width guides

3-36
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
CAS_LIFTUP_SENS
Lift sensor YC12-24
CAS_WID1
Paper length sensor 3 YC12-14
CAS_WID2
Paper length sensor 2 YC12-12
CAS_WID0
Paper length sensor 1 YC12-10
LIFT_MOT1_DIR
LIFT_MOT1_RET YC21-5
Lift motor YC21-6
FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK YC15-9
Developer motor K FEED_MOT_RDY YC15-10
FEED_MOT_DIR YC15-11
YC15-12
FEED_CL_REM
Paper feed clutch YC13-A5
PAPEMP_SENS
Paper sensor YC12-3
PAPVL1_SENS
Paper gauge sensor 1 YC12-6
PAPVL2_SENS
Paper gauge sensor 2 YC12-9

3-37
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-2)MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can load 100 sheets paper (80g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP paper feed roller
while lifting up the MP lift plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the MP separation
pad.
1 3 6 4 7

2 8 5

1
6
8
4
2
9
6 7

1 MP paper feed roller 4 MP tray 7 Paper stopper

2 MP separation pad 5 MP frame 8 Actuator (MP paper sensor )
3 MP lift plate 6 MP paper width guides 9 Sub tray

3-38
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB

FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK YC15-9
Developer motor K FEED_MOT_RDY YC15-10
FEED_MOT_DIR YC15-11
YC15-12

MPF_SOL_REM
MP solenoid YC12-29

MPF_SET_SENS
MP paper sensor YC12-21

3-39
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Paper conveying section

The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section when the paper is fed from the
cassette or the MP tray, or re-fed in the duplex print. The fed paper is conveyed to where it turns the registration sensor
on by the middle roller or the MP conveying roller, and then, conveyed to the transfer and separation section by the
registration front and rear rollers.

5 6

4
7
3

1 2

7 4
6
5

3 1

1 Middle roller 4 Registration sensor 7 Conveying guide

2 Middle pulley 5 Registration roller left
3 Registration guide 6 Registration roller right

3-40
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB

FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK YC15-9
Developer motor K FEED_MOT_RDY YC15-10
FEED_MOT_DIR YC15-11
YC15-12

REG_SENS
Registration sensor YC12-26

3-41
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Optical section

The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner section to write
the image.

(2-1)Image scanner section

The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp and that reflection light is scanned by the CCD image sensor
on the CCD PWB via three mirrors and the ISU lens to change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the image scanner unit stops at the original scanning position (slit glass) and scan
the original that the document processor conveys.

6 10 5 4

9
8
8

7
1 8
2

10

3 11
9 12
2
7
1

8
8

3-42
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 CCD 5 Original size indicator 9 Reflector

2 Scanner carriage 6 Slit glass 10 Exposure lamp
3 ISU frame 7 ISU lens 11 ISU shaft
4 Contact glass 8 Mirror 12 Drive belt

[Block diagram]

CCD PWB MPWB

LED_Cashode HP_SWN
LED_Anode YC2-1 M_LED_C YC2014-29
LED PWB YC2-2 YC2014-31
M_LED_A
YC2014-32
HP_SWN
Home position sensor YC3-3

EPWB
SCAN_MOT_B3
SCAN_MOT_A1 YC19-1
Image scanner SCAN_MOT_B1 YC19-2
motor SCAN_MOT_A3 YC19-3
YC19-4

3-43
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects to the polygon
mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The laser scanner unit has some
lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning
motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.

Drum Drum Drum Drum

(Yellow) (Cyan) (Magenta) (Black)

6 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4

5 1 2 7 7 7 3 7

11 10 7
4
1 9
12
13

2 14
7
4
8

1 Polygon motor 6 LSU cover 11 Slit glass plate

2 fθ lens A 7 Mirror 12 PD PWB
3 fθ lens B 8 Cylindrical lens 13 PD lens
4 LSU glass 9 Laser emitting diode 14 PD mirror
5 LSU base 10 Collimator lens

3-44
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

MPWB
APCPWB
BD BD
YC2-2 YC1-5 YC2016-36
PDPWB

EPWB
LSU_CL_MOT2
LSU_CL_MOT1 YC5-6
Cleaning motor
YC5-7

POLREM
POLOCK YC5-3
Polygon motor
PDLCLK YC5-4
YC5-5

3-45
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Developer section

(3-1)Developer unit
The developer section consists of the magnet roller forming the magnetic brush, the sleeve roller forming the thin layer
by replacing the toner, the developer blade, and the developer screw mixing up the toner. The toner density is adjusted
by impressing the bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner amount inside the developer unit is detected
by the toner sensor.

Drum Drum Drum Drum

(Yellow) (Cyan) (Magenta) (Black)

1 1 1 1
6 2 6 2 6 2 6 2

5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3

1
3
4
2

1 Sleeve roller 4 Developer screw A 7 Toner sensor

2 Magnet roller 5 Developer screw B
3 Developer blade 6 Developer case

3-46
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
DLPC_MOT_REM
DLPC_MOT_CLK YC16-3
Developer motor DLPC_MOT_RDY YC16-4
CMY DLPC_MOT_DIR YC16-5
YC16-6

FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK YC15-9
Developer motor FEED_MOT_RDY YC15-10
K FEED_MOT_DIR YC15-11
YC15-12

Drum/Developer
relay PWB TCSENS_BK
DLP_TH YC6-14
TCSENS_M YC6-13
TCSENS_C YC6-5
TCSENS_Y YC6-4
Toner sensor K YC6-3
DLP_TH
YC8-1
Developer PWB TCSENS_BK YC8-2

Toner sensor M
DLP_TH
TCSENS_M
YC7-1
Developer PWB YC7-2

Toner sensor C
DLP_TH
TCSENS_C
YC6-1
Developer PWB YC6-2

Toner sensor Y
DLP_TH
TCSENS_Y
YC5-1
Developer PWB YC5-2

3-47
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, the charger roller unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is evenly charged
to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.

(4-1)Charger roller unit

The charged roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to charge the drum evenly.

4 (Yellow) 4 (Cyan) 4 (Magenta) 4 (Black)

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

1 Charger roller 3 Charger case 4 Drum

2 Charger cleaning roller

3-48
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
DRMC_MOT_REM
DRMC_MOT_CLK YC18-3
DRMC_MOT_RDY YC18-4
Drum motor CMY
DRMC_MOT_DIR YC18-5
YC18-6
DRMK_MOT_REM
DRMK_MOT_CLK YC16-9
DRMK_MOT_RDY YC16-10
Drum motor K YC16-11
DRMK_MOT_DIR
YC16-12

High-voltage PWB
HVREM
Main Chager YC1-8 HVCLK YC8-8
YC1-9 YC8-9

Drum

Ground

3-49
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-2)Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected to
the waste toner box by the drum screw. The cleaning lamp consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.

5 (Yellow) 5 (Cyan) 5 (Magenta) 5 (Black)

2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4

1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3

2
4
1

1 Cleaning blade 3 Drum frame 5 Drum

2 Drum screw 4 Cleaning lamp

3-50
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
DRMC_MOT_REM
DRMC_MOT_CLK YC18-3
Drum motor DRMC_MOT_RDY YC18-4
CMY DRMC_MOT_DIR YC18-5
YC18-6
DRMK_MOT_REM
DRMK_MOT_CLK YC16-9
Drum motor DRMK_MOT_RDY YC16-10
K DRMK_MOT_DIR YC16-11
YC16-12

ERS_CL_REM
ERS_BK_REM YC6-6
YC6-15

DR/DLPRPWB

ERS_BK_REM
Cleaning lamp K Drum PWB YC4-8
ERS_CL_REM
Cleaning lamp M Drum PWB YC3-8
ERS_CL_REM
Cleaning lamp C Drum PWB YC2-8
ERS_CL_REM
Cleaning lamp Y Drum PWB YC1-8

3-51
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Transfer and separation section

(5-1)Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and four primary transfer rollers
facing each drum. When printing the color image, the toner image with a single color formed on each drum is repeatedly
transferred on the transfer belt by impressing the bias to the primary transfer rollers facing each drum, and then the full
color toner image is formed. Also, the ID sensor attached to the main unit measures the toner density on the transfer
belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transferring, and forwards
it to the waste toner box as waste toner.

10 9 7 3 3 3 5 3 1

11
8 4 2 6
12 12 12 12
(Yellow) (Cyan) (Magenta) (Black)

4
7
9 13
10

11 5

8
2 3

3
13
1
3

1 Drive roller 6 ID sensor 11 Cleaning screw

2 Pickup roller 7 Cleaning pre-brush 12 Drum
3 Primary transfer roller 8 Cleaning fur brush 13 Skew prevention belt
4 Tension roller 9 Cleaning roller
5 Transfer belt 10 Cleaning blade

3-52
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
BELT_RLS_REMA
BELT_RLS_REMB YC10-B1
TCBRM
Transfer release motor
YC10-B2
4REJECT_SENS
TC belt release sensor 2 YC7-19
3REJECT_SENS
TC belt release sensor 1 YC7-16

IMAGE_MOT_REM
IMAGE_MOT_CLK YC15-3
IMAGE_MOT_RDY YC15-4
Transfer motor
IMAGE_MOT_DIR YC15-5
YC15-6

DACSLD2
DACSCLK YC8-4
High-voltage PWB DACSDAT YC8-5
Transfer Bias YC8-7
HVREM
YC8-8

(5-2)Secondary transfer unit

The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller attached to the paper conveying unit, and
the separation brush. The DC bias from the high-voltage PWB is impressed to the secondary transfer roller, and the
toner image formed on the transfer belt is transfered to the paper by the potential gap. After transferring, the paper is
separated by self stripping and the electric charge on the paper is removed by the separation brush contacting the
ground.

4 1 3 5

3-53
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

4
1

1 Secondary transfer roller 3 Secondary transfer section 5 Transfer spring

2 Separation brush 4 Transfer front guide

[Block diagram]

EPWB
IMAGE_MOT_REM
IMAGE_MOT_CLK YC15-3
Transfer motor IMAGE_MOT_RDY YC15-4
IMAGE_MOT_DIR YC15-5
YC15-6

DACSLD2
Transfer Bias DACSCLK YC8-4
High-voltage PWB DACSDAT YC8-5
Separate bias HVREM YC8-7
YC8-8

3-54
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) Fuser section

The paper from the transfer and separation section is pinched between the fuser heat roller and the press roller. The
fuser heat roller is heated by the fuser heater , and the paper is pressed by the press roller with the pressure added by
the pressure spring toward the heat roller, so toner is fused on the paper by that heat and pressure.
The surface temperature of the fuser heat roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and controlled by the Engine PWB. If
the fuser section has abnormal temperature, the power supply line is shut off by switching the fuser thermostat and the
fuser heater is turned off forcedly.

(6-1)Fuser unit

9
10
8

5 7
6
3
2
1 11
4

1
7 10
8
9

6
5
2

1 Fuser heat roller 5 Fuser thermistor 2 9 Fuser exit roller

2 Fuser heater 6 Press roller 10 Fuser exit pulley
3 Fuser thermostat 7 Separator 11 Fuser front guide
4 Fuser thermistor 1 8 Actuator (Exit
sensor)

3-55
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB
FUSER_MOT_B/
FUSER_MOT_A/ YC17-1
FUSER_MOT_B YC17-2
Fuser motor
FUSER_MOT_A YC17-3
YC17-4

SHREM
Sub fuser heater PSPWB YC34-3
MHREM
Main fuser heater YC34-4

FSR_JAM_SENS
Eject sensor YC7-3

FSR_RLS_SENS
Press-release sensor YC7-6

GUIDE_TH2
Fuser thermistor 2 YC7-10

MAIN_TH2(ROLLE)
YC7-8
Fuser thermistor 1 MAIN_TH1(OUT)
YC7-9

3-56
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) Exit and feedshift section

The exit and feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex conveying
section.

(7-1)Exit unit

10
2
8 7
6

5
3

10
4 9
8
7

2 7
5
6
1

3
4
7

1 Upper exit roller 5 Exit conveying roller 9 Feedshift guide

2 Upper exit pulley 6 Exit conveying pulley 10 Eraser brush
3 Lower exit roller 7 Conveying pulley
4 Lower exit pulley 8 Actuator (Exit paper
full sensor)

3-57
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

Block diagram

EPWB

SB_MOT_B1
SB_MOT_B3 YC24-B3
SB_MOT_A3 YC24-B4
Exit motor YC24-B5
SB_MOT_A1
YC24-B6
EXIT_SOL_PULL
EXIT_SOL_RETURN YC24-B8
Feedshift solenoid
YC24-B9

EXIT_FULL_UPPER
Upper eject full sensor YC24-B12

EJE_FULL_DOWNER
Lower eject full sensor YC24-B15
CON_FAN
Steam removal fan motor YC24-B1

(7-2)exit paper jam

If paper exited is caught up by the paper previously exited, extend the length of the exit actuator.

1 If the leading edge (b) of the paper exited is caught up by the trailing edge (a) paper previously exited, slide the
position of the exit actuator sub guide (c) to extend it.

2 Pushes down the trailing edge (a) of exit paper to prevent the (b) leading edge of next paper from being caught
up.

b b
a c

3-58
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

3-59
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) Duplex conveying section

(8-1)Duplex conveying unit
The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the exit and feedshift
section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.

1
2

2
1
4
5
3
2
1

2
4
1

1
2

1 DU conveying roller 3 Actuator (Duplex 4 DU conveying base

2 DU conveying pulley sensor) 5 DU conveying guide

3-60
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB

DU1_REM
Duplex clutch YC13-A9

DU1_SENS
Duplex sensor YC12-18

FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK YC15-9
Developer motor K FEED_MOT_RDY YC15-10
FEED_MOT_DIR YC15-11
YC15-12

3-61
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9) Document processorOriginal

(9-1)paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to the original
conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP forwarding pulley and the DP feed roller.

11 4 2 5 3 1 6 9

12 12 8 7

11

1
2
4
3

12 9

8 10
9

1 DP forwarding pulley 5 Front separation pad 9 DP original width guide

2 DP feed roller 6 Friction pad 10 Original tray
3 DP feed holder 7 Actuator (DP original 11 Actuator (DP paper
4 DP separation pad sensor ) feed sensor)
8 DP original stopper 12 Conveying pulley

3-62
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB

DP_FEEDSW
DP feed sensor YC20-A6

DP_OPENSW
DPOCS YC20-A9

DP_SETSW
DP open/close sensor YC20-A3

DP_FEEDMOT_/B
DP_FEEDMOT_B YC20-B5
DP_FEEDMOT_/A YC20-B6
DP feed motor YC20-B7
DP_FEEDMOT_A
YC20-B8

3-63
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-2)Original conveying section and Original switchback and exit section

The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. Conveyed original is scanned by the optical section
(CCD) of the main unit when passing through the slit glass.
The original switchback and exit section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is exited to the
original exit table by the exit roller. When scanning the original in the duplex switchback mode, the original is conveyed
to the switchback tray once and then reconveyed to the original conveying section by the switchback roller.

3 1 12 9

10

11

2 4 5 6 7 8

5
2
3

9
8
7
13
10
11

1 Actuator (DP 5 DP conveying roller 10 DP exit roller

registration sensor ) 6 DP conveying pulley 11 DP exit pulley
2 DP registration roller 7 Feedshift guide 12 Reversing guide
3 DP registration pulley 8 Switchback roller 13 Eject tray
4 Scanner guide 9 Retard pulley

3-64
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

EPWB

DP_CONV_MOT_/B
DP_CONV_MOT_B YC20-B1
DP_CONV_MOT_/A YC20-B2
DP conveying motor
DP_CONV_MOT_A YC20-B3
YC20-B4

DP_SEPMOT_/B
DP_SEPMOT_/A YC20-B9
DP_SEPMOT_B YC20-B10
DP feedshift motor
DP_SEPMOT_A YC20-B11
YC20-B12

DP_JHPSW_EXITSW
DP feedshift sensor YC20-A12

DP_TMGSW
DP registration sensor YC20-A15

3-65
Machine Design > Mechanical construction [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9-3)Reversing duplex scanning

2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main
body).

Slit glass: first side scanning

2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main
body). DP switchback tray
1

DP feedshift guide

2
The original is reversed by the 3
switchback roller.
1

DP switchback roller

2
The second side of original is 3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is DP switchback tray
conveyed to the switchback tray. 1

Slit glass: second side scanning

Ejected to the original eject tray by

the feedshift and eject rollers.
DP conveying DP switchback roller
2
roller 1
3

DP eject roller Original eject tray

3-66
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 - 7 Extension device construction (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120)
(1-1)Cassette paper feed section
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2). Paper from the cassette is picked up
by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is also
prevented by the effect of the retard roller.

8 2 3 1 12 13

4
5

7 6

9 8 11 10 8 2 1 12 13 14

7 6 4

1 PF paper feed roller 6 PF friction pad 11 PF width guide release lever

2 PF pickup roller 7 PF lift plate 12 PF feed roller
3 PF pickup holder 8 PF paper width guides 13 PF feed pulley
4 PF retard roller 9 PF paper length guide 14 PF actuator (PF
5 PF retard holder 10 PF cassette base paper sensor)

3-67
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

PFMPWB EPWB
ULIM_SW_1
PF lift sensor YC4-3
CAS1_SIZE3_SENS
PF paper length switch 3 YC3-15
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS
PF paper length switch 2 YC3-13
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS
PF paper length switch 1 YC3-11
L_MOT1_RET
L_MOT1_DR YC6-1
PF lift motor YC6-2
FEED_CL1
PF paper feed clutch YC9-3
START/STOP
CLOCK YC8-3
LD YC8-4
PF paper feed motor
CW/CCW YC8-5
YC8-6
VER_CL1
PF conveying clutch YC9-1
COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch YC4-7
CAS1_EMPTY
PF paper sensor YC3-3
CAS1_QUANT1
PF paper gauge sensor 1 YC3-6
CAS1_QUANT2
PF paper gauge sensor 2 YC3-9
VER_SENS_1
PF feed sensor YC4-5

3-68
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130)

(2-1)Cassette paper feed section
The paper feeder can load 550 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80g/m2) and consists of two cassette.
Paper from the cassette is picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by rotating the paper
feed roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.

9 8 2 3 1 12 13

4
5
6
7 10
27
16 17 15
23 22
26
18
19
20
21 24

9 8 11 10 7 8 2 1 12 13 14

4
6
28
26
27

23 22 25 21 20 16 15 18

3-69
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 PF paper feed roller 1 11 PF width guide release lever 1 20 PF friction pad 2

2 PF Pickup roller 1 12 PF feed roller 2 21 PF lift plate 2
3 PF Pickup holder 1 13 PF feed pulley 2 22 PF paper width guides 2
4 PF retard roller 1 14 PF actuator (PF 23 PF paper length guide 2
5 PF retard holder 1 paper sensor 1) 24 PF cassette base 2
6 PF friction pad 1 15 PF paper feed roller 2 25 PF width guide release lever 2
7 PF lift plate 1 16 PF Pickup roller 2 26 PF feed roller 3
8 PF paper width guides 1 17 PF Pickup holder 2 27 PF feed pulley 3
9 PF paper length guide 1 18 PF retard roller 2 28 PF actuator (PF
10 PF cassette base 1 19 PF retard holder 2 paper sensor 2)

[Block diagram]

PFMPWB PFM
ULIM_SW_1 PWB
PF lift sensor 1 YC4-3 (500×1)
CAS1_SIZE3_SENS
PF paper length switch 3 YC3-15
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS
PF paper length switch 2 YC3-13
VER_SENS_1
PF feed sensor 1 YC4-5
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS
PF paper length switch 1 YC3-11
L_MOT1_RET
L_MOT1_DR YC6-1
PF lift motor 1 YC6-2
CAS1_QUANT2
PF paper gauge sensor 2 YC3-9
CAS1_QUANT1
PF paper gauge sensor 1 YC3-6
CAS1_EMPTY
PF paper sensor 1 YC3-3
FEED_CL1
PF paper feed clutch 1 YC9-3
VER_CL1
PF conveying clutch 1 YC9-1
COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch YC4-7
FEED_CL2
PF paper feed clutch 2 YC9-7
VER_CL2
PF conveying clutch 2 YC9-5
START/STOP EPWB
CLOCK YC8-3
LD YC8-4
PF paper feed motor
CW/CCW YC8-5
YC8-6
CAS2_EMPTY
PF paper sensor 2 YC5-3
CAS2_QUANT1
PF paper gauge sensor 3 YC5-6
CAS2_QUANT2
PF paper gauge sensor 4 YC5-9
L_MOT2_RET
PF lift motor 2 L_MOT2_DR YC6-3
YC6-4
CAS2_SIZE1_SENS
PF paper length switch 4 YC5-11
VER_SENS_2
PF feed sensor 2 YC4-13
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS
PF paper length switch 5 YC5-13
CAS2_SIZE3_SENS
PF paper length switch 6 YC5-15
ULIM_SW_2
PF lift sensor 2 YC4-11

3-70
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140)

(3-1)Paper deck feed section
The deck can load 2200 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 2000 sheets paper (80g/m2). Paper from the deck is picked up by
rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is also
prevented by the effect of the retard roller.

2 3 1 10 11

7 6 4 5 13

8 9 8 2 1 10 11 12

7 6 4

1 PF paper feed roller 6 PF friction pad 11 PF feed pulley

2 PF pickup roller 7 PF deck bottom plate 12 PF actuator (PF
3 PF pickup holder 8 PF paper width guides paper sensor)
4 PF retard roller 9 Paper length guide*1 13 Right cover
5 PF retard holder 10 PF feed roller

*1: inch specification only

3-71
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

PFMPWB PFM
ULIM_SW_1 PWB
PF lift sensor YC4-3 (500×1)
VER_SENS_1
PF feed sensor YC3-15
CAS1_QUANT2
PF paper gauge sensor 2 YC3-9
CAS1_EMPTY
PF paper sensor YC3-3
FEED_CL1
PF paper feed clutch YC9-3
VER_CL1
PF conveying clutch YC9-1
START/STOP
CLOCK YC8-3
PF paper feed motor LD YC8-4
CW/CCW YC8-5
YC8-6
COVER_OPEN EPWB
PF right cover switch YC4-7
L_MOT1_RET
L_MOT1_DR YC6-1
PF lift motor YC6-2
CAS1_QUANT1
PF paper gauge sensor 1 YC3-6
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS
PF deck detection switch YC3-11

3-72
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Inner finisher (DF-5100)

(4-1)Paper conveying section
The conveying section consists of the parts as shown below. Paper on the middle tray is transferred after adjusting the
side registration by moving the DF side registration guides in the staple and sort modes.

11 12 10 9 8 4 3 6 7 5 1 2

13 15 14

8 12 11 10 4 3 9

9 14 15 5 1 2

3-73
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 DF paper entry roller 6 DF paper stopper 11 DF exit roller

2 DF entry pulley 7 DF adjusting paddles 12 DF exit pulley
3 DF Middle roller 8 DF upper guide 13 DF Actuator (paper
4 DF Middle pulley 9 DF paper width guides press sensor)
5 DF Actuator (DF 10 DF bundle exit unit 14 DF stapler
paper entry sensor) 15 DF middle tray

3-74
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]
EJECT MOT 2B
EJECT MOT 1B YC8-1
EJECT MOT 2A YC8-2
DFEM YC8-3
EJECT MOT 1A
YC8-4
SID REG F HP SENS SIG
DFSRS1 YC19-6
PAP PRE SOL ACT
DFPPSOL PAP PRE SOL KEEP YC13-2
YC13-3
PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG
DFPPS2 YC19-18
PAP SENS SIG
DFMTS YC19-8
PAP PRE UP SENS SIG
DFPPS1 YC19-21
MTRAY FULL SENS SIG
DFTS YC19-12
SID REG R HP SENS SIG
DFSRS2 YC19-3
TRY MOT OUT1
DFTM TRY MOT OUT2 YC11-1
YC11-2
EJE RELS MOT 2B
EJE RELS MOT 1B YC8-9
EJE RELS MOT 2A YC8-10
DFERM YC8-11
EJE RELS MOT 1A
YC8-12
ADJUST HP SENS SIG
DFADS YC19-27

DFMPWB EPWB
SET SW
DFSSW YC4-2
ENTRY SENS SIG
DFPES YC17-3
STP MOV MOT 2B
STP MOV MOT 1B YC8-5
STP MOV MOT 2A YC8-6
DFSLM YC8-7
STP MOV MOT 1A
YC8-8
SIDE REG R MOT 2B
SIDE REG R MOT 1B YC9-5
SIDE REG R MOT 2A YC9-6
DFSRM2 YC9-7
SIDE REG R MOT 1A
YC9-8
SIDE REG F MOT 2B
SIDE REG F MOT 1B YC9-9
SIDE REG F MOT 2A YC9-10
DFSRM1 YC9-11
SIDE REG F MOT 1A
YC9-12

STPRPWB
DFSTP YC10
PADDLE HP SENS SIG
DFPDS YC19-15
STP MOV HP SENS SIG
DFSLS YC19-30
MIDDLE MOT 1B
MIDDLE MOT 1A YC21-1
MIDDLE MOT 2A YC21-2
DFMM YC21-3
MIDDLE MOT 2B
YC21-4
MIDDLE MOT 1B
MIDDLE MOT 1A YC21-1
MIDDLE MOT 2A YC21-2
DFPDM YC21-3
MIDDLE MOT 2B
YC21-4
BUNDLE HP SENS SIG
DFBDS YC19-24

3-75
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-2)Bundle exit operation

1st sheet

1 By rotating the DF entry roller and DF middle roller, paper is conveyed to the process section and then
conveyed to the DF main tray by the DF exit roller.
DF middle roller

DF eject roller

DF main tray

2 The DF upper guide descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF middle roller. Then, the DF exit
roller is rotated reversely and paper is sent to the DF middle tray.
DF middle roller

DF upper guide

3 Then, the DF upper guide ascends and the DF bundle exit unit ascends by the DF exit release motor drive. By
rotating the DF exit roller and DF adjusting paddles, paper is conveyed to the DF middle tray. The DF side
registration motor 1,2 drive the DF side registration guides to adjust paper.
DF bundle discharge unit

DF adjustment paddle
DF adjusutment guide

DF adjustment motor 1,2

3-76
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

2nd sheet and after

4 Paper is sent to the process section as well as the 1st sheet.

DF bundle discharge unit

DF middle roller
Second paper

First paper DF upper guide

DF adjustment motor 1,2

5 The DF upper guide descends when the paper trailing edge passes the DF middle roller. Then, by rotating the
DF adjusting paddles, paper is conveyed to the DF middle tray. Paper is adjusted as well as the 1st sheet.

DF upper guide
DF adjustment paddle

6 When completing to adjust the last sheet to bundle, the DF bundle exit unit descends and by rotating the DF
exit roller, the paper bundle is exited to the DF main tray.

DF bundle discharge unit

DF eject roller

3-77
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-5100)

The mailbox exits paper to the tray 1 to 6 designated to stack

11 10 9 8

6 7
13

12
5 2
1
4
3

10
9
10
9
10
13 9

10
9
6
10
9
4
6 3

12 1

1 MT entry guide 6 MT conveying roller 11 MT actuator (MB

2 MT Feedshift guide M 7 MT conveying pulley overflow sensor S)
3 MT exit roller M 8 MT Feedshift guide S 12 MT Main tray
4 MT exit pulley M 9 MT exit roller S 13 MT Sub tray
5 MT actuator (MT 10 MT exit pulley S
overflow sensor M)

3-78
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

[Block diagram]

LED
TEJS2 YC3-2
OFS1
TOFS1 YC2-7
OFS2
TOFS2 YC2-10
OFS3
TOFS3 YC2-13
OFS4
TOFS4 YC2-16
OFS5
TOFS5 YC3-5
OFS6
TOFS6 YC3-8

MBMPWB EPWB
MOTOR _A
MOTOR A YC4-1
MOTOR B YC4-2
MBDM YC4-3
MOTOR _B
YC4-4
LED
TEJS1 YC2-1
SHIFT HP SIG
MHPS YC3-14
COVER OPEN
MCOS YC3-17

3-79
Machine Design > Extension device construction (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-1)Exiting to the mailbox tray

If the belt support plate moving on the belt passes the feedshift nail lever, the feedshift nail is switches the conveying
path to exit to each MT exit sonsor. Also, the MT sensor detects paper jam.

Tray eject sensor

Belt

Feed shift claw

Belt support plate

Feed shift claw lever
Tray eject sensor

3-80
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance [CONFIDENTIAL]

4Maintenance
4 - 1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
• Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the power
lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly.
• When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to damage the
PWB.
• If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
• Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
• Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
• Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
• If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.

Note
The operation panel might display the screen for a moment when the power cord is connected.

(2) Storage and handling of the drum

• Note the following when handling and storing the drum.
• When detaching the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
• Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of 85% RH or
less. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in the place where the
temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the tolerable range.
• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
• Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
• Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
• If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

(3) Storage of the toner container

• Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
• Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.

4-1
Maintenance > Precautions for the maintenance [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Screening of the toner container

Look at the screening film on the brand protection seal affixed to the toner container through the windows of the
validation viewer.
Look at the screening film through two windows to check the genuineness.

A black-colored band when seen through the the anti-counterfeit film portion left side window (mark ).
A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the anti-counterfeit film portion right side window (mark ).

When seen as the above, it is genuine. Otherwise (e.g. both seen in gold), it is a counterfeit.

See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)

Validation viewer Validation viewer

Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal

A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window

The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.

Three cut parts at the red circle section

4-2
Maintenance > Maintenance parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 2 Maintenance parts
(1) Maintenance kits
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No.
MK-5315A MK-5315A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702SZ8NL0
MK-5317A MK-5317A/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702SZ7US0
(200,000 images) ROLLER RETARD ASSY *1
(*1: 300,000 images) DRUM K UNIT
DLP K UNIT
FUSER ASSY
MIDDLE TRANSFER UNIT
2ND TRANS ASSY SP
HOLDER PICK UP ASSY SP *1

MK-5195B MK-5195B/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702R40UN0

(200,000 images) DRUM CMY UNIT
DLP M UNIT
DLP C UNIT
DLP Y UNIT

(2) Maintenance kit for the document processor

30 ppm model standard DP
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No.
MK-3140 MK-3140/MAINTENANCE KIT 1702P60UN0
(200,000 Sheets)
SEPARATION PAD PAD SEPARATION
PAPER FEED PULLEY PULLEY PAPER FEED ASSY
Pickup roller PULLEY PICKUP ASSY

4-3
Maintenance > Maintenance parts [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Section Mode No. Maintenance item MK-5***A MK-5***B
Replacing
settings
U119 Drum unit initial settings
○ ○
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts
○ ○
U469 Color registration adjustment
○ ×
U127 Clearing the transfer count
○ ×
U167 Clearing the fuser count
○ ×
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counts
○ ×
Image
adjustment
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)
○ ○
U469 Color registration adjustment (Auto)
○ ○
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib)
○*1 ○*1
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
○ ○
Maintenance U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counts
○ ○
*1
: at the time of drum replacement only

(4) Maintenance parts list

Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No.
Regist cleaner PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP 302R49412_

Paper feed roller PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP 302R49421_

Pickup roller PARTS HOLDER PICK UP ASSY SP 302R49417_

Retard roller PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP 302SZ9407_

registration roller PARTS ROLLER REGIST SP 302SZ9409_

MP paper feed roller PARTS ROLLER MPF ASSY SP 302MV9402_

MP separation pad PARTS HOLDER SEPARATION SP 302R49418_

Contact glass PARTS ISU TOP SP 302R69401_

Slit glass PARTS ISU TOP SP 302R69401_

4-4
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after about 200,000 images. (Pickup roller, Paper feed roller and Retard
roller are replaced at times 300,000 images.)
The message [Replace MK.] appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following procedures.

(1) Cassette paper feed section

(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup roller and paper feed roller

1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the main unit (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.

2 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the main unit (b).

4-5
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the spring (b) from the primary paper feed unit (a).

b
c

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

4 Tilt up the pickup holder (b) on the primary paper feed unit (a) and remove it from the
bushing (c).

e
b

4-6
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
When attaching the primary paper feed unit (a), insert the protrusion (b) into the main unit side guide (c).

c b
a

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller

1 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).

2 Remove the spring (b).

4-7
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

3 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a) again.

4 Remove the retard holder fulcrum (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b) and remove the
retard holder (d).

5 Attach the new retard holder.

6 Attach the new pickup holder.

7 Reattach the parts in the original position.

e c

c b
b
d

Important
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

4-8
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner

1 Open the front cover (a).

2 Hold A and B, and remove the waste toner box (a).

4-9
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the screw (a)(M3x12).

4 Slide the regist cleaner (b) in the direction of the arrow and release the lock.

5 Pinch the regist cleaner (b) and pull it out.

6 Check the sponge of the regist cleaner (b) and clean or replace it.

7 Reattach the parts in the original position.

b
2

1 a

4-10
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) MP tray paper feed section

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed roller

1 Open the right cover (a).

2 Pinch the holder (b) and remove the MP feed roller (c) in the direction of the arrow.

4-11
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the MP separation pad

1 Remove the MP separation pad (a) in the direction of the arrow.

2 Attach the new MP separation pad.

3 Attach the new MP paper feed roller.

4 Reattach the parts in the original position.

Important
When replacing the new MP separation pad or MP paper feed roller, be careful not to touch the roller surface or
the pad surface.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the MP paper feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

4-12
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Transfer section

(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit

1 Open the right cover (a).

2 Hold the handle (a) and pull out the primary transfer unit (c) in the direction of the arrow.

3 Check the primary transfer unit (c) and clean or replace it.

4 Reattach the parts in the original position.

a b

Important
When pulling out the primary transfer unit, hold the center of it on the way to avoid hitting it to the right cover
(a).

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.

1 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (maintenance mode U127): Clear

2 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

3 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

4 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-13
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller unit

1 Open the right cover (a).

2 Release the front lever hook(c) of the secondary transfer unit(b) toward you with a flat-
blade screwdriver(d) and release the front lock(e) by pressing it with a flat-blade
screwdriver(d).

3 Likewise, release the rear lever hook(f) and rear lock(g) with a flat-blade screwdriver(d).

4 Pull out the secondary transfer unit(b) in the direction of the arrow while rotating it
toward you.

5 Check the secondary transfer unit (b) and clean or replace it.

6 Reattach the parts in the original position.

d
e
c

d
d
g
f

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the secondary transfer unit.

1 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (maintenance mode U127): Clear

2 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

3 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

4 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-14
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Drum section

(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit

1 Open the front cover (a).

2 Hold A and B, and remove the waste toner box (a).

4-15
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four drum units (b) (Y,C,M,K).

4 Attach the new drum units.

5 Reattach the parts in the original position.

b
b
b b

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the drum unit.

1 Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear

2 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

3 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

4 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-16
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Note the following procedure when installing the drum unit.

1 When installing the drum unit, make sure to press the pressing part (a).

2 After inserting the drum unit, push the lock shaft (a) until it clicks.
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (a) when inserting the drum unit. Otherwise, it causes the drum damage.

4-17
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit

1 Open the front cover (a).

2 Detach the waste toner box.

3 Detach the drum unit (a).

4 Turn over the drum unit (a).

5 Push the lock lever (b).

6 Pull up the main charge roller unit (c) while pressing it and remove it from the drum unit
in the direction of the arrow.

7 Check the main charge roller unit (c) and clean or replace it.

8 Reattach the parts in the original position.

4-18
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
When dettaching the main charge roller unit (a), remove it while pulling the gear (c) toward the center with a flat
head screwdriver (b) or the like.

4-19
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Note the following procedure when installing the charge roller unit.

1 When attaching the main charge roller unit (a), align the insert guide (b) to the guide rib
(c).

2 Insert the protrusion (d) into the positioning (e) and press down A portion to check it
clicks to lock.

3 Check that the spring B (f) is inserted into the spring C (g).

f
g

A c

e
d

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the main charge roller.

1 Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear

2 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

3 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

4 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-20
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Developer section

(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit

1 Open the front cover (a).

2 Hold A and B, and remove the waste toner box (a).

4-21
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (b) (Y,C,M,K).

4 Attach the new developer units.

5 Reattach the parts in the original position.

b
b b
b

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the developer unit.

1 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

2 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

3 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-22
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Note the following procedure when installing the developer unit.

1 When installing the developer unit, securely insert it by pressing the front side pressing
part (a).

2 After inserting the developer unit, securely push the lock shaft (a).
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (a) when inserting the developer unit. Otherwise, it causes the drum
damage.

4-23
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Unpacking the maintenance kit

1 Push up the lock lever (a) and remove four developer units (c) from the unit protective
cover (b).

2 Peal off two tapes (d) and pull out the protective sheet (e) straight from the developer
unit (c).

3 Remove the toner supply cover (f) in the direction of the arrow.
Take care not to touch the lower blade, sleeve roller, etc. of the developer unit during the work.

a
b

e
f

4-24
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) Fuser section

(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit

1 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the fuser wire cover (b).

3 Disconnect two connectors (c) of the fuser unit.

4-25
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the fuser unit (b).

5 Attach the new fuser unit.

6 Reattach the parts in the original position.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the fuser unit.

1 Checking/clearing the fuser counts (maintenance mode U167): Clear

2 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (Full)

3 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto

4 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410): Normal Mode

4-26
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) Document processor

(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller

1 Open the DP top cover (b) of the document processor (a).

b
a

2 Push the lock lever (a) toward the machine rear side.

3 Release the hook (b).

4 Rotate the lock lever (a) to the release position (c).

5 Shift the machine front side of the DP paper feed roller shaft (d) toward the machine left
side to remove it from the holding part (e).

6 Then, lift the shaft and pull the DP paper feed roller unit (f) out toward the machine front
side.
c

b 2

e
a 1
2
4
1
3

b
f
d

4-27
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pad

1 Push both hooks (b) inward and remove the DP separation pad assembly (a).

2 Attach the new DP separation pad assembly.

3 Reattach the parts in the original position.

Check if the pressure spring (c) is securely in the protrusion (d) when reattaching it.

4 Attach the new DP paper feed roller unit.

5 Reattach the parts in the original position.

a
b

4-28
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120)
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller

1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.

2 Press the lock lever (a) and pull out the primary feed unit (c) from the paper feeder (b).

4-29
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the spring (b) from the primary paper feed unit (a).

b
c

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

4 Tilt up the pickup holder (b) on the primary paper feed unit (a) and remove it from the
bushing (c).
d

e
b

4-30
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
When attaching the primary paper feed unit (a), insert the protrusion (b) into the main unit side guide (c).

c b
a

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller

1 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).

2 Remove the spring (b).

4-31
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

3 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a) again.

4 Remove the retard holder fulcrum (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b) and remove the
retard holder (d).

5 Attach the new retard holder.

6 Attach the new pickup holder.

7 Reattach the parts in the original position.

e c

c b
b
d

Important
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

4-32
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130)

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller

1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and pull it out on an angle.

2 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of
the arrow.

3 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the upper stage of
the paper feeder (b).

4 Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the primary paper feed unit (c) from the lower stage of
the paper feeder (b).

4-33
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove the spring (b) from the primary paper feed unit (a).

b
c

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

6 Tilt up the pickup holder (b) on the primary paper feed unit (a) and remove it from the
bushing (c).

e
b

4-34
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
When attaching the primary paper feed unit (a), insert the protrusion (b) into the main unit side guide (c).

c b
a

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller

1 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).

2 Remove the spring (b).

4-35
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

3 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a) again.

4 Remove the retard holder fulcrum (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b) and remove the
retard holder (d).

5 Attach the new retard holder.

6 Attach the new pickup holder.

7 Reattach the parts in the original position.

e c

c b
b
d

Important
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

4-36
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140)

(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller

1 Pull out the paper deck (a) from the paper feeder (b).

2 Press the lock lever (a) and pull out the primary feed unit (c) from the paper feeder (b).

4-37
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the spring (b) from the primary paper feed unit (a).

b
c

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

4 Tilt up the pickup holder (b) on the primary paper feed unit (a) and remove it from the
bushing (c).

e
b

4-38
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
When attaching the primary paper feed unit (a), insert the protrusion (b) into the main unit side guide (c).

c b
a

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard roller

1 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a).

2 Remove the spring (b).

4-39
Maintenance > Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Check if the pressure spring (b) is securely in the protrusion (c) when reattaching it.

3 Turn over the primary paper feed unit (a) again.

4 Remove the retard holder fulcrum (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b) and remove the
retard holder (d).

5 Attach the new retard holder.

6 Attach the new pickup holder.

7 Reattach the parts in the original position.

e c

c b
b
d

Important
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

Execute maintenance mode

Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.
• Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

4-40
Maintenance > Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit

Execute the following procedures after replacing the above maintenance kit.

MK-5315A MK-5317A MK-5195B

Start Start

U930 Clear the main charger roller counts U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

U127 Clearing the transfer count U464 ID correction setting

U167 Clearing the fuser count U469 Color registration adjustment

U464 ID correction setting

U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

U469 Color registration adjustment

U251 Checking/clearing the
maintenance counter

U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

U251 Checking/clearing
the maintenance counter

Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the maintenance kit.
Executable with the preset in the U952 maintenance mode workflow. (See page 6-212)

Maintenance kits Maintenance item

MK-5315A U930/ U127/ U167/ U464/ U469/ U410/ U251
MK-5317A

MK-5195B U930/ U464/ U469/ U410/ U251

MK-3140/5200 -

4-41
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 6 Disassembly and Reassembly

(1) Outer covers
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover

1 Open the front cover (a).

2 Hold A and B, and remove the waste toner box (a).

4-42
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (c) and remove the strap (e) in the
direction of the arrow.

4 Push down the stopper (b) of the front cover (a).

5 Slide the front cover in the direction of the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) from the
fulcrum shaft (c).

4-43
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the rear left cover, rear right cover, rear lower cover, right top cover
and right rear cover

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4-44
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

5 Remove the rear lower cover (f) while removing the hook (c) in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

6 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).

4-45
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

8 Slide the right upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

9 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear right cover (b).

4-46
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the ISU rear cover

1 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

2 Detach the ISU rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.

a
b

(1-4)Detaching and reattaching the left cover

1 Remove six screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Release three hooks (c) and remove the left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.

a
a

a a
a

4-47
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the right cover assembly

1 Open the manual feed table (a).

2 Remove two stop rings (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b).

c c

b b

3 Remove two straps (a) in the direction of the arrow.

4-48
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Open the right cover (a).

5 Rotate the wire cover (b).

6 Release the wire (c) from the hook (d) and disconnect the connector (a).

e d
b

7 Close the conveying unit (a).

4-49
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Tilt up the right cover shaft (a).

9 Slide the right cover shaft (a) in the direction of the arrow.

10 Open the conveying unit (a).

4-50
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Twist two straps (a) and detach them.

a a

12 Slide the rear side fulcrum (a) and pull out the shaft of the front side fulcrum (b).
13 Tilt up the right cover assembly (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.

4-51
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Pull out the right cover shaft (a).

15 Remove the stop ring (b) and pull out the fulcrum pin (c).
16 Detach the conveying unit in the direction of the arrow.
d

b
a

4-52
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Optical section

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU

1 Open the manual feed table (a).

2 Remove two stop rings (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b).

c c

b b

3 Remove two straps (a) in the direction of the arrow.

4-53
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Open the right cover (a).

5 Rotate the wire cover (b).

6 Disconnect the connector (c).

e d
b

7 Close the conveying unit (a).

4-54
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Tilt up the right cover shaft (a).

9 Slide the right cover shaft (a) in the direction of the arrow.

10 Open the conveying unit (a).

4-55
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Twist two straps (a) and detach them.

a a

12 Slide the rear side fulcrum (a) and pull out the shaft of the front side fulcrum (b).
13 Tilt up the right cover assembly (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.

4-56
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Open the front cover (a).

15 Hold A and B, and remove the waste toner box (a).

4-57
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

16 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

17 Slide the regist cleaner (b) in the direction of the arrow and release the lock.
18 Pinch the regist cleaner (b) and pull it out.

b
2

1 a

19 Remove six screws (a)(M3x8).

20 Release three hooks (c) and remove the left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.

a
a

a a
a

4-58
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

21 Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the LSU left stay (b).

a
a

22 Hold the handle (a) and pull out the primary transfer unit (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b

4-59
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

23 Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).

24 Release the hook (c) with the flat-blade screwdriver (b) and remove the regist guide
assembly (d) in the direction of the arrow.

a
e
a

c
b

Important
Securely hang the hook (e) when attaching the regist guide assembly (d). Otherwise, it causes paper jams.

25 Loosen the fixing screws (c) with a screwdriver (b) through the aperture (a) and remove
the LSU (d).
The fixing screws (c) are not removed.

c c

4-60
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

26 Pull out the laser scanner unit (a) half way.

27 Detach the FFC cover (b).
b

28 Detach the FFC connector (a) and the FFC connector with a lock (b).
29 Pull out the laser scanner unit (c).
30 Check the laser scanner unit (c) and clean or replace it.
31 Reattach the parts in the original position.
a

Notes when replacing the laser scanner unit

Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.

4-61
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Angle

1 Input "469" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Manual].

3 Select [Print].

4 Press the [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.

5 Execute the following adjustment if the gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale position is 2 scales or more for
each color.

MH - 1 MH - 2 MH - 3 MH - 4 MH - 5 MH - 1 MH - 2 MH - 3 MH - 4 MH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GECA 1 3 5 7 9 I GEC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GECA 1 3 5 7 9 I GECA 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 HF DB 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

CH - 1 CH - 2 CH - 3 CH - 4 CH - 5 CH - 1 CH - 2 CH - 3 CH - 4 CH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

YH - 1 YH - 2 YH - 3 YH - 4 YH - 5 YH - 1 YH - 2 YH - 3 YH - 4 YH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

MV - 5 MV - 5
I H I H
I H I H
G F G G F G
E E F E E F
C D C D C D C D
A B A B

MV-1 MV-5 MV-1 MV-5

B B
1 0 A 1 0 A
1 0 1 0
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
5 4 5
4 5 4 5
4
6
7 8 6 6
7 8 6
7 8 7 8
9 9 9 9

CV - 3 YV - CV - 5 CV - 3 YV - CV - 5
CV - 1 CV - 1
I I I I I I
I H H H I I H H H I
H G G G H G G G
F F F H F F F H
G E E E G G E E E G
F D C D D E F F D C D D E F
E D C C E D C C
C B B B C D C B B B C D
A A A A A A

CV-1 CV-5 CV-1 CV-5

B 0 B B 0 B
A 1 0 0 1 A A 1 0 0 1 A
1 0 1 2 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 0
3 2 2 3 3 2 2 3
2 4 3 4 2 2 4 3 4 2
3 5 4 5 3 3 5 4 5 3
4 5 4 4 5 4
5 6 6 5 5 6 6 5
7
6 7 6
8 7
8
7
8 7
6
7
6 7 6
8 7
8
7
8 7
6
8 9 9 9 8 8 9 9 9 8
9 9 9 9

YV - 1 YV - 5 YV - 1 YV - 5
I I I I
H H
G G H G G H
E F E F E F E F

YV-1 C
A
1
D
B
0
3 2
C D
A B
1
0
3 2
YV-5 YV-1 C
A
1
D
B
0
3 2
C D
A B
1
0
3 2
YV-5
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9

Sample 1 Sample 2

4-62
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Open the front cover and pull out the waste toner box.

7 Rotate the hex hole (a) by using a hex wrench (5mm).

• Direction of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is 2 scales or more (sample 1): counter-clockwise
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is -2 scales or more (sample 2): clockwise
• Number of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale multiplied by 4 clicks.

8 Reattach the waste toner box in the original position and close the front cover.

9 Output the adjustment chart to check it is within the range.

10Press the [Stop] key.

a
b

a a a

4-63
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Regist

1 Input "469" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Auto].
Output the automatic adjustment chart.

3 Select [Execute].

4 Set the chart on the table and press the [Start] key.
Execute the automatic adjustment. When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

5 Press the [Stop] key.

3 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib

1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Calib].

3 Select [Full] and press the [Start] key.

Calibration starts.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

4 Checking LSU cleaning operation (maintenance mode U474): Execute

1 Input "474" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Cleaning of the LSU slit glass is executed.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

5 Exiting from the maintenance mode

1 Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
The maintenance mode is exited.

4-64
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU)

1 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear right cover (b).

2 Release the DP interface wire (c) from the wire saddle(e) and remove it from the two
connectors (d).

c
d e

a
b

3 Open the document processor (a).

4 Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c)
from the main unit (b).

b
c

4-65
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

6 Slide the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

7 Disconnect the FFC (d) from the main PWB connector (c).

a
a

8 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

9 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

10 Disconnect the connector (d) from the engine PWB connector (c).
c
c
f
d
d

g
e

a
b

4-66
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Open the right cover.

12 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
13 Slide the right upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

14 Pull up the operation unit (a).

15 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).
16 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
a

c
b

4-67
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the upper exit cover (b).

18 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

19 Release
(c).
the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and remove the left controller cover

4-68
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

20 Remove four pins (a) from the ISU.

21 Remove four screws (b)(M3X8) of the unit fixing plate.
22 Detach the ISU (c) in the direction of the arrow.
23 Check the ISU (c) and clean or replace it.
24 Reattach the parts in the original position.

b
b
c

a
a

a a

4-69
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU) upper assembly

1 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear right cover (b).

2 Release the DP interface wire (c) from the wire saddle(e) and remove it from the two
connectors (d).
The number of connectors depends on the document processor to install.

c
e
d

a
b

3 Open the document processor (a).

4 Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove two hinge
(c) from the main unit (b).

b
c

4-70
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) from the ISU upper assembly (b).
a

b a

6 Push the ISU bottom frame (a) to release the hook (b) and then detach the ISU upper
assembly (c).
b

d
c

Important
Lift up the ISU upper assembly (c) from the rear side (d) so that the glass does not peel.

4-71
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage assembly

1 Detach the document processor.

2 Detach the ISU upper assembly.

3 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

4 Slide the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

5 Disconnect the FFC (d) from the main PWB connector (c).

a
a

4-72
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Peel off the sheet (a).

7 Peel off the FFC (b).

8 Shift the ISU shaft (a).

9 Remove the stop ring (b) and shim (c).
10 Remove the drive belt (e) from the two pulleys (d).
e b

a d

4-73
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Remove the ferrite cores from the two holders (e) and remove the FFC (f).
12 Remove the scanner carriage (a) and ISU shaft (b) from the ISU lower assembly (c).
13 Pull out the ISU shaft (b) from the scanner carriage assembly (a).
a
b

d
f

14 Remove the drive belt (b) from the belt holder (a).
15 Check the scanner carriage (c) and clean or replace it.
16 Reattach the parts in the original position.
a c

4-74
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

Notes when attaching

When attaching the scanner carriage, attach FFC in the following procedures.
• During the work, take care not to touch the CCD PWB or to give a shock.
• Take care not to touch the grease applyed on the scanner carriage rail or to adhere dust and foreign objects.

1 Pass FFC (c) through two hooks (e) on the bottom of the scanner carriage (a) and insert
it into the ferrite core (f).
Pass FFC so that the marking (d) is on the surface.

2 Connect FFC (c) to the connector (b) of the CCD PWB.

b e

f
c

4-75
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Affix three double-adhesive tapes (b) within the three marking positions (a) on the base.

4 Peel off the back sheet of the double-adhesive tape, and affix FFC (c) so that it aligns
with the marking.

5 Fold FFC (c) in right angle aligning with the marking (d) on FFC surface at the end
position of the marking.

6 Insert FFC (c) into the ferrite core (e) and connect to the main PWB.

7 Peel off the back sheet of three double-adhesive tapes (g) of the FFC protective sheet.

8 Insert the FFC protection sheet (f) into the ferrite core (e), and then affix it on the base
so that the end line of it align with the two projection step (h).

9 Insert the ISU shaft into the scanner carriage, and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

a b a

b b
a

e d

e
f g

h h g

4-76
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) PWBs

Caution

Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures. Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.

(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-77
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).

5 Remove eight screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).

6 Check or replace the engine PWB (b), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

a YC25
YC24 YC20
YC19
YC7

a YC30
YC10

a YC13

a A15

YC12 YC32

YC35
a YC14
YC3

AC17
YC4

a YC15
YC18

YC6
YC34
YC29
YC21

a b YC16

YC23 YC22
YC8 YC5
YC31

4-78
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

Notes when replacing the engine PWB

Important
When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old board and
install it in the new board.

YS1
b

Execute the following setting after replacing the engine PWB.

1 Machine No. (maintenance mode U004)

If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs.

1 Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

2 Firmware update (See page 5-1)

Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.

3 Adjusting the scanner automatically (maintenance mode U411)

Adjusting the table scanning automatically

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.

2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [Target].

4 Press [Left/Right] cursor key or [#], [*] key and select [Auto].

5 Press the [Up/Down] cursor key and select [Table(ChartA)].

6 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.

7 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

4-79
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

DP 1st side scanning auto adjustment

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-up on the DP.

Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.

80
65
2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [DP FU(ChartB)].

4 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

5 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

If there is a problem with the 2nd side timing after adjusting the scanner, execute [DP FD(ChartB)].
Also, if there is a problem with the DP 1st side color, execute [DP FU(ChartA)].

4 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib

1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Calib].

3 Select [Full] and press the [Start] key.

Calibration starts.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

5 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)

1 Input "410" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [Start] key.

Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.

3 Set the output Test Pattern 1 as the original.

Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

4 Press the [Start] key.

The 1st auto adjustment is executed.

5 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

6 Press the [Start] key.

The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.

7 [Finish] appears after normal completion.

8 Press the [Stop] key.

4-80
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and remove the left controller cover (c)
in the direction of the arrow.

4-81
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove the wire (a) from the hook (b).

5 Remove two screws (c)(M3x8).

6 Remove the fan connector (d) and remove the controller fan assembly (e).

c d

4-82
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Disconnect all the connectors from the main PWB (a).

8 Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the main PWB (a).

9 Check the main PWB (a) and clean or replace it if necessary.

Replace the optional memory from the old PWB to the new one, if installed.

10 Reattach the parts in the original position.

a YC2014
YC2001
YC2011
YC6003
YC2002
YC2007
YC6004
YC2004
YC2003

YC2009

b
b YC2008

YC19

b
YC6001 YC2000

YC2005
YC6002 YC2006
YC5
YC2016

b
b

Notes when replacing the main PWB

• There is no EEPROM in the main PWB for 30 ppm model.
• When replacing the main PWB, in order to maintain the user information, insert a USB memory and execute U917 to
export data. (See page 6-207)
• Since the MAC address changes, check the network settings.
Example: If the printer name is registered with the IP address, reset the IP address.

Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.

4-83
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Machine No. (maintenance mode U004)

If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs.

1 Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

2 Firmware update (See page 5-1)

Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.

3 Insert the USB memory and execute U917 to import data.

4 ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib

1 Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Calib].

3 Select [Full] and press the [Start] key.

Calibration starts.

4 Press the [Stop] key.

5 Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)

1 Input "410" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Displays the execution information screen.
Test patterns 1 and 2 are output on the A4 paper.

2 Set the output Test Pattern 1 as the original.

Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

3 Press the [Start] key.

The 1st auto adjustment is executed.

4 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

5 Press the [Start] key.

The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.

6 [Finish] appears after normal completion.

6 Reactivating the license

Reactivate the license when equipping the license of the optional product.
• Card Authentication Kit (B)
When using the SSFC card, execute maintenance mode U222 and set [SSFC].
(See page 6-96)
• UG-33 (ThinPrint)
• Data Security Kit (E)
Re-entering 4-digit encryption codes entered at setup is necessary.

7 Resetting the initial settings

Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting (e.g. the local FAX information) from the System Menu or
Command Center.

4-84
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 Resetting the maintenance mode

Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary.
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main unit No. Maintenance mode relating to
the main unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset U603 User data 1

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counts U604 User data 2

U253 Switching the double/single counts U610 System 1

U260 Feed/eject counter switch U611 System 2

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication U612 System 3

U402 Adjusting the printing margins U625 Communication settings

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the U695 FAX function customization
contact glass

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the

document processor

U425 Set Target

9 Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-85
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear lower cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

4-86
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

6 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

7 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

8 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

4-87
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

10 Release two board supports (e).
11 Release two hooks (c).
12 Rotate the high voltage PWB (a) making the three hooks (d) into a fulcrum and detach it.
13 Check or replace the high voltage PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

c
b
e

b
b a

4-88
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-4)Detaching and reattaching the power source PWB

Caution

Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures. Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-89
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear lower cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

4-90
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

6 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

7 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

8 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

4-91
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

10 Release two board supports (e).
11 Release two hooks (c).
12 Rotate the high voltage PWB (a) making the three hooks (d) into a fulcrum and detach it.

c
b
e

b
b a

13 Release the wire (e) from the hook (a) and five wire saddles B (d).

b
c

4-92
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Disconnect three connectors (a).

15 Remove the wire (b) from the two hooks (c).
16 Remove three screws (d)(M3x8) and remove the heater PWB holder plate (e).

e
d
a
b

a
d
c
d

17 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

18 Remove the PF drawer holder (c) by sliding it to the front and removing it from the
lancing (b).

Important
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).

4-93
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

19 Disconnect all the connectors from the power source PWB (a).
20 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
21 Release the board support (c) and remove the power source PWB (a).
22 Check or replace the power source PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

YC102
YC101

c
YC105

CN4
a

(3-5)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB

1 Pull up the operation unit (a).

2 Remove the screw (b) (M3x8).

3 Remove the operation lid (c) from the operation unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.

c
b

4-94
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the upper exit cover (b).

5 Disconnect the connector (b) from the operation unit (a).

4-95
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Release two locks of wire saddles(a).

7 Disconnect three connectors(b).

8 Remove the screw (c)(M3x8) and remove the ground terminal (d).

a
b

d c

9 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) from the right hinge (a).

10 Remove the operation unit (c) from the left hinge (d) in the direction of the arrow.
c

b
a

4-96
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).

12 Remove the operation rear cover (c) from the operation cover (b).
a

a
a
a

c
b

13 Disconnect all FFCs and the connectors from the operation PWB (c).
14 Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and ground wire (d).
15 Remove the operation PWB (c) from the operation cover (b).
a
YC18 YC2
a YC21
YC9

c
a d
YC7
YC8
a
YC17 YC8

4-97
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

Notes when detaching

In the case of the FFC connector with a lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the FFC (b).

b b

4-98
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Drive section

Caution

Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures. Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.

(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-99
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

5 Release three hooks (c) of the rear lower cover (b) and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

4-100
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

7 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

8 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

9 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

4-101
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

11 Release two board supports (e).
12 Release two hooks (c).
13 Detach the high voltage PWB (a) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making
three hooks (d) as fulcrum.

c
b
e

b
b a

14 Release the wire (e) from the hook (a) and five wire saddles B (d).

b
c

4-102
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

15 Remove three screws (a)(M3x8).

16 Release the hook (b) and remove the transfer high voltage assembly (c).

a
c

Important
When attaching the transfer high voltage assembly (a), check the hook (b) clicks.

4-103
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Disconnect three connectors (a).

18 Remove the wire (b) from the two hooks (c).
19 Remove three screws (d)(M3x8) and remove the heater PWB holder plate (e).

e
d
a
b

a
d
c
d

20 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

21 Remove the PF drawer holder (c) by sliding it to the front and removing it from the
lancing (b).

Important
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).

4-104
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

22 Disconnect all the connectors from the power source PWB (a).
23 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
24 Release the board support (c) and remove the power source PWB (a).

YC102
YC101

c
YC105

CN4
a

25 Remove the wire (a) from the three wire saddles (b).

4-105
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

26 Remove the wire (b) from the hook (a).

27 Remove ten screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the high voltage PWB holder (d) in the
direction of the arrow.

e
f
b

d
c
c
c
c
c
c c
cc
c

Important
When reattaching the high voltage PWB holder (d), check the spring terminal (e) is in the catch (f) of the holder.

28 Disconnect the fan connector (a).

29 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
30 Slide the hook (c) in the direction of the arrow and remove the clutch fan assembly (d).
c
a

4-106
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

31 Remove the wire (a) from the wire saddle (c) and ten hooks (b) of the wire holder.
c

b
b
b

b
b
b
b

32 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).

33 Detach the high voltage PWB holder plate (a).

4-107
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

34 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).

35 Release the hook (b) and remove the inlet assembly (c).

b
c
a

a
a

36 Disconnect two connectors (a).

37 Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the drive unit (c).
38 Check the feed drive unit (c) and clean or replace it.
39 Reattach the parts in the original position.
a

b b

b c

4-108
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

Important
Check if the MP cam (c) is put on the shaded part (b) when attaching the feed drive unit (a).

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-109
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

5 Release three hooks (c) of the rear lower cover (b) and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

4-110
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

7 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

8 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

9 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

4-111
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

11 Release two board supports (e).
12 Release two hooks (c).
13 Rotate the high voltage PWB (a) making the three hooks (d) into a fulcrum and detach it.

c
b
e

b
b a

14 Release the wire (e) from the hook (a) and five wire saddles B (d).

b
c

4-112
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

15 Remove three screws (a)(M3x8).

16 Release the hook (b) and remove the transfer high voltage assembly (c).

a
c

Important

When attaching the transfer high voltage assembly (a), check the hook (b) clicks.

4-113
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Disconnect three connectors (a).

18 Remove the wire (b) from the two hooks (c).
19 Remove three screws (d)(M3x8) and remove the heater PWB holder plate (e).

e
d
a
b

a
d
c
d

20 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

21 Remove the PF drawer holder (c) by sliding it to the front and removing it from the
lancing (b).

Important

When attaching the PF drawer holder (c), make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).

4-114
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

22 Disconnect all the connectors from the power source PWB (a).
23 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
24 Release the board support (c) and remove the power source PWB (a).
25
YC102
YC101

c
YC105

CN4
a

26 Remove the wire (a) from the three wire saddles (b).

4-115
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

27 Remove the wire (b) from the hook (a).

28 Remove ten screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the high voltage PWB holder (d) in the
direction of the arrow.

e
f
b

d
c
c
c
c
c
c c
cc
c

Important
When reattaching the high voltage PWB holder (d), check the spring terminal (e) is in the catch (f) of the holder.

29 Disconnect the fan connector (a).

30 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
31 Slide the hook (c) in the direction of the arrow and remove the clutch fan assembly (d).
c
a

4-116
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

32 Remove the wire (a) from the three wire saddles (b).
33 Disconnect three connectors (d) of the motor (c).

a
c
c
c

b
d

34 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).

35 Remove eight screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).

a YC25
YC24 YC20
YC19
YC7

a YC30
YC10

a YC13

a A15

YC12 YC32

YC35
a YC14
YC3

AC17
YC4

a YC15
YC18

YC6
YC34
YC29
YC21

a b YC16

YC23 YC22
YC8 YC5
YC31

4-117
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

36 Remove the wire (b) from the wire saddle (a).

37 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).

38 Release two hooks (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (c) and remove the engine PWB
mounting plate (d) in the direction of the arrow.

d
a a

d
a

4-118
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

39 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the main drive unit (b).
40 Check the main drive unit (b) and clean or replace it.
41 Reattach the parts in the original position.

a
a

a
b

(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the transfer motor

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

4-119
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

5 Release three hooks (c) of the rear lower cover (b) and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

4-120
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

7 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

8 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

9 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

4-121
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

11 Release two board supports (e).
12 Release two hooks (c).
13 Rotate the high voltage PWB (a) making the three hooks (d) into a fulcrum and detach it.

c
b
e

b
b a

14 Disconnect the fan connector (a).

15 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
16 Slide the hook (c) in the direction of the arrow and remove the clutch fan assembly (d).
c
a

4-122
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

17 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).

18 Remove eight screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).

a YC25
YC24 YC20
YC19
YC7

a YC30
YC10

a YC13

a A15

YC12 YC32

YC35
a YC14
YC3

AC17
YC4

a YC15
YC18

YC6
YC34
YC29
YC21

a b YC16

YC23 YC22
YC8 YC5
YC31

19 Remove the wire (b) from the wire saddle (a).

4-123
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

20 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).

21 Release two hooks (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (c) and remove the engine PWB
mounting plate (d) in the direction of the arrow.

d
a a

d
a

22 Disconnect the connector (a).

23 Remove
arrow.
two screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the transfer motor (c) in the direction of the

24 Check the transfer motor (c) and clean or replace it.

25 Reattach the parts in the original position.

Important

Apply grease as below to the drive gears when replacing them.

EM-50LP(7BG010006H)

4-124
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear left cover (b) by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.

b
a
a

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

3 Detach the rear right cover (b) while rotating it in the direction of the arrow making two
hooks (c) as a fulcrum.

4-125
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

5 Release three hooks (c) of the rear lower cover (b) and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.

b
c

6 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear middle stay (b).

4-126
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Release the wire (c) from the wire saddle (b) and disconnect the connector (a).

8 Remove two screws (d)(M3x8).

9 Remove the high voltage wire guide (e) in the direction of the arrow to release the
protrusion (f) and hook (g).

c b a

f
g

10 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).

11 Release two board supports (e).
12 Release two hooks (c).
13 Rotate the high voltage PWB (a) making the three hooks (d) into a fulcrum and detach it.

c
b
e

b
b a

4-127
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

14 Disconnect the fan connector (a).

15 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
16 Slide the hook (c) in the direction of the arrow and remove the clutch fan assembly (d).
c
a

17 Disconnect all the connectors from the engine PWB (b).

18 Remove eight screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the engine PWB (b).

a YC25
YC24 YC20
YC19
YC7

a YC30
YC10

a YC13

a A15

YC12 YC32

YC35
a YC14
YC3

AC17
YC4

a YC15
YC18

YC6
YC34
YC29
YC21

a b YC16

YC23 YC22
YC8 YC5
YC31

4-128
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

19 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

20 Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and remove the left controller cover (c)
in the direction of the arrow.

21 Remove the wire (a) from the hook (b).

22 Remove two screws (c)(M3x8).
23 Remove the fan connector (d) and remove the controller fan assembly (e).

c d

4-129
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

24 Disconnect all the connectors from the main PWB (a).

25 Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the main PWB (a).

a YC2014
YC2001
YC2011
YC6003
YC2002
YC2007
YC6004
YC2004
YC2003

YC2009

b
b YC2008

YC19

b
YC6001 YC2000

YC2005
YC6002 YC2006
YC5
YC2016

b
b

26 Remove the wire (b) from the wire saddle (a).

4-130
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

27 Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).

28 Release two hooks (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (c) and remove the engine PWB
mounting plate (d) in the direction of the arrow.

d
a a

d
a

29 Remove the holder (a) and remove FFC (b).

30 Remove four screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the main PWB holder plate (d).

b
a

d
c
c

4-131
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

31 Remove the wire (a) from the three wire saddles (b).
32 Remove five screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the controller frame (d).

c
c
c

b
d

33 Remove the wire (b) from the wire saddle (a).

34 Disconnect four connectors (c).
35 Remove four screws (d)(M3x8) and remove the toner supply drive unit (e).
36 Check the toner supply drive unit (e) and clean or replace it.
37 Reattach the parts in the original position.
a

c
b
c

d
d
d

4-132
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Document processor

(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor

1 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the rear right cover (b).

2 Release the DP interface wire (c) from the wire saddle(e) and remove it from the two
connectors (d).

c
e
d

a
b

3 Open the document processor (a).

4 Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of the arrow and remove the hinge (c)
from the main unit (b).

b
c

4-133
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover

1 Open the DP top cover (b) of the document processor (a).

b
a

2 Release two hooks (b) with the flat-blade screwdriver (a) and remove the DP rear cover
(d).

b
c

4-134
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) Others
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the lift motor

1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.

2 Press the lock lever (a) and pull out the primary feed unit (c) from the paper feeder (b).

4-135
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the connector (a) and two screws (b)(M3x8).

4 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the sensor
holder (e).

b
a b
d

b e
b

5 Remove the connector (a) and two screws (b)(M3x8).

6 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the lift motor
(e).

7 Check the lift motor (e) and clean or replace it.

8 Reattach the parts in the original position.

a b
b

b
b

4-136
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-2)Detaching and reattaching the eject unit

1 Open the right cover (a) of the main unit (b).

2 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the fuser wire cover (b).

3 Disconnect two connectors (c) of the fuser unit.

4-137
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and remove the fuser unit (b).

5 Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).

6 Slide the right upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.

4-138
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Disconnect the connector (b) of the eject fan (a).

8 Push the protrusion (c) with a screwdriver tip (d), etc. and release the lock.

9 Slide the eject fan (a) in the direction of the arrow and detach it.
a
c

10 Disconnect the connector (a) of the eject unit.

11 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) and detach the eject unit (c).
12 Check the eject unit (c) and clean or replace it.
13 Reattach the parts in the original position.
a

4-139
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-3)Replacing the language sheet

1 Lift up and slide the leading edge of the operation panel cover (d) with the flat-blade
screwdriver (g).

2 Release four hooks (e) and remove the operation panel cover (d).

3 Release two protrusions (f) and remove the clear panel (c) from the operation panel (a).

4 Remove the operation panel sheet (b).

5 Replace the operation panel sheet of the applicable language.

6 Reattach the clear panel (c) and operation panel cover (d) in the original position.
g
e
d e
c
e
e

f
b
f

4-140
Maintenance > Disassembly and Reassembly [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6-4)Fan motor attachment direction

Important
When reattaching the fan motor, be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).

h
gg

e
a
b
d f

a Developer fan motor 3: intake *1 h Clutch fan motor: intake *2

b Developer fan motor 4: intake *1 *1: rating label side: top side
c Eject fan motor: intake *2 *2: rating label side: inside
d PWB fan motor: intake *3
*3: rating label side: outside
e Developer fan motor 2: intake *3
f Developer fan motor 1: intake *3
g Controller fan motor: intake *2

4-141
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 7 Disassembly & Reassembly (option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-5120)
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

a
c

3 Disconnect the connector (b) of the motor (a).

4 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the PF drive unit (d).

5 Check or replace the PF drive unit (d), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

c
c

a b

4-142
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor

1 Pull out the cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the
arrow.

2 Pinch the lock lever (c) and pull the primary paper feed unit (d).

4-143
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Remove the connector (a) and two screws (b)(M3x8).

4 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the sensor
holder (e).

b
a b
d

b e
b

5 Remove the connector (a) and two screws (b)(M3x8).

6 Release the hook (d) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the PF lift
motor (e).

7 Check or replace the PF lift motor (e), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

b
b
a
c

b
b e

4-144
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

a
c

3 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).

4 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the PF PWB (a).

5 Check or replace the PF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.

YC4 YC12 YC13

YC1
YC10

YC2
YC11

YC3

YC9 YC6 YC8

b a

4-145
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper feeder (PF-5130)

(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

3 Release two wire saddles (d) and disconnect two connectors (a) of the PF drive unit.

4 Remove five screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the PF drive unit (c).

5 Check or replace the PF drive unit (c), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

b
b
b

b a

d
a

4-146
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor

1 Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and pull it out on an angle.

2 Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of
the arrow.

3 Pinch the lock lever (c) and pull the primary paper feed unit (d) from the upper stage.

4 Pinch the lock lever (c) and pull the primary paper feed unit (d) from the lower stage.

4-147
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Disconnect the connector (b) of the upper sensor holder (a) and remove two screws
(c)(M3X8).

6 Release the hook (e) from the square hole (c) of the side frame and remove the sensor
holder (a).

7 Remove the sensor holder (a) of the lower stage as well.

b
c

e
c
d
a c

8 Disconnect the connector (b) and remove two screws (c)(M3X8) of the upper stage PF
lift motor (a).

9 Release the hook (e) from the square hole (d) of the side frame and remove the PF lift
motor (a).

10 Remove the PF lift motor (a) of the lower stage as well.

11 Check or replace the PF lift motor (a), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

d
d e
e

b b

a a
c c

4-148
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

3 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).

4 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).

5 Release two hooks (c) and remove the PF PWB (a).

6 Check or replace the PF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.

YC11

YC9 YC4
YC2 YC1

YC6

YC12
c
b
YC8
b YC3 YC5

4-149
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper feeder (PF-5140)

(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

3 Remove the connecter (a) of the motor.

4 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the PF drive unit (c).

5 Check or replace the PF drive unit (c), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

b
b

4-150
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

3 Disconnect the connector (b) of the PF lift motor (a).

4 Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the PF lift motor (a).

5 Check or replace the PF lift motor (a), and then reattach the parts in the original
position.

c
c

4-151
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

1 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

2 Remove PF rear cover (c) from the paper feed unit (b).

3 Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).

4 Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).

5 Release two hooks (c) and remove the PF PWB (a).

6 Check or replace the PF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.

YC11
YC4
YC9
YC2 YC1

YC6

YC12
c
b
YC8
b YC3
YC3

4-152
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Finisher (DF-5100)

(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF PWB

1 Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.

2 Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) and remove the DF front right cover (c).

3 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

4 Detach the inner finisher (c) from the main unit (b).

b
c

a a

4-153
Maintenance > Disassembly & Reassembly (option) [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).

6 Remove the DF rear cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.

a
a

7 Disconnect all the connectors from the DF PWB (a).

8 Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the DF PWB (a).

9 Check or replace the DF PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in the original position.

YC21 YC8 YC13 YC9

YC4

YC17
YC5
YC11
YC16

YC19
YC3

b
b

b
a

4-154
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 - 8 Periodic maintenance Procedures

Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901.

(1) Main unit

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Set Up>
TONER (CARTRIDGE)

WASTE TONER BOX

WT-5190
Image quality CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD
MK-5315A RE *1 RE *1 DRUM UNIT K, TRANSFER UNIT, DLP UNIT K, FUSER
UNIT, 2ND TRANS ASSY SP (RE:200K/400K)
1702SZ8NL0
*1: HOLDER PICK UP ASSY SP, ROLLER RETARD ASSY
MK-5317A RE *1 RE *1 (RE:300K/600K)
1702SZ7US0
MK-5195B RE RE CMY DRUM UNIT,CMY DLP UNIT
1702R40UN0
INSIDE OF MACHINE CL CL CL VACUUM: Remove toner and paper dust especially at the
paper conveying part and around the image formation part.

<Cover>
OUTER COVERS CH CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
<PF and Conveying section>
PARTS CLEANER CL CL CL VACUUM: Remove paper dust.
REGIST ASSY
SP302R494120
PARTS PRIMARY CL Alcohol or dry cloth
FEED ASSY
SP302R494210
PARTS HOLDER PICK CL Alcohol or dry cloth
UP ASSY
SP302R494170
ROLLER RETARD CL Alcohol or dry cloth
ASSY
302SZ94070
PARTS ROLLER MPF CL CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
ASSY SP
RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302MV94020 replace at 100K.
PARTS HOLDER CL CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
SEPARATION SP
302R494180
RE RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
replace at 100K.

4-155
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Set Call PM maintenance Remark

UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
ROLLERS ,PULLEYS CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth

GUIDES CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth

<Exit and Duplex Section>

ROLLERS ,PULLEYS CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth

GUIDES CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth

<Image scanner section>

CONTACT GLASS CL CL CL CL Slit glass for DP: Clean by dry cloth or alcohol. (attention:
302H917031 wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)

CONTACT GLASS DP CL CL CL CL When inatalling DP,clean with dry cloth.

302H917040 Contact glass for putting the original on: Dry cloth after
cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
Wipe the back side with dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol
only when unusual image (line or stain) appears. (BACK
SIDE)
<Drive and other section>
CLUTCHS CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on
registration and paper feed section.
RE
SENSORS CH CH CH Dry cloth or airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is
dirt or paper dust.

4-156
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Document Processor

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Set Up>
Image quality CH CH CH CH
--- AD AD AD AD
<Cover>
Outer covers CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
---
<PF and Conveying section>
MK-3140 RE RE HOLDER PICKUP ASSY, HOLDER PAD ASSY
1702P60UN0
PARTS HOLDER CL CL:Alcohol (If necessary, replace the MK-3140)
PICKUP ASSY SP
303R394020
PARTS HOLDER PAD CL CL:Alcohol (If necessary, replace the MK-3140)
ASSY SP
303R394030
<Conveying and Reversing section>
PARTS ROLLER CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
CONVEYING A SP
303R394060
PULLEY CONVEYING CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x5
3V2NM18240
PULLEY GUIDE CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
READING x4
303LL24190
PARTS ROLLER CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
LOOP SP
303R394090
PULLEY CONVEYING CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
BK x5
303M824210
GUIDE READING CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3V2NM18520
<Other section>
PLATE ORIGINAL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
302H918021
CONTACT GLASS DP CL CL CL Slit glass for DP (Main body side)
302H917040 Alcohol or dry cloth (wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)

4-157
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) PF-5120 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Set Up>
PAPER LINE CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
--- AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
<Cover>
Outer covers CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
<Paper feed section>
PARTS PRIMARY CL Alcohol or dry cloth
FEED ASSY SP
302R494210
PARTS HOLDER PICK CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
UP ASSY SP
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302R494170 replace at 300K.
PARTS ROLLER CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
RETARD ASSY SP
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302SZ94070 replace at 300K.
<Paper conveying section>
PARTS ROLLER CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
CONVEYING VF SP
303PS94050
<Drive and other section>
SENSORS CH CH Dry cloth or airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is
dirt or paper dust.
---

4-158
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) PF-5130 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Set Up>
PAPER LINE CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
--- AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
<Cover>
Outer covers CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
<Paper feed section>
PARTS PRIMARY CL Alcohol or dry cloth
FEED ASSY SP x2
302R494210
PARTS HOLDER PICK CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
UP ASSY SP x2
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302R494170 replace at 300K.
PARTS ROLLER MPF CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
ASSY SP x2
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302SZ94070 replace at 300K.
<Paper conveying section>
PARTS ROLLER CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
CONVEYING VF SP
x2
303PS94050
<Drive and other section>
SENSORS CH CH Dry cloth or airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is
dirt or paper dust.
---

4-159
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) PF-5140 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Set Up>
PAPER LINE CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
--- AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
<Cover>
Outer covers CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
<Paper feed section>
PARTS PRIMARY CL Alcohol or dry cloth
FEED ASSY SP
302R494210
PARTS HOLDER PICK CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
UP ASSY SP
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302R494170 replace at 300K.
PARTS ROLLER CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
RETARD ASSY SP
RE CH: Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to
302SZ94070 replace at 300K.
<Paper conveying section>
PARTS ROLLER CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
CONVEYING VF SP
303PS94050
<Drive and other section>
SENSORS CH CH Dry cloth or airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is
dirt or paper dust.
---

4-160
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) AK-5100 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
Outer covers CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---

PARTS ROLLER CL CL Alcohol

CONVEYING A SP
303PY94010
PARTS ROLLER CL CL Alcohol
CONVEYING B SP x2
303PY94020
PULLEY DU LOW x6 CL CL Alcohol
302F929260

(7) JS-5100 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
Outer covers CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
PARTS SENSOR OPT CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth
SP
303PX94030

4-161
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) DF-5100 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Cover>
Outer covers, Tlay CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
<PF, Conveying and
exit sections>
ROLLER FEED CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303PX24030

PULLEY MIDDLE A x2 CL Alcohol or dry cloth

302H722760

ROLLER MIDDLE CL Alcohol or dry cloth

303PX36680

PULLEY MIDDLE x2 CL Alcohol or dry cloth

303NB36661

PULLEY PAPER FEED CL Alcohol or dry cloth

x2
3BR07040
PULLEY EXIT x2 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303RD36130

PULLEY EXIT CL Alcohol or dry cloth

ONEWAYCLUTCH x2
303RD36180
STATIC-ELIMINATOR CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
EJECT CENTER x2
303NB36500
<Sensor>
SENSOR OPT CL Airbrush
7NXPSR11GD6MH01

SENSOR OPT x6 CL Airbrush

7NXSG2A241++H01

4-162
Maintenance > Periodic maintenance Procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9) MT-5100 (Option)

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
Set Call PM maintenance Remark
UP (x1000 counts)
200 400 600 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas
for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
<Cover>
Outer covers, Tlay CL Alcohol or dry cloth
---
<Conveying Section>
ROLLER CONVEYING CL Alcohol or dry cloth
x2
303R024090
PULLEY 15 MPF CL Alcohol or dry cloth
FEED x4
302H008220
ROLLER EJECT A x5 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303R024100
PULLEY EJECT x10 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303LW24060
ROLLER EJECT C CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303R024110
PULLEY EJECT x4 CL Alcohol or dry cloth
303R024140
STATIC ELIMINATOR CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x5
303LJ28040
STATIC-ELIMINATOR CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
EJECT SIDE
303NB36490
STATIC-ELIMINATOR CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
EJECT CENTER
303NB36500
<Sensor>
SENSOR OPT x8 CL Airbrush
7NXSG2A241++H01
SENSOR CL Airbrush
A,SEPARATION
303H327460
SENSOR OPT CL Airbrush
7NXKB1281AA2H01

4-163
Firmware update > [CONFIDENTIAL]

5Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
• The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.

[GROUP1 UPDATE]
Target firmware Master file name Message
Optional language data (Optional language data for the controller) DL_OPT.2SZ OPT

Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2SZ CTRL

First color table data (Printer) DL_PCLT1.2SZ P-CLUT1

Second color table data (Printer) DL_PCLT2.2SZ P-CLUT2

First color table data (Copy) DL_CCLT1.2SZ C-CLUT1

Second color table data (Copy) DL_CCLT2.2SZ C-CLUT2

[GROUP2 UPDATE]
Target firmware Master file name Message
FAX firmware DL_FAX.2R4 FAX

[GROUP3 UPDATE]
Target firmware Master file name Message
Mail Box DL_03R0.2R6 MAIL-BOX

Inner DF DL_03PX.2R6 INNER-DF

Firmware for the second PF (paper feeder) DL_03PZ.2R6 PF2

Firmware for the first PF (paper feeder) DL_03PZ.2R6 PF1

Engine firmware DL_ENGN.2SZ ENGN

[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.

[GROUP5 UPDATE]
Target firmware Master file name Message
Optional language data (Optional language data for the Panel) DL_OPT.2SZ OPT

Dictionary data DL_DIC.2R4 DIC

Browser data DL_BRWS.2R4 BRWS

Panel firmware DL_PANL.2SZ PANL

Verify the signature at firmware update

Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.

File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data 2SZ_CTRL_sign.bin 2SZ_CTRL_cert.pem

Panel data 2SZ_PANL_sign.bin 2SZ_PANL_cert.pem

Optional language data 2SZ_OPT_sign.bin 2SZ_OPT_cert.pem

5-1
Firmware update > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file

name
Dictionary data 2R4_DIC_sign.bin 2R4_DIC_cert.pem

Browser data 2R4_BRWS_sign.bin 2R4_BRWS_cert.pem

First color table data for the printer 2SZ_PCLT1_sign.bin 2SZ_PCLT1_cert.pem

Second color table data for the 2SZ_PCLT2_sign.bin 2SZ_PCLT2_cert.pem

printer

First color table data for the copy 2SZ_CCLT1_sign.bin 2SZ_CCLT1_cert.pem

Second color table data for the copy 2SZ_CCLT2_sign.bin 2SZ_CCLT2_cert.pem

FAX PWB 2R4_FAX_sign.bin 2R4_FAX_cert.pem

Engine PWB 2SZ_ENGN_sign.bin 2SZ_ENGN_cert.pem

PF 2R6_03PZ_sign.bin 2R6_03PZ_cert.pem

Inner DF 2R6_03PX_sign.bin 2R6_03PX_cert.pem

Mail Box 2R6_03R0_sign.bin 2R6_03R0_cert.pem

Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware, high-speed master file (skip files:
ES_SKIP.ON) and the file for signature verification in the root folder of the USB memory.
• If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.

1 Turn the power switch (a) on and "Ready to copy" is displayed. After checking that the
screen is properly displayed, turn the power switch (a) off.

2 Insert the USB memory (b) with the firmware into the USB memory slot.

3 Turn the power switch (a) on.

c
b

5-2
Firmware update > [CONFIDENTIAL]

• FW-Update and the progress indicator is displayed.

Several kinds of firmware updates are processed simultaneously.
FW - U P D A T E
CTRL 100% OPT
P - CLUT1 DIC
P - CLUT2 BRWS
C- CLUT1 PANL
C- CLUT2
FAX 20%
MAIL - BOX
INNER - DF 100%
PF2
PF1
ENGN 80%

• Completed is displayed when the firmware update is completed.

Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.
FW - U P D A T E C om pleted
CTRL 2R6_2000.001.003* OPT No Change
P- CLUT1 No Change DIC No Change
P- CLUT2 No Change BRWS No Change
C- CLUT1 No Change PANL No Change
C- CLUT2 No Change
FAX ----------
MAIL- BOX No Change
INNER
- DF No Change
PF2 No Change
PF1 No Change
ENGN 2R4_1000.001.001

• When there is no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.

* is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped.
• ----------is displayed when the FAX PWB, optional equipment, etc. are not installed.
• The result of the signature verification is indicated as follows.
Official signature verification file Indicate the result
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is successful. Version number

Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuccessful. S000

Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001

Or either of them does not exist.

1 Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB memory.

2 Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
30ppm model due to its construction may indicate the operation display momentarily when connecting the
power cord.

3 Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.

Important
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.

Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
• The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.

5-3
Maintenance mode > Maintenance mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

6Maintenance mode
6 - 1 Maintenance mode
(1) Executing the maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

Start

Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.

Enter the maintenance item

number using the [∧] [∨] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?

No

Yes
Run another maintenance
item?

No
Enter 001 using the [∧] [∨] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.

End

6-1
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Maintenance modes list

Section No. Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Printing the reports and exporting them to a USB memory
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exiting from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initializing to the factory-default setting
U003 Set tel number Sets the telephone number of the service person.
U004 Machine serial number Display of the machine serial number and setting
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Setting the maintenance mode ID
U019 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the PWB
Initializatio U021 U021 Initializes Memory Initializing the backup RAM
n
U025 Firmware update (S) Updates the firmware
Drive U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor
Paper feed U031 Check the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
Conveying
U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
Cooling
U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply solenoids
U034 Paper timing adjustment Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center line
U035 Folio size setting Sets the Folio paper length and width.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjusts the paper loop amount between the rollers
adjustment
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Sets each motor's speed correction
U059 Fan mode setting Sets the drive mode of the conveying fan motor
Optical U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scanning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line Adjusting the center line for table scanning
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing Adjusting the DP scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjusting the center line for DP scanning
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
High U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
voltage
U101 Primary transfer current adjustment Sets high voltage except the main high voltage and outputs
system
U106 Secondary transfer current adjustment Set the secondary transfer current correction
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the primary transfer belt cleaning current
adjustment
U110 Drum counter Displays/sets the drum counter
U117 Drum unit number Displays the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Displays the drum history
U119 Setting the drum Sets the initial LSU light intensity
U120 Drum drive distance counter Displays the drum drive distance counter
U127 Clearing the transfer count Displaying the counts
U128 Leading edge timing Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF timing

6-2
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Section No. Maintenance item Outline

Developer U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply in the toner control level
system
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drives the toner motor
U136 Toner level detection setting Sets the number of pages printable at toner near end
U139 Temperature, humidity Displays the machine inside and outside humidity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high altitude
mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Sets the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Setting auto drum refresh
U155 Toner sensor output Displays the toner sensor output
U156 Toner control level adjustment Displays/adjusts the toner supply level
U157 Developer drive time Displays/sets the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Displays/sets the developer counter
Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Sets the fuser control temperature
U167 Clearing the fuser count Displaying/clearing the counts
U198 Sets the fuser phase control Switch the fixing phase control
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Operation U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
section
U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch panel
Support
U203 Check DP operation Checking the DP paper conveying operation with the DP
equipment
alone
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U211 Enhancement unit connection setting Sets the connection of the enhancement units
U211 USB host lock function setting Sets USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U211 USB host lock function setting Sets the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock
U230 Optional device serial number Displays the optional device serial number
U240 Finisher operation check Checks the drive operation
U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the PF motor and solenoid
U244 DP switch check Drive the DP sensor
U246 Finisher adjustment Sets the finisher adjustment value
U247 Paper feed operation check Drives the PF motor and clutch
Mode U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance Changes the preset value
Setting cycle
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance Displaying/clearing/changing the counter value
counter
U252 Destination Sets the machine operation and indication depending on the
specification of the destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Sets the counter by color mode
U260 Switching the timing for copy counting Setting the count-up timing
U265 Setting by destination Sets the OEM code
U276 Switching the copy count mode Set the single color copy count mode
U278 Delivery date setting Register Delivery Date

6-3
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Section No. Maintenance item Outline

Mode U283 Setting China Red Enable/Disable China Red setting
Setting U284 Setting the 2-color copy Switches the 2-color copy mode
U285 Set Service Status Page Setting the print coverage report output
U290 Setting the drive to save the HyPAS Setting the print coverage report output
application
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity Switches the indication mode of the abnormal temperature
notification setting and humidity detection
U325 Paper interval setting Sets the print interval at high coverage
U326 Black line cleaning indication Switch the black line cleaning guidance indication
U327 Cassette heater On/Off setting Selects the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient Setting the coefficient of the custom size
U341 Printer cassette setting Sets the cassette to printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switches the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due Setting the maintenance timing display
indication
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Setting the BAM related sleep mode
Image U402 margin adjustment Adjusts the scan image margins
processing
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
original from the document processor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Adjusting the writing timing when duplex printing
Reversal)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Acquiring the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and
the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically
U425 Set Target Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment original
U429 Adjusting the color balance offset Adjusts the color balance offset
U464 ID correction setting Sets the ID correction
U465 ID correction data Displays the light intensity control value after the ID
correction
U467 Color registration correction operation Sets the color registration correction
setting
U468 Color registration correction data Displays the color registration correction data
U469 Color registration adjustment Corrects the color registration
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Sets the JPEG compression rate
Image U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Sets the LSU cleaning operation check and cleaning cycle
processing
U485 Image process mode setting Sets the image processing
U486 Color/BW mode setting Sets the image processing
TDRS U520 TDRS setting Checking/setting the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initializes all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initializing the software switches of other than the machine
data
U603 User data 1 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U604 User data 2 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX

6-4
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Section No. Maintenance item Outline

FAX U605 Data clear Initializing the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a FAX
at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
U612 System 3 Setting regarding the FAX communication operation
U620 FAX system Sets the signal detection method for remote switching
U625 Communication settings Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of
auto redialing
U630 Communication control procedures 1 Setting the FAX communication
U631 Communication control procedures 2 Sets the FAX communication
U632 Communication control procedures 3 Setting the FAX communication
U633 Communication control procedures 4 Setting the FAX communication
U635 Communication control procedures 5 Set the acceptable error when judging the received TCF
signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Setting the detection time by remote switching mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Sets the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Sets the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Setting the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Outputting the list of the FAX communication data
U695 FAX function customization FAX batch transmission is set up.
U699 Software switch: Set Sets the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper source Displays/clears the counters by paper source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Displays/clears number of occurrence by jam trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error counter Displays/clears the service call error and system error
counts
U905 Optional counter Displaying the counts
U906 Resetting the partial operation Resets the partial operation
U908 Total counter Displays the FAX count
U910 Black rate data Clearing the print coverage data and its period
U917 Counter by media type Displays/clears the counts by media type
U917 Retrieve the backup data Reading/writing the backup data to a USB memory
U920 Billing counter Displays the billing count
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clearing the billing count and machine life count
U928 Machine life counter Displays the machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Displaying/setting the counts
U952 MMaintenance mode workflow Execute the maintenance flow with the WorkFlow data
U964 Log check Transfer the log files to a USB memory
U969 Toner area code Displays the toner area code
U977 Setting the data capture mode Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory
U984 U984 Developer unit number Displays the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Displays the developer unit number history
U991 Scanner counter Displays the scanner count

6-5
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Content of the maintenance mode

U000 Printing Maintenance Report
Message: Mainte Report
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Output the event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance
items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to output.

Items Output list
Maintenance Printing Maintenance Report
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
NW Status Output Network Status Page
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output

3 Turn it On/Off by the [<] [>] keys.

4 Press the [Start] key.

Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot to output to it.

5 Select the item to output.

Items Output list
Print A report is printed.
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

6 Press the [Start] key to output the list.

If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, select the paper source. Output
status is displayed.
The output data is sent to the USB memory.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-6
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Detail of event log

Event Log
(6) XXXXXXXXXX
MFP (2) 2017/10/19 15:15
TASKalfa 307ci (3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2SZ_2000.000.000 2017.09.19 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

(6) Machine No.:XXXXXXXXXX (7) Total Life Count:XXXXX (8) Color Life Count:XXXXX

(9) Paper Jam Log (11) Maintenance Log

# Count. Item. Data and Time
# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time
7 999999 01.21 2014/02/12 17:30
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 01.40
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2014/02/12 17:30
5 777777 01.60
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2014/02/12 17:30
4 666666 01.21
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555 01.40
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 01.60
2014/02/12 17:30
7
6 0501.01.08.01.00
999999
888888
4002.01.08.01.00
0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 01.21 2014/02/12 17:30
5 (a)
777777 (b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01 (e)
2014/02/12 17:30
4 666666 0501.01.08.01 2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555 4002.01.08.01 2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30

(10)Service Call Log (12) toner Log

# Count. Service Code Data and Time # Count. Item. Serial Number Data and Time
8 1111111 01.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 5 1111111 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 4 999999 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30 3 888888 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5 777777 01.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 2 777777 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
4 666666 01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 1 666666 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555 01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30
2 444444 01.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30

6-7
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Event Log
(6) XXXXXXXXXX
MFP (2) 2017/10/19 15:15
TASKalfa 307ci (3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2SZ_2000.000.000 2017.09.19 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

(6) Machine No.:XXXXXXXXXX (7) Total Life Count:XXXXX (8) Color Life Count:XXXXX

(13) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g)C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 C0011: 11
J1604: 1 C0012: 12
J1614: 1 C0013: 13
J4002: 1 C0014: 14
J4003: 1 C0015: 15
J4004: 1 C0016: 16
J4009: 1 C0017: 17
J4012: 1 C0018: 18
J4013: 1 C0019: 19
J4014: 1 C0020: 20
J4019: 1 C0021: 21
J4201: 1 C0022: 22
J4202: 0 C0023: 23
J4203: 1
J4204: 1 (h)T00: 10
J4208: 0 M00: 20
J4209: 1 M02: 30
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
J4219: 2
J4301: 1

6-8
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Description of event log

No. Contents
(1) System version

(2) System date

(3) Engine firmware version

(4) Engine boot version

(5) Operation panel firmware version

(6) Machine serial number

(7) Total counter

(8) Total counter (color)

(9) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Date and Time

Remembers 1 to 16 th of The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in Date and time
occurrence. time of a paper jam. hexadecimal) of occurrence
If the past paper jam
occurrence is less than 16, all (a) Cause of paper jam
of them are indicated. The
(b) Paper source
oldest log is deleted when
exceeding 16 events. (c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject

(a) Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)

*Refer to (See page 7-43),for the detail of Cause of paper jam.

(b) Detail of paper source

(Hexadecimal)

00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder)
05 to 09: Reserved

6-9
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents
(9) (c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
cont.
00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4

(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)

01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1

02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead

(10) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Date and Time

Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the (See page 7-95) Date and time
occurrence of self time of the self diagnostic of occurrence
diagnostics error. error.
Example: 01.6000
If the occurrence of the
01: Self diagnostic error6000
previous self-diagnostic error
: Self diagnostic error code
is 8 or less, all of the
number
diagnostics errors are
logged.

6-10
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents
(11) Maintenance Log

# Count. item Date and Time

Remembers 1 to 8 of Total page count at the time Maintenance item code (1- Date & Time of
occurrence of unknown toner of the replacement of the byte value to indicate 2 the
detection. If the occurrence of maintenance item. items) replacement
the previous unknown toner
detection is less than 8, all of
First byte (Replacing item)
the unknown toner detection
are logged. The toner replacement log is 01: Toner container
triggered by toner empty. Second byte (Type of
This record may contain such replacing item)
a reference as the toner
00: Black
container is inserted twice or
a used toner container is 01: Cyan
inserted. 02: Magenta
03: Yellow

First byte (Replacing item)

02: Maintenance kit

Second byte (Type of

replacing item)
01: MK-5315A
02: MK-5195B

(12) Toner Log

# Count. item Serial Number

・The preservation number of Records the log (Total page) Unknown toner log code (1 Serial number
a toner log specified from at the timing where the toner byte, 2 categories) of the toner
each model is displayed. empty displays container
* After recording the log, if the First byte (Replacing item)
*A toner log is displayed by toner empty occurs again
01: Genuine product
time series. ( As those log within 100 sheets, the log will
not be recorded.(Non- 02: Non-genuine product
number is large, it indicates
that it is a new event.) genuine only)
Second byte (Type of Date and Time
*If the number of past the replacing item)
toner log is less than 32, logs Date & Time of
00: Black
for the number when a toner the
01: Cyan replacement
was replaced are shown.
02: Magenta
*If the number of past the
toner log exceeds 32, logs 03: Yellow
will be deleted from the
oldest ones.

6-11
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents
(13) Counter Log
Consist of three log counters of paper jams, self diagnostics errors, and maintenance replacement items.

(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Maintenance replacement item

Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter depending on the
paper jams depending on self diagnostics errors maintenance replacing item.
location. depending on cause.
Refer to Paper Jam Log. T: Toner container
Example: C6000: 004 00: Black
All instances including those Self diagnostic error 6000 01: Cyan
not having occurred are has happened four times.
02: Magenta
displayed.
03: Yellow

M: Maintenance kit
01: MK-5315A
02: MK-5195B

Example: T00: 1
The toner container (Black) has been replaced
once.

The toner replacement log is triggered by toner

empty. This record may contain such a
reference as the toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner container is inserted.

6-12
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Detail of service status page

Service Status Page (6) XXXXXXXXXX

MFP (2) 2017/10/30 15:15
TASKalfa 307ci (3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware Version 2SZ_2000.000.000 2017.10.30 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Controller Information
Memory status FAX Information
Standard Size 1.0 GB (36) Rings (Normal) 3
Option Slot 1.0 GB (37) Rings (FAX/TEL)
F 3
(7) Total Size 2.0 GB (38) Rings (TAD) 3
(39) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Time
(8) Local Time Zone +01:00 _Tokyo
(9) Date and Time 10/30/2014 02:33 (40) FRPO Status
(10) Time Server 10.183.53.13 User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.0
Installed Options User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.0
((11) Paper Feeder2 Installed .
(12) Paper Feeder3 Cassette(500×2) .
(13) HDD Installed .
(14) SD Card Not Installed .
(15) SSD Not Installed .
(16) Finisher Not Installed .
(17) Mail box Not Installed .
(18) Job separator Not Installed .
(19) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(20) Internet FAX Kit (A) Installed .
(21) Security Kit (E) Not Installed .
(22) Security Kit (F) .
Not Installed
(23) UG-33 .
Installed
(24) UG-34 .
Installed
.
(25) USB Keyboard Installed
.
(26) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
(27) Scan extension kit(A) Not Installed .
Print Settings .
(28) MP Tray Priority Auto Feed e-MPS error control Y6 0
(29) Print Coverage
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) RP Code
(30) Total (41) 1234 5678 9012
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (42) 5678 9012 3456
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 (43) 9012 3456 7890
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 (44) 3456 7890 1234
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(31) Copy (45) Altitude Adjustment
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 Status Normal
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(32) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(33) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(34) Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(35) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44

6-13
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Service Status Page XXXXXXXXXX

MFP 2017/10/30 15:15
TASKalfa 307ci
Firmware Version 2SZ_2000.000.000 2017.10.30 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Engine Information Send Information

(46) NVRAM Version _CI04709_CI04709 (49) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(47) FAX Slot1 2NM_1200.001.089 (50) Address mail@bjd.ne.jp
FAX BOOT Version 2NM_5000.001.006
FAX APL Version 2NM_5100.004.001
FAX IPL Version 2NM_5200.001.006
(48) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D

1/2 (51) (52)

(53) 100/100
(54) 0/0/0/0/
(55) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69) (70)
(71) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(72) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(84) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(85) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(86) XXXXXXXX/
(87) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (88) (89)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (90) (91)
(92) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/
(93) 3/
0/0/12.3/56.7 (94) (95) (96) (97)
(98) 1/1/1/0/1/0/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56
1/5/ (99)(100)
1/1/ (101) (102)
(103) 1/
(104) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
(105) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/

6-14
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Content of the service status page

No. Items Contents
(1) Firmware Version -

(2) System date -

(3) Engine firmware version -

(4) Engine boot version -

(5) Operation panel firmware version -

(6) Machine serial number -

(7) Total memory size -

(8) Local time zone -

(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute

(10) NTP server name -

(11) Availability of the paper feed unit 2 Installed/Not Installed

(12) Availability of the paper feed unit 3 Cassette(500-sheet×2) / Cassette(2000-sheet) / Not Installed
(13) Availability of the optional HDD Installed/Not Installed

(14) Availability of the SD memory card Installed/Not Installed

(15) Availability of the SSD Installed/Not Installed

(16) Availability of the finisher 1000-sheet finisher/inner finisher/

3000-sheet finisher/not installed

(17) Availability of Mailbox Installed/Not Installed

(18) Availability of job separator Installed/Not Installed

(19) Availability of the ID Card Authentication Kit Introduced/ before introduction/trial

(20) Availability of the Internet FAX Kit(A) Introduced/ before introduction (not indicated for 30ppm model)

(21) Availability of the Security Kit(E) Installed/Not Installed

(22) Availability of the Security Kit(F) Introduced/ before introduction (not indicated for 30ppm model)

(23) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial

(24) Availability of UG-34 Introduced/ before introduction (not indicated for 30ppm model)

(25) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected

(26) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German

France

(27) Availability of the Scan extension kit(A) Introduced/ before introduction/trial (not indicated for 30ppm
model)
(28) MP tray priority setting Off/Auto/Always

(29) Page count converted to the A4/Letter size Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of toner
consumption and will not match the actual toner consumption.

(30) Entire average coverage Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(31) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(32) Average printer coverage Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(33) Average coverage for FAX Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(34) Cleared date and output date -

(35) Coverage on the last output page -

6-15
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Items Contents

(36) Number of rings 0 to 15

(37) Number of rings before automatic switching 0 to 15

(38) Number of rings before connecting to the 0 to 15

answering machine

(39) Optional DIMM size -

(40) FRPO setting -

(41) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the latest
update.
(42) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the latest update.

(43) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the previous
update.
(44) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previous
update.

(45) High altitude adjustment set data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m

(46) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225

(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME
firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are identical
with (c) and (f).

(47) FAX firmware version -

(48) Mac address -

(49) The last sent date and time -

(50) Transmission address -

(51) Destination information -

(52) Area information -

(53) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin

(54) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left margin
integer part /Left margin decimal part

(55) Life counter (cassette 1) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Paper feeder 2/
Paper feeder 3/Duplex
Life counter (cassette 2) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/Primary
transfer unit/Developer unit K/Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/
Maintenance kit A/Maintenance kit B

6-16
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Items Contents

(56) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock

(57) USB information U00: Not Connected

U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed

(58) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select

1: Paper source fixed

(59) Auto cassette change 0: OFF

1: ON (Default)

(60) Color printing double count mode 0: All single counts

3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts

(61) Black and white printing double count mode 0: All single counts
3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts

(62) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts

1: When the paper is ejected

(63) Temperature (machine inside) -

(64) Temperature (machine outside) -

(65) Relative humidity (machine outside) -

(66) Absolute humidity (machine outside) -

(67) Asset Number -

(68) Job end judgment time-out time -

(69) Job end detection mode 0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a break in job

(70) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off

1: On

(71) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings

1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
For details on settings, refer to MDAT 2: Normal 2 2: Low
command in "Prescribe Commands 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Reference Manual".
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Extra Heavy 1: Enable

(72) IO Calibration information K/C/M/Y

(73) Bias Calibration information -

(74) Sensor initial information -

(75) Calibration information -

(76) Calibration information -

(77) Calibration information -

(78) Calibration information -

6-17
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Items Contents

(79) Calibration information -

(80) Paper loop correction shift amount -

(81) Paper loop correction interval -

(82) Paper loop correction patch amount -

(83) Calibration information -

(84) Calibration information -

(85) RFID information (K,C,M,Y) -

(86) RFID reader/writer version -

(87) Optional paper feeder firmware version -

(88) Color table version for printer -

(89) Color table 2 version for printer -

(90) Color table version for copy -

(91) Color table 2 version for copy -

(92) Maintenance information -

(93) MC correction 1 to 7

(94) Configuring the toner coverage counters 0: Full-color count display

1: Color coverage count display

(95) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0

(96) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0

(97) Data sanitization information FAX Board/Main Memory/Panel Memory/SSD/Executed time

1: Success
0: Fail
- : Not performed or Not installed

(98) Toner low setting 0: Disabled

1: Enabled

(99) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)

(100) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)

1: Full-page mode

(101) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)

1: On (Do wake up)

(102) Wake-up timer Displays the wake-up time

(103) BAM conformity mode setting 0: Non-conformity mode

1: Conformity Mode

(104) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(105) Developer serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

6-18
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

Message: Exit Mainte

Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 The normal copy mode is entered.

U002 Set Factory Default

Message: Set Factory Def
Contents
Sets the machine setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine settings when shipping from factory.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Mode1(All)].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine setting values to the factory default.

4 Turn the power switch off.

An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode
U002.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)

0002 Controller (Counter error)

0003 Controller (OS error)

0020 Engine error

6-19
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U003 Set tel number

Message: Set Tel No.
Contents
Sets the telephone number of the service person.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 By using the numeric keys, enter the setting value.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-20
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U004 Machine serial number

Message: Machine No.

Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch" occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.

When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.

Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.

Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.

1 Select [Execute].

2 Press the [Start] key.

The serial number writing starts.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-21
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

Message: Set Mainte ID

Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Change Change the maintenance mode ID for service.

Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.

Method: Change

1 Select [New ID].

2 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.

Either [*] or [#] must be included.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

4 Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].

5 Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.

Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID

New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)

Execute Change the maintenance mode ID for service.

6 Select [Execute].

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Initialize

1 Select [Initialize].

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-22
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.

0002 ID does not match.

0003 8-digit ID is not input

6-23
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U019 Firmware Version

Message: Firm Version
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The firmware version is displayed.

2 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

Items Contents
Main Main firmware

MMI Operation firmware

Browser Browser firmware

Engine Engine firmware

Engine Boot Engine boot

RFID RFID

Dictionary Dictionary firmware

Option Language Optional language firmware

Color Table1(Copy) Color table 1 firmware (copy)

Color Table2(Copy) Color table 2 firmware (copy)

Color Table2(Prn) Color table 1 firmware (printer)

Color Table2(Prn) Color table 2 firmware (printer)

Cass2 Paper feeder 1 firmware

Cass2 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot

Cass3 Paper feeder 2 firmware

Cass3 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot

DF finisher firmware

DF Boot finisher boot

MT mailbox Firmware

MT Boot mailbox boot

Fax APL Fax APL

Fax Boot FAX Boot

Fax APL Fax APL

HyPAS EMB API HyPAS EMB API

Application Name 1 Application 1 software

Application Name 2 Application 2 software

Application Name 3 Application 3 software

Application Name 4 Application 4 software

6-24
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Application Name 5 Application 5 software

Application Name 6 Application 6 software

Application Name 7 Application 7 software

Application Name 8 Application 8 software

Application Name 9 Application 9 software

Application Name 10 Application 10 software

Application Name 11 Application 11 software

Application Name 12 Application 12 software

Application Name 13 Application 13 software

Application Name 14 Application 14 software

Application Name 15 Application 15 software

Application Name 16 Application 16 software

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-25
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U021 Initializes Memory

Message: Init Memory

Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call error
history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area specification selected in the
maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

3 Press the [Start] key.

All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance mode
U021.

Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)

0002 Controller (Counter error)

0020 Engine error

0040 Scanner error

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-26
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U025 Firmware update (S)

Message: Firm Update(S)
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while "Very High" is selected in the Security Level settings
under the System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is inserted
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware

3 Press the [Start] key.

This is not executable when a USB memory is not installed.

4 After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off
and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-27
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U030 Motor operation check

Message: Chk Motor
Contents
Drive each motor.
Purpose
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the motor to operate.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the imaging motor.

DLP(CMY) Operate the DLP (CMY) motor

Fuser Operate the fuser motor

SB(CW) Drive the SB(CW) motor

SB(CCW) Drive the SB(CCW) motor

Belt Release Operate the bridge motor

Bridge Operate the belt release

Fuser Release Operate the fuser release

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-28
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U031 Check the conveying switch

Message: Chk Switch
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
Execute to check the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

3 The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.

Items Contents
Regist Sens Display the regist sens switch state

Fuser Displays the fuser switch status

Bridge1 Feed Displays the bridge 1 feed switch state

Bridge2 Feed Displays the bridge 2 feed switch state

Exit Full Display the exit full switch state

JobSepa Full Display the job separator full switch state

JobSepa Display the job separator switch state

Feed2 Displays the cassette2 feed switch state

Feed3 Displays the cassette3 feed switch state

Feed4 Displays the cassette4 feed switch state

DU Sens Display the DU sens switch state

Completion

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-29
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U032 Clutch operation check

Message:Check Clutch Operation
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch's operation.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the clutch to operate.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
DLP Operates the developer clutch (K).

Regist Operate the registration clutch

Mid Roller Operates the middle clutch

Dup Operate the DU clutch

Feed1 Operates the paper feed1 clutch

Motor Operate the motor

The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.

4 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-30
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U033 Solenoid operation check

Message: Chk Solenoid
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid's operation.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the solenoid to operate.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Branch Exit Operate the feed-shift solenoid.

MPT Operate the MP solenoid

Motor Operate the motor

The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.

4 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-31
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U034 Paper timing adjustment

Message: Adj Paper Timing
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Full Adjust the leading edge registration (full speed)

LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge registration (3/4 speed)

LSU Out Top Half Adjust the leading edge registration (half speed)

LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line

Adjustment: LSU Out Top

1 Select the item to adjust.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
MPT Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm

Cassette Adjusts the leading edge timing for cassette -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feed

PF*1 Adjust the leading edge timing for the paper -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
feeder

Dup Adjusting the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying

*1: 500 x 1 cassette only

6-32
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value
is decreased.

A A
A
Center line
(within ± 1.0 mm)

Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2

6 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034 > U066(P.6-323)> U071(P.6-328)

Adjustment: LSU Out Left

1 Select the item to adjust.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

setting variatio
n
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm

Cass1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm

Cass2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed

Cass3 Adjust the center line for cassette 3 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed

Cass4 Adjust the center line for cassette 4 (Optional -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
unit) feed

Duplex Adjusting the center line when duplex copying -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(Back page)

6-33
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

5 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting value is
decreased.

Center line
(within ± 2.0 mm)

A A A

Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2

6 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note

• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034 < U067(P.6-324) < U072(P.6-331)

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-34
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U035 Folio size setting

Message: Set FOLIO Size
Contents
Changes the printable area when copyng with Folio paper.
Purpose
Setting the actual size of Folio to use prevents the image dropout at the trailing edge or right/left edges.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Length Sets the Folio paper length. 318 to 356 (mm) 330 1(mm)

Width Sets the Folio paper width. 200 to 216 (mm) 210 1(mm)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-35
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U037 Fan motor operation check

Message: Chk Fan Motor
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the fan motor to operate.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Each operation starts.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors

DLP Operate the developer fan motor 1

Exit Paper Operate the exit paper fan motor

Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor

LVU CL Fan Operate the developer fan motor 2

WTNR Fan Operates the toner suction motor

CON Fan Operate the Controller fan motor

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-36
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment

Message: Adj Paper Loop
Contents
Adjusts the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded in a Z-shape.
Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
Full Paper loop amount adjustment at full speed

Half Paper loop amount adjustment at half speed

3/4 Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed

Adjustment

1 Select the item to adjust.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
MPT MPT loop amount adjustment -30 to 20 0/0/0 1mm

Cass1 Cassette 1 loop amount adjustment -30 to 20 0/0/0 1mm

PF PF (Cassette2,3,4) loop amount adjustment -30 to 20 0/0/0 1mm

Dup Duplex loop amount adjustment -30 to 20 0/0/0 1mm

5 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases when the setting value
is decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

6-37
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-38
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U053 Adjusting the motor speed

Message: Adj Motor Speed
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
Full Full speed setting

Half Half speed setting

3/4 3/4 speed setting

Setting

1 Select the item to adjust.

The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Drum(K) Adjusting the drum motor K -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

Drum(CMY) Adjusting the drum motor CMY -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

Drum Mono(K) Adjust the drum motor K at the time of -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -
monochrome printing.

Dev(K) Adjusting the developer motor K -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

Dev(CMY) Adjusting the developer motor CMY -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

Fixing Adjusting the fuser motor (FUM) -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

Trans Belt Adjusting the transfer belt motor -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

SB Adjusts the DP feedshift motorrotation -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

SB Reverse Adjusts the DP feedshift motor reverse -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

rotation

Brg1 Adjusting the BR conveying motor -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

PF2 Adjusting the PF paper feed motor -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

PF3 Adjusting the PF paper feed motor -5000 to 5000 0/0/0 -

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-39
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U059 Fan mode setting

Message: Set Fan Mode
Contents
Sets the conveying fan motor drive mode during paper conveying.
Purpose
A fan is added in the conveying unit so that the leading edge of paper is conveyed along with the conveying
path to prevent paper creases.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Cycle Changes the fan control timing cycle. 0 to 10000 1000 sheets

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-40
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

Message: Adj Scn
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the above incorrect

Note

• The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depending on the
content of the original document.
• Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
• U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-321)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-321)

Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scanning -15 to 15 0 0.10%
direction

Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -25 to 25 0 0.10%

scanning direction

Adjustment: Main Scan

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Adjustment: Sub Scan

6-41
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-42
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

Message: Table Timing
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner leading edge timing. -45 to 45 0 0.085 mm

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value
is decreased.

Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034(P.6-312)> U065(P.6-321)> U066

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-43
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

Message: Table Center
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner center line -40 to 40 0 0.085 mm

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is
decreased.

Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note

• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034(P.6-312)> U065(P.6-321)> U067

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-44
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U068 DP scanning position adjustment

Message: DP Scn Start Pos
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -33 to 33 0 0.158 mm
originals.

Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test copy 0 to 3 0 -
originals.

Adjustment: DP Read

1 Select [DP Read].

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the setting value
is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Adjustment: Black Line

1 Select [Black Line].

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

4 Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.

6 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line
appears and the image is normally scanned.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-45
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U070 DP magnification adjustment

Message: Adj DP Motor
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
SubScan(F) Adjusting the magnification for table scanning -25 to 25 - 0.1 %

SubScan(B) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -25 to 25 - 0.1 %
scanning direction when duplex scanning

Duplex 1side Adjusts the 1st side magnification in the sub -25 to 25 -3 0.1 %
scanning direction when duplex scanning

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-46
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

Message: DP Timing
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image
when the DP is used
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.245mm

Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.245mm

Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.245mm

Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.245mm

Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value
is decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note

• Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034(P.6-32)> U071

6-47
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is decreased.

Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-48
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U072 Adjusting the DP original center

Message: DP Center
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image when the DP is
used
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Front DP center line. (Front page) -40 to 40 - 0.085 mm

Back DP center line. (Back page) -40 to 40 - 0.085 mm

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting value is
decreased.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
• Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the
maintenance mode.
• U034(P.6-312)> U065(P.6-321)> U067(P.6-324)> U072

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-49
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U089 MIP-PG pattern output

Message: Output MIP-PG
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scanner section
using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and page count
displayed on the service status page.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the MIP-PG pattern to output

Items Contents
White For drum quality check (Blank PG)

White Color Color for drum quality check (Blank PG)

Gray(C) For drum quality check (Cyan PG)

Gray(M) For drum quality check (Magenta PG)

6-50
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Gray(Y) For drum quality check (Yellow PG)

Gray(K) For drum quality check (Gray PG)

Color Belt PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)

Mono Belt Printing 64 grayscales to check 4 colors

Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty application
PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)
For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
For drum quality check (Gray PG)

3 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

4 Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.

5 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-51
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U100 Main high voltage adjustment

Message: Main HV Output
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Set DC Bias Displays the main charge DC bias correction value for each color.

Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value

Set DC Bias Base Displays the main charge DC bias base value for each color. (Adjusted value
before correction)
Chk Current Displays the in-rush current. (40 ppm model only)

Set Main HV Sets the main high voltage mode

MCH Set MC correction

Setting: Set DC Bias

1 Displays the current setting.

Items Contents
DC1(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)

DC1(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)

DC1(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)

DC1(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)

Setting: Adj DC Bias

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the setting value is
decreased.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
DC2(C) Cyan main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 3/4(C) Cyan main charge DC bias additional value (3/4 speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 Half(C) Cyan main charge DC bias additional value (Half speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2(M) Magenta main charge DC bias additional value (Full -1000 to 1000 0
speed)

DC2 3/4(C) Magenta main charge DC bias additional value (3/4 -1000 to 1000 0
speed)

6-52
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents Setting range Initial

setting
DC2 Half(M) Magenta main charge DC bias additional value (Half -1000 to 1000 0
speed)

DC2(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 3/4(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias additional value (3/4 speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 Half(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias additional value (Half speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 3/4(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (3/4 speed) -1000 to 1000 0

DC2 Half(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Half speed) -1000 to 1000 0

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Set DC Bias Base

1 Displays the current setting.

Items Contents
DC1 B(C) Cyan main charge DC bias base value (Full speed)

DC1 B3/4(C) Cyan main charge DC bias base value (3/4 speed)

DC1 B Half(C) Cyan main charge DC bias base value (Half speed)

DC1 B(M) Magenta main charge DC bias base value (Full speed)

DC1 B 3/4(M) Magenta main charge DC bias base value (3/4 speed)

DC1 B Half(M) Magenta main charge DC bias base value (Half speed)

DC1 B(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias base value (Full speed)

DC1 B 3/4(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias base value (3/4 speed)

DC1 B Half(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias base value (Half speed)

DC1 B(K) Black main charge DC bias base value (Full speed)

DC1 B 3/4(K) Black main charge DC bias base value (3/4 speed)

DC1 B Half(K) Black main charge DC bias base value (Half speed)

Refer: Chk Current(40ppm model only)

1 Displays the current setting.

Items Contents
C Cyan inflow current

M Magenta inflow current

Y Yellow inflow current

K Black inflow current

6-53
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Set Main HV

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
White Line Switch On/Off the white streak prevention control On/Off Off

Agent Time Aging time by surface speed gap 0 to 255 *1 0

*1:The aging time of the set value 1 to 255 is 30 seconds.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: MCH

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Value MCH correction 1 to 7 4

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-54
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U101 Primary transfer current adjustment

Message: 1st TC Output
Contents
Sets the primary transfer control current
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Normal Sets the primary transfer current

Add Color Sets 2nd side additional value

Add Color 2nd Sets 2nd side additional value.

Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction

Setting: Normal

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Full Yellow primary transfer current (full speed) 0 to 400 60 -

Half Yellow primary transfer current (half speed) 0 to 400 40 -

3/4 Yellow primary transfer positive current (3/4 0 to 400 50 -

speed)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Add Color

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
C Sets the additional value (Cyan) -200 to 200 5 -

M Sets the additional value (Magenta) -200 to 200 5 -

Y Sets the additional value (Yellow) -200 to 200 0 -

K Sets the additional value (Black) -200 to 200 25 -

B/W Monochrome mode (toner applying amount) -200 to 200 -27 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Add Color 2nd

6-55
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
C 2nd side additional value (Cyan) -200 to 200 -12 -

M 2nd side additional value (Magenta) -200 to 200 -12 -

Y 2nd side additional value (Yellow) -200 to 200 -10 -

K 2nd side additional value (Bllack) -200 to 200 30 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Surround Correct

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the numeric keys, change the setting value.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Mode Environmental correction (On/Off) 0: On On -
1: Off

Rev Bias Reverse bias cleaning -200 to 200 30 -

High Altitude High altitude correction control (2nd side -200 to 200 85 -
correction)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-56
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U106 Secondary transfer current adjustment

Message: 2nd TC Output
Contents
Sets the secondary transfer control current for each media type.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1

Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3

Light/Normal123 Transfer control value for Light to Normal1,2,3

Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3

Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3

OHP Transfer control value for Transparency

Light-Normal3 Transfer control value for Light to Normal3

Bias Bias setting

High Altitude High altitude correction control setting (2nd side correction)

Paper End Turning off the secondary transfer at the paper end

Setting: Light/Normal1

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed

2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 420 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 310 -
than 210

6-57
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

2nd
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 500 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 230 -
than 210

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Normal2/3

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed

2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 460 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 340 -
than 210

2nd
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 450 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 340 -
than 210

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Light/Normal123

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st B/W 1st side transfer control value in monochrome mode

2nd B/W 2nd side transfer control value in monochrome mode

6-58
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st B/W
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 380 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 260 -
than 210

2nd B/W
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 300 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 220 -
than 210

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Heavy1

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side transfer control value at 3/4 speed

2nd 3/4 2nd side transfer control value at 3/4 speed

1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed

2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed

1st 3/4 B/W 1st side transfer control value at 3/4 speed in monochrome mode

2nd 3/4 B/W 2nd side transfer control value at 3/4 speed in monochrome mode

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st 3/4
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 360 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 220 -

less than 210

2nd 3/4
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 350 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 220 -

less than 210

6-59
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1st Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 240 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 150 -

less than 210

2nd Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 240 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 150 -

less than 210

1st 3/4 B/W

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 320 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 180 -

less than 210

2nd 3/4 B/W

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 340 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 180 -

less than 210

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Heavy2/3

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed

2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed

1st Half B/W 1st side transfer control value at half speed in monochrome mode

2nd Half B/W 2nd side transfer control value at half speed in monochrome mode

6-60
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 300 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 210 -

less than 210

2nd Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 360 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 180 -

less than 210

1st Half B/W

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 300 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 210 -

less than 210

2nd Half B/W

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 360 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 210 -

less than 210

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: OHP

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 220 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and less 0 to 2000 90 -

than 210

6-61
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Light-Normal3

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side setting at 3/4 speed

2nd 3/4 2nd side setting at 3/4 speed

1st Half 1st side setting at half speed

2nd Half 2nd side setting at half speed

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1st 3/4
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 340 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 250 -

less than 210

2nd 3/4
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 400 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 200 -

less than 210

1st Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 220 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 170 -

less than 210

2nd Half
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
W<160 Setting paper width less than 160 0 to 2000 340 -

160<=W<210 Setting paper width of 160 or more and 0 to 2000 150 -

less than 210

6-62
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Bias

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Reverse 2nd Secondary transfer cleaning negative bias -1 to 200 0 -

Cleaning 2nd Secondary transfer cleaning positive bias 0 to 200 1000 -

Calb Cleaning Calibration cleaning bias 0 to 200 100 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: High Altitude

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Light/Normal1 Light and Normal1 setting 0 to 100 85 -

Normal2/3 Setting of Normal 1/2 0 to 100 80 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Paper End

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Heavy2/3 Setting for Thick2,3 0 to 100 65 -

Ext Heavy Ext Heavy setting 0 to 100 90 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-63
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage adjustment

Message: Adj 1st TC Clean
Contents
Sets the transfer belt unit cleaning control current.
Purpose
Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting

Belt(B) Belt B setting

Belt(C) Belt C setting

Belt(D) Belt D setting

Setting

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Belt(A)
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 300 50 -

Half Half speed setting 0 to 300 40 -

3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 300 45 -

Belt(B)
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 300 45 -

Half Half speed setting 0 to 300 45 -

3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 300 45 -

Belt(C)
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 300 60 -

Half Half speed setting 0 to 300 60 -

3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 300 60 -

6-64
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Belt(D)
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variatio
n
Full Full speed setting 0 to 300 130 -

Half Half speed setting 0 to 300 80 -

3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 300 100 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-65
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U110 Drum counter

Message: Drum Cnt
Contents
Displays the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum counter

M Displays the magenta drum counter

Y Displays the yellow drum counter

K Displays the black drum counter

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-66
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U117 Drum unit number

Message: Drum No.
Contents
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the drum number.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum number

M Displays the magenta drum number

Y Displays the yellow drum number

K Displays the black drum number

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-67
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U118 Drum unit history

Message: Drum History
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum history

M Displays the magenta drum history

Y Displays the yellow drum history

K Displays the black drum history

Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history

Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-68
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U119 Setting the drum

Message: Set Drum
Contents
Set the drum sensitivity.
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the drum sensitivity data from the EEPROM in the drum unit to the
engine PWB to set the LSU light amount correction data.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Starts the drum setup operation.

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-69
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U120 Drum drive distance counter

Message: Drum Drv Dist Cnt
Contents
Displays the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to displays the drum drive distance counter.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the count.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum drive distance counter

M Displays the magenta drum drive distance counter

Y Displays the yellow drum drive distance counter

K Displays the black drum drive distance counter

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-70
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U127 Clearing the transfer count

Message: Clr Trans Cnt
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the primary/secondary transfer unit counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid(Cnt) Displays or clears the primary transfer counter

2nd(Cnt) Displays or clears the secondary transfer counter

Setting: Mid(Cnt)
Clear only. This cannot be changed.

1 Select [Clear].

2 Press the [Start] key to set the counter value.

Setting: 2nd(Cnt)

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the counter value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-71
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U128 Leading edge timing

Message: Adj Trans Timing
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up by the drum.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Timing 1st Transfer On timing adjustment value (1st side)

Timing 2nd Transfer On timing adjustment value (2nd side)

Setting: Timing 1st

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
On Timing Transfer On timing adjustment value -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment value -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Timing 2nd

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
1side < 60 Secondary transfer voltage on timing -200 to 200 0 0.5mm
(1st side, weight less than 60gsm)

1side >= 60 Secondary transfer voltage on timing -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

(1st side, weight 60gsm or more)

2side < 60 Secondary transfer voltage on timing -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

(2nd side, weight less than 60gsm)

2side >= 60 Secondary transfer voltage on timing -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

(2nd side, weight 60gsm or more)

Off Timing Secondary transfer voltage off timing -200 to 200 0 0.5mm

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-72
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U132 Forcible toner supply operation

Message: Supply Toner
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is often detected.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Execute toner supply forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Items Contents
Supply(C) Cyan toner supply level

Supply(M) Magenta toner supply level

Supply(Y) Yellow toner supply level

Supply(K) Black toner supply level

Sensor(C) Cyan toner sensor output value

Sensor(M) Magenta toner sensor output value

Sensor(Y) Yellow toner sensor output value

Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value

Execute Installs toner

4 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-73
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U135 Checking the toner motor operation

Message: Chk Toner Motor
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.

Note
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside and it may lock
up.

Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Toner].

3 Press the [Start] key.

The operation starts.
Items Contents
Toner Drives the toner motor(TM)

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-74
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U136 Toner level detection setting

Message: Set Toner NearEnd
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval between toner near
end and toner empty is too short.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
CMY Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow toner level 0 to 9 3 -
setting

K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -

If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-75
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U139 Temperature, humidity

Message: Temp/Humidity
Contents
Displays the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Each value is displayed.
Items Contents
Ext Temp Displays the machine outside temperature.

Ext Humidity Displays the machine outside humidity.

Dev Temp Displays the developer K temperature inside the machine.

LSU Temp(K) Displays the LSU K temperature inside the machine.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-76
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U140 Developer bias adjustment

Message: Adj Dev Bias
Contents
Displays/changes the developer bias set values or sets high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias set values.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Sleeve DC Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.

Sleeve AC Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.

Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.

Sleeve Freq Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.

Sleeve Duty Set the developer sleeve roller duty.

Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.

Altitude Adj Sets the altitude adjustment mode

Setting: Sleeve DC

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
C Sets the cyan 0 to 350 200 1V

M Sets the magenta 0 to 350 200 1V

Y Sets the yellow 0 to 350 200 1V

K Sets the black 0 to 350 200 1V

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Sleeve AC

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
C Sets the cyan 100 to 175 140 1V

M Sets the magenta 100 to 175 140 1V

Y Sets the yellow 100 to 175 140 1V

K Sets the black 100 to 175 140 1V

6-77
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Mag DC

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
C Sets the cyan 0 to 750 470 1V

M Sets the magenta 0 to 750 470 1V

Y Sets the yellow 0 to 750 470 1V

K Sets the black 0 to 750 470 1V

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Sleeve Freq

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Normal Execute full speed setting 3600 3600 1Hz

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Sleeve Duty

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Normal Execute full speed setting 34 66 1%

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Mag Duty

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Normal Execute full speed setting 50 to 80 66 1%

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Altitude Adjustment

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Normal Sets 1000m or less

1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m

6-78
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m

3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m

Initial setting: Normal

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-79
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U147 Setting the toner applying mode

Message: Set Toner Apply
Contents
Mode selection for the operation to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner applying mode).
Also, sets the operation to take toner accumulated on the developer blade back to the developer unit (vibration
motor control).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute to change the vibration motor control
frequency.
Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Mode Sets the toner applying mode.

Drum T7 Sets the toner applying width at the cleaning mode.

Dev T7 Sets the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation mode.

Motor Sets the vibration motor operation.

Setting: Mode

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Sets the toner applying operation with the normal amount.

Off Sets the toner applying operation with less than the normal amount.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Drum T7

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Value Sets the toner applying width at the 0 to 25 10 0.1mm
cleaning mode.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Developing T7

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Value Sets the upper limit of the toner 0 to 25 20 1%
applying amount for each operation (Indicated as
mode. 2.0)

6-80
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Motor

1 By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Print(Normal) Sets the continuius printing (normal 10 to 2550 - 10
environment)

Print(H/H) Sets continuous printing (high temperature, 10 to 2550 - 10

high humidity)

Print End Setting when completing printing 1 to 255 - 1

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-81
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U148 Drum refresh mode setting

Message: Set Drum Refresh
Contents
Sets the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Normal Sets Auto drum refresh 0: Off 1 -
1 to 3: Standard

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-82
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U155 Toner sensor output

Message: Toner S Output
Contents
Displays the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check each color's output value when an image failure occurs.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to refer to.

Switched to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Displays the toner sensor value

Toner Displays the toner sensor value and supply level value for each color

Method: Waste Toner

1 Check each sensor value.

Displays the waste toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 1

Near Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 2

Method: Toner

1 Check each sensor value.

Displays the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor (C) Displays the cyan toner sensor output value

Sensor (M) Displays the magenta toner sensor output value

Sensor (Y) Displays the yellow toner sensor output value

Sensor (K) Displays the black toner sensor output value

Supply (C) Displays the cyan toner supply level target value

Supply (M) Displays the magenta toner supply level target value

Supply (Y) Displays the yellow toner supply level target value

Supply (K) Displays the black toner supply level target value

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-83
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U156 Toner control level adjustment

Message: Adj Tnr Ctrl Lv
Contents
Displays the toner supply level for each color.
Purpose
Execute displaying the toner supply level for each color.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Supply].
Items Contents
Supply Displays the toner supply level

3 Displays the toner supply level for each color.

Items Contents
C Displays the cyan toner supply level

M Displays the magenta toner supply level

Y Displays the yellow toner supply level

K Displays the black toner supply level

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-84
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U157 Developer drive time

Message: Dev Time
Contents
Displays the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the developer drive time.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit drive time.

M Displays the Magenta developer unit drive time.

Y Displays the Yellow developer unit drive time.

K Displays the Black developer unit drive time.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U158 Developer counter

Message: Dev Cnt

Contents
Displays the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan developer counter.

M Displays the magenta developer counter.

Y Displays the yellow developer counter.

K Displays the black developer counter.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-85
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U161 Fuser temperature adjustment

Message: Adj Fuser Temp
Contents
Sets the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl, creases and
fusing failure on thick paper.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Center Set the center thermistor temperature.

Edge Sets the edge thermistor control temperature.

Setting: Center

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Press Start Sets the temperature to start pressing 0 to 200 30 1°C

Drive Start Sets the drive start temperature 0 to 200 100 1°C

Ready Sets the Ready temperature 100 to 200 145 1°C

Steady Sets the secondary stability temperature 100 to 200 150 1°C

Printing Set the temperature during printing 100 to 200 170 1°C

Waiting Set the standby temperature 100 to 200 160 1°C

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Edge

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Ready Sets the Ready temperature 100 to 200 110 1°C

Steady Sets the secondary stability temperature 100 to 200 130 1°C

Waiting Set the standby temperature 100 to 200 150 1°C

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-86
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U167 Clearing the fuser count

Message: Clr Trans Cnt
Contents
Displays and clears the fuser count.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the fuser count

Clear Clears the fuser count

Method: Clear

1 Select [Clear].

2 Press the [Start] key.

Fuser unit counter is cleared.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-87
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U198 Sets the fuser phase control

Message: Set Phase Ctrl
Contents
Switching the fuser phase control
Purpose
Used for switching the fuser phase control against the measure of the flicker.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Flicker].
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Flicker Sets the mode for the measure of the flicker

Setting: Mode

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Make the mode for the measure of the flicker enable

Off Make the mode for the measure of the flicker disable

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-88
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U199 Fuser temperature

Message: Fuser Temp
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge Displays the fuser heat roller edge temperature (°C)

Heat Roller Center Displays the fuser heat roller center temperature (°C)

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U200 All LEDs lighting

Message: All LEDs ON
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key.

All the LEDs on the operation panel are blinking.

4 Press the [Stop] key to turn the display off.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-89
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U201 Initializing the touch panel

Message: Init Touch Panel
Contents
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation panel is
replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position

Check Checks the touch panel display position

3 Press the [Start] key.

The screen for executing is displayed.

Method: Initialize

1 Press the center of "+".

2 Repeat 3 times.

3 After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is automatically displayed.

Method: Check

1 Press the indicated three "+", and then check the display position.
If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and press the [Start] key to return to Step.

+
Initialize

6-90
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-91
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U203 Check DP operation

Message: Chk DP Ope
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.

3 Select the scan speed

Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)

High Speed High speed scanning

Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

4 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD

CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD

CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)

CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous operation)

5 Press the [Start] key.

The operation starts.

6 To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-92
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U207 Operation key check

Message: Chk Panel Key
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key to display execution window.

2 [Count 0] appears and the job separator LED is turned on.

3 When pressing the keys on the operation panel from the left upper side and each row in order, the count is
counted up by one.

4 If pressing all the keys, all the LEDs are lit.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-93
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U211 Enhancement unit connection setting

Message: Set EH Connection
Contents
Execute the inner job separator installation setting.
Purpose
Execute when installing the inner job separator.
Make sure to set to [Off] to prevent wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Inner Job Separator].

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Inner JobSepa Job separator setting

Method

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On The job separator is installed

Off The job separator is not installed

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

6-94
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U211 USB host lock function setting

Message: Set USB Host Lock
Contents
Sets ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the USB host is not
recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Host Lock].

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off

3 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available

Off The USB Host lock function is not available

Initial setting: Off

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

5 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-95
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U222 Setting the IC card type

Message: Set IC Card Type
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.

SSFC When the ID card type is SSFC,

Initial setting: Other

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-96
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U223 Operation panel lock

Message: Lock Panel Ope
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the users other
than those with administrator privileges.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation

Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting

Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution setting

Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution setting and
Paper settings

Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation

Initial setting: Unlock

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock
Entering the maintenance mode Prohibition Prohibition

Switching to System Menu Prohibition Prohibition

Send, Send from Document Box Prohibition Prohibition

Switches the Yellow developer On/Off setting Prohibition Prohibition

Switch to registration/editing Document Box Prohibition Prohibition

Pressing the [Stop] key Permission Prohibition

Pressing the [Status/Job Cancel] key Permission Prohibition

Disconnect the FAX line Permission Prohibition

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-97
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U230 Optional device serial number

Message: Optional Device Serial No
Contents
Displays the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to help the investigation when a problem occurs.

Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the serial number.
Items Contents
Finisher Displays the finisher serial number.

PF1 Displays the PF1 serial number.

PF2 Displays the PF2 serial number.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-98
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U240 Finisher operation check

Message: Chk Fin Ope
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to operate.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check

Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check

Mail Box Mail Box motor operation check

Method: Motor

1 Select the item to operate.

2 Press the [Start] key.

The operation starts.
Items Contents
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.

Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.

Eject Pull(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed in the reversing direction.

Eject Pull(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed in the reversing direction.

Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed in the conveying direction.

Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed in the conveying direction.

Tray Drive the DF tray motor.

Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and descends
again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off. Ascends again
when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the upper limit.

Staple Drive the DF staple motor

Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor

Width Test(A4R) Drive the DF side registration motor 1,2

Width Test(LTR) Drive the DF side registration motor 1,2

Beat Drive the DF paddle motor

Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position

Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position

Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position

Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position

Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position

6-99
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Method: Solenoid

1 Select the item to operate.

2 Press the [Start] key.

The operation starts.
Items Contents
Press Paper Turn the paper press solenoid

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Method: Mail Box

1 Select the item to operate.

2 Press the [Start] key.

The operation starts.
Items Contents
Conv Drives the MT drive motor to convey paper

Branch Drives the MT drive motor for feed-shift

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-100
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U241 Finisher switch check

Message: Chk Fin Switch
Contents
Displays the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to operate.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Finisher Finisher switch sensor operation check

Mail Box Mail Box switch sensor operation check

Method: Finisher

1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Tray L-Limit DF tray sensor 4

HP DF paper entry sensor

Middle Tray Eject DF middle exit sensor (DFMES)

Staple HP DF slide sensor

Middle Tray DF main tray exit sensor

Width Front HP DF side registration sensor 1

Width Tail HP DF side registration sensor 2

Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor

Match Paddle DF adjusting sensor

Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor

Press Paper Up DF paper press sensor 1

Press Paper Down DF paper press sensor 2

Set DF setting switch

Method: Mail Box

1 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Eject MT exit sensor

Cover MT cover open close switch

Over Flow1 MT overflow sensor 1

Over Flow2 MT overflow sensor 2

6-101
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Over Flow3 MT overflow sensor 3

Over Flow4 MT overflow sensor 4

Over Flow5 MT overflow sensor 5

Over FlowTA MT overflow sensor tray A

Motor HP MT paper entry sensor

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U243 Checking the DP motor

Message: Check DP Motor
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to operate.

Items Contents
Feed Motor (CW) Drive the DP feed motor

Feed Motor (CCW) Reversely drives the DP feed motor

Conv Motor (CW) Rotate the DP conveying motor

Conv Motor (CCW) Rotate the DP conveying motor reversely

Rev Motor Execute the automatic adjustment in the DP feedshift motor

3 Press the [Start] key. Each operation starts.

To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-102
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U244 DP switch check

Message: Check DP SW
Contents
Displays each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.

The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Feed Check the DP feed sensor.

Regist Checks the DP registration sensor

Set Checks the DP original sensor

Cover Open Check the DP interlock switch

Open Checks the DP open close switch

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-103
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U246 Finisher adjustment

Message: Adj Fin
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam occurs.
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.

Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Finisher].
The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value

Method: Finisher

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment

Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment

Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment

Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP

1 Select [Width Front HP].

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.973mm

Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.973mm

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

4 Press the [Stop] key to return to the screen to select the maintenance item No.

5 Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A4R)].

The middle tray side registration guides move to A4R size position.

6 Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.

7 Repeat the above adjustment until the consistency is appropriate.

6-104
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Staple HP

1 Select [Staple HP].

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Content to adjust Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Front/rear staple home position adjustment -15 to 15 0 0.0972mm

Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1). Lower the set value
if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).

Sample 1 Sample 2

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-105
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U247 Paper feed operation check

Message: Chk Paper Feeder
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to operate.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
PF Operates 1-tray paper feeder

2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder

LCF Operate the high capacity feeder

Setting: PF

1 Select the item to set.

Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF

On PF paper feed motor ON

Clutch Feed2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch ON

V Feed2 Clutch PF conveying clutch ON

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.

To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.

Setting: 2PF

1 Select the item to set.

Display Contents
Mode Off PF paper feed motor OFF

On PF paper feed motor ON

Device Feed3 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1 ON

Feed4 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2 ON

V Feed3 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1 ON

V Feed4 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2 ON

6-106
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.

To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.

Setting: LCF

1 Select the item to set.

Display Contents
Mode Off PF paper feed motor OFF

On PF paper feed motor ON

Device Feed3 Clutch PF paper feed clutch ON

V Feed3 Clutch PF conveying clutch ON

2 Select [Execute].

3 Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.

To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-107
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle

Message: Mnt Cnt Pre-set
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
M.Cnt A Changes the maintenance counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 200000

M.Cnt B Change the maintenance counter preset value (Kit B) 0 to 9999999 200000

M.Cnt HT Change the maintenance counter preset value (HT 0 to 9999999 0

adjustment)

Cassette1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 1)

Cassette2 *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 2)

Cassette3 *2 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 3)

Cassette4 *3 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000

(Cassette 4)

*1: 500 PF only, *2: 500×2/2000 PF only, *3: 500×2 PF only

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-108
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter

Message: Clr Mnt Cnt
Contents
Displays, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting
range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999

M.Cnt B Maintenance cycle counter (Kit B) 0 to 9999999

M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999

Cassette1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 1) 0 to 9999999

Cassette2 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 2) 0 to 9999999

Cassette3 *2 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 3) 0 to 9999999

Cassette4 *3 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 4) 0 to 9999999

Clear Clears all the maintenance counts 0

*1: 500 PF only, *2: 500×2/2000 PF only, *3: 500×2 PF only

Clearing

1 Select [Clear].

2 Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-109
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U252 Destination
Message: Set Dest
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or
initialization
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric

Inch *2 Inch

Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific

Japan Metric *1 Japan metric

Australia *2 Australia

China *2 China

Korea *2 Korea

*1: 100 V model only, *2: Except 100 V model

Initial setting: Destination

3 Press the [Start] key.

Initializes according to the destination

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

6-110
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U253 Switching the double/single counts

Message: Set D/S Count
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as one
sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Color] or [B/W].

Items Contents
Full Color Switch the counter for full color mode (Single/Double Count)

Mono Color *1 Switch the counter for mono color mode (Single/Double Count)

B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)

*1: Appears if U276 set to other than [Mode0]

3 Select [SGL(All)] or [DBL(Folio)].

Items Contents
SGL (All) Sets single count for all the paper sizes

DBL (Legal) Set double count for larger than Legal size

DBL (Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2

Initial setting: DBL(Legal)

*2: The Folio length can be set to between 318 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035. However, the double count will
be applied when the set value is 330 mm (Initial value) or longer.

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-111
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U260 Switching the timing for copy counting

Message: Set Count Mode
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Selects the copy count timing.

Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.

Eject Selects the paper eject timing

Initial setting: Eject

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U265 Setting by destination

Message: Set Model Dest
Contents
Sets the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents
No. Displays the OEM code

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-112
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U276 Switching the copy count mode

Message: Set Chg Count
Contents
Set the single color count mode
Purpose
Execute to change the billing counter to count up in the single color mode.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Mode0 Count the single color count in the full color counter

Mode1 Count the single color count in the single color counter

Initial setting: Mode1

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U278 Delivery date setting

Message: Set Delivery Date
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Today].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Sets the delivery date of the machine.

Clearing

1 Select [Clear].

2 Press the [Start] key.

Clears the delivery date of the machine.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-113
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U283 Setting China Red

Message: Set CN Red
Contents
Set China Red.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Item Contents
On Enable China Red.

Off Disable China Red.

Initial setting: China: On/Other than China: Off

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-114
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U284 Setting the 2-color copy

Message: Set 2 Color Copy
Contents
Sets whether to use the 2-color copy.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On 2-color copy enabled

Off 2-color copy disabled

Initial setting: Off

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-115
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U285 Set Service Status Page

Message: Set Svc Sts Page
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.

Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.

Initial setting: On

3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-116
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U290 Setting the drive to save the HyPAS application

Message: Set Drive App
Contents
Sets the drive to save the HyPAS application
Indicated when the HyPAS application is not installed in the SD card and SSD.
Purpose
Sets to save to the SD card or optional SSD.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
SD Card Set in the SD card

SSD Set in the SSD

Initial setting: SD card (0)

3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-117
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity notification setting

Message: Warning Heat Hum
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification

Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification

Initial setting: On

3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-118
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U325 Paper interval setting

Message: Set Paper Int
Contents
Sets the print interval at high coverage.
Purpose
Changes the print interval at high coverage.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Interval Sets On/Off of print interval at high coverage. On/Off Off

Average Set the average number of sheets (parameter) 1 to 255 100

Threshold Sets the coverage threshold to start lowering. - -

Rate Displays the down rate - -

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Threshold

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Coverage threshold to start lowering for Cyan 1 to 100 15

M Coverage threshold to start lowering for Magenta 1 to 100 15

Y Coverage threshold to start lowering for Yellow 1 to 100 15

K Coverage threshold to start lowering for Black 1 to 100 20

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Rate
Display each setting values.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan down rate 50 to 100 0

M Magenta down rate 50 to 100 100

Y Yellow down rate 50 to 100 0

K Black down rate 50 to 100 0

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-119
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U326 Black line cleaning indication

Message: Set Clean Bk Line
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass
when scanning from the document processor.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication

3 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance

Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated

Initial setting: On

4 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-120
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U327 Cassette heater On/Off setting

Message: Set Cass Heater
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Sets the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Sets the cassette heater control On (installed).

Off Sets the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

Initial setting: Off

Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].

3 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-121
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

Message: Adj Calc Rate
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black
ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial setting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.

Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 0
display 1: by coverage

Level1 Sets low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 10

(Indicated as
1.0)

Level2 Sets middle coverage threshold value 0.2 to 99.9 25

(Indicated as
2.5)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-122
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U341 Printer cassette setting

Message: Set Prn Cass
Contents
Sets the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it cannot be used
for copy.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Multiple cassettes are selectable.
Items Contents
Cass1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source

Cass 2 *1 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)

Cass 3 *2 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)

Cass 4 *3 Setting cassette 4 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)

*1: 500 PF only, *2: 500×2/2000 PF only, *3: 500×2 PF only

Initial setting: Off (Cassette1-4)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-123
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U343 Duplex priority mode

Message: Set Dup PriMode
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Sett the frequently used settings depending on the user's usage.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex copy

Off Single-side copy

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-124
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

Message: Set Mnt Time Disp
Contents
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by setting the
number of prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Displays the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value before the
maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle reaches)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-125
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

Message: Slct Sleep Mode
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting

Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting

Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)

Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off

Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)

Initial setting: More Energy Save

2 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Setting: Auto sleep

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.

Off The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-126
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U402 margin adjustment

Message: Print Margin
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second page.
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to set.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm

A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm

C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm

Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.

Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

Left margin Right margin

(Within 4.0mm) (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin

(Within 4.0mm)

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-312)> U402

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-127
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass

Message: Scan Margin Tbl
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm

B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm

C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm

D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.

Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

Left margin Right margin

(Within 4.0mm) (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin

(Within 4.0mm)

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-312) > U402(P.6-425) > U403

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-128
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the document processor
Message: Scan Margin DP
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select the item to adjust.

Items Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm

B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm

C Margin Sets the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm

D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is decreased.

Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)

Left margin Right margin

(Within 4.0mm) (Within 4.0mm)

Trailing edge margin

(Within 4.0mm)

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Note
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-312)> U402(P.6-425)> U403(P.6-427)> U404

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-129
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal)

Message: WR DR Timing
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing when duplex printing.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner
reading image (image on the memory)

Note
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-312)> U402(P.6-425)> U66(P.6-323)>
U403(P.6-427)> U71(P.6-328)> U404(P.6-428)> U407

Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

3 Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.

4 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key.

5 Select [Adj Data].

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when writing -47 to 47 0 1dot
the image in the memory

6 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the setting value
is decreased.

Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-130
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically

Message: Adj Half Tone
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the execution information screen.
Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4 paper.

2 Set the test pattern output on the original glass with the arrow facing the rear side and print side face-down.
Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

3 Press the [Start] key.

The 1st auto adjustment is executed.

4 Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.

Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.

5 Press the [Start] key.

The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.

6 [Finish] appears after normal completion.

An error code appears when an error occurs.

Error codes
Codes Occurrence position Contents
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected

S002 Original deviation is in excess in the main scanning

direction

S003 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scanning

direction

S004 Original skew is in excess

S005 Original type error

SFFF Other scanner error

6-131
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Codes Occurrence position Contents

E001 Engine Engine status error

E002 Adjustment result error

EFFF Other engine error

C001 Controller Pause status

C002 Adjustment result error

C110 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error

(black)

C120 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error (cyan)

C140 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error

(magenta)

C180 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error

(yellow)

C210 Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black)

C220 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (cyan)

C240 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (magenta)

C280 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (yellow)

CFFF Other controller error

6-132
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U411 Scanner auto adjustment

Message: Auto Adj Scn
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning
sections.
Scanner section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/sub
scanning direction, color/monochrome input gamma, color correction matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, Input gamma, automatic
adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Items Contents Original for adjustment
(P/N)
Table (Chart A) Automatically adjusts the table scanning. 302NM94340

Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning
direction
Input gamma in monochrome mode
Input gamma in color mode
Color correction matrix

DP FU(ChartB) Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment in 302NM94330

DP FD(ChartB) the DP scanning section.
Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment in
the DP scanning section.

Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing

DP FU(ChartA) Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment in 302NM94340

the DP scanning section.
Input gamma in monochrome mode
Input gamma in color mode
Color correction matrix

All Automatically adjusts the DP scanning after the 302NM94340

automatic adjustment of the table scanning. 302NM94330
Automatic adjustment in the scanning section.

Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 302NM94340

Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.

6-133
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

80
65
Method: Table (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
Usually, it adjusts here.

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.

2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [Target].

4 Press the [<] [>] keys, [#] or [*] key to select [Auto].

5 Select [Table(ChartA)] using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

6 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.

7 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

Manual input of the target value

1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425.

2 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.

3 Enter maintenance item U411.

4 Select [Target].

5 Press the [<] [>] keys, [#] or [*] key to select [U425].

6 Select [Table(ChartA)] using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

7 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

8 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjusting it
with ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).

6-134
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Method: DP FU (Chart B)
Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-up on the DP.

2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [DP FU(ChartB)].

4 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

5 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

Method: DP FD (Chart B)
Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-down on the DP.

2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [DP FD(ChartB)].

4 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

5 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

Method: DP FU (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value

1 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP.

2 Enter maintenance item U411.

3 Select [Target].

4 Press the [<] [>] keys, [#] or [*] key to select [Auto].

5 Select [DP FU(ChartA)] using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

6 Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.

7 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the
barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

6-135
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Manual input of the target value

1 Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/N:
302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425.

2 Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-up on the DP.

3 Enter maintenance item U411.

4 Select [Target].

5 Press the [<] [>] keys, [#] or [*] key to select [U425].

6 Select [DP FU(ChartA)] using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

7 Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.

8 When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

If an error occurs during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case,
check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action
00 Automatic adjustment success -

01 Black band detection error 1 Set the original correctly and

(Table scanning leading edge skew in the sub- execute the adjustment again.
scanning direction) 2 Check lighting of the lamp or
replace it.
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading edge
in the sub-scanning direction)

05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in the

main scanning direction)

06 Black band is not detected (Table near end in

the main scanning direction)

07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing edge

in the sub-scanning direction)

08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in the 1 Check the attachment position of
main scanning direction) DP.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in the
2 Check lighting of the lamp or
main scanning direction) replace it.
3 Check the back and front of the
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading edge in adjustment original.
the sub-scanning direction)

0b Black band is not detected

(Original check of DP leading edge in the sub-
scanning direction)

0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing edge in

the sub-scanning direction)

0d White band is not detected (DP trailing edge in

the sub-scanning direction)

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.

6-136
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Codes Contents Corrective action

0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning 1 Turn the power switch off then
direction on, and execute again.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning
2 Adjust manually.
direction (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)

11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning

direction

12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction

13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on, and
execute again.

14 Center line error in the main scanning direction 1 Turn the power off and on, and
execute again.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direction
2 Adjust manually.
16 Magnification error in the main scanning (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction

17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and execute
again.

18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and execute

again.

19 PWB replacement error -

1a Original error 1 Clean the contact glass and slit

glass.
2 Exchange the adjustment
original.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error

1d Original for the white reference correction

coefficient error

1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute again.
• Is the bar code dirty?
• Is the original position correct?
• Is the bar code position correct?

1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute again.
• Is the acquired bar code the same?
• Is the original position correct?
• Is the bar code position correct?

20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error

30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original error

63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-137
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U425 Set Target

Message: Set Target
Contents
Enter the lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Chart A Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning

Chart B Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning

Method: ChartA

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original

Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original

Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original

Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the adjustment original

Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the adjustment original

C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original

M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original

Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original

R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original

G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original

B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original

Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions

Setting: White

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 93.6 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 0.9 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.4 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-138
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Black

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 10.6 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.2 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.7 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Gray1

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 76.2 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.2 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 1.2 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Gray2

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 25.2 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.2 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.2 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Gray3

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 51.3 -

6-139
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

setting variation
a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -0.3 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 0.3 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: C

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 72.6 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -32.8 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -11.5 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: M

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 48.1 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 69.9 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -6.1 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Y

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 86.2 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -18.6 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 81.7 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-140
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: R

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 46.7 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 54.2 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 38.6 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: G

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 67.8 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -51.3 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 48.9 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: B

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using [<] [>]keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment
original.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100.0 38.8 -

a A value setting -200.0 to 200.0 25.3 -

b B value setting -200.0 to 200.0 -22.8 -

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-141
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Adjust Original

This setting is usually unnecessary.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading edge. 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm

Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left edge. 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm

Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge. 265.0 to 267.0 266.0 0.1mm

Measure the distances A, B and C from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt 3 of the
adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B:
105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)

4 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

5 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6 Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of black
belt 2.

7 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

8 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

9 Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at two positions.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the leading
edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and deduct A. E:
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at
180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)

6-142
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

10Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

11Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

30mm 105mm 180mm Black belt 1

A B C Leading edge
21mm

Black belt 2 D E
Left edge

[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2

Original for adjustment Black belt 3

(P/N: 302NM94340)

6-143
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: DP(ChartB)
This setting is usually unnecessary.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data
setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the leading edge. 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm

Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the left edge. 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm

Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the trailing edge. 265.0 to 269.0 267.0 0.1mm

1 Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.

2 Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

3 Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.

4 Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

5 Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.

6 Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the the [<] [>] keys keys.

7 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Original for adjustment

(P/N: 302NM94330)

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-144
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U429 Adjusting the color balance offset

Message: Color Balance
Contents
Displays/changes the density of each color in various image quality mode.
Purpose
Execute to change each color's balance.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

1 Select the image mode to change the setting.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Text+Photo Density of each color in the text+photo mode

Photo Density of each color in the photo mode

Photo/Printout Each color's density in the printed photo mode

Text Density of each color in the text mode

Graphics/Map Density of each color in the map mode

Copy/Printout Each color's density in the printed document mode

Setting: Text+Photo

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Photo

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

6-145
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Photo/Printout

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Text

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Graphics/Map

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

M Magenta color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

Y Yellow color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

K Black color balance offset value -5 to 5 0

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-146
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Copy/Printout

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
C Cyan color balance offset value 0 to 10 5

M Magenta color balance offset value 0 to 10 5

Y Yellow color balance offset value 0 to 10 5

K Black color balance offset value 0 to 10 5

When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the setting value is decreased.

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu/Counter] key as interruption copy mode
when executing this maintenance mode.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-147
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U464 ID correction setting

Message: Set ID Adj Mode
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Executes each setting of the calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration

Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.

Mode Color print mode setting

Leaving Time Setting the time to determine whether to execute calibration when recovering from Sleep
mode

Target Value Setting the target sensor value for the thick layer calibration and light intensity calibration

Calib Executing Calibration

Setting: Permission

1 Select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On Permitting Calibration

Off Prohibiting Calibration

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Time Interval

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Time(sec) Calibration interval 0 to 9999 1200 (sec)

Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Mode

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Short Color print mode setting: Short

Normal Color print mode setting: Normal

6-148
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents
Long Color print mode setting: Long

Auto Color print mode setting: Auto

Initial setting: Normal

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Leaving Time

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Time(min) Setting the sleep timer 0 to 1440 1080 (min)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Target Value

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Thickness (C) Toner layer calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 680

Thickness (M) Toner layer calibration (Magenta) 0 to 1000 625

Thickness (Y) Toner layer calibration (Yellow) 0 to 1000 550

Thickness (K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 700

Gamma (C) Light amount calibration (Cyan) 0 to 1000 445

Gamma (M) Light amount calibration (Magenta) 0 to 1000 445

Gamma (Y) Light amount calibration (Yellow) 0 to 1000 375

Gamma (K) Light amount calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 465

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Calib

1 Select the item to execute.

2 Press the [Start] key.

Calibration starts.
Same operation as [System Menu] - [Adjustment/Maintenance] - [Calibration].
Items Contents
Regist Execute the registration correction calibration

Full Executes Full Calibration

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-149
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U465 ID correction data

Message: ID Adj Data
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Laser Power].

The screen is switched.
Items Contents
Laser Power Displays the light intensity control value

The current value is displayed.

Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan light intensity control value.

M Displays the Magenta light intensity control value.

Y Displays the Yellow light intensity control value.

K Displays the Black light intensity control value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-150
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U467 Color registration correction operation setting

Message: Set Reg Adj Mode
Contents
Sets the color registration correction operation.
Also, sets the execution condition of the color registration correction by the LSU temperature variation.
Purpose
If the color registration is unstable due to the sensor failure, etc., set it to off to temporarily fix the control value.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Color Regist Sets the color registration correction

Timing Execute the color registration correction if the LSU temperature changes by the
specified value after the previous correction

Setting: Color Regist

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Permitting the color registration correction operation

Off Prohibiting the color registration correction operation

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Timing

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
LSU Temp Execution condition by the LSU temperature variation 2 to 20 10

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-151
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U468 Color registration correction data

Message: Cor Reg Data
Contents
Displays the color registration correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to refer to.

The screen is switched.
Items Contents
Auto (C) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Cyan)

Auto (M) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Magenta)

Auto (Y) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Yellow)

Manual (C) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Cyan)

Manual (M) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Magenta)

Manual (Y) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Yellow)

Initialize Initializing the correction result

Refer: Auto C) / Auto (M) / Auto (Y)

1 Select [Auto (C)], [Auto (M)] or [Auto (Y)].

The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Main Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the main scanning direction.

Sub Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the sub scanning direction.

Mag Automatic color registration correction value for magnification

Refer: Manual (C) / Manual (M) / Manual (Y)

1 Select [Manual (C)], [Manual (M)] or [Manual (Y)]

The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Main Scan Manual color registration adjustment value in the main scanning direction.

Sub Scan Manual color registration adjustment in the sub scanning direction.

Mag1 Manual color registration correction value 1 for magnification

Mag2 Manual color registration correction value 2 for magnification

Mag3 Manual color registration correction value 3 for magnification

Mag4 Manual color registration correction value 4 for magnification

6-152
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Method: Initialize

1 Select [Initialize].
The operation is executed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-153
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U469 Color registration adjustment

Message: Adj Cor Reg
Contents
Corrects the color registration data.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the laser scanner unit.
Make sure to execute U464 Calib before executing this maintenance mode.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Select [Auto] to output the automatic adjustment chart.
Select [Manual] to enter the setting display.
Items Contents
Auto Adjust the color registration automatically

Manual Adjust the color registration manually

Method: Auto

1 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
Print Output the automatic adjustment chart.

Execute Start scanning and execute the automatic adjustment.

Method: Print

1 Press the [Start] key.

Output the automatic adjustment chart.

Method: Execute

1 Place an original on the table and press the [Start] key.

Execute the automatic adjustment.

2 When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

An error code appears when there is an error.

Error codes list

Error codes Place of occurrence Factor
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected

S002 Scanned image position shifted in excess in the main

scanning direction.

S003 Scanned image position shifted in excess in the sub

scanning direction.

S004 Original skew is in excess

6-154
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error codes Place of occurrence Factor

S005 Original type mismatch

SFFF Other scanning error

E001 Engine Engine error

CFFF Controller Other errors

Setting: Manual

1 Select the item to execute.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Regist(CH) Sets the color registration adjustment value (CH)

Regist(MH) Sets the color registration adjustment value (MH)

Regist(YH) Sets the color registration adjustment value (YH)

Print Output the manual adjustment chart.

Method: Print

1 Press the [Start] key.

Output the manual adjustment chart.

Chart sample
There are H-1 to 9 in the chart For each color of m, c and y (upper part).

MH - 1 MH - 2 MH - 3 MH - 4 MH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I GECA 1 3 5 7 9 I GEC A 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

CH - 1 CH - 2 CH - 3 CH - 4 CH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

YH - 1 YH - 2 YH - 3 YH - 4 YH - 5
I GE C A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9 I G ECA 1 3 5 7 9 I G EC A 1 3 5 7 9
HF DB 0 2 4 68 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B 0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8 H F D B0 2 4 6 8

MV - 5
I H
I H
G F G
E E F
C D C D
A B B
1 0 A
1 0
3 2 3 2
5 4 5
4
7 6
8
6
7 8
9 9

CV - 3 YV -
CV - 1 CV - 5
I I I
I H H H I
H G G G
F F F H
G E E E G
F D C D D E F
E D C C
C B B B C D
B A A A
A 0 0 0 A B
0 1 1 1 0
1 2 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 2
3 4 4 4 3
4 5 5 5 4
5 6 6 5
7
6 7 6
8 7
8
7
8 7
6
8 9 9 9 8
9 9

YV - 1 YV - 5
I I
H
G G H
E F E F
D
C C D
B
A A B
0 0
1 1
3 2 3 2
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

Find the positions where two lines are best matched on each chart.
If it is at "0", the correction is unnecessary. In case of the illustration below, "B" is the value that should be set.

6-155
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Method: Regist(CH)

1 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
CH-1 CH-1 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

CH-2 CH-2 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

CH-3 CH-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

CH-4 CH-4 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

CH-5 CH-5 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

CV-3 CV-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Regist(MH)

1 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
MH-1 MH-1 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

MH-2 MH-2 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

MH-3 MH-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

MH-4 MH-4 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

MH-5 MH-5 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

MV-3 MV-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Regist(YH)

1 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
YH-1 YH-1 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

YH-2 YH-2 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

YH-3 YH-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

YH-4 YH-4 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

6-156
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents Setting Initial

range setting
YH-5 YH-5 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

YV-3 YV-3 adjustment value -9 to 9 -

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-157
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate

Message: Adj JPEG Rate
Contents
Sets the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce the image
roughness by changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged copy. If the set value is
reduced, compression is high and image quality is lowered. If the set value is increased, image quality is
improved but processing speed is slower.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy

Send Compression rate of the Send

System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system

Method: Copy

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode

Text Compression rate of the text mode

Setting: Photo

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90

CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-158
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Text

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90

CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Method: Send

1 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode

Text Compression rate of the text mode

HC-PDF(BG) Sets the compression rate for high compression PDF

HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).

HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression priority).

Setting: Photo

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)

Y2 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 40(%)

Y3 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 51(%)

Y4 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 70(%)

Y5 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)

CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)

CbCr2 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 40(%)

CbCr3 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 51(%)

CbCr4 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 70(%)

CbCr5 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-159
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Text

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)

Y2 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 40(%)

Y3 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 51(%)

Y4 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 70(%)

Y5 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)

CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)

CbCr2 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 40(%)

CbCr3 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 51(%)

CbCr4 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 70(%)

CbCr5 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: HC-PDF(BG)

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)

Y2 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 25(%)

Y3 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)

CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 15(%)

CbCr2 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 25(%)

CbCr3 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: HC-PDF(Char)

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)

Y2 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 75(%)

Y3 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)

CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 15(%)

6-160
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items Contents Setting Initial

range setting
CbCr2 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 75(%)

CbCr3 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 15(%)

Y2 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 25(%)

Y3 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 75(%)

CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 15(%)

CbCr2 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 25(%)

CbCr3 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 75(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: System

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)

CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu/Counter] key as interruption copy mode
when executing this maintenance mode.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-161
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U474 Checking the LSU cleaning

Message: Chk LSU Cleaning
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, sets the cleaning operation interval.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
Execute Executes the cleaning operation.

Cycle Sets the cleaning cycle.

Method: Execute

1 Press the [Start] key.

The LSU slit glass is cleaned.

Setting: Cycle

1 Select the item to set.

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting range Initial
setting
Cnt Sets the cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 *1 1000

*1: Set in 100 sheet increments

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-162
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U485 Image process mode setting

Message: Set Img Proc Mode
Contents
Sets the PDF image rotation.
Purpose
Change the PDF image rotation setting.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Mode Set the image process mode

Setting: Mode

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image

2 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
setting Contents
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter

1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image

2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter (CTM rotation)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-163
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U486 Color/BW mode setting

Message: Set ACS mode
Contents
Sets the operation mode after detecting color originals with color/BW mixed originals.
Purpose
Mode: To prioritize the productivity when copying color/BW mixed originals in ACS mode, change the setting to
Mode3. However, if setting it to Mode3, even when monochrome originals come after color originals, C/M/Y
developer maintenance counts are counted up.
Permission: set in case of color background image when printing an envelope in BW half speed mode
processed as color printing.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Mode Color/BW mode setting

Permission Permit monochrome printing at half speed

Setting: Mode

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
0: Mode1 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome mixed
mode is not high during continuous printing.
Monochrome printing remains in the color process speed after switching to color
and other process is switched .

1: Mode2 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome mixed
mode is high during continuous printing.
Even when receiving a monochrome print request during color printing, color
printing operation is continued until 9 pages and color mode is switched to
monochrome mode when starting printing of the 10th page (Color process is
stopped).

2: Mode3 Appropriate for users who mostly print in color.

Once switched to the color mode, monochrome printing after that remains in the
color process including the surface speed.

3: Auto Mode 1 to 3 is automatically selected depending on user's usage.

Select Mode 1 to 3 based on color print ratio and switch rate from the print
volume during the specified period.

Initial setting: 1 (Mode2)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-164
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Permission

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
1: On Permit: monochrome printing (three colors separated)

0: Off Prohibit: color printing (four color process)

Initial setting:0 (Off)

3 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-165
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U520 TDRS setting

Message: Set TDRS
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog

Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog

On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog

Setting: Registration

3 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password

Access Code Registers Access Code

Setting: Access Code

4 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager

TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL

TDRS User Sets the TDRS User name

Access Code Sets the TDRS access code

Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL

Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number

Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username

Text Sets the TDRS description

[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed.

When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and displayed.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information by pressing the
[OK] or [Start] key.
After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item that was performed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the item that has been
operated.
If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the "TDRS User" will be
indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be indicated.

6-166
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents
e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error

e0002 The USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network

e0003 The file to import does not exist in the USB t0003 An illegal parameter error
memory.

e0004 Reading from the USB memory has failed. t0004 Insufficient resource

e0005 Unmounting the USB memory has failed. t0005 Communication error

e0006 Moving or renaming the file has failed. t0006 Error in processing communication.

e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error

e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error

e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error

e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error

e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the server

e000C Creating the working directory has failed. t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.

e000D Deleting the working file has failed.

Setting: Information

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID

Agent Type Agent Type

Model Refers to the model name

Serial No Refers to the machine serial number

Offline Refers to the TDRS connection state

Setting: On/Off Config

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS

Off Disables TDRS

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

3 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-167
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U600 Initialize: All Data

Message: Init: All Data
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to
the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file
system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.

2 Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code

OEM Code Sets the OEM code

Execute Executing data initialization

No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

3 Select [Execute].

4 Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.

Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.

5 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.

The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.

Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)

Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)

Unknown Country (When both are unknown)

Destination code list

Destination Destination Destination Destination
code code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European nations)

007 Argentina ↑ Italy

009 Australia ↑ Germany

022 Brazil ↑ Spain

038 China ↑ U.K.

080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands

6-168
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Destination Destination Destination Destination

code code
084 Indonesia 253 Sweden

088 Israel ↑ France

097 Korea ↑ Austria

181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland

250 Russia ↑ Belgium

108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark

115 Mexico ↑ Finland

126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal

136 Peru ↑ Ireland

137 Philippines ↑ Norway

152 Middle East 254 Taiwan

156 Singapore

159 South Africa

169 Thailand

6-169
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U601 Initialize: Keep data

Message: Init Keep Data
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and
OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.

2 Select [Country Code].

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Refer to the destination code list. (See page P.6-221)
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code

OEM Code Sets the OEM code

Execute Executing data initialization

No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

4 Select [Execute].

5 Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.

Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.

6 The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.

The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)

Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)

Unknown Country (When both are unknown)

6-170
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U603 User data 1

Message: User Data 1
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Line Type].

Items Contents
Line Type Line Type

3 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
DTMF DTMF

10PPS 10PPS

20PPS 20PPS

Initial setting: DTMF

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-171
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U604 User data 2

Message: User Data 2
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Rings(F/T)#].

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Rings (F/T) # Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 0 (100 V model)
1 (220-240 V model)
2 (120 V model / Australia)
3 (New Zealand)

If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-172
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U605 Data clear

Message: Clr Data
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Clear Com.Rec.].

Items Contents
Comm Rec Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

3 Press the [Start] key.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-173
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U610 System 1
Message: System Setting 1
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction
mode.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR) in the
auto reduction mode.

Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.

Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction mode.

Setting: Cut Line: A4

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on
a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.

Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge
margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Cut Line: 100%

Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are
recorded on the next page.

6-174
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 0 to 22 3 -
100% magnification.

Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease the
value if there is dropout in received image.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on
a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.

Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trailing edge
margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-175
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U611 System 2
Message: System Setting 2
Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is
set.

Setting: ADJ LINES

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 22 -
A4 paper is set.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter 0 to 22 26 -
size paper is set.

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-176
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-177
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U612 System 3
Message: System Setting 3
Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction

Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.

Setting: Auto Reduct

Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at 100%
magnification.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the FAX paper.

Off Auto reduction is not performed.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.

Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.

On Automatically printed out after communication.

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-178
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U620 FAX system

Message: FAX System
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode

3 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection

Cont Sets the continuous type detection

Initial setting: One

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-179
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U625 Communication settings

Message: Set Comm
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete
transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing

Setting: Interval

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Sets the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 minutes -

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Times

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial Data
range setting variation
Sets the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-180
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U630 Communication control procedures 1

Message: Comm Ctrl 1
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.

RX Speed Sets the reception speed.

TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.

RX Echo Sets the reception speed.

Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected
for transmission regardless of this setting.

1 Select the communication speed.

Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps

9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps

4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps

2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps

Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has the
V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.

1 Select the reception speed.

Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter

9600bps V.29, V.27ter

4800bps V.27ter

2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)

6-181
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Initial setting: 14400bps

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with echo
at the transmitter side.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.

300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.

Initial setting: 300

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the receiver side.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.

75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.

Initial setting: 75

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-182
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U631 Communication control procedures 2

Message: Comm Ctrl 2
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.

ECM RX Sets ECM reception.

CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.

Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.

Off ECM transmission is disabled.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.

Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.

Off ECM reception is disabled.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-183
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: CED Freq

Sets the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the
international communication.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
2100 2100Hz

1100 1100Hz

Initial setting: 2100

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-184
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U632 Communication control procedures 3

Message: Comm Ctrl 3
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.

Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.

Setting: DIS 4Byte

Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.

Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode. Sets the line type for FAX use

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.

2Time Detects CNG twice.

Initial setting: 1Time (100 V)/2Time (Others)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-185
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U633 Communication control procedures 4

Message: Comm Ctrl 4
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.

V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).

DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.

RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.

Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.

TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.

RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.

Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.

Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: DIS 2Res

Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective
measures for transmission errors and other problems.

6-186
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.

Twice Responds to the second signal.

Initial setting: Once

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: RTN Check

Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur frequently
due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%

10% Error line rate of 10%

15% Error line rate of 15%

20% Error line rate of 20%

Initial setting: 15%

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-187
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U635 Communication control procedures 5

Message: Comm Ctrl 5
Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as one of
measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
Relax the communication conditions

Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [TCF Check].

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
TCF Check Sets the allowed error bytes when detecting the TCF signal 1 to 255 0

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-188
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U640 Communication time setting 1

Message: Comm Time 1
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.

Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value
Items Contents Setting Initial
range setting
Time(One) Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching. 0 to 255 7
1 (New Zealand)

Time (Cont) Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching. 0 to 255 80

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-189
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U641 Communication time setting 2

Message: Comm Time 2
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
T0 Time Out Sets the T0 time-out time.

T1 Time Out Sets the T1 time-out time.

T2 Time Out Sets the T2 time-out time.

Ta Time Out Sets the Ta time-out time.

Tb1 Time Out Sets the Tb1 time-out time.

Tb2 Time Out Sets the Tb2 time-out time.

Tc Time Out Sets the Tc time-out time.

Td Time Out Sets the Td time-out time.

Setting: T0 Time Out

Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the
destination unit sets the auto switching function.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 s 56
58 (100 V)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: T1 Time Out

Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
This setting is usually unnecessary.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 s 36
38 (100 V model)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-190
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: T2 Time Out

The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Ta Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-18). If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or
passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception
error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting range Initial setting
Sets the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Ring back tone send start

Start of fax reception

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring detection

Rings

Tb1 Ta

Tb2

Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time

Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/telephone
automatic switching mode, (See figure 1-3-18). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic
FAX/telephone switching.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting range Initial setting
Sets the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6-191
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the
automatic FAX/telephone switching.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a connected
handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal phone after
this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as a
telephone.

1 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sets the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 30 (100 V model)
6 (220-240 V model)
9 (120 V model)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-192
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U650 Modem 1
Message: Modem 1
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.

Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.

RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.

Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr

1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr

1 Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].

Initial setting: 0dB

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: RX Mdm Level

1 Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].

Initial setting: -43dBm

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-193
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U651 Modem 2
Message: Modem 2
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents Setting Initial setting
range
Sgl LVL Modem Sets the modem output level -15 to 0 -10 (100 V model)
-11 (220-240 V model/120 V
model)
-12 (Australia)

DTMF LEV (Cent) DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -9 (100 V model)
-8 (220-240 V model)
-6 (120 V model)
-7 (Australia)
-8 (New Zealand)

DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-194
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U660 Ring setting

Message: Set Calls
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to set.

The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection

Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.

Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.

PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection

DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.

Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.

PBX Connecting to the PBX

Initial setting: PSTN

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected
to a public switched telephone network.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.

Off The dial tone is not detected.

Initial setting: On
Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: Busy Tone

Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not
detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may be
improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.

6-195
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.

Off Does not detect the busy tone.

Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode

Loop Code number mode

Initial setting: Loop

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.

Off Does not detect the loop current before dialing.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-196
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U670 List output

Message: Output List
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is pressed
to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

3 Press the [Start] key.

4 Output selected list.

Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential boxes,
firmware versions and other information.

Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.

Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance mode
(self-status report).

Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.

Error List Output the error list.

Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order

Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.

One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.

Group List Outputs the group list.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-197
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U695 FAX function customization

Message: Customize FAX Func
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method

1 Select the item to set.

Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.

A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.

Setting: FAX Bulk TX

1 By using the [<] [>] keys keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.

Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.

Initial setting: On

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg

1 By using the [<] [>] keys keys, select [On] or [Off].

Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3

Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4

Initial setting: Off

2 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-198
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U699 Software switch: Set

Message: Set Soft SW
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [SW No.].

3 Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)

4 Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.

Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

5 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. Bit Contents
36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34

6-199
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Bit Contents

41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or more

Communication time setting

No. Bit Contents
53 76543210 T3 timeout setting

54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)

55 76543210 T5 timeout setting

60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal

63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)

64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception

66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo

68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8

Modem setting
No. Bit Contents
89 76543 RX gain adjust

NCU setting
No. Bit Contents
121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern

122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern

1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching

125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN

126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8

Calling time setting

No. Bit Contents
133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time

134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time

141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)

142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)

143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection

144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection

145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected

147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)

148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time

149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit

151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time

6-200
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U901 Clearing the counters by paper source

Message: Clr Paper FD Cnt
Contents
Displays and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance
parts.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Display/clear the MP tray feed counter

Cass1 Displays/clears Cassette 1 count

Cass2 *1 Displays Cassette 2 count

Cass3 *2 Displays Cassette 3 count

Cass4 *3 Displays Cassette 4 count

Dup Displays/clears the duplex unit count

*1: 500 PF only, *2: 500×2/2000 PF only, *3: 500×2 PF only

2 Select the counter to clear.

Unable to clear [Cass2], [Cass3] and [Cass4]

3 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-201
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U903 Clearing the jam counter

Message: Clr Paper JAM Cnt
Contents
Displays/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts

Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts

Method: Cnt

1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.

2 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

3 Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

4 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.

Method: Total Cnt

1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.

2 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-202
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U904 Clearing the service call error counter

Message: Clr Svc Call Cnt
Contents
Displays/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the maintenance parts.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

Items Contents
Cnt Displays/clears the service call counter.

Total Cnt Displays accumulate service call error counts.

Method: Cnt

1 Select [Cnt].
Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.

2 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

3 Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.

Individual counters cannot be cleared.

4 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.

Method: Total Cnt

1 Select [Total Cnt].

Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.

2 Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.

Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-203
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U905 Optional counter

Message: Option Cnt
Contents
Displays the counter values of the document processor and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor or inner finisher.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the device to check.

Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor count.

DF Displays the document finisher count.

Method: DP
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.

RADP Duplex original count is displayed.

Method: DF
Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Displays the sorter counter.

Staple Displays the staple counter.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-204
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U906 Resetting the partial operation

Message: Reset Dis Func
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after repairing the
parts.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.

3 Press the [Start] key to release the partial operation.

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U908 Total counter

Message: Total Cnt
Contents
Displays the total counter.
Purpose
Displays the total counter for check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the total count.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-205
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U910 Black rate data

Message: Clr Coverage Dat
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on the
service status page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.

3 Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U917 Counter by media type

Message: Paper SZ Cnt
Contents
Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Displays the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A4 Displays A4 feed counts

B5 Displays B5 feed counts

A5 Displays A5 feed counts

Folio Displays Folio feed counts

Legal Displays Legal feed counts

Letter Displays Letter feed counts

Statement Displays Statement feed counts

ETC Displays paper feed counts of Other.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-206
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U917 Retrieve the backup data

Message: R/W Bkup Data
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB memory to
the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information

Method

1 Turn the power switch off.

2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.

3 Turn the power switch on.

Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.

4 Enter maintenance mode U917.

5 Select [Export] or [Import], and press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.

Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.

6 Select the object item.

Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.
Items Contents Depending data*
Address Address book information -

Job Accnt Job accounting information -

One Touch One-touch key information Address book information

User User management information Job accounting information

Document Document box information Job accounting, User information

Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information

Fax Fwd FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information

System System setting information -

Network Network setting information -

Job Set Job setting information -

Printer Printer setting information -

Fax Set FAX setting information -

Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User

management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting

Panel Set Panel setting information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX
setting and Program

Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or written.

6-207
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Select the object item.

8 Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.

The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.

9 [Finish] appears after normal completion.

10When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.

Error codes
Codes Contents
e000 Unspecified error

e0001 Parameter error

e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.

e0003 The XML file to import does not exist

e0004 The exported file does not exist

e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook

e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch

e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management

e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data

e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data

e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration

e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters

e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting

e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts

e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information

e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data

e0c00 to toe0cff Error in handling printer data

e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data

e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes

e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process

e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF

e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF

e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import

(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header

e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-208
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U920 Billing counter

Message: Chg Cnt
Contents
Displays the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Switched to each display screen.
Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.
Items Contents
Col Copy H Color copy counts (Coverage: High)

Col Copy M Color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)

Col Copy L Color copy counts (Coverage: Low)

Mono Copy Displays mono color copy count

B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.

Col Prn H Color print counts (Coverage: High)

Col Prn M Color print counts (Coverage: Middle)

Col Prn L Color print counts (Coverage: Low)

B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed

B/W FAX FAX count

Simplex Simplex print count is displayed

Duplex Duplex print count is displayed

Comb(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed

Comb(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed

Comb(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-209
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

Message: Clr Chg/Life Cnt
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or
less.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

3 Press the [Start] key.

Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U928 Machine life counter

Message: Life Cnt
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The current machine life counts is displayed.

Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count

Color Cnt Displays the machine life count (color)

Clear Clears the count

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-210
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U930 Clear the main charger roller counts

Message: Clr Chg Cnt
Contents
Displays and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
C The current main charger roller count for C is displayed.

M The current main charger roller count for M is displayed.

Y The current main charger roller count for Y is displayed.

K The current main charger roller count for K is displayed.

Method: Clear

1 Select the item to set.

1 Select [Clear].

2 Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-211
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U952 MMaintenance mode workflow

Message: Mainte Work Flow
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB memory.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select the item to execute.

The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.

Exec(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.

Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.

Entry(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.

Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.

Log Displays the latest workflow execution history.

Method: Continue

1 Select maintenance item number to execute.

2 Press the [Start] key.

Selected maintenance mode is executed.

Method: Execute (USB)

1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.

2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.

3 Turn the power switch on.

4 Enter maintenance item U952.

5 Select [Exec(USB)].

6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

7 Press the [Start] key.

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.

6-212
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

Method: Excute

1 Select the place to save the data to execute.

Items Contents
Data 1 - 6 Workflow save area in the main unit

2 Select the item to execute.

3 Press the [Start] key to execute the process.

Method: Entry(USB)

1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.

2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.

3 Turn the power switch on.

4 Enter maintenance item U952.

5 Select [Entry(USB)].

6 Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

7 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit

8 Select [Execute].
Registers the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.

Method: Entry

1 Select [Entry].

2 Select the workflow save area.

Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit

3 By using the [<] [>] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

5 Press the [Start] key.

Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.

6-213
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

e.g.
When inserting a USB memory the following items can be registered: commands, texts and maintenance
numbers (variable).
File format: xxx.mwf

1, SET UP, 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278

2, WARRANTY, 089, 000
3, MK-A, 930, 127, 167, 464, 469, 410, 251
4, MK-B, 930, 464, 469, 410, 251
5, EH SETUP, 411, 034, 246, 211

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-214
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U964 Log check

Contents
Transfer the log files save in the NAND to a USB memory.
Transfer screenshots at log and log acquisition.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the NAND to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method

1 Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.

2 Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.

3 Turn the power switch on.

4 Enter maintenance item U954.

5 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

6 Press the [Start] key.

Starts transferring the log files saved in the NAND to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)

7 [Completed] appears after normal completion.

8 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
An error code appears when there is an error.

Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Log retrieving starts when pressing four keys on the operation panel (*, 8, 6, Clear) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns off when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.

Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed

No File No file

Mount Error USB memory mount error

File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory

Copy Error NAND to USB memory copy failure

Unmount Error USB memory unmount error

Other Error Other error

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-215
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U969 Toner area code

Message: Toner Area Code
Contents
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check the currently set toner area code and model code
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code

Model Code Model code

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U977 Setting the data capture mode

Message: Set Data Capture
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

2 Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

3 Press the [Start] key.

When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.

Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data processing
or is write-protected.

4 USB memory is full.

50 Other error occurs

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-216
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U984 Developer unit number

Message: Dev No.
Contents
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Displays the developer unit number.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit number.

M Displays the Magenta developer unit number.

Y Indicates the Yellow developer unit number.

K Displays the Black developer unit number.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U985 Developer unit history

Message: Dev History
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Displays the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit history.

M Displays the Magenta developer unit history.

Y Indicates the Yellow developer unit history.

K Displays the Black developer unit history.

Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history

Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-217
Maintenance mode > [CONFIDENTIAL]

U991 Scanner counter

Message: Scanner Counter
Contents
Displays the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method

1 Press the [Start] key.

Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Displays times of copy and scan operations.

Fax Scan Displays times of FAX scan operations.

Other Scan Displays times of other scan operations.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

6-218
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

6 - 2 Service mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing the service mode

[Message Display]

Ready to copy

1. Press the System Menu Key.

System Menu:
Quick Setup Wisard
Language
Report
Counter

Cassette/MP Tray Setting

Common Setting
Home
Copy
Send
Document Box
FAX *1
Application

Inter net
Address Book/One touch
User Login/Job Accounting
Printer

System/Network 3. Select [Service Setting] using

Date/Timer/Energy Saver WKH>Ÿ@>ź@NH\V
Adjustment/Maintenance Adjustment/Maintenance:
Laser Scanner Cleaning 4. Select the item to be set.
2. Select [Adjustment/Maintenance] Service Setting Service Setting:
XVLQJWKH>Ÿ@>ź@NH\V FAX Country Code *1
FAX Call Settings *1
Alutitude Adjustment
MC

DEV-CLN
Memory Diagnostics

*1: Displays only when the FAX kit is installed

Note
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and password, and select [Login].
Login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login User Name/Login Password (30ppm model): 3000 / 3000

6-219
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Service mode list

Items Contents Page
FAX country code *1 Initializes all data and image memory. P.6-220

FAX recall setting *1 Set for connection. P.6-222

Altitude Adjustment Sets the altitude adjustment mode. P.6-223

MC Sets the main charger output. P.6-223

DEV-CLN Execute developer refreshing. P.6-224

Memory diagnostics Diagnose memory at power up (whether reading and writing are P.6-224
executable).

*1: For FAX kit installed model only

(3) Descriptions of service modes

FAX country code

Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB according to
the destination and OEM setting.
Purpose
To initialize the FAX PWB.
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [FAX country code].

3 Press the [Start] key.

4 Enter the destination code using the numeric keys.

5 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

6 Press the [Start] key. Data initialization starts.

6-220
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

Destination code list

Destination Destination Destination Destination
code code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European nations)

007 Argentina ↑ Italy

009 Australia ↑ Germany

022 Brazil ↑ Spain

038 China ↑ U.K.

080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands

084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden

088 Israel ↑ France

097 Korea ↑ Austria

181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland

250 Russia ↑ Belgium

108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark

115 Mexico ↑ Finland

126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal

136 Peru ↑ Ireland

137 Philippines ↑ Norway

152 Middle East 254 Taiwan

156 Singapore

159 South Africa

169 Thailand

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

6-221
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

FAX ringing setting

Contents
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
Purpose
Execute as required.
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [FAX recall setting].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Items Contents
Exchange selection PBX/PSTN connection setting

PBX setting PBX external connection setting

PSTN connection number PSTN access code setting

setting

Setting: Exchange selection

1 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [Exchange selection].

2 Press the [Start] key.

3 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [PBX] or [PSTN].

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: PBX setting

1 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [PBX setting].

2 Press the [Start] key.

3 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [Loop], [Flash] or [Earth].

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Setting: PSTN access code setting

1 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [PSTN connection number setting].

2 Press the [Start] key.

3 Enter the access code using the numeric keys. (0 to9, 00 to 99)

4 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

6-222
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

Altitude Adjustment
Contents
Sets the main charger output.
Executable only when the altitude adjustment mode is set to "Normal".
Purpose
Execute when the image density declines, dirt of a background or an offset has occurred.
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [MC].

3 Press the [Start] key.

4 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select the item to set.

Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Normal Sets 1000m or less

1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m

2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m

3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

MC
Contents
Sets the main charger output.
Executable only when the altitude adjustment mode is set to "Normal".
Purpose
Execute when the image density declines, dirt of a background or an offset has occurred.
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [MC].

3 Press the [Start] key.

4 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select the setting "1" to "7".

5 Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

6-223
Maintenance mode > Service mode [CONFIDENTIAL]

DEV-CLN
Contents
The laser output of the image data, exposure, developing and primary transfer is executed for ten pages
equivalent. (Paper is not fed)
Purpose
Execute when the image failure or problem in the developer unit occurs
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [DEV-CLN].

3 Press the [Start] key.

Developer refresh is executed by forming image with toner on the primary transfer belt.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

Memory diagnostics
Contents
Diagnose memory at power-up (whether reading and writing are executable).
Purpose
Check if the memory device is defective that may cause an unresolvable F-code error, locking or abnormal
images. Checks the memory failure.
Method

1 Enter the Service Setting menu.

2 Using the [Up/Down cursor] key, select [Mem.Diagnostics].

3 Press [Start].

4 Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.

Completion
Press the [Stop] key.

6-224
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

7Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
How to isolate the cause
• Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
• Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor

1 Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-107).

(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CCD failure at scanning factor)

Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Main unit CCD scan)
b. On the contact glass (scan by the main unit CCD)

2 Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page 7-134).

(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Primary transfer image formation process failure)

Image data flow

Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Main PWB
(LSU)

Sending :

LED lamp CCD Main PWB PC

Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Main PWB
(LSU)

7-1
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side or back side through the DP)
No. Contents Image sample
(2-1) Abnormal image(7-4Page)

(2-2) Background is colored(7-4Page)

(2-3) Black dots or color dots(7-4Page)

(2-4) Horizontal black streaks(7-5Page)

(2-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)(7-5Page)

(2-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white)(7-6Page)

(2-7) Entire blank image (white or black)(7-6Page)

(2-8) Image is blurred(7-7Page)

7-2
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents Image sample

(2-9) Part of the image is not copied(7-7Page)

(2-10) The entire image is light(7-7Page)

(2-11) Mismatch of the center line between the original

and copy image(7-8Page)

(2-12) Regular mismatch of the leading edge between

the original and copy image(7-9Page)

(2-13) Skewed image(7-9Page)

(2-14) Blurred characters(7-10Page)

(2-15) Color shift(7-10Page)

(2-16) Moire(7-11Page)

(2-17) A part of the image is dark or light(7-11Page)

7-3
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Content of Scanner Factors

(2-1)Abnormal image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
2 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-2)Background is colored
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings The Background Density Set [Background Adjustment] to [Auto].
Adjustment is not set.
2 Changing the settings The original background Set [Background Adjustment] to [Manual] to
density is dark. The adjust the background density.
background density
adjustment is dark.
3 Reloading the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
4 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
5 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)] if the same
phenomenon occurs at the table scanning.
6 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
7 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
8 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty or not Reattach or clean the slit glass.
properly attached.
9 Replacing the document The DP frame is deformed or Replace the document processor.
Processor the DP hinges are faulty.
10 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
11 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-3)Black dots or color dots

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
3 Cleaning the scanner carriage Dust adheres on the scanner Clean the scanner carriage.
carriage.
4 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
5 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.

7-4
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-4)Horizontal black streaks

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
3 Executing U072 The image at the back side of Adjust the value at U072 [Front].
the size indication plate.
(U072 [Front] adjustment
value is not proper.)
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside of Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
the size indication plate is
scanned.
(The adjustment value of
[Table(ChartA)] at U411 is
incorrect.)
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-5)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the slit glass and the The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass and the DP conveying
DP original conveying guide guide.
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass.
of the contact glass is dirty.
3 Cleaning the scanner carriage Dust adheres on the scanner Clean the scanner carriage.
carriage.
4 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
5 Changing the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
detected original size are
mismatched.
6 Cleaning the platen cover The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
7 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust the value at U071 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
8 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
incorrect. (Streaks or bands
appear out of the original.)
9 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust the value at U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
10 Executing U072 The center line settings are Adjust the value at U072 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)

7-5
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
incorrect. (Streaks or bands
appear out of the original.)
12 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
13 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
14 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-6)Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Checking the scanner carriage Dust adheres on the scanner Remove dust in the laser path of the scanner
carriage. carriage.
3 Cleaning the slit glass and the The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass and the DP conveying
DP original conveying guide guide.
4 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
5 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-7)Entire blank image (white or black)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
2 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is not properly Reattach the slit glass.
attached.
3 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust the value at U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
4 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
7 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is not Reattach the scanner drive gear.
gear properly attached.
8 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
9 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

7-6
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-8)Image is blurred
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation (slit The slit glass has Remove condensation on the slit glass.
glass) condensation.
3 Removing condensation The lens has condensation. Remove condensation on the lens of the
(scanner carriage) scanner carriage.
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
5 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.
6 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

(2-9)Part of the image is not copied

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
2 Changing the settings The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
3 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
4 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is not properly Reattach the slit glass.
attached.
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-10)The entire image is light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust the value at U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
2 Cleaning the slit glass and the The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass and the DP conveying
DP original conveying guide guide.
3 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is not properly Reattach the slit glass.
attached.
4 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
5 Changing the settings The density is not properly Change [EcoPrint] to [Off] in [System Menu/
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function
'On'.) Defaults].

7-7
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

6 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
7 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make dark.
density] is set to 'Off'.)
8 Changing the settings [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On]. [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
9 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartA)].
adjusted.
11 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
12 Replacing the scanner The LED PWB or CCD PWB is Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage faulty. U411.
13 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(2-11)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image
(When scanning the front side through the DP)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust the value at U072 [Front].
the front page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
when DP scanning is not
executed.

(When scanning the back side through the DP)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reloading the original The originals are not properly Reset the originals.
set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scanning Adjust the value at U072 [Back].
the back page of the originals
at the document processor is
not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjustment Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)].
when DP scanning is not
executed.

7-8
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and copy image
(When scanning the front side through the DP)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust the value at U071 [Front Head].
original leading edge at the
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(ChartB)].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and bushing.
roller bushing is dirty.
4 Replacing the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying roller.
roller worn down.
5 Applying the grease The DP conveying motor Apply the grease to the DP drive gears.
rotates irregularly, and so the
excessive load is applied to
the drive gear.
6 Checking the DP conveying DP conveying motor is not Reattach the DP conveying motor and
motor properly attached. The reconnect the connector. Execute U243
connector is not properly [Conv Motor(CW)]. If it does not operate
connected or the DP correctly, replace it.
conveying motor is faulty.

(When scanning the back side through the DP)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust the value at U071 [Back Head].
leading edge on the back page
of the originals at the
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FD(ChartB)].
scanning an original on the DP
is incorrect.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and bushing.
roller bushing is dirty.
4 Replacing the DP conveying The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying roller.
roller worn down.
5 Applying the grease The DP conveying motor Apply the grease to the DP drive gears.
rotates irregularly, and so the
excessive load is applied to
the drive gear.
6 Checking the DP conveying DP conveying motor is not Reattach the DP conveying motor and
motor properly attached. The reconnect the connector. Execute U243
connector is not properly [Conv Motor(CW)]. If it does not operate
connected or the DP correctly, replace it.
conveying motor is faulty.

(2-13)Skewed image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
2 Resetting the DP original The original skews. Relocate the original width guides.
width guides

7-9
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Cleaning the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Clean the DP feed roller.
can be removed by cleaning.)
4 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop amount at U942.
before registration is improper.
5 Replacing the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. (It Replace the DP feed roller.
cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration roller is Clean the DP registration roller.
roller dirty.
7 Reattaching the DP The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration pulley.
registration pulley registration pulley is faulty.

(2-14)Blurred characters
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The originals out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification are used. (They specifications.
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Correcting the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and bushing.
roller and the bushings bushing is dirty.
4 Reattaching the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulleys and the
pulley does not rotate smoothly. pressure springs.
5 Reattaching the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the scanning guide The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
deformed.
7 Reinstalling the document The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
processor not properly installed on the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.

(2-15)Color shift
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The originals out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification are used. (They specifications.
are thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Correcting the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
original is bent. the original.
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller or the Clean the DP conveying roller and the
roller bushing is dirty. bushing.
4 Reattaching the DP conveying The original conveying pulley Reattach the DP conveying pulley and the
pulley does not rotate smoothly. pressure spring.
5 Reattaching the DP drive parts The DP drive parts are not Reattach the DP drive parts.
properly attached.
6 Replacing the scanning guide The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
deformed.
7 Reinstalling the document The document processor is Check the positioning of the document
processor not properly installed on the processor and tighten the screws again.
main unit.

7-10
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

8 Replacing the DP hinge The DP hinges are faulty. (The Replace the DP hinges.
hinge's vertical motion is
unsmooth, the opened DP
cannot be held, and the DP is
skewed horizontally.)

(2-16)Moire
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings The original imaging quality is Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/
not properly set. (Moire Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
changes depending on the [Function Defaults].
print quality.)
2 Reloading the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
set. (Moire appears in the them.
original scanning direction.)

(2-17)A part of the image is dark or light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the situation The table scanning of originals Check if the same phenomenon occurs
is faulty. when scanning on the contact glass, perform
the process of [the part of the image is dark
or bright (when scanning on the contact
glass)]..
2 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
3 Reattaching the slit glass The slit glass is bent. Reattach the slit glass.
4 Reattaching the scanning The scanning guide is not Reattach the scanning guide.
guide properly attached.

7-11
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

No. Contents Image sample
(3-1) Abnormal image(7-14Page)

(3-2) Background is colored(7-14Page)

(3-3) Black dots or color dots(7-14Page)

(3-4) Horizontal black streaks(7-14Page)

(3-5) Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)(7-

15Page)

(3-6) Vertical streaks or bands (white)(7-15Page)

(3-7) Entire blank image (white or black)(7-16Page)

(3-8) Image is blurred(7-16Page)

7-12
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents Image sample

(3-9) Part of the image is not copied(7-17Page)

(3-10) The entire image is light(7-17Page)

(3-11) Mismatch of the center line between the original

and copy image(7-18Page)

(3-12) Regular mismatch of the leading edge between

the original and copy image(7-18Page)

(3-13) Skewed image(7-18Page)

(3-14) Blurred characters / Color Shift(7-19Page)

(3-15) Moire(7-19Page)

(3-16) A part of the image is dark or light(7-19Page)

7-13
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-1)Abnormal image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
2 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-2)Background is colored
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings The Background Density Set [Background Adjustment] to [Auto].
Adjustment is not set.
2 Changing the settings The original background Set [Background Adjustment] to [Manual] to
density is dark. The adjust the background density.
background density
adjustment is dark.
3 Reloading the original The original is raised at Set the original during pressing.
scanning.
4 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
5 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
6 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
7 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
8 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
9 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-3)Black dots or color dots

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
3 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
4 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
5 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-4)Horizontal black streaks

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.

7-14
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
3 Executing U066 The image at the backside of Adjust the value at U071 [Front].
the size direction plate is
scanned.
(The adjustment value of
[Front] at U066 is incorrect.)
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside of Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
the size indication plate is
scanned.
(The adjustment value of
[Table(ChartA)] at U411 is
incorrect.)
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-5)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Changing the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
detected original size are
mismatched.
3 Cleaning the original mat The original mat is dirty. Clean the original mat.
4 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust the value at U071 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
incorrect. (Streaks or bands
appear out of the original.)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and the shading
shading plate at the backside plate at the backside of the contact glass.
of the contact glass is dirty.
7 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using an air-blower.
8 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
9 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
10 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-6)Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Checking the scanner carriage Dust adheres in the scanner Remove dust in the laser path of the scanner
carriage light path. carriage.

7-15
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Cleaning the scanner carriage Dust adheres on the scanner Clean the scanner carriage.
carriage.
4 Checking the shading plate The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the scanner
backside of the contact glass shading position.
is dirty.
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-7)Entire blank image (white or black)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The originals were set upside Reset the original to correct the front and
down. back direction.
2 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
3 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
4 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt comes Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt off.
5 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is not Reattach the scanner drive gear.
gear properly attached.
6 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
7 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-8)Image is blurred
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or replace it if
possible.
2 Removing condensation The contact glass has Remove the condensation on the contact
(contact glass) condensation. glass.
3 Removing condensation The scanner carriage has Remove condensation on the scanner
(scanner carriage) condensation. carriage.
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner is incorrect.
5 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
6 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

7-16
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-9)Part of the image is not copied

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings Marked part by highlighter pen Set [Highlight] to [On] at [System Menu/
on the original cannot be Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function
scanned. Defaults] > [Original Image].
2 Checking the original A part of the original is not Remove the part reflecting the light from the
printed out where the light is original, and copy it.
reflected.
3 Reloading the original The original is not set properly. Reset the originals.
4 Changing the settings The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
5 Changing the settings The Border Erase function is Lower the setting of the Border Erase.
not properly set. (Setting value
is too large.)
6 Cleaning the contact glass The original scanning side of Clean the original scanning side of the
the contact glass is dirty. contact glass.
7 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
8 Reattaching the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
9 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
10 Checking the scanner carriage The scanner carriage is not Reattach the scanner carriage. If not
properly attached or the CCD repaired, replace it and execute U411.
PWB is faulty.
11 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-10)The entire image is light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality according to the
adjusted. (The original type originals.
and image quality differs.)
2 Changing the settings The density is not properly Change [EcoPrint] to [Off] in [System Menu/
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set to Counter] > [Common Settings] > [Function
'On'.) Defaults].
3 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be dark.
adjusted. (The density setting
is too light.)
4 Changing the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Background Density
adjusted. ([Background Adjustment to make dark.
density] is set to 'Off'.)
5 Changing the settings [Prevent Bleed-thru] setting is Change to [Off] at [System Menu/Counter] >
[On]. [Common Setting] > [Function Defaults] >
[Prevent Bleed-thru].
6 Cleaning the shading plate The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the backside of
the contact glass.
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
8 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.

7-17
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

9 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
10 Replacing the scanner The LED lamp or the CCD Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage PWB is faulty. U411.
11 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(3-11)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The original is not properly set Reset the originals.
on the contact glass.
2 Reattaching the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is not Adjust the value at U071 [Front].
adjusted.
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scanning Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
adjustment is not executed.

(3-12)Regular mismatch of the leading edge between the original and copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
placed.
(The original leading edge is
not aligned to the contact
glass properly.)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust the value at U066 [Front].
timing is incorrect.
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
timing is incorrect.
4 Reattaching the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor.
sensor not properly attached.
5 Reattaching the scanner drive The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive belt.
belt loose.
6 Reattaching the scanner drive The attachment of the scanner Retighten the screw of the scanner drive
gear drive gear is loose. gear.

(3-13)Skewed image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reloading the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set. (The original is skewed.)
2 Reattaching the scanner The scanner carriage is not Reattach the scanner carriage.
carriage properly attached.

7-18
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-14)Blurred characters / Color Shift

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Removing foreign material There is a load on the scanner Remove foreign material on the ISU shaft.
movement since the foreign
material adheres on the ISU
shaft.
2 Reattaching the scanner There is a load on the scanner Reattach the scanner carriage.
carriage movement since the scanner
carriage is not properly
attached.
3 Adjusting the scanner motor A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt tension
belt tension. scanner movement since the properly.
belt tension is improper.

(3-15)Moire
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings The original imaging quality is Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/
not properly set. (Moire Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
changes depending on the [Function Defaults].
print quality.)
2 Reloading the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90 degrees and reset
set. (Moire appears in the them.
original scanning direction.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scanning Change the value at U065 [Main Scan] to
direction is large. (This reduce the scanner magnification in the main
problem occurs when the print scanning direction.
ratio is set as 100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(ChartA)].
scanner section is incorrect.

(3-16)A part of the image is dark or light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Changing the settings Image quality is not properly Set [Original Image] in [System Menu/
adjusted. (Original type and Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
image quality are [Function Defaults].
mismatched.)
2 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the paper creases of
creased. the original.
4 Reattaching the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
5 Cleaning the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
6 Reloading the booklet original The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
7 Reloading the booklet original Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while not bending the
bent contact glass. contact glass.
8 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
9 Replacing the scanner A part of the LED lamps dot Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage not light, the scanner carriage U411.
ISU shaft contact part is
deformed or the CCD PWB is
faulty.
10 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

7-19
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
No. Contents Image sample
(4-1) Background is colored
Background is colored(7-22Page)

(4-2) Black dots or color dots

Black dots or color dots(7-23Page)

(4-3) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

Horizontal streaks or band (White, black,
color)(7-23Page)

(4-4) Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)

Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)(7-
23Page)

(4-5) Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)(7-24Page)

(4-6) Entire blank image (white)

Entire blank image (white)(7-24Page)

(4-7) Image is blurred

Image is blurred(7-24Page)

(4-8) The image is not partly printed (blank or white

spots)
The image is not partly printed (blank or white
spots)(7-25Page)

7-20
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents Image sample

(4-9) The entire image is light
The entire image is light(7-25Page)

(4-10) Mismatch of the center line between the original

and copy image
Mismatch of the center line between the original
and copy image(7-25Page)

(4-11) Irregular mismatch between the original and

copy image (paper leading edge timing
variation)
Irregular mismatch between the original and
copy image (paper leading edge timing
variation)(7-26Page)

(4-12) Skewed image

Skewed image(7-26Page)

(4-13) Blurred characters

Blurred characters(7-26Page)

(4-14) Color shift in the main scanning direction

Color shift in the main scanning direction(7-
27Page)

(4-15) Color shift in the sub scanning direction

Color shift in the sub scanning direction(7-
27Page)

(4-16) Offset image

Offset image(7-27Page)

7-21
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents Image sample

(4-17) Color reproduction is poor
Color reproduction is poor(7-28Page)

(4-18) Uneven transfer

Uneven transfer(7-28Page)

(4-19) Paper creases

Paper creases(7-28Page)

(4-20) Dirt with toner on the paper edge

Dirt with toner on the paper edge(7-29Page)

(4-21) Dirty reverse side

Dirty reverse side(7-29Page)

(4-22) Fusing failure

Fusing failure(7-29Page)

Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(4-1)Background is colored
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
unit dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. After
cleaning, in case if not resolved even
performing the calibration and color
adjustment, replace the primary transfer unit.
2 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer bias contact so
bias contact contact is deformed. that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer bias Correct the secondary transfer bias contact
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. so that it grounds the shaft of the secondary
transfer roller securely.

7-22
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty. secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.

(4-2)Black dots or color dots

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary transfer There is long cycle dirt and If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
unit scratches straddling between (long period that spans between papers) of
papers at the outer peripheral the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. If it is
pitch of the transfer belt. not improved, replace the primary transfer
unit.
2 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty or has some scratches. secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.
3 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heat roller is dirty or In the case where image failure occurs at the
scratched circumferential pitch of the fuser heat roller,
clean it. If not resolved, replace the fuser
unit.

(4-3)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt.
2 Cleaning the fuser heat roller The fuser heat roller is dirty. Clean the fuser heat roller if an image failure
appears in the circumference interval.
3 Opening and reclosing the Only one side of the right Open and close the right cover (conveying
right cover cover (conveying unit) is unit).
closed, or the pressure spring
is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. If it is not fixed,
transfer unit properly attached or replace the secondary transfer unit.
deformed.
5 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit faulty.
6 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heat roller surface is Replace the fuser unit.
scratched.

(4-4)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the fuser separation The fuser separation nails are Clean the fuser separation claws.
claws dirty with toner.
2 Changing the settings The media type is not properly Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
set. > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
Settings] > [Media Type].
3 Cleaning the feed-shift guide There is toner dirt or welding Clean the feed-shift guide.
on the feed-shift guide.

7-23
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the separation brush The separation brush is dirty Clean the discharger brush by using the
with paper dust or toner. cleaning brush, etc.
5 Checking the primary transfer Surface of the transfer belt is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
unit dirty or scratched. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. If it is
not improved, replace the primary transfer
unit.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty, is deformed or is worn secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
down. clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.
7 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer cleaning Clean the primary transfer cleaning bias
cleaning bias contact bias contact smudges or is contact. Or, correct its shape so that it is
deformed. securely grounded.

(4-5)Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary transfer Surface of the transfer belt is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
unit dirty or scratched. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. If it is
not improved, replace the primary transfer
unit.
2 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty or has some scratches. secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.
3 Reattaching the feed-shift The paper is hitting the feed- Check the paper loop amount when
guide shift guide strongly. outputting the paper and reattach the feed-
shift guide.

(4-6)Entire blank image (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Opening and reclosing the The right cover (conveying Check the lock of the right cover (conveying
right cover unit) is not closed completely. unit), and then open and close the right
cover.
2 Replacing the engine PWB The ON signal of the Replace the engine PWB.
secondary transfer high-
voltage (3.3V to 0V) is not
output from the engine PWB.

(4-7)Image is blurred
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater and set U327 to
place humidity environment. [On] if necessary.
Ask users to store paper in a dry place.

7-24
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-8)The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage The paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater and set U327 to
place humidity environment. [On] if necessary.
Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
3 Changing the settings The media type is not properly Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
set. > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
Settings] > [Media Type].
4 Executing U161 The fuser temperature is Reset the fuser temperature to the default
shifted largely. value by executing U161.
5 Checking the primary transfer Surface of the transfer belt is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
unit dirty or scratched. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt. If it is
not improved, replace the primary transfer
unit.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty or has some scratches. secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.

(4-9)The entire image is light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater and set U327 to
place humidity environment. [On] if necessary.
Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
3 Opening and reclosing the The transfer current cannot be Open and close the right cover (conveying
right cover impressed since the right unit).
cover (conveying unit) is not
closed completely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the secondary transfer roller shifts,
transfer unit does not contact the transfer correct the pressure position.
belt or the contact is not
enough.
5 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer bias Clean the secondary transfer bias contact.
transfer bias contact cannot be impressed since the Or, correct its shape so that it is grounded
secondary transfer bias securely.
contact is dirty or deformed.

(4-10)Mismatch of the center line between the original and copy image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to match the paper size.
guides width guides do not match the
paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when image Adjust the center line at U034 [LSU Out Left].
writing the data is incorrect.

7-25
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-11)Irregular mismatch between the original and copy image (paper leading edge timing variation)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is not Adjust the leading edge timing by executing
properly adjusted. U034 [LSU Out Top]. Adjust it at 'Full' (for
full-speed), '3/4' (for 3/4-speed) or 'Half' (for
half-speed).
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop
registration is improper. amount before registration.
3 Checking the connection The feed conveying clutch Reconnect the connectors of feed/conveying
connectors are not properly clutches.
connected and they do not
operate smoothly.
4 Reattaching the conveying The feed conveying clutches Reattach the feed/conveying clutches.
are not properly connected
and they do not operate
smoothly.
5 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed/conveying clutches Replace feed drive unit.
are faulty and smooth
operation is not available.

(4-12)Skewed image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to match the paper size.
guides width guides do not match the
paper size.
2 Reattaching the paper width The paper width guides or the Reattach the paper width guides or MP
guides or MP paper width MP paper width guides are not paper width guides.
guides properly attached.
3 Executing U051 The paper loop amount before Execute U051 to adjust the paper loop
the secondary paper feeding amount before registration.
is insufficient.
4 Replacing the paper width The paper width guides or the Replace the paper width guides or the MP
guides or MP paper width MP paper width guides are paper width guides.
guides faulty.

(4-13)Blurred characters
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
specification.
2 Changing the settings The media type is not properly Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
set. > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
Settings] > [Media Type].
3 Applying the grease The drives from the conveying Apply the grease to the gear.
motors are not smoothly
transmitted.
4 Replacing the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser forwarding guide is Replace the fuser unit.
deformed or the fuser
pressure is uneven.

7-26
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-14)Color shift in the main scanning direction

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Adjusting the color registration Color Registration was Execute Calibration and then execute Color
executed without executing Registration.
Calibration.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty or the ID Check the opening / closing operation of the
shutter and cleaning the ID sensor shutter is not opened. ID sensor shutter and fix it if necessary. And,
sensor. clean the ID sensor.
3 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.

(4-15)Color shift in the sub scanning direction

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Adjusting the color registration Color Registration was Execute Calibration and then execute Color
executed without executing Registration.
Calibration.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty or the ID Check the opening / closing operation of the
shutter and cleaning the ID sensor shutter is not opened. ID sensor shutter and fix it if necessary. And,
sensor. clean the ID sensor.
3 Replacing the primary transfer Transfer belt is worn out. Check if the color registration patches
unit appear twice at the both edge of the transfer
belt. If it does not appear twice, replace the
primary transfer unit.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

(4-16)Offset image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing paper and changing Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the paper within the
setting specification, or change to the media type
setting closest to the specified paper.
2 Changing the settings The media type is not properly Change the settings according to the media
set. type (paper weight).
3 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt.
4 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failure appears with the
transfer roller is dirty. secondary transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
5 Executing U161 The higher fuser temperature Reset the fuser temperature to the default
is set. value by executing U161.
6 Cleaning the fuser heat roller The fuser heat roller is dirty. Clean the fuser heat roller if an image failure
appears in the circumference interval.
7 Replacing the primary transfer Transfer cleaning voltage is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit not applied due to the broken
wire in the primary transfer
unit.
8 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heat roller surface is Replace the fuser unit.
scratched.

7-27
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-17)Color reproduction is poor

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater and set U327 to
place humidity environment. [On] if necessary.
Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
3 Replacing the paper Rough paper for monochrome Use the color paper with smooth surface that
print is used. fits for color print.
4 Executing U140 Installation environment is Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at U140, and
high altitude. select the most proper mode.

(4-18)Uneven transfer
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Opening and reclosing the The right cover (conveying Open and close the right cover (conveying
right cover unit) is not closed completely. unit).
2 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer cleaning Clean the primary transfer cleaning bias
cleaning bias contact bias contact smudges or is contact. Or, correct its shape so that it is
deformed. securely grounded.
3 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is If the image failure occurs at the outer pitch
dirty. (long period that spans between papers) of
the transfer belt, clean the transfer belt.
4 Cleaning the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failure appears with the
transfer roller is dirty. secondary transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
5 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller Correct the pressure spring deformed. If it is
transfer unit is faulty. Or, the pressure not fixed, replace the secondary transfer
spring is deformed. unit.
6 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit scratched.
7 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer cleaning Clean the primary transfer cleaning bias
cleaning bias contact bias contact smudges or is contact. Or, correct its shape so that it is
deformed. securely grounded.
8 Replacing the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in the Replace the fuser unit.
drive section or the fuser
press-release section are
deformed or worn down.

(4-19)Paper creases
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to match the paper size.
guides width guides do not match the
paper size.
2 Replacing the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper.
3 Checking the paper storage Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater and set U327 to
place humidity environment. [On] if necessary.
Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
4 Reattaching the pressure The pressure springs are not Reattach the pressure springs at both sides
spring attached properly at both ends of the registration roller.
of the registration roller, so the
pressure balance is uneven.

7-28
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Replacing the fuser unit The pressure springs at the Check the pressure balance of both ends of
machine front and rear ends of the fuser unit by checking the nipped
the fuser unit are not properly pressure on the solid image. If the balance is
attached. uneven, replace the fuser unit.

(4-20)Dirt with toner on the paper edge

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the machine inside The conveying guide is dirty Clean the conveying guide, developer unit
with toner. and the developer duct.

(4-21)Dirty reverse side

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer roller When the image failures appear in the
transfer unit is dirty or has some scratches. secondary transfer roller diameter interval,
clean the secondary transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the secondary transfer
unit.
2 Cleaning the fuser press roller The fuser pressure roller is Clean the fuser press roller. Set the proper
and changing setting dirty caused by the paper type media type at [System Menu] > [Common
setting. Settings] > [Original/Paper Settings] >
[Media Type.
3 Cleaning the machine inside The conveying guide or Clean the conveying guide and developer
developer unit is dirty. unit.

(4-22)Fusing failure
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the paper Unspecified papers are used. Replace with the proper paper.
2 Changing the settings The media type is not properly Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
set. > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
Settings] > [Media Type].
3 Executing U161 The lower fuser temperature is Reset the fuser temperature to the default
set. value by executing U161.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The nipped pressure (width) to Replace the fuser unit.
the solid image is low and
fuser pressure setting (spring)
is too weak.

7-29
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

No. Contents Image sample
(5-1) Background is colored
Background is colored(7-32Page)

(5-2) Black dots

Black dots(7-32Page)

(5-3) Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

Horizontal streaks or band (White, black,
color)(7-33Page)

(5-4) Entire blank image (black)

Entire blank image (black)(7-33Page)

(5-5) Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Vertical streaks or bands (white)(7-34Page)

(5-6) Vertical streaks and bands (black)

Vertical streaks and bands (black)(7-34Page)

(5-7) Entire blank image (white)

Entire blank image (white)(7-34Page)

(5-8) Image is blurred

Image is blurred(7-35Page)

7-30
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

No. Contents Image sample

(5-9) Part of the image is not copied
Part of the image is not copied(7-35Page)

(5-10) The entire image is light

The entire image is light(7-35Page)

(5-11) Offset image

Offset image(7-36Page)

(5-12) Color reproduction is poor

Color reproduction is poor(7-36Page)

(5-13) Poor grayscale reproduction

Poor grayscale reproduction(7-37Page)
(5-14) Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white)
Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white)(7-
37Page)

(5-15) Horizontal uneven density

Horizontal uneven density(7-37Page)

(5-16) Vertical uneven density

Vertical uneven density(7-38Page)

7-31
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(5-1)Background is colored
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Performing the items to Uncharged toner increases 1. Execute [System Menu/Counter] key >
improve the image quality due to the continuous high [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service
coverage printing in the high Settings] > [DEV-CLN].
temperature environment. Or 2. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
the developer bias in Maintenance].
controlled at the higher level
3. Execute [System Menu/Counter] key >
since the calibration was
[Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Grayscale
executed when the density
Adjustment].
was too light.
2 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the toner sensor The toner sensor is faulty. If the sensor output value is 100 or less at
output value U155, reattach the developer unit. If not
repaired, replace it.
4 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the When the internal temperature indicated in
inside the main unit installation environment. U139 is 16°C / 60.8°F or less, request the
user to change the installation environment
where the room temperature is warmer than
16°C / 60.8°F.
5 Checking the drum unit The drum unit does not Reattach the main charger unit to the drum
ground. unit and reinstall the drum unit into the main
unit to ensure secure contact .
6 Changing the settings The setting value of the main If the setting values at U100 are not the
high voltage is incorrect. default values, reset them to the default
values.
7 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Clean the main charger roller surface. If it is
unit surface is dirty. not fixed, replace the main charger unit.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
• Toner motor - Engine PWB
9 Checking the toner motor The toner motor is faulty. Reattach the toner motor. If it is not repaired,
replace it.
10 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage contact of the Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB high voltage PWB is dirty or
deformed.
11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

(5-2)Black dots
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the drum unit The drum surface is dirty or Execute the drum refresh. If not repaired,
has some scratches. replace the drum unit.
2 Replacing the main charger The main charger roller Replace the main charger unit.
unit surface is dirty.
3 Executing U140 Developer bias leaks. Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at U140, and
select the most proper mode.
4 Checking the developer unit The developer roller or the Clean the developer roller. Or, replace the
magnet roller is dirty, or is developer unit if not repaired after cleaning.
faulty.

7-32
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-3)Horizontal streaks or band (White, black, color)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Specifying the faulty color (Judgment of the abnormal Execute U089 [Color Belt] to output the 4-
color) color PG image, and then specify the fault
color. (Go to the next step.)
2 Checking the developer unit Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the developer roller and
roller are dirty and it causes the developer bias contact.
the developer bias leakage.
3 Executing Developer refresh The last image remains on the Execute the developer refresh.
developer roller surface.
4 Replacing the developer unit Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit.
roller and the developer bias
contact are deteriorated and it
causes the developer bias
leakage.
5 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
6 Replacing the drum unit There are some scratches on Replace the drum unit.
the drum surface.
7 Replacing the main charger The main charger roller When the image failure appears in the main
unit surface is dirty or has some charger roller diameter interval, replace the
scratches. main charger unit.
8 Changing the settings The electric charge remains Lower the main charger output value at
on the drum surface due to [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/
insufficient discharging. Maintenance] > [Service Settings] > [MC].
9 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer bias contact. Or,
bias contact contact is dirty or deformed. correct its shape so that it grounds certainly.
If it is not fixed, replace the primary transfer
unit.
10 Checking the connection The bias voltage is irregularly Reconnect the connector on the high voltage
generated from the high PWB.
voltage PWB due to the
contact failure.
11 Replacing the high voltage The bias voltage is generated Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB unevenly from the high voltage
PWB since the PWB is faulty.

(5-4)Entire blank image (black)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the drum unit The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit to the drum
charger unit is not properly unit and reinstall the drum unit into the main
installed. unit to ensure secure contact .
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Clean the main charger roller contact and
roller contact contact is dirty or deformed. correct its shape so it is grounded securely.
3 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
4 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of the Clean the high-voltage contact and correct it
contact high voltage PWB is dirty or so that it grounds securely. Or, reattach the
deformed. high-voltage PWB.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.

7-33
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged,
replace FFC.
• LSU(APC PWB) - Main PWB
8 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
9 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

(5-5)Vertical streaks or bands (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing the Laser Scanner The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning.
Cleaning
2 Replacing the developer unit Foreign objects are in the Replace the developer unit with faulty color.
developer unit.
3 Checking the laser path There are foreign objects on Remove foreign objects on the frame or
the laser path of the LSU. sealing material between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
4 Checking the drum unit The drum surface is dirty or Execute the drum refresh. If not repaired,
has some scratches. replace the drum unit.
5 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Clean the main charger roller surface. If it is
unit surface is dirty or has some not fixed, replace the main charger unit.
scratches.
6 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.

(5-6)Vertical streaks and bands (black)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down.
3 Cleaning the main charger The main charge roller surface Clean the main charge roller surface.
roller is dirty in the shape of a
streak.
4 Replacing the main charger The main charge roller surface Replace the main charger unit.
unit is deteriorated in the streak
shape.
5 Checking the developer unit Foreign objects are on the Clean the developer roller. Or, replace the
developer roller surface. developer unit if not repaired after cleaning.

(5-7)Entire blank image (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Clean the developer bias contact, or correct
contact dirty or deformed. its shape so that it grounds securely.
2 Replacing the developer unit The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit.
faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
• Developer clutch - Engine PWB

7-34
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the developer clutch The developer clutch is not Reattach the developer clutch. If not
engaged or faulty. repaired, replace it.
5 Replacing the feed drive unit The drive parts such as drive Replace feed drive unit.
gear, coupling, etc. are faulty.
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
7 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged,
replace FFC.
• LSU(APC PWB) - Main PWB
8 Replacing the LSU APC PWB of LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
9 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

(5-8)Image is blurred
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Executing the Laser Scanner The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner Cleaning.
Cleaning
3 Replacing the LSU The LSU glass is deteriorated. Replace the LSU.

(5-9)Part of the image is not copied

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
2 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer roller is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit dirty or deformed.

(5-10)The entire image is light

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reinstalling the toner Toner is collected on one side. Sufficiently shake the toner container and
container reinstall it to the main unit.
2 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening Replace the toner container.
does not open.
3 Performing the items to Toner is deteriorated due to Execute [System Menu/Counter] key >
improve the image quality frequent low coverage [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service
printing. Settings] > [DEV-CLN].
Next, execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] and [Halftone Auto
Adjustment] at U410.
4 Reinstalling the drum unit and The drum unit or the Reinstall the drum unit and the developer
developer unit developer unit is not properly unit.
attached, and so the
developer roller does not
contact the drum.
5 Checking the developer bias The developer bias contact is Correct the developer bias contact so that it
contact deformed. surely grounds.
6 Cleaning the developer unit The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
7 Replacing the developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.

7-35
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

8 Replacing the developer unit The toner sensor has a fault When 4-color PG image output by [Color
and so toner is not supplied. Belt] at U089 is too light, check the output
value of the toner sensor at U155. If the
value is always low, replace the developer
unit.
9 Checking the drum unit The drum surface has Execute the drum refresh. If not repaired,
condensation or is worn down. replace the drum unit.
10 Checking the main charger The voltage applied to the Correct the main charger roller contact so
roller contact main charger roller contact is that it grounds securely.
too high.
11 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
12 Replacing the drum unit The eraser is faulty. Reinsert the drum unit into the main unit all
the way to reconnect the connector. If not
resolved, replace the drum unit.
13 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
14 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. If FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminal is deformed or FFC is damaged,
replace FFC.
• LSU(APC PWB) - Main PWB
15 Replacing the LSU The LSU is dirty or faulty. Clean the LSU. If not repaired, replace it.
16 Checking the primary transfer The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer bias contact so
bias contact contact is deformed. that it grounds securely.
17 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer roller is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit not attached properly or the
transfer belt is deteriorated.
18 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Toner motor - Engine PWB
19 Checking the toner motor The toner motor is faulty. Reattach the toner motor. If not repaired,
replace it.
20 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

(5-11)Offset image
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down or scratched.
3 Cleaning the developer unit The developer roller is dirty. Clean the developer roller.
4 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller surface is Replace the developer unit.
worn down or scratched.

(5-12)Color reproduction is poor

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Adjusting the image The half tone image cannot be Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
reproduced. Maintenance] in the System Menu. Then,
execute U410 to perform the automatic
halftone adjustment.
2 Executing Developer refresh The developer powder in the Isolate the abnormal color and execute
developer unit is deteriorated. Developer Refresh for that color.

7-36
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 reinstalling the main charger The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger unit or the drum
unit and drum unit charger unit is not properly unit that has poor reproduction.
installed.
4 Changing the settings The proper color reproduction Change [Color reproduction] in the [Imaging]
mode is not selected in the tab in the print settings at the PC.
[Imaging] tab in the print
settings at the PC.
5 Changing the settings Printer data is CYMK, but not Change [Color conversion processing] of
RGB. Print quality in KPDL to Image Quality prior
mode.
6 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
7 Replacing the scanner The full color cannot be Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage reproduced since the CCD U411.
PWB is faulty. (Red images
are output.)

(5-13)Poor grayscale reproduction

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Adjusting the image Calibration is not executed Execute [Calibration] in [System Menu/
properly. Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance].

(5-14)Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the installation The settings do not match the Execute [Altitude Adjustment] at U140, and
environment installation environment (High select the most proper mode.
altitude exceeding 1,500m
above sea-level).
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Correct the main charger roller contact so
roller contact contact does not ground. that it grounds securely.
3 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not properly Reinstall the drum unit.
installed, so it does not ground
the drum drive shaft.
4 Checking the paper Paper with the high surface Replace with the recommended paper.
resistance is used.

(5-15)Horizontal uneven density

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reinstalling the main charger The main charge roller rotates Reattach the main charger unit.
unit irregularly.
2 Replacing the main charger The charger cleaning roller is Replace the main charger unit.
unit deformed.
3 Cleaning the developer unit The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both ends of the
developer unit.
4 Replacing the developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.
5 Checking the developer bias The conduction is not Clean the developer bias contact.
contact stabilized due to the dirty
developer bias contact.

7-37
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

6 Checking the developer unit The developer powder in the Execute the developer refresh. If not
developer unit is deteriorated. repaired, replace the developer unit.
7 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the shape Execute Drum refresh.
of a streak are on both ends of
the drum surface.
8 Changing the settings The electric charge remains Lower the main charger output value at
on the drum surface due to [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/
insufficient discharging. Maintenance] > [Service Settings] > [MC].
9 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down.
10 Replacing the LSU The laser emission is uneven. Replace the LSU.
21 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

(5-16)Vertical uneven density

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Replacing the LSU LSU emits the laser unevenly. Replace the LSU.
(Inner mirror comes off.)
2 Reinstalling the primary The transfer belt is not contact Reattach the primary transfer unit.
transfer unit with the drum. (The primary
transfer roller does not press
evenly the transfer belt against
the drum).
3 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt is not contact Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit with the drum uniformly.
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
5 Checking the main charger The main charge roller surface Clean the main charger roller surface. If it is
unit is dirty in the shape of a not fixed, replace the main charger unit.
streak.
6 Replacing the drum unit The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down.
7 Checking the developer unit The toner layer on the Execute the developer refresh. If not
developer roller is uneven. repaired, replace the developer unit.

7-38
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feed-shift guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)

Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Opening and reclosing the The paper conveying unit is Check if the right cover (conveying unit)
paper conveying unit not aligned to the other cannot be opened by slightly pulling. Then,
exterior covers. open the right cover and reclose completely.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not aligned Open and close the right cover (conveying
right cover to the other exterior covers. unit).
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough or the cutting edge of the paper direction. Correct or replace paper
loaded paper is damaged. if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used or Ask a user to use the specified paper type.
foreign objects are on the Or, remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
6 Re-loading paper The paper is not properly Paper set in the high capacity feeder
loaded. cassette runs over the guide reset the paper
so that the paper corner does not run over
the bump in the cassette.

(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Re-loading paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Re-loading paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
enough. the paper direction.
3 Replacing the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.

7-39
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper path and The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs, check if a piece of
the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the torn paper, foreign objects or the burrs on the
leading edge of the sheet is part do not exist on the paper path, and
bent. remove them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature to the default
fuser temperature is improper. value at U161 when the paper curls.

(1-4)Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feed-shift guide
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign objects on the
piece of paper, etc. paper path and remove the burrs on the
parts such as the guide or the actuator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the separation needles are
dirty with toner or paper dust, etc., clean
them with a dry cloth or a brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not properly Check the guide, and remove any burrs.
operate due to the incorrect Also, if the guide does not operate smoothly
attachment or a fault. manually, reattach the guide. Then, replace
the guide if it is not fixed or if there is
deformation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not operate Execute U033 and check if the guide can
properly. move smoothly by the operation sounds. If
the guide does not operate thoroughly or
smoothly, reattach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not resolved.

(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides width guides do not fit with the paper width guides along the paper size
paper size. when the paper skew or the paper creases
occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the paper source.
enough. If a part of the paper is bent, remove it.

(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.

(1-7)Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the roller The roller is dirty. Check if the conveying rollers or the pulleys
have no paper dust, toner, foreign objects,
diameter change or frictional wear and clean
their surface. If they have a diameter change
or frictional wear, replace the parts.

7-40
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the clutch The clutch does not operate Execute U030, U240 (finisher), U243
properly. (document processor) or U247 (paper
feeder) to check if the related motor operates
correctly. Then, execute U032 or U247
(paper feeder) to check the clutch operation.
If the clutch does not operate correctly, go to
the next step. (When the motor does not
operate correctly, perform the measures for
the applicable jam code.)
3 Checking the clutch The clutch is not properly Check if the connector is securely connected
attached, is not properly to the clutch, the clutch is properly attached,
connected, or the foreign and there are no foreign objects on the
objects adhere on the clutch. clutch. Then, perform the proper measures if
necessary.
4 Replacing the clutch The clutch is faulty. If the clutch does not operate properly after
reattaching and reconnecting, or if the clutch
is rusted, replace it. (Use the individual
clutch or the unit containing the clutch.)
5 Checking the bushing The bushing is dirty. Clean the roller's shaft or the bushing when
the load is applied to the rotation of the
conveying rollers due to dirt on them.
6 Checking the spring The spring comes off. Check if the spring came off, or if it
adequately presses the roller or the pulley,
and reattach it if necessary.

(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Reattaching the actuator The actuator or the returning Reattach the actuator or the return spring for
spring are not attached the sensor if the actuator is caught up or
properly. comes off.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or photoreceptor
black felt is dirty by paper dust, etc., clean
them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor is faulty. Execute U031 (Main Unit/Paper Feeder),
U241 (Finisher) or U244 (Document
Processor) and check the sensor operation.
If not operating normally, reattach the sensor.
If not repaired, replace it.

(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper leading The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from the paper
edge margin not enough. leading edge to 4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm),
and, when there is no check line (fuser jam)
on 20mm(+/-1mm) from the paper leading
edge of the test pattern that is output at
U034,
adjust the leading margin by executing
[Lead] at U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misdetected. Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides paper width guides along the paper size to
properly detect the paper size. (factor of
multi feed jam or jam at DF section)

7-41
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the settings The media type is not properly If the media type is not matched to the actual
set. paper weight (the paper jam occurs due to
the paper separation failure), set the media
type at [System Menu/Counter] key >
[Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
Settings] > [Media Type].

(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the ground The static electricity When the main unit is installed in the low
accumulates. humidity environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates on the
conveying guide during the continuous
printing,
check if the discharge sheet in the exit
section and the metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded securely. If necessary,
reattach the parts.

(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper storage Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a dry place.
place the improper place.
2 Installing the cassette heater The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater and set the
cassette heater control to on at U327.

7-42
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper misfeed detection

(2-1)Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed message on the
operation panel. To remove paper misfeed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the front cover or paper conveying
cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.

Jam location indication

10:10

Paper jam.

Clear the paper jammed in

Cassette 1.

1 Press [Next >] to follow 4

the instructions.

JAM 0001 1/3

< Back Next >

2 3

L
J
K
I

F
E
A
B G
C H
D

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Shows the previous step.

3 Shows the next step.

4 Shows the removal procedure.

A.Misfeed in the cassette 1 H.Misfeed inside the right cover 3

B.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×1 cassette 2 I.Misfeed in the bridge conveying section
C.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×2 cassette 3 J.Misfeed in the mailbox
D.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×2 cassette 4 K.Misfeed in the inner finisher
E.Misfeed in the MP tray L.Misfeed in the document processor
F.Misfeed inside the right cover 1
G.Misfeed inside the right cover 2

7-43
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Paper misfeed detection condition

Main unit + PF-5120 + PF-5140 + AK-5100 + MT-5100

11

13
L
17
L 18

8 7 Q
I O
12
5

P F
6
4

E
A N
3

G
B
2

H
C

7-44
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Main unit + PF-5120 + PF-5140 + AK-5100 + MT-5100

13
L
17 L
18

K 9

10 Q
O
5

P F
4 6

E
A N
3

G
B
2

C H
1

7-45
Troubleshooting > Image formation problems [CONFIDENTIAL]

Jam location Sensor (Paper conveying)

A.Misfeed in the cassette 1 1 PF feed sensor 1
B.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×1 cassette 2 2 PF feed sensor 2
C.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×2 cassette 3 3 PF feed sensor 3
D.Misfeed in the 500-sheet×2 cassette 4 4 Registration sensor
E.Misfeed in the MP tray 5 Exit sensor
F.Misfeed inside the right cover 1 6 DU sensor
G.Misfeed inside the right cover 2 7 BR conveying sensor 1
H.Misfeed inside the right cover 3 8 BR conveying sensor 2
I.Misfeed in the bridge conveying section 9 DF paper entry sensor
J.Misfeed in the mailbox 10 DF main tray exit sensor
K.Misfeed in the inner finisher 11 MT exit sensor 1
L.Misfeed in the document processor 12 MT exit sensor 2
M.Misfeed in the 3000-sheet finisher 13 DP feed sensor
N.Misfeed in the DU unit 14 DP registration sensor
O.Misfeed in the registration 15 DP feedshift sensor
P.Misfeed in the Job Separator

7-46
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code and JAM location

JAM JAM JAM JAM
Error code locati Error code locati Error code locati Error code locati
on on on on
0000 - 1604 G 4901 Q 6002 K
0100 - 1614 N 4902 Q 6012 -
0101 - 4002 N 4903 Q 6102 K
0104 - 4003 N 4904 Q 6112 K
0105 - 4004 N 4908 Q 6412 K
0106 - 4012 P 4909 Q 6512 K
0107 - 4013 P 4911 I 6812 K
0110 - 4014 P 4912 I 6912 K
0111 - 4201 P 4913 I 7002 K
0114 - 4202 P 4914 I 7800 I
0211 - 4203 P 4918 I 7810 J
0212 - 4204 P 4919 I 7902 K
0213 - 4208 P 5001 I 9000 L
0300 - 4209 P 5002 I 9004 L
0501 A 4211 Q 5003 I 9009 L
0502 B 4212 Q 5004 I 9010 -
0503 C 4213 Q 5008 I 9011 -
0504 D 4214 Q 5009 I 9110 L
0508 F 4218 Q 5011 I 9200 L
0509 E 4219 Q 5012 I 9210 L
0511 P 4301 O 5013 I 9300 L
0512 N 4302 O 5014 I 9310 L
0513 N 4303 O 5018 I 9400 L
0514 N 4304 O 5019 I 9410 L
0518 P 4309 O 5013 I 9600 L
0519 P 4311 F 5014 I 9610 L
1403 C 4312 F 5018 I 9110 L
1404 H 4313 F 5019 I
1413 H 4314 F
1414 H 4319 F

7-47
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Jam Codes

Error code Contents note
J0000 Power ON jam
J0107 Fuser temperature stabilization
time-out
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Paper jam caused by the
J0105/J0106 firmware factor
J0110/J0111/J0114 Cover open detection J0110: Right cover open detection (right cover switch), J0111: Front
cover open detection (Front cover switch), J0114: BR cover open
detection (BR cover switch)
J0211/J0212/J0213 PF right cover open detection Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504 No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4 Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the cassette
J0501 Cassette no feed Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper feed roller.
J0501 Cassette no feed Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed roller.
J0501 Cassette no feed Condition: The paper does not arrive at the registration section
J0501 Cassette no feed Condition: The paper arrives at the registration section
J0502/J0503/J0504 No feed from cassette Condition: Paper does not reach the feed roller.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J0502/J0503/J0504 No feed from cassette Condition: The paper stops at the feed roller.
Target: Paper feeder (500-sheetx1), paper feeder (500-sheetx2),
large capacity paper feeder (2,000-sheet)
J0502/J0503/J0504 No feed from cassette Condition: Paper does not reach the registration section.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J0502/J0503/J0504 No feed from cassette Condition: Paper reaches the registration section.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J0508 No paper feed from the duplex
section
J0509 No paper feed from the MP tray
J0511 Multi feed jam
J0512/J0513/J0514 Multi feed from cassette Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP tray
J1403/J1404 PF conveying sensor non-arrival Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-
jam sheet)
J1413/J1414 PF conveying sensor stay jam Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-
sheet)
J1604 PF conveying sensor non-arrival Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
jam
J1614 PF conveying sensor stay jam Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
J4002/J4003/J4004 Registration sensor non-arrival Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
jam large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J4012/J4013/J4014 Registration sensor stay jam Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2),
large capacity feeder (2,200-sheet)
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
J4204/J4208/J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is
J4204/J4208/J4209 less than 4.0mm.)

7-48
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents note

J4201/J4202/J4203/ Exit sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is
J4204/J4208/J4209 4.0mm or more.)
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/ Conveying sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is
J4218/J4219 less than 4.0mm.)
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/ Conveying sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is
J4218/J4219 4.0mm or more.)
J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/ Conveying sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit
J4218/J4219
J4301/J4302/J4303/ DU sensor non-arrival jam
J4304/J4309
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/ DU sensor stay jam
J4319
J4901/J4902/J4903/ BR conveying sensor 1 non- Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
J4904/J4908/J4909 arrival jam
J4911/J4912/J4913/J4914/ BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
J4918/J4919
J5001/J5002/J5003/ BR conveying sensor 2 non- Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
J5004/J5008/J5009 arrival jam
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/ BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
J5018/J5019
J6000/J6001/J6002 DF paper entry failure jam Target: J6000 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6001 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J6002 (Inner finisher)
J6012 Inner DF open jam Target: Inner finisher
J6020/J6021 DF front cover open jam Target: J6020 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6021 (1,000-sheet finisher)
J6041 DF top cover open jam Target: 1,000-sheet finisher
J6060 MT cover open jam Target: Mail box
J6100/J6101/J6102 DF paper entry sensor non-arrival Target: J6100 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6101 (1,000-sheet finisher)
jam and J6102 (Inner finisher)
J6110/J6111/J6112 DF paper entry sensor stay jam Target: J6110 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6111 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J6112 (Inner finisher)
J6200 DF sub exit sensor non-arrival Target: 3,000-sheet finisher
jam
J6210 DF sub exit sensor stay jam Target: 3,000-sheet finisher
J6300/J6301 DF middle sensor non-arrival jam Target: J6300 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6301 (1,000-sheet finisher)
J6310/J6311 DF middle sensor stay jam Target: J6310 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6311 (1,000-sheet finisher)
J6400/J6401 DF exit paper sensor non-arrival Target: J6400 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6401 (1,000-sheet finisher)
jam
J6410/J6411/J6412 DF exit paper sensor stay jam Target: J6410 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J6412 (Inner finisher)
Remark: J6412 is not detected when feeding the OHP film.
J6510/J6511/J6512 DF exit paper sensor stay jam Target: J6510 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1,000-sheet finisher)
when outputting the paper bundle and J6512 (Inner finisher)
J6810/J6811/J6812 Front DF side registration jam Target: J6810 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6811 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J6812 (Inner finisher)
J6910/J6911/J6912 Rear DF side registration jam Target: J6910 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J6912 (Inner finisher)
J7000/J7001/J7002 DF staple jam Target: J7000 (3,000-sheet finisher), J7001 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J7002 (Inner finisher)
J7800 Mail Box exit non-arrival jam Target: Mail box
J7810 Mail Box exit stay jam Target: Mail box
J7900/J7901/J7902 DF paddle jam Target: J7900 (3,000-sheet finisher), J7901 (1,000-sheet finisher)
and J7902 (Inner finisher)
J9000 No original feed from the DP

7-49
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents note

J9004 DP registration sensor non-arrival
jam during the original reversing
J9010 Document processor open
detection
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam
J9120 DP original sensor initial jam
J9200 DP registration sensor non-arrival
jam
J9210 DP registration sensor stay jam
J9220 DP registration sensor initial jam

Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Specifying the sensor (Specify the sensor which is Specify the sensor that displays ON at U031.
turned on) (Go to the next step.)
2 Checking the paper path There is a piece of paper If a piece of paper or the foreign objects
remaining on paper conveying adhere on the conveying path, or a burr in
route to turn on the sensor. the parts such as the guide or the actuator,
remove them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor does not operate Clean and reattach the sensor specified at
correctly. U031, and reconnect the connector. If not
repaired, replace it.

J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
activate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
environment fluctuates or the electric
voltage reduces.
3 Changing the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
paper settings (media type, > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
paper size) do not match. Settings] > [Media Type].
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly activate.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.

J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

The firmware does not properly activate.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
activate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
properly activate.

7-50
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover open detection (right cover switch), J0111: Front cover open detection (Front
cover switch), J0114: BR cover open detection (BR cover switch)
The cover-open is detected during print.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is securely closed, and
reattach it if necessary. Fix or replace it if it is
deformed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reconnect the cover switch connector.
connected.
3 Reattaching the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch if it is off.
operate properly.
4 Replacing the cover switch The cover switch is faulty. Replace the cover switch.

J0211/J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection

Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The PF right cover open is detected when printing paper fed from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the PF right cover The PF right cover is not Check if the PF right cover is securely
aligned to the other exterior closed, and reattach it if necessary. Fix or
covers. replace it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reconnect the PF right cover switch
connected. connector.
3 Reattaching the PF right cover The PF right cover switch Reattach the PF right cover switch if it is off.
switch does not operate properly.
4 Replacing the PF right cover The PF right cover switch Replace the PF right cover switch if it is
switch does not operate properly. faulty.

J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4

Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the cassette
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on after passing
the specific time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
4 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
5 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.

7-51
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J0501: Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper feed roller.
The paper leading edge does not come from the cassette or the registration sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch
turns on when feeding from cassette 1.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
guides width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
paper size.
2 Removing foreign material The lift sensor is on but the lift If there is paper tip or foreign objects adhere
plate does not go up to the on the lift sensor actuator of the pickup
upper limit position. holder, remove it.
3 Checking the spring The conveying function of the Reattach the spring for the pickup roller if it
pickup pulley is not enough. comes off. If deformed, replace it.
4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of the Clean the pickup roller surface. If worn down,
pickup pulley is not enough. replace it.
5 Checking the retard holder The load increases since the Remove the retard holder and reattach it
retard holder is caught up. while the cassette is inserted. Or, replace the
retard holder.
6 Checking the paper feed shaft The pickup roller does not Reattach the paper feed shaft. If deformed,
rotate since the feed shaft of replace it.
the feed roller is not properly
attached.
7 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the feed drive unit
since the drive from the motor and if it does not rotate normally, clean them
is not transmitted. and apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Feed clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine PWB
9 Checking the paper feed The pickup roller does not Reattach the feed clutch and execute U032
clutch rotate since the feed clutch is [Feed1]. If it does not operate correctly,
not properly attached or faulty. replace it.
10 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0501: Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed roller.
Paper does not stop at the feed roller and registration roller does not turn on after the feed clutch turns on when feeding
from cassette 1.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
3 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.
4 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the feed drive unit
since the drive from the motor and if it does not rotate normally, clean them
is not transmitted. and apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.

7-52
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Feed clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine PWB
6 Checking the paper feed The feed roller does not rotate Reattach the feed clutch and execute U032
clutch since the feed clutch is not [Feed1]. If it does not operate correctly,
properly attached or faulty. replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0501: Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the registration section
The paper leading edge comes from the cassette but the registration sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch turns
on when feeding from cassette 1.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
2 Checking the middle roller The conveying force of the Clean the middle roller surface. If worn
middle roller is insufficient. down, replace it.
3 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
6 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
7 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the feed drive unit
since the drive from the motor and if it does not rotate normally, clean them
is not transmitted. and apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine
PWB
9 Checking the middle clutch The middle roller does not Reattach the middle clutch and execute
rotate since the middle clutch U032 [Mid Roller]. If it does not operate
is not properly attached or correctly, replace it.
faulty.
10 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0501: Cassette no feed

Condition: The paper arrives at the registration section
The registration sensor does not turn on after the feed clutch turns on when feeding from cassette 1.

7-53
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
3 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
5 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0502/J0503/J0504: No feed from cassette

Condition: Paper does not reach the feed roller.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The paper leading edge does not come from the cassette and the PF conveying sensor does not turn on after the PF
feed clutch turns on when feeding from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
guides width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
paper size.
2 Removing foreign material The lift sensor is on but the lift If there is paper tip or foreign objects adhere
plate does not go up to the on the lift sensor actuator of the pickup
upper limit position. holder, remove it.
3 Checking the spring The conveying function of the Reattach the spring for the pickup roller if it
pickup pulley is not enough. comes off. If deformed, replace it.
4 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of the Clean the pickup roller surface. If worn down,
pickup pulley is not enough. replace it.
5 Checking the retard holder The load increases since the Remove the retard holder and reattach it
retard holder is caught up. while the cassette is inserted. Or, replace the
retard holder.
6 Checking the paper feed shaft The pickup roller does not Reattach the paper feed shaft. If deformed,
rotate since the feed shaft of replace it.
the feed roller is not properly
attached.
7 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the PF drive unit and
since the drive from the motor if it does not rotate normally, clean them and
is not transmitted. apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• PF feed clutch - Relay connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1, 2,000-sheet)
• PF feed clutch1, 2 - PF PWB (500-sheetx2)

7-54
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

9 Checking the PF feed clutch The pickup roller does not Reattach the PF feed clutch and execute
rotate since the PF feed clutch U247 to check the operation. If it does not
is not properly attached or operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
10 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.

J0502/J0503/J0504: No feed from cassette

Condition: The paper stops at the feed roller.
Target: Paper feeder (500-sheetx1), paper feeder (500-sheetx2), large capacity paper feeder
(2,000-sheet)
Paper stops at the feed roller and the PF conveying sensor does not turn on after the PF feed clutch turns on when
feeding from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
3 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.
4 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the PF drive unit and
since the drive from the motor if it does not rotate normally, clean them and
is not transmitted. apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• PF feed clutch - Relay connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1, 2,000-sheet)
• PF feed clutch1, 2 - PF PWB (500-sheetx2)
6 Checking the PF feed clutch The feed roller does not rotate Reattach the PF feed clutch and execute
since the PF feed clutch is not U247 to check the operation. If it does not
properly attached or faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.

J0502/J0503/J0504: No feed from cassette

Condition: Paper does not reach the registration section.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The paper leading edge come from the cassette but the PF conveying sensor does not turn on after the PF feed clutch
turns on when feeding from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
2 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.

7-55
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
6 (When J0502 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
7 (When J0503/J0504 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
8 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed2], [Feed3], or [Feed4].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
10 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
11 (When J0503/J0504 occurs) The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
Replacing the PF PWB (500- (550-sheetx1).
sheetx1)
12 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0502/J0503/J0504: No feed from cassette

Condition: Paper reaches the registration section.
Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The PF conveying sensor dos not turn on after the feed clutch turns on when feeding from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
3 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.

7-56
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 (When J0502 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
5 (When J0503/J0504 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
6 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed2], [Feed3], or [Feed4].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
9 (When J0503/J0504 occurs) The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
Replacing the PF PWB (500- (550-sheetx1).
sheetx1)
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

During duplex print, the registration sensor does not turn on after the DU clutch turns on (paper switchback).

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
4 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
5 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
6 Replacing the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is damp.
7 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
8 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.

7-57
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

9 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
10 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
11 Checking the DU clutch The DU clutch is not attached Reattach the DU clutch and execute U032
properly, or it is faulty. [Dup]. If it does not operate correctly, replace
it.
12 Reinstalling the conveying unit The developer motor K drive is Reattach the paper conveying unit.
not conveyed to the DU
conveying roller.
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
14 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
4 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
5 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
6 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
7 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
8 (For the MP lift plate not The MP lift plate ascending Align the MP lift plate elevation cam and
ascending) checking the cam cam does not operate reattach it.
normally.
9 (For the MP lift plate not The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
ascending) checking the MP attached properly.
lift plate
10 (For the MP lift plate not The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
ascending) checking the connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
connection there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MP solenoid - Feed drive unit - Engine
PWB
11 (For the MP lift plate not The MP solenoid does not Reattach the MP solenoid and execute U033
ascending) checking the MP operate properly. [MP]. If it does not operate correctly, replace
solenoid it.

7-58
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

12 Checking the MP paper feed The paper conveying Clean the MP paper feed roller surface. If
roller performance of the MP feed worn down, replace it.
roller is not enough.
13 Checking the middle roller The conveying force of the Clean the middle roller surface. If worn
middle roller is insufficient. down, replace it.
14 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the feed drive unit
since the drive from the motor and if it does not rotate normally, clean them
is not transmitted. and apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.
15 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Middle clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine
PWB
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
16 Checking the middle clutch The middle roller does not Reattach the middle clutch and execute
rotate since the middle clutch U032 [Mid Roller]. If it does not operate
is not properly attached or correctly, replace it.
faulty.
17 Checking the registration The registration sensor does Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor not operate properly. U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
correctly, replace it.
18 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
19 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0511: Multi feed jam

When feeding from cassette 1, registration sensor is kept ON and does not turn off.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
4 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with dry paper. Install the cassette
heater and set U327 to [On] if necessary.
5 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down,
the retard roller is not enough. replace it.
6 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.
7 Reattaching the retard holder The retard holder comes off. Reattach the retard holder.
8 Reattaching the retard The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure spring.
pressure spring comes off.
9 Checking the driving parts The roller does not rotate Check the drive parts of the feed drive unit
since the drive from the motor and if it does not rotate normally, clean them
is not transmitted. and apply grease. If not repaired, replace it.

7-59
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

10 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive unit -
Engine PWB
11 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
12 (In case of no mark of paper The registration clutch Reattach the registration clutch and execute
loop) Checking the registration continues linkage and the U032 [Regist]. If it does not operate correctly,
clutch registration roller rotation does replace it.
not stop.
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
14 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0512/J0513/J0514: Multi feed from cassette

Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The PF conveying sensor continues on and does not turn of when feeding from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
4 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with dry paper. Install the cassette
heater and set U327 to [On] if necessary.
5 Checking the retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the retard roller surface. If worn down,
the retard roller is not enough. replace it.
6 Checking the press-release The press-release lever and Reattach the press-release lever and the
lever and the retard holder the retard holder are attached retard holder.
oppositely.
7 Checking the retard holder The retard holder comes off. Reattach the retard holder.
8 Checking the retard pressure The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure spring.
spring comes off.
9 (When J0512 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB

7-60
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

10 (When J0513/J0514 occurs) The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
Checking the connection connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
11 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed2], [Feed3], or [Feed4].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
14 (When J0513/J0514 occurs) The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
Replacing the PF PWB (500- (550-sheetx1).
sheetx1)
15 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

During duplex print, the registration sensor does not turn off when passing the specified time after the DU clutch turns
on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy or curls due Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
to the moisture. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive unit -
Engine PWB
6 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
7 (In case paper reached the The registration clutch Reattach the registration clutch and execute
registration roller but no mark continues linkage and the U032 [Regist]. If it does not operate correctly,
of paper loop) Checking the registration roller rotation does replace it.
registration clutch not stop.
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-61
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
3 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
4 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the MP feed roller The paper separation force of Clean the MP paper feed roller and the MP
and the MP separation pad the MP separation pad is separation pad. Or, replace them.
insufficient.
6 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
spring properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
it.
7 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive unit -
Engine PWB
• Middle clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine
PWB
8 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
9 (In case paper reached the The registration clutch Reattach the registration clutch and execute
registration roller but no mark continues linkage and the U032 [Regist]. If it does not operate correctly,
of paper loop) Checking the registration roller rotation does replace it.
registration clutch not stop.
10 Checking the middle clutch The middle roller rotation does Reattach the middle clutch and execute
not stop while the middle U032 [Mid Roller]. If it does not operate
clutch continues engaging. correctly, replace it.
11 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
12 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J1403/J1404: PF conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
The PF conveying sensor of cassette 2 (550-sheet x 1) does not turn on when feeding from cassette 3, 4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.

7-62
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
4 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
5 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
6 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
7 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
8 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
9 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
10 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.
11 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
12 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed3] or [Feed4]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
14 Replacing the PF PWB (500- The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
sheetx1) (550-sheetx1).
15 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J1413/J1414: PF conveying sensor stay jam

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
The PF conveying sensor of cassette 2 (550-sheet x 1) does not turn off when feeding from cassette 3, 4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 Checking the paper feed roller Paper conveying capability is Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
decreasing or slipping. down, replace it.
(Rotation is not smooth)
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.

7-63
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
5 Checking the PF right cover The PF right cover is Check if the PF right cover is securely
deformed. closed. Replace it if it is deformed and is not
closed.
7 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
8 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
9 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
10 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
11 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
12 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF conveying clutch - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
13 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed3] or [Feed4]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
14 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying clutch Reattach the PF conveying clutch and
clutch continues linkage and the PF execute U247 to check the operation. If it
conveying roller rotation does does not operate correctly, replace it.
not stop.
15 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
16 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
17 Replacing the PF PWB (500- The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
sheetx1) (550-sheetx1).
18 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J1604: PF conveying sensor non-arrival jam

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
Cassette 3 PF sensor does not turn on when feeding from cassette 4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If there is paper tip or foreign objects adhere
piece of paper, etc. on the conveying path, or parts such as the
guide, etc. have burrs, remove them.
2 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.

7-64
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
6 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
7 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
8 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
9 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
10 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
11 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF conveying clutch - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
12 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed3]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
13 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
14 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
15 Replacing the PF PWB (500- The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
sheetx1) (550-sheetx1).
16 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J1614: PF conveying sensor stay jam

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
Cassette 3 PF sensor does not turn off when feeding from cassette 4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 Checking the paper feed roller The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.

7-65
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Clean and reattach the conveying guide. If
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. there are burrs on the conveying guide,
remove them.
5 (In case of paper conveying The PF right cover is Check if the PF right cover is securely
delay) Checking the PF right deformed. closed. Replace it if it is deformed and is not
cover closed.
6 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
7 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
8 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
9 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
10 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
11 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF conveying sensor - PF PWB
• PF conveying clutch - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
12 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying sensor is Reattach the PF conveying sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Feed3]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
13 Checking the PF conveying The PF conveying clutch Reattach the PF conveying clutch and
clutch continues linkage and the PF execute U247 to check the operation. If it
conveying roller rotation does does not operate correctly, replace it.
not stop.
14 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
15 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
16 Replacing the PF PWB (500- The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB of the upper cassette
sheetx1) (550-sheetx1).
17 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4002/J4003/J4004: Registration sensor non-arrival jam

Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2-4.

7-66
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the paper feed roller paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
6 (When the paper conveying The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
was delayed) Checking the paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
paper feed roller enough.
7 (In case paper conveying The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is closed securely. If
delays) Checking the PF cover not closed due to deformation, replace it.
8 Re-loading paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
crushed. the paper direction.
9 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
10 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
11 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
12 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
13 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive unit -
Engine PWB
14 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
15 Checking the registration The registration clutch is not Reattach the registration clutch and execute
clutch properly attached, or it is U032 [Regist]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
16 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed drive unit is faulty. Replace feed drive unit.
17 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
18 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-67
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J4012/J4013/J4014: Registration sensor stay jam

Target: Paper feeder (550-sheet x 1), paper feeder (550-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,200-
sheet)
The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2-4.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a If paper tip or foreign objects adhere on the
piece of paper, etc. conveying path, remove it.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
5 (When the multi-feed occurs) The paper fanning is not Clean or replace the feed roller.
Checking the paper feed roller enough.
6 Checking the conveying The paper conveying force of Clean or replace the conveying related roller.
rollers the conveying rollers is
insufficient.
7 (When the multi-feed occurs) The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it by reversing
Reloading paper crushed. the paper direction.
8 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
9 Checking the paper The paper is curled downward Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
or wavy. user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
10 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
11 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
12 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Registration sensor - Relay connector -
Engine PWB
• Registration clutch - Feed drive unit -
Engine PWB
13 Checking the registration The registration sensor is not Reattach the registration sensor and execute
sensor properly attached, or it is U031 [Regist Sens]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
14 Checking the registration The registration clutch is not Reattach the registration clutch and execute
clutch properly attached, or it is U032 [Regist]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
15 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed drive unit is faulty. Replace feed drive unit.
16 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
17 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
The exit sensor does not turn on due to the paper jam before the fuser rollers during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the
duplex section or the MP tray.

7-68
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the paper feed roller paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
6 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
7 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
8 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
9 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
10 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace the paper if it is damp. (Replace
with long grain paper.)
11 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type at [System Menu]
paper settings (media type, > [Common Settings] > [Original/Paper
paper size) do not match. Settings] > [Media Type].
12 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB
13 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor is not properly Reattach the fuser motor and execute U030
attached, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
14 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
15 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The exit sensor does not turn on due to the paper that is rolled up around the fuser rollers during paper feed from
cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Adjusting the paper leading The margin at the paper If each margin shift is regular, execute U034
edge timing leading edge is incorrect. to adjust the leading edge timing .
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.

7-69
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the paper feed roller paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
5 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
6 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
7 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper conveying force of Clean the middle roller or the registration
Checking the conveying the conveying rollers is roller. If worn down, replace it.
rollers insufficient.
8 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
9 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
10 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
11 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
12 Checking the fuser unit Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the fuser press roller, or replace the
fuser press roller or fuser heat fuser unit.
roller.
13 Checking the fuser separation Foreign objects such as toner Replace the fuser unit if the fuser separation
plate are on the fuser separation plate is faulty.
plate. Or, the fuser separation
plate is deformed or
improperly attached.
14 Cleaning the machine inside The machine inside is Clean the machine inside.
contaminated with toner.
15 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
16 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Exit sensor - Fuser unit - Engine PWB
17 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor is not attached Reattach the exit sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
18 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
19 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4208/J4209: Exit sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The exit sensor does not turn on due to the paper that is rolled up around the fuser rollers during paper feed from
cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

7-70
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the fuser unit Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the fuser press roller, or replace the
fuser press roller or fuser heat fuser unit.
roller.
2 Checking the fuser separation Foreign objects such as toner Replace the fuser unit if the fuser separation
plate are on the fuser separation plate is faulty.
plate. Or, the fuser separation
plate is deformed or
improperly attached.
3 Cleaning the machine inside The machine inside is Clean the machine inside.
contaminated with toner.
4 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Exit sensor - Fuser unit - Engine PWB
6 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor is not attached Reattach the exit sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4218/J4219: Conveying sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The exit sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the fuser unit during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex
section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Adjusting the paper leading The margin at the paper If each margin shift is regular, execute U034
edge timing leading edge is incorrect. to adjust the leading edge timing .
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The conveying function of the Clean the paper feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the paper feed roller paper feed roller is not down, replace it.
enough.
5 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
6 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
7 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper conveying force of Clean the middle roller or the registration
Checking the conveying the conveying rollers is roller. If worn down, replace it.
rollers insufficient.
8 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.

7-71
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

9 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If you cannot get
user agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the leading end of
paper and the trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
10 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are used. Explain to the user to use the paper within
the specifications.
11 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with foreign objects.
paper.
12 Checking the fuser unit Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the fuser press roller, or replace the
fuser press roller or fuser heat fuser unit.
roller.
13 Checking the fuser separation Foreign objects such as toner Replace the fuser unit if the fuser separation
plate are on the fuser separation plate is faulty.
plate. Or, the fuser separation
plate is deformed or
improperly attached.
14 Cleaning the machine inside The machine inside is Clean the machine inside.
contaminated with toner.
15 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
16 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Exit sensor - Fuser unit - Engine PWB
17 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor is not attached Reattach the exit sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
18 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
19 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4218/J4219: Conveying sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The exit sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the fuser unit during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex
section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the fuser unit Foreign objects adhere to the Clean the fuser press roller, or replace the
fuser press roller or fuser heat fuser unit.
roller.
2 Checking the fuser separation Foreign objects such as toner Replace the fuser unit if the fuser separation
plate are on the fuser separation plate is faulty.
plate. Or, the fuser separation
plate is deformed or
improperly attached.
3 Cleaning the machine inside The machine inside is Clean the machine inside.
contaminated with toner.
4 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain paper.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Exit sensor - Fuser unit - Engine PWB
6 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor is not attached Reattach the exit sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.

7-72
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4218/J4219: Conveying sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the exit unit
The exit sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the exit unit during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex
section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the inner tray There is a obstacle on the Remove the obstacle on the inner tray.
inner tray.
2 Storing the paper stopper The paper stopper on the Store the paper stopper.
inner tray is not stored.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
4 (When the paper skew occurs) The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides to fit them
Relocating the paper width width guides do not fit with the with the paper size.
guides paper size.
5 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit and The fuser unit or the exit unit is Check the attachment of the fuser unit and
the exit unit not properly installed. the exit unit, and reattach the units if
necessary.
7 Checking the exit guide Foreign objects such as toner Clean the eject guide. If foreign objects
are on the exit guide. cannot be removed, replace the eject guide.
8 Checking the driving parts The drive parts are faulty and If the drive gear is deformed, bushing is worn
the eject roller does not rotate. down, etc., replace the applicable parts. If
not repaired, replace the eject unit.
9 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Exit motor - Exit unit - Engine PWB
• Exit sensor - Fuser unit - Engine PWB
10 Checking the exit motor The exit motor is not attached Reattach the exit motor and execute U030
properly, or it is faulty. [SB(CW)]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
11 Checking the exit sensor The exit sensor is not attached Reattach the exit sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [Fuser]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4309: DU sensor non-arrival jam

The DU sensor does not turn on after the DU switch back when feeding from cassette 1-4 or MP tray.

7-73
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector between the paper
conveying unit that connects conveying unit and the main unit.
to the main unit is not properly
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts are faulty. Correct the drive parts between developer
motor K and DU conveying roller. If not
repaired, replace them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DU sensor - Engine PWB
• DU clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine PWB
5 Checking the DU sensor The DU sensor is not attached Reattach the DU sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [DU Sens]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
6 Checking the DU clutch The DU clutch is not attached Reattach the DU clutch and execute U032
properly, or it is faulty. [Dup]. If it does not operate correctly, replace
it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4319: DU sensor stay jam

The DU sensor does not turn off after the DU switch back when feeding from cassette 1-4 or MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector between the paper
conveying unit that connects conveying unit and the main unit.
to the main unit is not properly
connected. (Loose
connection, etc.)
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts are faulty. Correct the drive parts between developer
motor K and DU conveying roller. If not
repaired, replace them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DU sensor - Engine PWB
• DU clutch - Feed drive unit - Engine PWB
5 Checking the DU sensor The DU sensor is not attached Reattach the DU sensor and execute U031
properly, or it is faulty. [DU Sens]. If it does not operate correctly,
replace it.
6 Checking the DU clutch The DU clutch is not attached Reattach the DU clutch and execute U032
properly, or it is faulty. [Dup]. If it does not operate correctly, replace
it.

7-74
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
5 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
6 Checking the paper conveying The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear is deformed, the
roller does not rotate. torque limiter is faulty, or the bushing is worn
down.
7 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit.
between the relay conveying
unit and main unit is not
connected properly.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• BR conveying sensor 1 - BR PWB
• Conveying motor - Engine PWB
9 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 1 is not Reattach BR conveying sensor 1 and
sensor 1 attached properly, or it is execute U031 [Bridge1 Feed]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
10 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor is Reattach the BR conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Brg]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
11 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J4911/J4912/J4913/J4914/J4918/J4919: BR conveying sensor 1 stay jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

7-75
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
5 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
6 Checking the paper conveying The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear is deformed, the
roller does not rotate. torque limiter is faulty, or the bushing is worn
down.
7 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit.
between the relay conveying
unit and main unit is not
connected properly.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• BR conveying sensor 1 - BR PWB
• Conveying motor - Engine PWB
9 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 1 is not Reattach BR conveying sensor 1 and
sensor 1 attached properly, or it is execute U031 [Bridge1 Feed]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
10 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor is Reattach the BR conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Brg]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
11 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J5001/J5002/J5003/J5004/J5008/J5009: BR conveying sensor 2 non-arrival jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.

7-76
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
5 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
6 Checking the paper conveying The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear is deformed, the
roller does not rotate. torque limiter is faulty, or the bushing is worn
down.
7 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit.
between the relay conveying
unit and main unit is not
connected properly.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• BR conveying sensor 2 - BR PWB
• Conveying motor - Engine PWB
9 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 2 is not Reattach BR conveying sensor 2 and
sensor 2 attached properly, or it is execute U031 [Bridge2 Feed]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
10 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor is Reattach the BR conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Brg]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
11 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher, 1,000-sheet finisher and the mail box
BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the duplex section or the MP tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 (When the paper skew occurs) The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
Checking the paper path piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
3 (When the paper skew occurs) The actuator does not operate The actuator or the spring is deformed. If the
Checking the actuator and the properly. actuator does not properly operate, replace
spring it.
4 (In case paper skews) The paper is caught with the Reattach the conveying guide. Remove the
Checking the conveying guide conveying guide. burrs on the conveying guide surface or
replace the conveying guide if there are
burrs on it.
5 Checking the conveying guide The foreign objects such as Clean or replace the conveying guide.
toner are on the conveying
guide.
6 Checking the paper conveying The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear is deformed, the
roller does not rotate. torque limiter is faulty, or the bushing is worn
down.

7-77
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the relay conveying unit.
between the relay conveying
unit and main unit is not
connected properly.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• BR conveying sensor 2 - BR PWB
• Conveying motor - Engine PWB
9 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 2 is not Reattach BR conveying sensor 2 and
sensor 2 attached properly, or it is execute U031 [Bridge2 Feed]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
10 Checking the BR conveying The BR conveying motor is Reattach the BR conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U030 [Brg]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
11 Replacing the BR PWB The BR PWB is faulty. Replace the BR PWB.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam

Target: J6000 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6001 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6002 (Inner finisher)
Turning on of the DF paper entry sensor is detected before the paper output from the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 Cleaning the DF paper entry The DF paper entry sensor is Clean the DF paper entry sensor.
sensor dirty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF entry sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry sensor is Reattach the DF paper entry sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [HP]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6012: Inner DF open jam

Target: Inner finisher
The inner DF unit open is detected during the DF operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector of the DF Reconnect the connector of the DF
installation detective switch is installation detective switch.
not properly connected.
2 Checking the DF installation The DF installation detective Reattach the DF installation detective switch
detective switch switch is not properly and execute U241 [Finisher] > [Set]. If it does
attached, or it is faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.

7-78
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam

Target: J6020 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6021 (1,000-sheet finisher)
The DF front cover open is detected during the DF operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF front cover The DF front cover is not Check if the DF front cover closes securely,
aligned to the other exterior and reattach it if necessary. Fix or replace it if
covers. it is deformed.
2 Checking the connection The connector of the DF front Reconnect the connector of the DF front
cover switch is not connected cover switch.
properly.
3 Checking the DF front cover The DF front cover switch is Reattach the DF front cover switch and
switch not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Front Cover]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.

J6041: DF top cover open jam

Target: 1,000-sheet finisher
The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover closes securely
aligned to the other exterior and reattach it if necessary. Fix or replace it if
covers. deformed.
2 Checking the connection The connector of the DF top Reconnect the connector of the DF top cover
cover switch is not connected switch.
properly.
3 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover switch is not Reattach the DF top cover switch and
switch attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Top Cover]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.

J6060: MT cover open jam

Target: Mail box
The MT cover open is detected during the paper conveying to the Mail Box.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the MT cover The MT cover is not aligned Check if the MT cover is securely closed
with the other exterior covers. and reattached it if necessary. If the MT
cover is deformed, repair or replace it.
2 Checking the connection The MT cover is not aligned Reconnect the connector of the MT cover
with the other exterior covers. switch.
3 Checking the MT cover switch The MT cover switch is not Reattach the MT cover switch and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Mail Box] > [Cover]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.

J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

Target: J6100 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6101 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6102 (Inner finisher)
• J6100/J6101: DF entry sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after BR conveying sensor 2 turns on.
• J6102: DF entry sensor does not turn on when passing the specified time after the main unit exit sensor turns on.

7-79
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF paper entry sensor - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB (3,000/
1,000-sheet finisher)
3 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry sensor is Reattach the DF paper entry sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [HP]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
4 (3,000/1,000-sheet finisher) The DF paper entry motor is Reattach the DF paper entry motor and
Checking the DF paper entry not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In(H)]. If it
motor faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam

Target: J6110 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6111 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6112 (Inner finisher)
The DF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF paper entry sensor - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB (3,000/
1,000-sheet finisher)
3 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry sensor is Reattach the DF paper entry sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [HP]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
4 (3,000/1,000-sheet finisher) The DF paper entry motor is Reattach the DF paper entry motor and
Checking the DF paper entry not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In(H)]. If it
motor faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6200: DF sub exit sensor non-arrival jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher
The DF sub exit sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.

7-80
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF sub exit sensor - DF PWB
• DF feed-shift solenoid - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor is not Reattach the DF sub exit sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Sub Tray Eject]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking the DF feed-shift The DF feed-shift solenoid is Reattach the DF feed-shift solenoid and
solenoid not properly attached, or it is execute U240 [Solenoid] > [Sub Tray]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry motor is Reattach the DF paper entry motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In(H)]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6210: DF sub exit sensor stay jam

Target: 3,000-sheet finisher
The DF sub exit sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since the DF sub exit sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF sub exit sensor - DF PWB
• DF feed-shift solenoid - DF PWB
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF sub exit The DF sub exit sensor is not Reattach the DF sub exit sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Sub Tray Eject]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking the DF feed-shift The DF feed-shift solenoid is Reattach the DF feed-shift solenoid and
solenoid not properly attached, or it is execute U240 [Solenoid] > [Sub Tray]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry motor is Reattach the DF paper entry motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In(H)]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

7-81
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

J6300/J6301: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam

Target: J6300 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6301 (1,000-sheet finisher)
The DF middle sensor does not turn on after passing the specific time since the DF paper entry sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB
• DF feed-shift solenoid - DF PWB (3,000-
sheet finisher)
• DF paper entry motor - DF PWB
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor is not Reattach the DF middle sensor. If it does not
sensor attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 (3,000-sheet finisher) The DF feed-shift solenoid is Reattach the DF feed-shift solenoid and
Checking the DF feed-shift not properly attached, or it is execute U240 [Solenoid] > [Sub Tray]. If it
solenoid faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF paper entry The DF paper entry motor is Reattach the DF paper entry motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Feed In(H)]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor is not Reattach the DF middle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6310/J6311: DF middle sensor stay jam

Target: J6310 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6311 (1,000-sheet finisher)
The DF middle sensor does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB
• DF exit clutch - DF PWB (3,000-sheet
finisher)
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor is not Reattach the DF middle sensor. If it does not
sensor attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 (3,000-sheet finisher) The DF exit clutch is not Reattach the DF exit clutch. If it does not
Checking the DF exit clutch attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.

7-82
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Checking the DF middle motor The DF middle motor is not Reattach the DF middle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6400/J6401: DF exit paper sensor non-arrival jam

Target: J6400 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6401 (1,000-sheet finisher)
The DF exit paper sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF middle sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF middle sensor - DF PWB
• DF exit paper sensor - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor is not Reattach the DF middle sensor. If it does not
sensor attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 Checking the DF exit paper The DF exit paper sensor is Reattach the DF exit paper sensor. If it does
sensor not attached properly, or it is not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
5 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is not Reattach the DF tray motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6410/J6411/J6412: DF exit paper sensor stay jam

Target: J6410 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6412 (Inner finisher)
Remark: J6412 is not detected when feeding the OHP film.
The DF exit paper sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.

7-83
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF exit paper sensor - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF exit paper The DF exit paper sensor is Reattach the DF exit paper sensor. If it does
sensor not attached properly, or it is not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is not Reattach the DF tray motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6510/J6511/J6512: DF exit paper sensor stay jam when outputting the paper bundle
Target: J6510 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6512 (Inner finisher)
The DF exit paper sensor does not turn off after starting the paper stack output.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper conveying The parts such as the roller or Clean, correct and reattach the conveying
parts the guide are not properly parts such as roller and guide. If not
attached, or they are dirty, repaired, replace it.
deformed or worn down.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF exit paper sensor - DF PWB
• DF exit motor - DF PWB
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
3 Checking the DF exit paper The DF exit paper sensor is Reattach the DF exit paper sensor. If it does
sensor not attached properly, or it is not operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 Checking the DF exit motor The DF exit motor is not Reattach the DF exit motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Eject Conv(H)]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is not Reattach the DF tray motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6810/J6811/J6812: Front DF side registration jam

Target: J6810 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6811 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6812 (Inner finisher)
DF side registration sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor 1 turned
on during the standby operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the front DF The front DF adjusting plate is Check if the DF front adjusting plate shifts
adjusting plate not properly attached, or it is manually. Clean and reattach it if it does not
dirty, deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace it if it is not
fixed.

7-84
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB
3 Checking DF side registration DF side registration sensor 1 Reattach DF side registration sensor 1 and
sensor 1 is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
faulty. it does not operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Reattach DF side registration motor 1 and
motor 1 not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If it does not operate
correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam

Target: J6910 (3,000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J6912 (Inner finisher)
DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the specific time since DF side registration motor 2 turned
on during the standby operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the rear DF The rear DF adjusting plate is Check if the DF rear adjusting plate shifts
adjusting plate not properly attached, or it is manually. Clean and reattach it if it does not
dirty, deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace it if it is not
fixed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration sensor 2 - DF PWB
• DF side registration motor 2 - DF PWB
3 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2 and
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Tail HP]. If
is faulty. it does not operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 2 is Reattach DF side registration motor 2 and
motor 2 not attached properly, or it is execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If it does not operate
correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam

Target: J7000 (3,000-sheet finisher), J7001 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J7002 (Inner finisher)
The DF staple home position cannot be detected after starting up DF slide motor. Or the motor lock-up is detected
during DF staple motor (DF staple unit) operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF Check if the lower BF registration guide
registration guide shifts shifts manually, and reattach it if it does not
manually, and reattach it if it smoothly shift.
does not smoothly shift.
2 Checking the driving parts The DF slide motor cannot Check if the DF slide motor rotates manually,
rotate due to the excessive and replace the DF staple unit if the motor
load. does not rotate smoothly due to the faulty
gear.

7-85
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple table unit does If the DF staple unit is not shifted manually
not move normally. back and forth, repair the part that restricts
the operation.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF slide motor - DF PWB
• DF staple unit - DF staple relay PWB
• DF staple relay PWB - DF PWB
5 Replacing the DF slide motor The DF slide motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Staple Move]. If the
DF slide motor does not operate correctly,
replace it.
6 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Staple]. If the DF
staple motor does not operate correctly,
replace the DF staple unit.
7 Replacing the DF staple relay The DF staple relay PWB is Replace the DF staple relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
8 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J7800: Mail Box exit non-arrival jam

Target: Mail box
MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the specific time since the paper is output from the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the belt The belt and surrounding parts Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv] to check
are not properly attached, are the belt operation. If the belt does not
dirty, deformed or worn down. operate correctly, correct the belt and the
neighboring parts (the feed-shift claw lever,
guide, etc.). If not repaired, replace the parts.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MT tray exit sensor 1 - MT PWB
• MT home position switch - MT PWB
• MT drive motor - MT PWB
3 Checking MT tray exit sensor MT tray exit sensor 1 is not Reattach MT tray exit sensor 1. If it does not
1 attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
4 Checking the MT home The belt holding plate does Reattach the MT home position sensor and
position switch not shift correctly since the MT execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If it
home position switch is not does not operate correctly, replace it.
attached properly, or it is
faulty.
5 Checking the MT drive motor The MT drive motor is not Reattach the MT drive motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.

J7810: Mail Box exit stay jam

Target: Mail box
The MT tray exit sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the specific time since it turned on.

7-86
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the belt The belt and surrounding parts Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv] to check
are not properly attached, are the belt operation. If the belt does not
dirty, deformed or worn down. operate correctly, correct the belt and the
neighboring parts (the feed-shift claw lever,
guide, etc.). If not repaired, replace the parts.
2 Reattaching the MT tray The MT tray is not properly Reattach the MT tray.
attached.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MT tray exit sensor 1 - MT PWB
• MT drive motor - MT PWB
4 Checking MT tray exit sensor MT tray exit sensor 1 is not Reattach MT tray exit sensor 1. If it does not
1 attached properly, or it is operate correctly, replace it.
faulty.
5 Checking the MT drive motor The MT drive motor is not Reattach the MT drive motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.

J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam

Target: J7900 (3,000-sheet finisher), J7901 (1,000-sheet finisher) and J7902 (Inner finisher)
The DF puddle sensor on is not detected when passing 1s after starting up the DF puddle motor.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing the paper The paper is jammed in the Remove the jammed paper from the DF
DF paddle. paddle.
2 Checking the driving parts The DF paddle does not rotate Check if the DF puddle motor rotates
due to the excessive load. manually. If the drive parts do not rotate
smoothly due to damage, etc., replace it.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
• DF paddle motor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is not Reattach the DF paddle sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF paddle motor The DF paddle motor is not Reattach the DF paddle motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U240 [Motor] > [Beat]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

J9000: No original feed from the DP

The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the specified times of retries of the original feed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
2 Checking the original The original curls downward, Correct or replace the original. If the original
or is wavy. cannot be replaced, relocate the leading end
of the original and the trailing end.

7-87
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
6 Checking the DP feed roller The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
7 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP feed sensor
spring properly. is deformed or does not operate normally,
replace it.
8 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP feed sensor - DP PWB
• DP feed motor - Relay connector - MT PWB
9 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor is not Reattach the DP feed sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U244 [Feed]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
10 Checking the DP feed motor The DP feed motor is not Reattach the DP feed motor and execute
attached properly, or it is U243 [Feed]. If it does not operate correctly,
faulty. replace it.
11 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
12 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
13 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the reverse operation started.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
Checking the DP conveying performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
roller conveying roller is insufficient.
3 (When the original is skewed) The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width width guides and the original size.
guides size are mismatched.
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed-shift guide. If the burrs
Checking the DP feed-shift DP feed-shift guide. are on the original conveying side of the DP
guide feed-shift guide, remove them or replace the
guide.
5 (When the original conveying The paper conveying force of Clean the DP reverse roller surface. If worn
delays) Checking the DP the DP reverse roller is down, replace it.
reverse roller insufficient.
6 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
7 Checking the original The original curls downward, Correct or replace the original. If the original
or is wavy. cannot be replaced, relocate the leading end
of the original and the trailing end.

7-88
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

8 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
9 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
10 Checking the driving parts The DP feed-shift guide does Check if the drive parts of the DP feedshift
not switch since the DP feed- motor operate normally, clean and apply
shift motor drive parts are grease. If not repaired, replace it.
faulty.
11 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP registration
spring properly. sensor is deformed or does not operate
normally, replace it.
12 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP registration sensor - DP PWB
• DP feed-shift motor - Relay connector - MT
PWB
13 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor is Reattach the DP registration sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U244 [Regist]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
14 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is not Reattach the DP feed-shift motor and
motor attached properly, or it is execute U243 [Rev Motor]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
16 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
17 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DP The document processor is Check if the document processor is securely
not properly installed, or it is closed, and reinstall it if necessary. Fix or
faulty. replace the DP covers if it is deformed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the connector of the DP opening/
connected. closing sensor.
3 Reattaching the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reattach the DP opening/closing sensor.
closing sensor sensor comes off.
4 Replacing the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Execute U244 [Open]. If the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor is faulty. closing sensor does not operate correctly,
replace it.

J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off when passing the specified pulses after the DP registration sensor turns on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
2 Checking the original The original curls downward, Correct or replace the original. If the original
or is wavy. cannot be replaced, relocate the leading end
of the original and the trailing end.
3 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.

7-89
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
5 Checking the DP retard roller The paper separation force of Clean the DP reverse roller surface. If worn
the DP reverse roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
6 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift guide Reattach the DP feed-shift guide.
guide comes off.
7 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the DP feed roller the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.
8 (When the original is skewed) The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width width guides and the original size.
guides size are mismatched.
9 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP feed guide. If the burrs are
Checking the DP feed belt DP feed guide. on the original conveying side of the DP feed
guide, remove them or replace the DP feed
guide.
10 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP feed sensor
spring properly. is deformed or does not operate normally,
replace it.
11 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP feed sensor - DP PWB
12 Checking the DP feed sensor The DP feed sensor is dirty, is Clean and reattach the DP feed sensor, and
not attached properly, or is then execute U244 [Feed]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
13 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.

J9120: DP original sensor initial jam

Scanning the original has started under the condition that the original is remaining in the conveying path after turning on
the power.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 Cleaning the DP feed clutch The DP original sensor is dirty. Clean the DP original sensor.
3 Checking the connection The connector of the DP Reinsert the DP original sensor connector.
original sensor is not properly
connected.
4 Replacing the DP original The DP original sensor is Execute U244 [Set]. If the DP original sensor
sensor faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.

J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the DP feed roller the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.

7-90
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the original is skewed) The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width width guides and the original size.
guides size are mismatched.
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP conveying guide. If burrs
Checking the DP conveying DP conveying guide. are on the original conveying surface of the
guide DP conveying guide, remove burrs or
replace the guide.
5 (When the original conveying The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
delays) Checking the DP performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
conveying roller conveying roller is insufficient.
6 (When the original conveying The DP top cover is deformed. Check if the DP top cover is securely closed.
delays) Checking the DP top If it cannot be closed due to the deformation,
cover replace it.
7 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
8 Checking the original The original curls downward, Correct or replace the original. If the original
or is wavy. cannot be replaced, relocate the leading end
of the original and the trailing end, or reload
the original upside down at the duplex scan.
9 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
10 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
11 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP registration
spring properly. sensor is deformed or does not operate
normally, replace it.
12 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP registration sensor - DP PWB
• DP conveying motor - Relay connector -
MT PWB
13 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor is Reattach the DP registration sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U244 [Regist]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
14 Checking the DP conveying The DP conveying motor is Reattach the DP conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U243 [Conv Motor(CW)]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
16 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
17 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the specific pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 (When the original is skewed) The paper conveying force of Clean the DP feed roller surface. If worn
Checking the DP feed roller the DP feed roller is down, replace it.
insufficient.

7-91
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 (When the original is skewed) The location of the original Align the original width guides to the original
Relocating the original width width guides and the original size.
guides size are mismatched.
4 (When the original is skewed) The original is hooked with the Reattach the DP conveying guide. If burrs
Checking the DP conveying DP conveying guide. are on the original conveying surface of the
guide DP conveying guide, remove burrs or
replace the guide.
5 (When the original conveying The paper conveying Clean the DP conveying roller surface. If
delays) Checking the DP performance of the DP worn down, replace it.
conveying roller conveying roller is insufficient.
6 (When the original conveying The DP top cover is deformed. Check if the DP top cover is securely closed.
delays) Checking the DP top If it cannot be closed due to the deformation,
cover replace it.
7 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
8 Checking the original The original curls downward, Correct or replace the original. If the original
or is wavy. cannot be replaced, relocate the leading end
of the original and the trailing end, or reload
the original upside down at the duplex scan.
9 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the original within the
specification is used. specifications.
10 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on the Remove the original with the foreign objects.
original.
11 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP registration
spring properly. sensor is deformed or does not operate
normally, replace it.
12 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP registration sensor - DP PWB
• DP conveying motor - Relay connector -
MT PWB
13 Checking the DP registration The DP registration sensor is Reattach the DP registration sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U244 [Regist]. If it does not operate
faulty. correctly, replace it.
14 Checking the DP conveying The DP conveying motor is Reattach the DP conveying motor and
motor not attached properly, or it is execute U243 [Conv Motor(CW)]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
15 Replacing the DP PWB The DP PWB is faulty. Replace the DP PWB.
16 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
17 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

J9220: DP registration sensor initial jam

Scanning the original has started under the condition that the original is remaining in the conveying route after turning on
the power.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove paper strip or foreign objects
piece of paper, etc. adhering on the conveying path, or burrs on
the parts such as guide, actuator, etc.
2 Checking the actuator and the The actuator does not operate The actuator or spring of the DP registration
spring properly. sensor is deformed or does not operate
normally, replace it.

7-92
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Cleaning the DP registration The DP registration sensor is Clean the DP registration sensor.
sensor dirty.
4 Checking the connection The connector of the DP Reinsert the DP registration sensor
registration sensor is not connector.
properly connected.
5 Replacing the DP registration The DP registration sensor is Execute U244 [Regist]. If the DP registration
sensor faulty. sensor does not operate correctly, replace it.

7-93
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures

No. Contents Condition

(4-1) Original dog-ear The leading edge of the original gets dog-ear when scanning the
downward curl original through the DP.

Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(4-1)Original dog-ear
The leading edge of the original gets dog-ear when scanning the downward curl original through the DP.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the scanning guide The leading edge of the Replace the scanning guide with the
original contacts the DP feed- assembly with the sponge and film
shift guide. (302R39410_).

7-94
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 3 Self Diagnostic
(1) Self diagnostic function
This machine is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops operating and
displays an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to
service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of error.

Important
• Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the
power switch off and unplug the machine from power.
• Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric
charge may remain in the capacitors on the low voltage PWB, so that please be careful not to touch
the mounted parts to protect you from electric shock.

(2) Self diagnostic error codes

(2-1)Error codes list
Error code Contents
C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0140 Backup memory data error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0350 Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
C0360 Communication error between the engine PWB and ASIC
C0640 Hard Disk (SSD) error
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)
C0870 PC FAX Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0950 FAX job stay error
C0970 24V power interruption detection
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 PF lift motor 1 error
C1030 PF lift motor 2 error
C1040 PF lift motor 3 error
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1810 Paper Feeder communication error
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C1910 Paper feeder EEPROM error
C2101 Developer motor K error
C2102 Developer motor C/M/Y steady-state error

7-95
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents

C2112 Developer motor C/M/Y startup error
C2201 Drum motor K steady-state error
C2202 Drum motor C/M/Y steady-state error
C2211 Drum motor K startup error
C2211 Drum motor C/M/Y startup error
C2500 Feed motor error
C2600 PF feed motor error
C2610 PF feed motor error
C2700 Full-color release error
C2760 Transfer motor startup error
C2820 Transfer motor steady-state error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED lamp startup error
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3500 Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC
C3800 AFE error
C4001 Polygon motor startup error
C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error K
C4102 BD initialization error C
C4103 BD initialization error M
C4104 BD initialization error Y
C4201 BD steady-state error
C4600 LSU cleaning motor error
C4700 VIDEO ASIC device error
C5101 Main high voltage error BK
C5102 Main high-voltage error C
C5103 Main high-voltage error M
C5104 Main high-voltage error Y
C6000 Fuser main heater broken
C6020 Fuser thermistor 1 high temperature error
C6030 Broken fuser thermistor 1 error
C6040 Fuser main heater error
C6050 Fuser thermistor 1 low temperature error
C6200 Fuser sub heater error
C6220 Fuser sub heater high temperature error
C6230 Broken fuser thermistor 2 error
C6250 Fuser thermistor 2 low temperature error
C6400 Zero-cross signal error
C6610 Fuser press-release sensor error
C6910 Engine firmware unexpected error
C7001 Toner motor K error
C7002 Toner motor C error
C7003 Toner motor M error
C7004 Toner motor Y error
C7101 Toner sensor K error
C7102 Toner sensor C error

7-96
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents

C7103 Toner sensor M error
C7104 Toner sensor Y error
C7200 Internal thermistor error (Developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7221 Broken LSU thermistor error
C7231 LSU thermistor short-circuited
C7401 Developer unit K type mismatch error
C7402 Developer unit C type mismatch error
C7403 Developer unit M type mismatch error
C7404 Developer unit Y type mismatch error
C7411 Drum unit K type mismatch error
C7412 Drum unit C type mismatch error
C7413 Drum unit M type mismatch error
C7414 Drum unit Y type mismatch error
C7601 Front ID sensor error
C7602 Rear ID sensor error
C7611 Bias calibration read value error BK
C7612 Bias calibration read value error C
C7613 Bias calibration read value error M
C7614 Bias calibration read value error Y
C7620 Automatic color registration failure
C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
C7902 Drum unit C EEPROM error
C7903 Drum unit M EEPROM error
C7904 Drum unit Y EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
C8000 Incompatible finisher detection error
C8090 DF paddle motor error
C8100 DF exit release motor error
C8140 DF tray motor error 1
C8160 DF tray motor error 3
C8170 DF side registration motor 1 error (1)
C8180 DF side registration motor 1 error (2)
C8190 DF side registration motor 2 error (1)
C8200 DF side registration motor 2 error (2)
C8210 DF slide motor front/rear error
C8230 DF slide motor error 1
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8500 Main program error / Mail Box communication error
C8510 MB conveying motor error 1
C8520 MB conveying motor error 2
C8800 Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

7-97
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents

C8900 DF backup error
C9180 DP feed-shift motor error
C9500 Image processing PWB error A
C9540 Backup data error

(2-2)Content of Self Diagnostic

C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.

C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reinstall the EEPROM on the main PWB.
attached.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM. Then, execute U004
as service call error C0180 will appear after
replacing the EEPROM.
4 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

C0120: MAC address data error

MAC address data was incorrect data.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.

7-98
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address is incorrect. Replace the main PWB when the MAC
address is not indicated on the network
status page.

C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

C0140: Backup memory data error

The data read from the flash memory is judged as abnormal at the startup.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Executing U021 The flash memory does not Execute U021.
operate properly.
3 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM on the engine PWB.
attached.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the engine PWB
and execute U004.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

7-99
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021.
EEPROM on the engine PWB
is faulty.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the engine PWB
and execute U004.

C0170: Charger count error

The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side and the
engine side.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
number different main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
main PWB if the MAIN No. differs.
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
number main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
EEPROM on the engine PWB if the ENGINE
machine serial No. differs.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at
U004, replace the main PWB and execute
U004.
4 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. In case if the machine serial No. registered in
the engine PWB is different in U004, reattach
the EEPROM on the engine PWB. If it is not
fixed, replace the EEPROM and execute
U004.
Note: Be sure not to execute U004 if the
machine serial No. is different from the
machine serial No. indicated on the main
unit. Otherwise, the different machine serial
No. will be overwritten. (Don't select
[Execute] and press the [Start] key.)
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the power on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the machine serial The main PWB for the Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
number different main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
main PWB if the MAIN No. differs.
2 Checking the machine serial The EEPROM for the different Check the machine serial Nos of MAIN and
number main unit is installed. ENGINE at U004, and install the correct
EEPROM on the engine PWB if the ENGINE
machine serial No. differs.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine serial No. differs at
U004, replace the main PWB and execute
U004.

7-100
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. In case if the machine serial No. registered in
the engine PWB is different in U004, reattach
the EEPROM on the engine PWB. If it is not
fixed, replace the EEPROM and execute
U004.
Note: Be sure not to execute U004 if the
machine serial No. is different from the
machine serial No. indicated on the main
unit. Otherwise, the different machine serial
No. will be overwritten. (Don't select
[Execute] and press the [Start] key.)
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial command was
transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The operation of the operation Turn off the power switch and unplug the
panel PWB is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Operation panel PWB - Main PWB
3 Replacing the operation panel The operation panel PWB is Replace the operation panel PWB.
PWB faulty.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C0360: Communication error between the engine PWB and ASIC

The checksum error appears or the video signal is not reversed when checking the read-back data after transmitting the
data. (Successive failure 10 times)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly operate. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

C0640: Flash memory (SSD) error

The SSD I/O error is detected when accessing the file after the ready mode.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The SSD (HD-6 or HD-7) is Turn off the power switch and unplug the
faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the SSD (HD-6 or The SSD (HD-6 or HD-7) is Turn off the power switch and unplug the
HD-7) faulty. power cord. Then, reinstall the SSD (HD-6 or
HD-7).

7-101
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Reconnecting the SSD (HD-6 The connection with the main Reconnect the KUIO connector on the main
or HD-7) PWB is faulty. PWB and the SSD (HD-6 or HD-7).
4 Initializing the SSD (HD-6 or The storage data in the SSD Initialize the SSD (HD-6 or HD-7) by
HD-7) (HD-6 or HD-7) is faulty. executing U024.
5 Replacing the SSD (HD-6 or The SSD (HD-6 or HD-7) is Replace the SSD (HD-6 or HD-7).
HD-7) faulty.
6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only when handling
the certain image data, check if the image
data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of the Acquire the job's log if the phenomenon can
certain file is faulty. be reproduced by specifying the job when
the error was detected.
3 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
2 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

C0840: RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)

1. The normal communication is not available with the RTC device.
2. There is mismatch in the RTC data due to dead battery or short-circuit with metal parts.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Setting the RTC RTC is not properly set. Set the RTC in the System Menu.
2 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is not properly Retighten the screws for the PWB.
attached.
3 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

7-102
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted into the FAX PWB.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
2 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect.
2 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly executed. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version.

C0970: 24V power interruption detection

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the interlock switch The interlock switch does not Check if the interlock switch turns on by
turn on. closing the front cover. If it does not turn on,
reattach the interlock switch.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Lower voltage PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-103
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C1010: Lift motor 1 error

1. The lift sensor does not turn on if 12s passes after inserting the cassette.
2. The lift sensor does not turn on after passing 1s from ascending control since it turned off during the printing.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate If the lift plate does not ascend or descend,
properly. correct it or replace it.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not rotate Check if MP lift plate elevation drive gears
properly. rotate or have no excessive load. And apply
the grease to the frictional parts and repair
the related parts so that they can rotate
properly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Lift sensor - Engine PWB
4 Checking the lift sensor The lift sensor is not properly Reattach PF lift upper limit sensor. If not
attached, or it is faulty. repaired, replace it.
5 Checking the lift motor The lift motor is not properly Reattach the lift motor. If it is not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C1020: PF lift motor 1 error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 1)
1. The PF lift sensor does not turn on if 12s passes after inserting the cassette.
2. The PF lift sensor does not turn on after passing 1s from ascending control since it turned off during the printing.
3. The current of the PF lift motor exceeding the specified value is detected for 500ms or more continuously during the
PF lift motor operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate If the lift plate does not ascend or descend,
properly. correct it or replace it.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not rotate Check if MP lift plate elevation drive gears
properly. rotate or have no excessive load. And apply
the grease to the frictional parts and repair
the related parts so that they can rotate
properly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF lift motor - PF PWB
• PF lift sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not attached Reattach the PF lift motor. If it is not repaired,
properly or faulty. replace it.

7-104
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking the PF lift sensor The PF lift motor is not Reattach the PF lift sensor. If it is not
properly attached, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
6 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C1030: PF lift motor 2 error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
1. The PF lift sensor does not turn on if 12s (500-sheet feeder or 2 cassettes of 500-sheet feeder) or 17s (2000-sheet
feeder) passes after inserting the cassette.
2. The PF lift sensor does not turn on after passing 1s from the ascending control since the it turned off during the
printing.
3. The current of the PF lift motor exceeding the specified value is detected for 500ms or more continuously during the
PF lift motor operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate If the lift plate does not ascend or descend,
properly. correct it or replace it.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not rotate Check if MP lift plate elevation drive gears
properly. rotate or have no excessive load. And apply
the grease to the frictional parts and repair
the related parts so that they can rotate
properly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF lift motor - PF PWB
• PF lift sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not attached Reattach the PF lift motor. If it is not repaired,
properly or faulty. replace it.
5 Checking the PF lift sensor The PF lift motor is not Reattach the PF lift sensor. If it is not
properly attached, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
6 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB for the paper feeder
(500-sheetx1).
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C1040: PF lift motor 3 error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2)
1. The PF lift sensor does not turn on if 12s passes after inserting the cassette.

7-105
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

2. The PF lift sensor does not turn on after passing 1s from ascending control since it turned off during the printing.
3. The current of the PF lift motor exceeding the specified value is detected for 500ms or more continuously during the
PF lift motor operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the lift plate The lift plate does not operate If the lift plate does not ascend or descend,
properly. correct it or replace it.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not rotate Check if MP lift plate elevation drive gears
properly. rotate or have no excessive load. And apply
the grease to the frictional parts and repair
the related parts so that they can rotate
properly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF lift motor - PF PWB
• PF lift sensor - PF PWB
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor PF lift motor is not attached Reattach the PF lift motor. If it is not repaired,
properly or faulty. replace it.
5 Checking the PF lift sensor The PF lift motor is not Reattach the PF lift sensor. If it is not
properly attached, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
6 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB for the paper feeder
(500-sheetx1).
8 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 1)
The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-106
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C1810: Paper Feeder communication error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
5 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB for the paper feeder
(500-sheetx1).
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 1)
For the internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.

C1910: Paper feeder EEPROM error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
For the internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 4 times continuously when writing.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.

7-107
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
3 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
4 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB for the paper feeder
(500-sheetx1).

C2101: Developer motor K error

The steady signal turns off for 2s continuously after developer motor K is stabilized.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the developer unit drive gear if it is
correctly. faulty.
2 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller does not Check if the developer roller rotates. If not,
rotate correctly. replace developer unit K.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed] to check if the
correctly. developer motor K drive gear rotates or has
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer motor K - Engine PWB
5 Checking developer motor K Developer motor K is faulty. Reattach developer motor K. If not repaired,
replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2102: Developer motor C/M/Y steady-state error

The steady signal turns off for 1s continuously after developer motor C/M/Y started up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the developer unit drive gear if it is
correctly. faulty.
2 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller does not Replace developer unit C, M or Y if the
rotate correctly. developer roller does not rotate.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [DLP(CMY)] to check if the
correctly. developer motor C/M/Y drive gear rotates or
has excessive load. Apply grease and repair
the parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer motor C/M/Y - Engine PWB
5 Checking developer motor C/ Developer motor C/M/Y is Reattach developer motor C/M/Y. If not
M/Y faulty. repaired, replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-108
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C2112: Developer motor C/M/Y startup error

The steady signal does not turns on for 2s continuously after developer motor C/M/Y started up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the developer unit drive gear if it is
correctly. faulty.
2 Replacing the developer unit The developer roller does not Replace developer unit C, M or Y if the
rotate correctly. developer roller does not rotate.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [DLP(CMY)] to check if the
correctly. developer motor C/M/Y drive gear rotates or
has excessive load. Apply grease and repair
the parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer motor C/M/Y - Engine PWB
5 Checking developer motor C/ Developer motor C/M/Y is not Reattach developer motor C/M/Y. If not
M/Y attached properly, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2201: Drum motor K steady-state error

The steady signal turns off for 1s continuously after drum motor K is stabilized.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the gears driving the drum unit if
correctly. they are faulty.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum does not rotate Check if the drum or the drum screw is
smoothly. rotated, and replace drum unit K if not
rotated.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed] to check if the drum
correctly. motor K drive gear rotates or has excessive
load. Apply grease and repair the parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum motor K - Engine PWB
5 Checking drum motor K Drum motor K is not properly Reattach drum motor K. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2202: Drum motor C/M/Y steady-state error

The steady signal turns off for 1s continuously after drum motor C/M/Y started up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the gears driving the drum unit if
correctly. they are faulty.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum does not rotate Check if the drum or the drum screw is
smoothly. rotated, and replace drum unit C/M/Y if not
rotated.

7-109
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed] to check if the drum
correctly. motor CMY drive gear rotates or has
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum motor C/M/Y - Engine PWB
5 Checking drum motor C/M/Y Drum motor C/M/Y is not Reattach drum motor C/M/Y. If not repaired,
properly attached, or it is replace it.
faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2211: Drum motor K startup error

The drum motor K is not in the steady state when passing 2s after the drive start.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the gears driving the drum unit if
correctly. they are faulty.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum does not rotate Check if the drum or the drum screw is
smoothly. rotated, and replace drum unit K if not
rotated.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed] to check if the drum
correctly. motor K drive gear rotates or has excessive
load. Apply grease and repair the parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum motor K - Engine PWB
5 Checking drum motor K Drum motor K is not properly Reattach drum motor K. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2211: Drum motor C/M/Y startup error

The drum motor C/M/Y is not in the steady state when passing 2s after the drive start.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the gear The gear does not rotate Replace the gears driving the drum unit if
correctly. they are faulty.
2 Replacing the drum unit The drum does not rotate Check if the drum or the drum screw is
smoothly. rotated, and replace drum unit C/M/Y if not
rotated.
3 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed] to check if the drum
correctly. motor CMY drive gear rotates or has
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum motor C/M/Y - Engine PWB

7-110
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking drum motor C/M/Y Drum motor C/M/Y is not Reattach drum motor C/M/Y. If not repaired,
properly attached, or it is replace it.
faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2500: Feed motor error

1.The ready signal does not turn on when passing 2s after starting the feed motor drive.
2. The ready signal does not turn on for 1s continuously after the feed motor is in the steady state.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Feed].
correctly. Check if the feed roller or drive gear rotates
or has an excessive load. Apply grease and
repair the parts.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Feed motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking the feed motor The feed motor is not attached Reattach the feed motor. If not repaired,
properly, or it is faulty. replace it.
4 Replacing the feed drive unit Parts in the feed drive unit are Replace feed drive unit.
faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2600: PF feed motor error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 1)
The ready signal does not turn on when passing 2s after starting up the PF feed motor.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Select U247 [PF] > [Motor] > [On] and
correctly. execute it.
Check if the PF feed roller or drive gear
rotates correctly or has an excessive load.
Apply grease and repaired the parts.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• PF feed motor - PF PWB
3 Checking the connection The paper feeder is not Check the following wire connection, and
properly connected to the correct the terminals and reconnect the
main unit, or the wire or connectors all the way.
drawer connector is faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - Engine PWB
4 Checking the PF feed motor The PF feed motor is not Reattach the PF feed motor. If not repaired,
attached properly, or it is replace it.
faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
6 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.

7-111
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2610: PF feed motor error

Target: Paper feeder (500-sheet x 2), large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet)
The ready signal does not turn on when passing 2s after starting up the PF feed motor.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Select U247 [2PF] or [LCF] > [Motor] > [On]
correctly. and execute it.
Check if the PF feed roller or drive gear
rotates correctly or has an excessive load.
Apply grease and repaired the parts.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• PF feed motor - PF PWB
3 Reinstalling the paper feeder The paper feeder is not Reinstall the paper feeder.
properly installed.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not Check the following wire connection, and
connected properly or, the correct the terminals and reconnect the
wire or drawer connector is connectors all the way.
faulty. If the wire has no continuity or the drawer
connector is faulty, replace them.
• PF PWB - Drawer connector - PF PWB
(500-sheetx1)
• PF PWB (500-sheetx1) - Drawer connector
- Engine PWB
5 Checking the PF feed motor The PF feed motor is not Reattach the PF feed motor. If not repaired,
attached properly, or it is replace it.
faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB.
8 Replacing the PF PWB The PF PWB is faulty. Replace the PF PWB for the paper feeder
(500-sheetx1).
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2700: Full-color release error

The position signal does not change when passing 2s while the transfer belt release is changed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The drive parts do not operate Execute U030 [Belt Release].
correctly. Check if the drive gear rotates or has an
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• TC belt release sensor 1, 2 - Engine PWB
• Transfer release motor - Engine PWB
3 Checking the TC belt release The TC belt release sensor Reattach TC belt release sensor 1, 2. If not
sensor comes off, or it is faulty. repaired, replace them.
4 Checking the transfer release The transfer release motor is Reattach the transfer release motor. If not
motor not attached properly, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.

7-112
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Replacing the primary transfer The lift drive of the primary Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit transfer roller is faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2760: Transfer motor startup error

The ready signal does not turn on when passing 2s after starting up the motor.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The transfer motor drive parts Execute U030 [Feed].
are faulty. Check if the drive gear rotates or has an
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
2 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer unit drive Replace the primary transfer unit when the
unit parts are faulty, or the transfer primary transfer unit drive parts are faulty or
belt is faulty. the transfer belt does not rotate correctly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Transfer motor - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the transfer motor The transfer motor is faulty. Reattach the transfer motor. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C2820: Transfer motor steady-state error

The steady state signal is off for 1s continuously after the transfer motor is in the steady state.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the driving parts The drive transmission from Execute U030 [Feed].
the transfer motor is faulty. Check if the drive gear rotates or has an
excessive load. Apply grease and repair the
parts.
2 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer unit drive Replace the primary transfer unit when the
unit parts are faulty, or the transfer primary transfer unit drive parts are faulty or
belt is faulty. the transfer belt does not rotate correctly.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Transfer motor - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the transfer motor The transfer motor is faulty. Reattach the transfer motor. If not repaired,
replace it.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or finishing the
original scan by the scanner.

7-113
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the scanner A load is applied to the If there is an excessive load to the scanner
movement scanner movement. movement when manually shifting the
scanner carriage, check if foreign material is
on the scanner drive belt. Then, clean the
scanner drive belt and apply the grease to
the ISU shaft.
2 Checking the tension of the A load is applied to the Adjust the drive belt tension properly.
drive belt scanner movement since the
drive belt tension is improper.
3 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the reconnect the FFC. If there is no continuity,
wire or FFC is faulty. replace the wire. If the FFC terminal section
is deformed or FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
• Home position sensor - CCD PWB
• Scanner motor - Engine PWB
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
• Main PWB - Engine PWB
4 Checking the home position The home position sensor is Reattach the home position sensor. If not
sensor not properly attached, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
5 Checking the scanner motor The scanner motor is not Reattach the scanner motor. If not repaired,
attached properly or faulty. replace it.
6 Checking the scanner carriage The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
U411.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
9 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C3200: LED lamp startup error

The white reference data retrieved by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not light. Execute U061 [CCD] to check the LED
lamps light. If not, replace the scanner
carriage and execute U411.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LED PWB - CCD PWB
3 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
4 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
6 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C3300: CCD AGC error

The brightness of the LED lamps is darker or brighter than anticipated when executing the AGC process for the CCD
lamp.

7-114
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the LED lamp 1 LED lamp is broken. Execute U061 [CCD] to check the LED
lamps light. If not, replace the scanner
carriage and execute U411.
2 Cleaning the backside of the The white reference sheet is Clean the contact glass backside. 2017/11/21
contact glass dirty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LED PWB - CCD PWB
4 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
5 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
7 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine CPU.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
2 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C3800: AFE error

The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.
The response from AFE is not returned for 100ms.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• CCD PWB - Main PWB
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
3 Replacing the scanner The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage and execute
carriage U411.

C4001: Polygon motor startup error

The polygon motor is not in the steady state for 15s or more after start-up

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LSU (Polygon motor) - Engine PWB

7-115
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error

The speed is not stable when passing 15s after the polygon motor is in the steady state.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LSU (Polygon motor) - Engine PWB
2 Checking the polygon motor The polygon motor does not Check the rotation sound of the polygon
rotate properly. motor, and reattach or replace the LSU if it
does not rotate properly.
3 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C4101: BD initialization error K

A BD signal is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor drive starts.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C4102: BD initialization error C

A BD signal is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor drive starts.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C4103: BD initialization error M

A BD signal is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor drive starts.

7-116
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C4104: BD initialization error Y

A BD signal is not detected within 1s after the polygon motor drive starts.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C4201: BD steady-state error

The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

1. The LSU cleaning motor operation time is shorter than the specified time.
2. The LSU cleaning parts continue shifting in the same direction for the specified time or more.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning the LSU The LSU cleaning drive gear Clean the LSU cleaning drive gear and the
and the cleaning pad have the cleaning pad.
load and so they are not
shifted smoothly.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• LSU cleaning motor - Engine PWB

7-117
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the LSU cleaning The LSU cleaning motor is not Reattach the LSU cleaning motor. If not
motor properly attached, or it is repaired, replace it.
faulty.
4 Replacing the LSU The LSU cleaning drive gear, Replace the LSU.
cleaning wire or the cleaning
pad are deformed, or they are
faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C4700: VIDEO ASIC device error

1. The communication with VIDEO ASIC failed 5 times continuously.
2. After writing the data to VIDEO ASIC, the value mismatching error repeated 8 times continuously by trying to read the
data from the same address.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn off the power switch and unplug the
PWB is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the connectors on the engine PWB
connected. all the way.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware and the engine
version. firmware to the latest version.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.
5 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

C5101: Main high voltage error BK

The inflow electric current K detected is less than the specified value during the Vpp adjustment.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum screw is Check if the drum or the drum screw is 2017/11/21
not rotated properly due to the rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if
excessive load. not rotated.
2 Checking the drum motor The drum motor does not Execute U030 [Feed] and check the drum 2017/11/21
properly rotate due to the motor K rotation. If it does not rotate
excessive load. correctly, replace it.
3 Checking the main charger The proper voltage is not Clean the high-voltage contact of the main
unit applied since foreign material charger unit, and apply conductive grease to
is adhering on the high- the roller shaft.
voltage contact of the main
charger unit.
4 Replacing the main charger The proper voltage is not Replace the main charger unit and execute
unit applied since the high-voltage U930.
contact of the main charger
unit is deformed or damaged.

7-118
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
8 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C5102: Main high-voltage error C

The inflow electric current C detected is less than the specified value during the Vpp adjustment.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum screw is Check if the drum or the drum screw is
not rotated properly due to the rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if
excessive load. not rotated.
2 Checking the drum motor The drum motor does not Execute U030 [Feed] and check the drum
properly rotate due to the motor C/M/Y rotation. If it does not rotate
excessive load. correctly, replace it.
3 Checking the main charger The proper voltage is not Clean the high-voltage contact of the main
unit applied since foreign material charger unit, and apply conductive grease to
is adhering on the high- the roller shaft.
voltage contact of the main
charger unit.
4 Replacing the main charger The proper voltage is not Replace the main charger unit and execute
unit applied since the high-voltage U930.
contact of the main charger
unit is deformed or damaged.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C5103: Main high-voltage error M

The inflow electric current M detected is less than the specified value during the Vpp adjustment.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum screw is Check if the drum or the drum screw is
not rotated properly due to the rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if
excessive load. not rotated.
2 Checking the drum motor The drum motor does not Execute U030 [Feed] and check the drum
properly rotate due to the motor C/M/Y rotation. If it does not rotate
excessive load. correctly, replace it.
3 Checking the main charger The proper voltage is not Clean the high-voltage contact of the main
unit applied since foreign material charger unit, and apply conductive grease to
is adhering on the high- the roller shaft.
voltage contact of the main
charger unit.

7-119
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Replacing the main charger The proper voltage is not Replace the main charger unit and execute
unit applied since the high-voltage U930.
contact of the main charger
unit is deformed or damaged.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C5104: Main high-voltage error Y

The inflow electric current Y detected is less than the specified value during the Vpp adjustment.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum screw is Check if the drum or the drum screw is
not rotated properly due to the rotated manually, and replace the drum unit if
excessive load. not rotated.
2 Checking the drum motor The drum motor does not Execute U030 [Feed] and check the drum
properly rotate due to the motor C/M/Y rotation. If it does not rotate
excessive load. correctly, replace it.
3 Checking the main charger The proper voltage is not Clean the high-voltage contact of the main
unit applied since foreign material charger unit, and apply conductive grease to
is adhering on the high- the roller shaft.
voltage contact of the main
charger unit.
4 Replacing the main charger The proper voltage is not Replace the main charger unit and execute
unit applied since the high-voltage U930.
contact of the main charger
unit is deformed or damaged.
5 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• High voltage PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage PWB.
PWB faulty.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6000: Fuser main heater broken

The temperature detected by fuser thermistor 1 (center) does not reach 100 °C / 212 °F in 20s during warm-up.
The temperature detected by thermistor 1 (center) does not reach the ready display temperature in 30s after reaching
100 °C / 212 °F

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.

7-120
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB when the fuser
PWB heaters always turn on.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6020: Fuser thermistor 1 high temperature error

Fuser thermistor 1 (center thermistor) detects 240°C / 464°F or more for 1s or more.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the fuser unit The drawer connector of the Reinstall the fuser unit so that the drawer
fuser unit is not inserted connector is connected securely.
securely.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6030: Broken fuser thermistor 1 error

Fuser thermistor 1 (center) detected low temperature for 1.6s when fuser thermistor 2 (edge) detected 30°C / 86°F or
more.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the drawer The terminals of the drawer Clean, or correct the terminals of the drawer
connector connectors between the main connector at the fuser unit, and reconnect
unit and the fuser unit have them.
foreign material or are
deformed.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-121
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C6040: Fuser main heater error

1. Fuser thermistor 1 (center) input an abnormal value for 1s continuously.
The fuser unit detection port was at H level during all the operation mode.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB when the fuser
PWB heaters always turn on.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6050: Fuser thermistor 1 low temperature error

Fuser thermistor 1 (center) detected 100 °C / 212 °F or less for 1s during standby or printing.
Fuser thermistor 1 (center) detected 70°C / 158°F or less for 1s during low power mode.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the power supply The power supply voltage Connect the power cord to a different wall
voltage reduces. outlet if the power supply voltage descends
by 10% or more of the rated voltage.
2 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
6 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB when the fuser
PWB heaters always turn on.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6200: Fuser sub heater error

1. The temperature detected by the thermistor does not reach 100 °C / 212 °F after turning the fuser heater on for 30s
continuously during warm-up.
2. The temperature detected by the thermistor does not reach the specified value when turning the fuser heater on for
30s continuously after the temperature detected by the thermistor reaches 100 °C / 212 °F.

7-122
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB when the fuser
PWB heaters always turn on.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6220: Fuser sub heater high temperature error

Fuser thermistor 2 (edge thermistor) detects 240°C / 464°F or more for 1s.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB when the fuser
PWB heaters always turn on.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6230: Broken fuser thermistor 2 error

Fuser thermistor 2 (edge thermistor) detects low temperature for 1.6s.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB

7-123
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6250: Fuser thermistor 2 low temperature error

1.Fuser thermistor 2 (edge) detected 100 °C / 212 °F or less for 1s during standby or printing.
Fuser thermistor 2 (edge) detected 60°C/140°F or less for 1s.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the power supply The power supply voltage Connect the power cord to a different wall
voltage reduces. outlet if the power supply voltage descends
by 10% or more of the rated voltage.
2 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser unit - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.
6 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect normal temperature
due to abnormal part in the
fuser unit.
7 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB

C6400: Zero-cross signal error

The zero-cross signal is not input for 1s continuously when the fusers heater turns on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
3 Checking the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6610: Fuser press-release sensor error

1. The fuser press-release sensor does not turn on after passing 10s since the fuser motor rotated in the counter
direction when the sensor turned off.
2. The fuser press-release sensor does not turn off after passing 10s since the fuser motor rotated in the counter
direction when the sensor turned on.

7-124
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Removing a piece of paper The fuser thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper remaining in the
detect normal temperature fuser unit.
since paper tip resides in the
fuser unit.
2 Checking the fuser press- The fuser press-release does Check if the pressure can be reduced by
release operation not operate properly. reverse-rotating the fuser gear
3 Checking the fuser press- The fuser press-release Check if the fuser press-release sensor is
release sensor sensor is not properly interrupted by the actuator at the fuser
attached. pressure decrease operation. If it is not
interrupted, reattach the parts.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Fuser press-release sensor - Engine PWB
• Fuser motor - Engine PWB
5 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Execute U030 [Fuser]. If the fuser motor
does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the fuser unit The internal parts of the fuser Replace the fuser unit.
unit such as the fuser press-
release sensor are faulty.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error

1. The main charge, developer or transfer bias was impressed when the drum was stopped.
2. The developer bias on was detected 3340ms or more when the main charge was off.
3. Fuser thermistor 1 (center) or fuser thermistor 2 (edge) detected 240°C/464°F or more for 1.2s.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn off the power switch and unplug the
power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Refixing the engine PWB The engine PWB is not Retighten the fixing screws of the engine
properly attached and PWB.
grounding is not secured.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

C7001: Toner motor K error

'Shake the toner container.' appears if the container rotation detection pulse signal does not change for 500ms
continuously when turning the toner motor on.
properly, this message disappears by opening and closing the front cover. If the container rotation detection pulse signal
does not change after repeating that operation 3 times, the service call error appears 3rd time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the toner container The spiral locks up (it does not Replace toner container K if the spiral of the
rotate). toner container cannot be rotated manually.

7-125
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Check if the coupling or the gears are not
drive parts do not properly rotate or the damaged. If damaged, replace the parts.
excessive load is applied to
them.
3 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Toner motor K - Engine PWB
5 Checking the toner supply The toner supply drive unit is Reattach the toner supply drive unit. If not
drive unit not attached properly, or the repaired, replace it.
drive parts are faulty.
6 Checking toner motor K Toner motor K is faulty. Reattach toner motor K. If not repaired,
replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7002: Toner motor C error

'Shake the toner container.' appears if the container rotation detection pulse signal does not change for 500ms
continuously when turning the toner motor on.
properly, this message disappears by opening and closing the front cover. If the container rotation detection pulse signal
does not change after repeating that operation 3 times, the service call error appears 3rd time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the toner container The spiral locks up (it does not Replace toner container C if the spiral in the
rotate). toner container cannot be rotated manually.
2 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Check if the coupling or the gears are not
drive parts do not properly rotate or the damaged. If damaged, replace the parts.
excessive load is applied to
them.
3 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Toner motor C - Engine PWB
5 Checking the toner supply The toner supply drive unit is Reattach the toner supply drive unit. If not
drive unit not attached properly, or the repaired, replace it.
drive parts are faulty.
6 Checking toner motor C Toner motor C is faulty. Reattach toner motor C. If not repaired,
replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7003: Toner motor M error

'Shake the toner container.' appears if the container rotation detection pulse signal does not change for 500ms
continuously when turning the toner motor on.

7-126
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

properly, this message disappears by opening and closing the front cover. If the container rotation detection pulse signal
does not change after repeating that operation 3 times, the service call error appears 3rd time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the toner container The spiral locks up (it does not Replace toner container M if the spiral in the
rotate). toner container cannot be rotated manually.
2 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Check if the coupling or the gears are not
drive parts do not properly rotate or the damaged. If damaged, replace the parts.
excessive load is applied to
them.
3 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Toner motor M - Engine PWB
5 Checking the toner supply The toner supply drive unit is Reattach the toner supply drive unit. If not
drive unit not attached properly, or the repaired, replace it.
drive parts are faulty.
6 Checking toner motor M Toner motor M is faulty. Reattach toner motor M. If not repaired,
replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7004: Toner motor Y error

'Shake the toner container.' appears if the container rotation detection pulse signal does not change for 500ms
continuously when turning the toner motor on.
properly, this message disappears by opening and closing the front cover. If the container rotation detection pulse signal
does not change after repeating that operation 3 times, the service call error appears 3rd time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Replacing the toner container The spiral locks up (it does not Replace toner container Y if the spiral in the
rotate). toner container cannot be rotated manually.
2 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Check if the coupling or the gears are not
drive parts do not properly rotate or the damaged. If damaged, replace the parts.
excessive load is applied to
them.
3 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Toner motor Y - Engine PWB
5 Checking the toner supply The toner supply drive unit is Reattach the toner supply drive unit. If not
drive unit not attached properly, or the repaired, replace it.
drive parts are faulty.
6 Checking toner motor Y Toner motor Y is faulty. Reattach toner motor Y. If not repaired,
replace it.
7 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
8 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-127
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C7101: Toner sensor K error

The sensor output value is at the specified value or less, or more for a certain time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the toner The toner container is not Reinstall toner container BK.
container properly installed.
2 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening of Replace toner container BK.
the toner container cannot
open.
3 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gear and the coupling and
drive parts do not properly rotate or the apply the grease to them.
excessive load is applied to
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit K into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit K - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
• Toner motor K - Engine PWB
5 Replacing developer unit K The gear or spiral does not Replace developer unit K.
rotate in the developer unit, or
toner sensor K is faulty.
6 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
7 Checking toner motor K Toner motor K is not properly Reattach toner motor K. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
8 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7102: Toner sensor C error

The sensor output value is at the specified value or less, or more for a certain time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the toner The toner container is not Reinstall toner container C.
container properly installed.
2 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening of Replace toner container C.
the toner container cannot
open.
3 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gear and the coupling and
drive parts do not properly rotate or the apply the grease to them.
excessive load is applied to
them.

7-128
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit C into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit C - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
• Toner motor C - Engine PWB
5 Replacing developer unit C The gear or spiral does not Replace the developer unit C.
rotate in the developer unit, or
toner sensor C is faulty.
6 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
7 Checking toner motor C Toner motor C is not properly Reattach toner motor C. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
8 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7103: Toner sensor M error

The sensor output value is at the specified value or less, or more for a certain time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the toner The toner container is not Reinstall toner container M.
container properly installed.
2 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening of Replace toner container M.
the toner container cannot
open.
3 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gear and the coupling and
drive parts do not properly rotate or the apply the grease to them.
excessive load is applied to
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit M into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit M - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
• Toner motor M - Engine PWB
5 Replacing developer unit M The gear or spiral does not Replace the developer unit M.
rotate in the developer unit, or
toner sensor M is faulty.
6 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
7 Checking toner motor M Toner motor M is not properly Reattach toner motor M. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.

7-129
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

8 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7104: Toner sensor Y error

The sensor output value is at the specified value or less, or more for a certain time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the toner The toner container is not Reinstall toner container Y.
container properly installed.
2 Replacing the toner container The toner supply opening of Replace toner container Y.
the toner container cannot
open.
3 Checking the toner container The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gear and the coupling and
drive parts do not properly rotate or the apply the grease to them.
excessive load is applied to
them.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit Y into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit Y - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
• Toner motor Y - Engine PWB
5 Replacing developer unit Y The gear or spiral does not Replace the developer unit Y.
rotate in the developer unit, or
toner sensor Y is faulty.
6 Checking the toner supply The drive gear or the coupling Clean the drive gears and the couplings in
drive unit do not properly rotate or the the toner supply drive unit, and apply the
excessive load is applied to grease to these parts.
them.
7 Checking toner motor Y Toner motor Y is not properly Reattach toner motor Y. If not repaired,
attached, or it is faulty. replace it.
8 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7200: Internal thermistor error (Developer)

The input sampling value of the sensor is more than the reference value. (It is controlled by 25°C / 77°F after detection.)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit K into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit K - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB

7-130
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Replacing developer unit K The toner sensor (internal Replace developer unit K.
thermistor) is faulty.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

The input sampling value of the sensor is at the reference value or less.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit K into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit K - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Replacing developer unit K The toner sensor (internal Replace developer unit K.
thermistor) is faulty.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7221: Broken LSU thermistor error

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is more than the reference value

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU.
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or less.

7-131
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector or FFC is not Reconnect the following wire connectors and
connected properly. Or, the clean the FFC and reconnect. If there is no
wire or FFC is faulty. continuity, replace the wire. If the FFC
terminal section is deformed or FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
• LSU - Main PWB
2 Replacing the LSU The LSU (LSU thermistor) is Replace the LSU.
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C7401: Developer unit K type mismatch error

Developer unit K does not conform with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit K into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit K - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking developer unit K The different type of the Install the correct developer unit.
developer unit is installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7402: Developer unit C type mismatch error

Developer unit C mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit C into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit C - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking developer unit C The different type of the Install the correct developer unit.
developer unit is installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-132
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C7403: Developer unit M type mismatch error

Developer unit M mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit M into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit M - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking developer unit M The different type of the Install the correct developer unit.
developer unit is installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7404: Developer unit Y type mismatch error

Developer unit Y mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit Y into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit Y - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking developer unit Y The different type of the Install the correct developer unit.
developer unit is installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7411: Drum unit K type mismatch error

The main unit and drum unit K mismatch.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit K into the main unit all the
connected or the wire is faulty. way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit K - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking drum unit K The different drum unit is Install the proper drum unit.
installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.

7-133
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7412: Drum unit C type mismatch error

Drum unit C mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit C into the main unit all
connected or the wire is faulty. the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit C - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking drum unit C The different drum unit is Install the proper drum unit.
installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7413: Drum unit M type mismatch error

Drum unit M mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit M into the main unit all
connected or the wire is faulty. the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit M - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking drum unit M The different drum unit is Install the proper drum unit.
installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7414: Drum unit Y type mismatch error

Drum unit Y mismatches with the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit Y into the main unit all the
connected or the wire is faulty. way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit Y - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB

7-134
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking drum unit Y The different drum unit is Install the proper drum unit.
installed.
3 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7601: Front ID sensor error

The sensor output value is out of the specified range.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning the front ID sensor The front ID sensor is dirty. Clean the front ID sensor surface.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter not operate properly. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Front ID sensor - Engine PWB
4 Checking the front ID sensor The front ID sensor is not Reattach the front ID sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U464 [Calib] > [Full]. If an error is detected,
faulty. replace it.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7602: Rear ID sensor error

The sensor output value is out of the specified range.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning the rear ID sensor The rear ID sensor is dirty. Clean the rear ID sensor surface.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter not operate properly. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Rear ID sensor - Engine PWB
4 Checking the rear ID sensor The rear ID sensor is not Reattach the rear ID sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U464 [Calib] > [Full]. If an error is detected,
faulty. replace it.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7611: Bias calibration read value error BK

The ID sensor cannot read the patch image density on the transfer belt normally when executing Calibration.

7-135
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter opened. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• ID sensors - Engine PWB
5 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] in the System Menu.
6 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
dirty. (removable by cleaning) If the service call repeatedly appears, clean
the transfer belt surface.
7 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
unit dirty. not (removable by If the service call repeatedly appears,
cleaning) replace the primary transfer unit.
8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU are drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or,
drum unit / developer unit / dirty or worn down. replace them.
LSU
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7612: Bias calibration read value error C

The ID sensor cannot read the patch image density on the transfer belt normally when executing Calibration.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter opened. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• ID sensors - Engine PWB
5 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] in the System Menu.
6 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
dirty. (removable by cleaning) If the service call repeatedly appears, clean
the transfer belt surface.
7 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
unit dirty. not (removable by If the service call repeatedly appears,
cleaning) replace the primary transfer unit.

7-136
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU are drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or,
drum unit / developer unit / dirty or worn down. replace them.
LSU
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7613: Bias calibration read value error M

The ID sensor cannot read the patch image density on the transfer belt normally when executing Calibration.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter opened. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• ID sensors - Engine PWB
5 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] in the System Menu.
6 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
dirty. (removable by cleaning) If the service call repeatedly appears, clean
the transfer belt surface.
7 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
unit dirty. not (removable by If the service call repeatedly appears,
cleaning) replace the primary transfer unit.
8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU are drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or,
drum unit / developer unit / dirty or worn down. replace them.
LSU
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7614: Bias calibration read value error Y

The ID sensor cannot read the patch image density on the transfer belt normally when executing Calibration.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter opened. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.

7-137
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• ID sensors - Engine PWB
5 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] in the System Menu.
6 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
dirty. (removable by cleaning) If the service call repeatedly appears, clean
the transfer belt surface.
7 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
unit dirty. not (removable by If the service call repeatedly appears,
cleaning) replace the primary transfer unit.
8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU are drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or,
drum unit / developer unit / dirty or worn down. replace them.
LSU
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
10 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7620: Automatic color registration failure

1. The patch print position on the transfer belt is not within the readable area by the ID sensors.
2. The transfer belt surface is dirty, or the patch print density is too light.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
operate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open the right cover and open/close the
shutter opened. front cover while the primary transfer unit is
detached to check if the ID sensor shutter
opens/closes (slides to the machine front
and rear side). If not operating correctly,
reattach it.
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• ID sensors - Engine PWB
5 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance] in the System Menu.
6 Cleaning the transfer belt The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
dirty. (removable by cleaning) If the service call repeatedly appears, clean
the transfer belt surface.
7 Replacing the primary transfer The transfer belt surface is Check the service call log on the Event Log.
unit dirty. not (removable by If the service call repeatedly appears,
cleaning) replace the primary transfer unit.
8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, In case if the image is too light, clean the
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU are drum unit, developer unit and the LSU. Or,
drum unit / developer unit / dirty or worn down. replace them.
LSU
9 (When the color registration The LSU or drum unit is not If the color registration shift occurs, attach
occurs) Reinstalling the LSU attached to the proper position the LSU and drum units to the regular
and drum unit or replacing the or the LSU is faulty, position. If not repaired, replace the LSU.
LSU
10 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.

7-138
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

11 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (Outer thermistor) is more than the reference value.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (Outer thermistor) is at the reference value or less.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Temperature/humidity sensor - Engine
PWB
2 Replacing the temperature/ The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
humidity sensor sensor is faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in drum Turn off the power switch and unplug the
unit K is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit K into the main unit all the
connected or the wire is faulty. way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit K - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in drum unit K Replace drum unit K.
is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.

7-139
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7902: Drum unit C EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in drum Turn off the power switch and unplug the
unit C is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit C into the main unit all
connected or the wire is faulty. the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit C - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in drum unit C Replace drum unit C.
is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7903: Drum unit M EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in drum Turn off the power switch and unplug the
unit M is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit M into the main unit all
connected or the wire is faulty. the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit M - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in drum unit M Replace drum unit M.
is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7904: Drum unit Y EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.

7-140
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.

3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in drum Turn off the power switch and unplug the
unit Y is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall drum unit Y into the main unit all the
connected or the wire is faulty. way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Drum unit Y - Drum/developer relay PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the drum unit The EEPROM in drum unit Y Replace drum unit Y.
is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in Turn off the power switch and unplug the
developer unit K is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit K into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit K - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing developer unit K The EEPROM in developer Replace developer unit K.
unit K is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7912: Developer unit C EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

7-141
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in Turn off the power switch and unplug the
developer unit C is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit C into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit C - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing developer unit C The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit C.
unit C is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7913: Developer unit M EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in Turn off the power switch and unplug the
developer unit M is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit M into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit M - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing developer unit M The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit M.
unit M is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C7914: Developer unit Y EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

7-142
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in Turn off the power switch and unplug the
developer unit Y is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinstall developer unit Y into the main unit
connected or the wire is faulty. all the way to reconnect the connector.
Also, reinsert the following wire connectors.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Developer unit Y - Drum/developer relay
PWB
• Drum/developer relay PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing developer unit Y The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit Y.
unit Y is faulty.
4 Replacing the drum/developer The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer relay PWB.
relay PWB PWB is faulty.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C8000: Incompatible finisher detection error

Target: Inner finisher
The main unit and the finisher are mismatched.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the finisher The finisher for other models Install the correct finisher.
is installed.

C8090: DF paddle motor error

Target: Inner finisher
1. DF puddle sensor does not turn on when passing 1s during the DF puddle motor drive.
2. DF puddle sensor does not turn off when driving for 1s during the DF bundle eject sensor on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive parts are Reattach the DF paddle drive parts. If not
parts not attached properly, or they repaired, replace them.
are faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF paddle motor - DF PWB
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Beat]. If the DF
motor paddle motor does not operate correctly,
replace it.
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is not Reattach the DF paddle sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8100: DF exit release motor error

Target: Inner finisher
1. DF bundle sensor does not turn on when passing 1s during the DF eject release motor drive.

7-143
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

2. DF bundle eject sensor does not turn off when driving during the DF bundle eject sensor on.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF bundle exit The exit guide in the DF Repair the DF bundle exit unit.
unit bundle exit unit is deformed.
2 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit unit drive Reattach the DF bundle exit unit drive parts.
unit drive parts parts are not attached If not repaired, replace them.
properly, or they are faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF exit release motor - DF PWB
• DF bundle exit sensor - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF exit release The DF exit release motor is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Eject Unlock]. If the
motor faulty. DF exit release motor does not operate
correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF bundle exit The DF bundle exit sensor is Reattach the DF bundle exit sensor and
sensor not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Bundle Eject HP].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8140: DF tray motor error 1

Target: Inner finisher
Change from DF paper holding sensor 1 or 2 turning on to off is not detected when passing 4s while ascending the DF
main tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not move up and
assembled properly. down manually, adjust the position where
stacks.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive parts Reattach the DF main tray drive parts. If not
drive parts are not attached properly, or repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
• DF paper holding sensor 1 - DF PWB
• DF paper holding sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray
motor does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking DF paper holding DF paper holding sensor 1, 2 Reattach DF paper holding sensor 1, 2 and
sensors 1, 2 is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Press Paper Up]
faulty. or [Press Paper Down]. If it does not operate
correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8160: DF tray motor error 3

Target: Inner finisher
DF tray sensor turning on is not detected when passing 4s while descending the DF main tray.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray does not move up and
assembled properly. down manually, adjust the position where
stacks.

7-144
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive parts Reattach the DF main tray drive parts. If not
drive parts are not attached properly, or repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF tray motor - DF PWB
• DF tray sensor - DF PWB
4 Checking the DF tray motor The DF tray motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Tray]. If the DF tray
motor does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Checking the DF tray sensor The DF tray sensor is not Reattach the DF tray sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Tray L-Limit]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error (1)

Target: Inner finisher
The home position cannot be detected when passing 3s while returning to the home position

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration If the front DF side registration guide is not
registration guide guide is not assembled shifted manually, repair the part that restricts
properly. the operation.
2 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration Reattach the DF side registration front guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts. If not repaired, replace them.
attached properly, or they are
faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
motor 1 faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If DF side registration
motor 1 does not operate correctly, replace
it.
5 Checking DF side registration DF side registration sensor 1 Reattach DF side registration sensor 1 and
sensor 1 is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8180: DF side registration motor 1 error (2)

Target: Inner finisher
J6812 (Pre DF front width registration jam) is detected twice continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration If the front DF side registration guide is not
registration guide guide is not assembled shifted manually, repair the part that restricts
properly. the operation.
2 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registration Reattach the DF side registration front guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts. If not repaired, replace them.
attached properly, or they are
faulty.

7-145
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration motor 1 - DF PWB
• DF side registration sensor 1 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 1 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
motor 1 faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If DF side registration
motor 1 does not operate correctly, replace
it.
5 Checking DF side registration DF side registration sensor 1 Reattach DF side registration sensor 1 and
sensor 1 is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8190: DF side registration motor 2 error (1)

Target: Inner finisher
The home position cannot be detected when passing 3s while returning to the home position

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration If the rear DF side registration guide is not
registration guide guide is not assembled shifted manually, repair the part that restricts
properly. the operation.
2 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration Reattach the DF side registration rear guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts. If not repaired, replace them.
attached properly, or they are
faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration motor 2 - DF PWB
• DF side registration sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 2 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
motor 2 faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If DF side registration
motor 2 does not operate correctly, replace
it.
5 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2 and
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
is faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8200: DF side registration motor 2 error (2)

Target: Inner finisher
J6812 (Post DF rear width registration jam) is detected twice continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration If the rear DF side registration guide is not
registration guide guide is not assembled shifted manually, repair the part that restricts
properly. the operation.
2 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registration Reattach the DF side registration rear guide
registration guide drive parts guide drive parts are not drive parts. If not repaired, replace them.
attached properly, or they are
faulty.

7-146
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF side registration motor 2 - DF PWB
• DF side registration sensor 2 - DF PWB
4 Checking DF side registration DF side registration motor 2 is Execute U240 [Motor] > [Width Test(A4R)] or
motor 2 faulty. [Width Test(LTR)]. If DF side registration
motor 2 does not operate correctly, replace
it.
5 Checking DF side registration DF width adjustment sensor 2 Reattach DF side registration sensor 2 and
sensor 2 is not installed properly. Or, it execute U241 [Finisher] > [Width Front HP].
is faulty. If it does not operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8210: DF slide motor front/rear error

Target: Inner finisher
The home position cannot be detected when passing 3s while returning to the home position at the initial operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit is not shifted manually
assembled properly. back and forth, repair the part that restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit drive parts Reattach the DF staple unit drive parts. If not
drive parts are not attached properly, or repaired, replace them.
they are faulty.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF slide motor - DF PWB
• DF slide sensor - DF PWB
4 Replacing the DF slide motor The DF slide motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Staple Move]. If the
DF slide motor does not operate correctly,
replace it.
5 Checking the DF slide sensor The DF slide sensor is not Reattach the DF slide sensor and execute
attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. If it does not
faulty. operate correctly, replace it.
6 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8230: DF slide motor error 1

Target: Inner finisher
The DF staple jam was detected 2 times continuously.
(Detection condition of 2nd paper jam: The home position cannot be detected after passing 600ms since starting up the
motor.)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple cannot operate manually
assembled properly. without paper jam, repair the part that
restricts the DF staple.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF staple unit - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF staple unit The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit.
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

7-147
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

Target: Inner finisher
J7902 (DF puddle jam) is detected twice continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DF paddle drive The DF paddle drive parts are Reattach the DF paddle drive parts. If not
parts not attached properly, or they repaired, replace them.
are faulty.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF middle motor - DF PWB
• DF paddle sensor - DF PWB
3 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Motor] > [Middle(H)] or
motor [Middle(L)]. If the DF middle motor does not
operate correctly, replace it.
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is not Reattach the DF paddle sensor and execute
sensor attached properly, or it is U241 [Finisher] > [Lead Paddle]. If it does
faulty. not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Target: Mail box
The communication failed after confirming the connection with the mail box.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn off the power switch and unplug the
power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MT PWB - DF PWB
3 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.

C8510: MB conveying motor error 1

Target: Mail box
MT home position sensor turning on is not detected when passing 5s at the initial operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
roller assembled properly. manually, repair the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT home position sensor - MT PWB
3 Replacing the MT drive motor The MT drive motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT
conveying motor does not operate correctly,
replace it.
4 Checking the MT home The MT home position sensor Reattach the MT home position sensor and
position sensor is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
5 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.

7-148
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

Target: Mail box
MT home position sensor turning on is not detected when passing 1s at the standby operation.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller is not If the MT conveying roller is not rotated
roller assembled properly. manually, repair the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the MT conveying The MT conveying roller drive Reattach the MT conveying roller drive parts.
roller drive parts parts are not attached If not repaired, replace them.
properly.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MT conveying motor - MT PWB
• MT home position sensor - MT PWB
5 Replacing the MT drive motor The MT drive motor is faulty. Execute U240 [Mail Box] > [Conv]. If the MT
conveying motor does not operate correctly,
replace it.
6 Checking the MT home The MT home position sensor Reattach the MT home position sensor and
position sensor is not attached properly, or it is execute U241 [Mail Box] > [Motor HP]. If it
faulty. does not operate correctly, replace it.
7 Replacing the MT PWB The MT PWB is faulty. Replace the MT PWB.

C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

Target: Inner finisher
1. The main program is fault when turning the main power on.
2. Engine- DF communication error is detected 10 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the DF firmware to the latest
version. version.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.
5 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C8900: DF backup error

Target: Inner finisher
For the internal count
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DF PWB - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the DF PWB The DF PWB is faulty. Replace the DF PWB.

7-149
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

C9180: DP feed-shift motor error

The home position cannot be detected even if executing the retry of the home position detection 3 times continuously.
[Note]
Home position detection: When shifting the DP feed-shift motor to the home position, the retry will be executed if the
home position could not be detected after driving the DP feed-shift motor 1-round.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The DP feed-shift motor is not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
controlled correctly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is not Detach the DP feed-shift motor, and rotate
motor rotated correctly. Or, there is the drive section manually to fix it. Then,
an excess load. reattach the motor.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• DP feed-shift motor - DP PWB
• DP feed-shift sensor - DP PWB
• DP PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift motor is Replace the DP feed-shift motor if it does not
motor faulty. operate correctly when executing U243 [Rev
Motor].
5 Checking the DP feed-shift The DP feed-shift sensor is Reattaching the DP feed-shift sensor. If not
sensor not attached properly or faulty. solved, replace it.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
7 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

C9500: Image processing PWB error A

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DP relay PWB The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB. If not solved,
attached properly, or it is replace it.
faulty.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

C9540: Backup data error

When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the machine
operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were replaced Recover to the original, if 2 or more of the
at the same time. following related parts were replaced at the
same time.
• Related parts: Memory, each PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were replaced at Be sure not to perform the following works at
the same time. the same time when the memory or each
PWB is replaced.
• Replacing the drum unit or the developer
unit
• Relocating the drum units to other color's
position inside a main unit

7-150
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

(3-1)System Error code list
Error code Contents
F000 Communication error between the main unit and CPU
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
F040 Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the controller and the
print engine)
F050 Engine main program error

(3-2)Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel main
PWB is unavailable.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
activate properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Operation panel PWB - Main PWB
3 Checking the DDR memory The DDR memory is not Remove the DDR memory on the main
properly connected. PWB. Then, clean the terminals and reinstall
the DDR memory.
4 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM
faulty. data.
5 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
6 Replacing the operation panel The operation panel PWB is Replace the operation panel PWB.
PWB faulty.

F010: Program read error (SSD)

The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the SSD (if lit after An SSD out of specification is Install the SSD matching the memory
replacing the SSD) installed. capacity specification.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Reinsert the following wire connectors. If
connected or the wire is faulty. there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Operation panel PWB - Main PWB
4 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM
faulty. data.
5 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.

7-151
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start up Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the backup RAM
faulty. data.
3 Checking the main PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the main PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace
them. If not resolved, replace the main PWB.

F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the
controller and the print engine)
The communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB is not normal.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The communication between Turn off the power switch and unplug the
the controller and the print power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
engine is faulty. power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the connection FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. When the FFC
connected, or it is faulty. terminals are peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the FFC.
• Main PWB - Engine PWB
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware and the engine
version. firmware to the latest version.
4 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB.
5 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn off the power switch and unplug the
checksum is faulty. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest
version. version.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not properly Reattach the EEPROM.
attached.
4 Checking the engine PWB The connector and FFC are Clean the terminal of the connectors on the
not connected properly or the engine PWB, reconnect the connector of the
wire, FFC or PWB is faulty. wire, and reconnect the FFC terminal. If the
wire or the FFC is faulty, repair or replace it.
If not resolved, replace the engine PWB.

7-152
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis
error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.

Important
• Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated. Check the DIMM (DDR
memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing and reinserting
the DIMM.If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
• Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off. Unplug the power plug and
check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power
off and then on.

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
- It locks on a Welcome (1) Check the harness of , and the connection state of a (Main<=>Panel I/F)
screen. connector between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an Main PWB:YC2011
It locks on a starting logo operation check.
Operation panel PWB:YC4
(Taskalfa/Ecosys) screen. (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform
(Even if time passes for a an operation check.
definite period of time in If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an
more than * notes, a operation check.
screen does not change) (3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
Note: (4) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
30ppm model:70sec. check.
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
headquarters.

F000 CF000 will be displayed if (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>SSD), (Main<=>Panel I/F)
* notes progress is and the connection state of a connector between Main PWB:YC2001
carried out for a definite Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation check.
Operation panel PWB:YC4
period of time with a (2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform
Welcome screen. an operation check.
The communication fault If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an
between Panel-Main operation check.
boards
(3) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
Communication fault operation check is performed.
between Panel Core-
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Main Core Notes 2
(5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation
check.
Note:
(6) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service
30ppm model:70sec. headquarters.
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model

7-153
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
F12X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, (Scan<=>Main)
Scan control section and the connection state of a connector, and perform an Main PWB:YC2014
operation check.
CCD PWB:YC1
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation
check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F13X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and (Main<=>Panel I/F)
Panel control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB:YC2011
check.
Operation panel PWB:YC4
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F14X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the (Main<=>KUIO I/F)
FAX control part connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB:YC6001,YC6002
check.
KUIO PWB:YC3,YC4
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F15X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between authentication device Authentication device: Card
an authentication device <=>Main boards, and the connection situation of a connector, reader etc.
control section and perform an operation check.
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an (USB Cable)
operation check.
Main PWB:YC2007
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F17X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
printer data control part operation check.
(2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F18X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and (Main<=>Engine I/F)
Video control section the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB:YC6004
check.
Engine PWB:YC3
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation
check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

7-154
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
F1DX Abnormality detecting of (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an * Poor arrangement of
the image memory operation check. F1D4:Random Access
Management Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. Memory
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. * (1) Confirmation of U340
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. (2) Initialization of a set point
(U021)

F21X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an
F22X an image-processing part operation check.
F23X (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F24X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an * F248 is the abnormalities of
the system Management operation check. a printer process.
Department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an In recurring by specific printer
operation check. data, please give me
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. cooperation at acquisition of
capture data and USBLOG.
(4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F25X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an * It may occur according to a
network management operation check. visitor's network
department (2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an environment.
operation check.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F26X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F27X the system Management operation check.
Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F28X
F29X (3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F2AX (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F2BX Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F2CX network control part operation check.
F2DX (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2EX (3) Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service
headquarters.
F2FX
F30X
F31X
F32X

7-155
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
F33X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, (Scan<=>Main)
the Scan Management and the connection state of a connector, and perform an Engine PWB:YC2014
Department operation check.
CCD PWB:YC1
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation
check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F34X Abnormality detecting in (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and (Main<=>Panel I/F)
the Panel Management the connection state of a connector, and perform an operation Main PWB:YC2011
Department check.
Operation panel PWB:YC4
(2) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an
operation check is performed.
(3) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

* Note : A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model

F35X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
the printing controlling operation check.
Management Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F37X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
the FAX Management operation check.
Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(3) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F38X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
the authentication operation check.
authorized Management (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Department
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F3AX Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F3BX the Entity Management operation check.
Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3CX
F3DX (3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F3EX (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F3FX
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X

7-156
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
F46X Abnormality detecting of a (1) Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of
printer rendering part (2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out a printer process.
(Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data In recurring by specific printer
acquisition) data, please give me
cooperation at acquisition of
capture data and USBLOG.

F47X Abnormality detecting of (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F48X an image editing operation check.
processing part (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F49X
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F4DX Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F4EX the Entity Management operation check.
Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F50X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Since the USB log at the time
the FAX Management operation check. of occurrence is needed for
Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. analysis, please give me
cooperation of acquisition.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F51X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Since the USB log at the time
F52X JOB execution part operation check. of occurrence is needed for
(2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. analysis, please give me
F53X
cooperation of acquisition.
F55X (3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F56X (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F57X

F58X Abnormality detecting in (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Since the USB log at the time
F59X the various-services operation check. of occurrence is needed for
Management Department (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. analysis, please give me
F5AX
cooperation of acquisition.
F5BX (3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
F5CX (4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F5DX
F5EX

F60X Abnormality detecting in (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In case of F60A:
the maintenance mode/ (FULL of U024) * 60A is occurred when device
Remote Service registered Remote Service
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
Management Department detects off-line status with
operation check.
external system.
(3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
Please check device Network
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
Settings and Network
(5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. environment which device is
* Only HDD standard model used ( include Disconnection
rule/status in night time and
on weekends.)

7-157
Troubleshooting > Self Diagnostic [CONFIDENTIAL]

Num Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

ber
F61X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Since the USB log at the time
report creation part operation check. of occurrence is needed for
(2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. analysis, please give me
cooperation of acquisition.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F62X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an Since the USB log at the time
service execution part operation check. of occurrence is needed for
(2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. analysis, please give me
cooperation of acquisition.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F68X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
storage device control operation check.
section (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F69X Abnormality detecting in a (1) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an
F6AX HyPAS-E part operation check.
F6BX (2) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F6CX (3) Exchange SSD and perform an operation check. *
(4) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.

F6DX Abnormality detecting in (1) Check an external server and perform an operation check.
F6EX the external server (2) Check connection with an external server and perform an
Management Department operation check.
F6FX
F70X (3) network setup is checked and an operation check is
performed.
F71X
(4) Exchange a Bridge board and perform an operation check.
F72X
(5) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F73X
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F74X
F75X

7-158
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 4 FAX Related Errors

(1) FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(1-2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(1-3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(1-4) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(1-5) C0920: FAX file system error
(1-6) C0950: FAX job stay error
(1-7) FAX cannot be sent
(1-8) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished
(1-9) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data.

Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1)C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

(1-2)C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX PWB is Install the FAX PWB for the applicable
installed. model.
2 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.

(1-3)C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
2 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

7-159
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-4)C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data is
transmitted into the FAX PWB.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
2 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB is Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
faulty.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

(1-5)C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
incorrect.
2 Reinstalling the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and pull out the
operate properly. power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware.
4 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

(1-6)C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn off the power switch and unplug the
properly executed. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version.

(1-7)FAX cannot be sent

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection of The modular cable Reconnect the modular cable.
the modular cable disconnects.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit to the
switching device or the like is telephone line.
connected to the telephone
line, it is affected.
3 Checking the settings The line settings are incorrect. Correct the line settings. (Reduce the
transmission speed, etc.)
4 Checking the destination unit The destination unit is busy. Wait a while and then redial the number if
busy tones are heard.

7-160
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

5 Checking the destination unit The modular cable is Request the destination unit to reconnect the
disconnected in the modular cable.
destination unit if the
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
6 Checking the setting in the The manual reception is set in Ask the destination unit to change the
destination unit the destination unit if the reception settings.
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
7 Checking the sending content When transmitting the data to Input a pause at the last of the destination
the other country, the FAX number.
communication line is
automatically cut.

(1-8)The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version. version.

(1-9)When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] according to the
destination unit is A4 / Letter. receivable size at the Address book
registration display > [i-FAX] > [Paper size].
2 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select the condition of the destination unit
destination unit is A4 / Letter. when transmitting the data, choose [B4] or
[A3/Ledger] according to the receivable
sizes.

7-161
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Communication Errors

Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication
Ufollowed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-digit number) Regarding the 5-
digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits small classification of cause.
The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.

Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX

Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code

Error code indication

Error code
Error code Contents
U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted number. Or, sub address-
based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID
in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub address password was
not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the sub address
box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not
registered.
U00601/E00601 1. The original feed jam occurs.
2. The original length exceeds the maximum allowed.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section error
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.

7-162
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents

U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
U01020/E01020 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021 Command send retry time has exceeded since message signal is not received after sending EOR•Q signal.
(ECM)
U01022/E01022 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and communication speed
at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01095/E01095 Command send retrial time is exceeded since significant signal is not received after sending (PPS) Q signal at
phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed commonly used with the
destination unit.

7-163
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Error code Contents

U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box specified by the
destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID
or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted
due to a mismatch in permitted ID or telephone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our
make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password was not registered in
the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified sub
address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no sub address bulletin
board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was not registered in the
destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did
not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Consequently, the transmission
was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or
the own unit did not return its phone number.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.

Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit can receive the
data and resend the data if there is no
particular problem.

U00100/E00100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
by a press of the stop/clear
key.

7-164
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U00200/E00200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted by Suspend resending from the destination unit
a press of the [Stop] key. or request the destination unit to resend the
data.

U00300/E00300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination unit Recording paper on the Request the destination unit to set the
destination unit has run out recording papers.
during transmission.

U00430/E00430
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bulletin Register a valid permitted number.
number board transmission were
requested, but the
communication was
interrupted because the
permitted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting unit.)

U00431/E00431
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit An sub address bulletin board Register the sub address password in the
transmission was interrupted destination unit.
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.

U00432/E00432
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin board Send by using correct the sub address
password transmission was interrupted password.
because the sub address
password did not match.

U00433/E00433
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address box A sub address bulletin board Set data in the sub address box.
transmission request was
received but data was not
present in the sub address
box.

7-165
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U00440/E00440
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address password.
password reception was interrupted
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.

U00450/E00450
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The reception was interrupted Register the permitted number to be
number because the permitted ID and consistent at own machine side.
FAX number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission) in the
destination unit.

U00460/E00460
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption key The encryption reception was Register an encrypted box number.
interrupted because the
specified encryption box
number was not registered.

U00462/E00462
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key.
interrupted because the
encryption key for the
specified encryption box was
not registered.

U00601/E00601
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and resend.
2 Checking the original The original length exceeds Check if the original length does not exceed
the maximum allowed. 1.6 meter and resend.

U00613/E00613
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the service call error Image writing section error Check the service call error record and
record perform the corrective actions.

7-166
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U00656/E00656
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was interrupted Resend.
because there was an error in
the modem.
2 Resetting the main power and Transmission was interrupted Turn off the power switch and pull out the
reinstalling the FAX PWB because there was an error in power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
the modem. FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
turn on the power switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

U00690/E00690
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and unplug the
power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
2 Measures for the system error System error in the main unit Perform the corrective actions for the system
error in the main unit.

U00800/E00800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not properly sent and
speed occurred because of the resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
reception of an RTN or PIN start speed and resend the data.
signal during communication.

U00811/E00811
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not properly sent and
remained after retry of resending does not solve it, reduce transmit
transmission in the ECM start speed and resend the data.
mode.

U00900/E00900
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a page not
transmitted because of a page transmitted properly.
reception error.

7-167
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01000/E01000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An FTT signal was received Resend.
for a set number of times after
TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal
was received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP) after
transmission at 2400 bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01001/E01001
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Function as indicated by DIS Resend.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01016/E01016
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since MBF Resend.
signal is received but DIS
signal is not after sending
EOM signal.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01019/E01019
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending CNC signal. (between
own machines)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-168
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01020/E01020
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending CTC signal. (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01021/E01021
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retry time has Resend.
exceeded since message
signal is not received after
sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01022/E01022
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial times Resend.
exceeds since significant
signal is not received after
sending RR signal. (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01028/E01028
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected when Resend.
sending in ECM (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01052/E01052
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal is received after Resend.
sending RR signal (ECM)

7-169
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01080/E01080
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01092/E01092
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol speed
and communication speed at
V.34 sending.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01093/E01093
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is MODEM LEVEL]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [REG. G3 RX EQR]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.

U01094/E01094
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send retrial Resend.
time is exceeded at phase B
during transmission.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-170
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01095/E01095
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial time is Resend.
exceeded since significant
signal is not received after
sending (PPS) Q signal at
phase D during transmission.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01096/E01096
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid Resend.
command is received at phase
D during transmission.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01097/E01097
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The preset number of Resend.
command retransfers was
exceeded after transmission of
an RR signal or no response.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01100/E01100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request resending.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01101/E01101
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request resending.
signal except communication
type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.

7-171
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01102/E01102
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is received Request resending.
while own machine has no
transmission data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01110/E01110
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received after Request resending.
sending DIS signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01111/E01111
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received after Request resending.
sending DTC (NSC) signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01113/E01113
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection level at U650 [RX
since the received signal is MODEM LEVEL]. (Initial setting: -43dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
since the received signal is [REG. G3 RX EQR]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)
attenuated with its frequency
response.

U01125/E01125
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request resending.
a CNS signal. (Between the
units of our make)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

7-172
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01129/E01129
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response after transmitting Request resending.
an SPA signal. (Short
protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01141/E01141
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request resending.
sending DTC signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01143/E01143
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received after Set the G3 reception cable equalizer in U650
sending FTT signal. [REG. G3 RX EQR]. (Initial setting: 0dBm)

U01155/E01155
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received after Request resending.
sending SPA signal.
(simplified protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01160/E01160
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request resending.
per line is exceeded while
receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01162/E01162
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission time Request resending.
per line is exceeded while
receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

7-173
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01191/E01191
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request resending.
with error during image data
receipt sequence at V.34.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01193/E01193
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal or Extend T2 time-out time at U641 [T2 Time
invalid command is received Out]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
at phase C/D during reception. 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing '9600bps' or less.

U01194/E01194
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request resending.
phase B during reception.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01195/E01195
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time at U641 [T2 Time
phase C during reception. Out]. (Change from the initial setting 69 to
150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures for echoes at
the reception in U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting speed to
timing '9600bps' or less.

U01196/E01196
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Error line control overflow and Resend.
decoding error occurred in
messages during reception.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

7-174
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01400/E01400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the telephone '#' exists in advance of 'x' on Delete '#' from the registered numbers if '#'
number the phone numbers of the exists in advance of 'x' on the phone
destination unit, so it is numbers of the destination unit.
processed as the invalid dial
line.

U01500/E01500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is the Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed poor condition. [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the transmit start speed by
speed condition is poor and an error executing U630 [TX Speed].
frequently occurs.

U01600/E01600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit The communication line is the Request the destination unit to resend the
poor condition. data after reducing the transmit start speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit to resend the
timing condition is poor and an error data after lowering the reception start speed.
frequently occurs.

U01700/E01700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01720/E01720
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4 (replacing
the modem parameter).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

7-175
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U01721/E01721
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there is
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed by executing
speed (Destination unit) [TX Speed] at U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the transmit start speed by
machine) executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01800/E01800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 2 (line data after reducing the transmit start speed.
probing).
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01810/E01810
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01820/E01820
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit to resend the
occurred in phase 3 (primary data after reducing the transmit start speed.
channel equivalent device
training).
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

U01821/E01821
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit to resend the
interrupted because there is data after reducing the transmit start speed.
no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. (Own Change the reception speed by executing
machine) U630 [RX Speed].

7-176
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U03000/E03000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit No document was present in Request the destination unit to set the
the destination unit when originals.
polling reception started.

U03200/E03200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit to store the
address box in the main unit original data in the sub address box.
that are specified from the
destination unit.

U03300/E03300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit to register the
number registered in the own ID and the own FAX number as the
destination unit are incorrect. permitted ID and the permitted FAX number.

U03400/E03400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again.
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.

U03500/E03500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password input at the
operation was interrupted destination machine is consistent with the
because the password input in receiver's own FAX ID to receive again.
the destination unit and the
own FAX number in the
receiver did not match.

U03600/E03600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after inputting the sub
reception was interrupted address password registered in the
because the specified sub destination unit.
address password did not
match.

7-177
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U03700/E03700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the Destination machine has no Check if the destination unit has a sub
destination unit sub address bulletin board address bulletin board communication
communication function or no function. If available, request the destination
originals are stored in any unit to save the original data in the sub
original delivery box (sub address box.
address box).

U04000/E04000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The original was transmitted to Register the sub address password in the
destination unit the sub address box, but the destination unit.
specified box was not
registered in the destination
unit that is our own model.
2 Checking the sub address of The original was transmitted to Match the sub address in the FAX forward
the FAX transmission the sub address box in the condition.
condition destination unit that is our own
model, but the sub address of
the transmission condition did
not match.

U04100/E04100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The destination unit had no Transmit the data according to the reception
destination unit sub address reception function in the destination unit.
capability while the sub
address transmission was
executed.

U04200/E04200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the In encrypted transmission, the Request the destination unit to register the
destination unit specified encryption box was encrypted box.
not registered in the
destination unit.

U04300/E04300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The encryption transmission Transmit the data according to the reception
destination unit was carried out, but there is no function in the destination unit.
encryption function at the
other machine.

U04400/E04400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.

7-178
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U04500/E04500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption key Encrypted transmission was Request resending after checking the
interrupted because encryption key registered in the receiving
encryption keys did not agree. and sending machines.

U05100/E05100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the authorization
number interrupted because the number that has been registered.
permitted ID and FAX number
did not match in the restricted
transmission (password check
transmission).

U05200/E05200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The number does not match a Change the restricted reception settings.
permitted FAX number / ID, or
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Checking the setting in the The own telephone number is Request the destination unit to register the
destination unit not informed from the own telephone number.
destination unit.

U05300/E05300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The number does not match a Ask the destination unit to change the
destination unit permitted FAX number / ID, or restricted reception settings.
it matches a rejected FAX
number.
2 Checking the settings The main unit did not Request the destination unit to register the
acknowledge its phone own telephone number.
number in question .

U14000/E14000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX box Release memory by printing originals stored
was interrupted due to in memory or cancel FAX box reception.
memory overflow in its unit.

U14100/E14100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination unit Transmission was interrupted Request the destination unit to release
due to the memory overflow in memory.
the destination unit when
transmitting into the sub
address box.

7-179
Troubleshooting > FAX Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

U19000/E19000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception was interrupted Release memory by printing originals stored
due to the memory overflow in in memory.
the main unit during memory
reception.

U19100/E19100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there is
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power and The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
reinstalling the FAX PWB interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.

U19300/E19300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there is
an error in the data during
transmission.
2 Resetting the main power and The transmission was Turn off the power switch and pull out the
reinstalling the FAX PWB interrupted because there is power plug. After passing 5s, reattach the
an error in the data during FAX PWB and reinsert the power plug. Then,
transmission. turn on the power switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the fax firmware to the latest
version. version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the FAX.
changed.
5 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.

7-180
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 5 Send Related Errors

(1) Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software settings
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.
(1-3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent

Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1)The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security
software settings
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The incorrect port number has Change the SMB port number from '139' to
been set. '445'.

(1-2)Sending error 2203 does not disappear.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The Windows Fire Wall is not Select [Allow a program or feature through
properly set. (Windows Vista / Windows Firewall] at [Control Panel] >
7 / 8) [System and Security] > [Windows Firewall]
and check [File and Printer Sharing] and also
check the right side checkbox.

(1-3)Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings [Continuous Scan] is not set to Press [Send] key or [FAX] key, and select
[On]. [On] in [Continuous scan].

7-181
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)

(2-1)Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents
1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 Invalid SMTP protocol
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.

Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1102

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 user name or
server name password is incorrect. password at [Function Settings] > [E-mail]
via the command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
server settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1104

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings Destination address domain is Correct the settings in the Network Settings
restricted and transmission is via the Command Center.
denied.

7-182
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Scan to E-mail error code : 1105

Invalid SMTP protocol

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings Invalid SMTP protocol Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 1106

The sender address is not set.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The sender address is not set. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2101

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
4 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
5 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
6 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2102

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.

7-183
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Scan to E-mail error code : 2103

The server cannot establish communication.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name is Correct the SMTP / POP3 server name at
server name incorrect. [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMTP/POP3 port number.
port No.
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2201

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2202

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to E-mail error code : 2204

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 3101

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

7-184
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
settings are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 3201

No SMTP authentication is found.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The SMTP server settings are Set the correct SMTP Authentication
incorrect. Protocol at [Function Settings] > [E-mail] via
the command center.

Scan to E-mail error code : 4803

Failed to establish the SSL session.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the self-signed The self-signed certificate of Correct the certificates in the Security
certificate the device is incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The service certificate settings Correct the certificates in the Security
are incorrect. Settings via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

7-185
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-2)Scan to FTP Error Codes

Error code Contents
1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a certain period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.

Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to FTP error code : 1102

Login to the FTP server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FTP host name The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
password is incorrect.
2 Checking the FTP server FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 1105

FTP protocol is not enabled.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings FTP protocol is not enabled. Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 1131

Initializing TLS has failed.

7-186
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 1132

TLS negotiation has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Security Settings
device are incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 2101

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit.
3 Checking the FTP port The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.
number
4 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
5 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 2102

Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
2 Checking the FTP port The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.
number
3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 2103

The server cannot establish communication.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the FTP host name The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name via the
incorrect. Command Center.
2 Checking the FTP port The port number is incorrect. Correct the FTP port number.
number

7-187
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
4 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
5 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 2201

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
3 Checking the destination The destination folder name is Set the correct destination folder.
folder name incorrect.
4 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to FTP error code : 2202

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to FTP error code : 2203

No response from the server during a certain period of time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to FTP error code : 2231

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

7-188
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Scan to FTP error code : 3101

FTP server responded with an error.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
3 Checking the settings The FTP server settings are Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.

7-189
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-3)Scan to SMB Error Codes

Error code Contents
1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a certain period of time.

Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to SMB error code : 1102

Login to the host has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the user name and The user name or the Correct the user name and the password.
the password password is incorrect.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings of the
destination host / folder are destination host / folder.
incorrect.

Scan to SMB error code : 1103

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the host name, The host name, destination Revise invalid characters in destination host
destination folder name and folder name, or the file name name, destination folder name and file name
the file name contains the invalid character. properly.
2 Checking the destination The destination folder name or Revise the destination folder and file name
folder name and the file name the file name is incorrect. according to the naming rules.
3 Checking the destination host The destination host name or Revise the destination host and destination
and the destination folder the destination folder name is folder properly.
incorrect.

7-190
Troubleshooting > Send Related Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Scan to SMB error code : 1105

SMB protocol is not enabled.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the Network Settings
protocol are incorrect. via the Command Center.

Scan to SMB error code : 2101

Login to the host has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the destination host The destination host name is Correct the destination host name.
name incorrect.
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).
3 Checking the SMB port No. The port number is incorrect. Correct the SMB port number.
4 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
5 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to SMB error code : 2201

Writing scanned data has failed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the scanning file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file name.
name incorrect.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.

Scan to SMB error code : 2203

No response from the host during a certain period of time.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Network Settings
incorrect. via the Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings that the Correct the network settings that the main
main unit is connected to are unit is connected to.
incorrect.
3 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the main unit.
connected to the main unit in
the transmission (Scan to
SMB).

7-191
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 6 Print Errors
No. Contents Condition
(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the
monochrome mode is set
(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.
(4) The paper direction is incorrect
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(6) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(7) Data is output in monochrome Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color.
(Print from Windows Photo Viewer)
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver
and the main unit are mismatched.
(9) The same data is printed out endlessly A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is displayed on the printer
properties
(11) [Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit while the The main unit locks up.
printer standby message is displayed
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main The main unit locks up.
unit startup error
([Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit)
(13) Print stops after printing several pages (machine lock- The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the
up) main unit locks up.
([Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit.)
(14) Print out is not available from the network factor (1) The network is faulty, or the network settings is not correct.
(15) Print out is not available from the network factor (2) The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly
connected.
(16) Print out is not available from the network factor (3) The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate
properly.
(17) Print out is not available from the network factor (4) The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.
(18) Print out is not available from the network factor (5) 'Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.
(19) Print out is not available from the network factor (6) Only one among installed PCs is unable to print. No error is
displayed and if directing print, it is on hold.
(20) Print out is not available from the network factor (7) The main unit IP address is changed.
(21) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting [Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen and the print job
factor (1) cannot be output due to this error. (Print is unavailable.)
(22) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting 'Please wait' is displayed at the main unit. The Job is retained
factor (2) without outputting printed materials.
(23) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting A PC does not recognize the main unit.
factor (3)
(24) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting PC operation does not stabilize.
factor (4)
(25) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in
factor (5) the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
(26) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting The incorrect printer driver was selected.
factor (6)
(27) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when
factor (7) reinstalling it
(28) A part of the image is missing The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF,
etc.) is faulty.
(29) Paper Mismatch Error' appears The paper size is not detected properly.

7-192
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Content of Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded paper Load the paper of the paper size defined at
did not match the paper size 'Paper size' in the [Basic] tab in the print
set in the printer properties. settings at the PC to the cassette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the operation
operation panel and the one panel and the one set for the paper source
set for the paper source do not do not match.
match.
3 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width guides or the MP
guides or the MP paper width width guides or the MP paper paper width guides to match the paper size.
guides width guides do not match the
paper size.
4 Checking the paper sensor The actuator or the spring for Replace the actuator or the spring of the
the paper sensor is not paper sensor if they are deformed or do not
properly attached. Or, the operate properly.
paper sensor does not
properly operate due to their
deformation.
5 Checking the situation The print data created by a Check if the print data generated by other
certain application (Word, etc.) than a certain application (Word, etc.) is
is faulty. output properly. If the phenomenon occurs
with the application only, change the
application setting.
6 Checking the settings Orientation is not properly set Check the orientation with preview before
in the print page setting on a printing and reset the orientation at the print
certain application (Word, setting on a certain application (Word, etc.).
etc.).
7 Checking the settings The paper size and the media Check if the paper size detected on the MP
type detected at the main unit tray and the media type of the MP tray set
did not match with the paper via the System Menu (for the main unit)
size and the media type set in matched to the paper size and the media
the printer driver. type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the printer
properties at the PC.
8 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does not Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in the [Basic] tab
match between the main unit in the print settings at the PC.
and printer driver.

(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings Excel is not properly set up. Select 'Black & White' at [Color Mode] in the
[Imaging] tab in the print settings at the PC.
Next, overwrite the Excel data and close the
window. And then, restart it up.

(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different

The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the situation A file created on a certain When the phenomenon occurs with a certain
application makes error. file only, check if there is an abnormality in
the image data.

7-193
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the settings Print quality is not properly set Select 'Quality priority' at [Color conversion]
up. in the [Imaging] tab in the print settings at the
PC.
3 Checking the settings The print settings of Check if the phenomenon occurs with the file
PageMaker or Illustrator, etc. generated by a certain application such as
are incorrect. PageMaker or Illustrator, and refer to Help
display.
4 Checking the settings The PDL settings or the Change [PDL Settings] from [PCL XL] to
imaging settings of [Basic] are [KPDL] in the print settings at the PC and
incorrect. change [Color reproduction] at the [Imaging]
tab.
5 Checking the settings PDL or Color conversion Change [PDL Settings] from [PCL XL] to
processing is not properly set. [KPDL] in the print settings at the PC and
select 'Quality priority' at [Color conversion]
in the [Imaging] tab. (When the image data is
CMYK, not RGB.)
6 Checking the paper Paper quality causes the Replace with smooth paper.
phenomenon.
7 Executing Calibration Calibration is not executed Execute the calibration.
properly.
8 Checking the settings The settings in the [Imaging] Select 'Text and Photos' at [Color
tab in the print settings at the reproduction] in the [Imaging] tab in the print
PC are incorrect. settings at the PC.

(4) The paper direction is incorrect

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in process in the
error. PC and the main unit. Then, turn off the
power switch and unplug the power cord.
After 5s later, reconnect the power cord and
turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Excel, Word, etc.
resident. is normal, print the font list to check if a font
for special data is resident.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default setting) and
setting) is unselected. print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.

(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The Auto Cassette Change is To prevent paper from feeding in case no
[On]. paper is available in cassette which is
selected, change [Auto Cassette Switching]
to [Off].
([System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer] >
[Auto Cassette Switching] > [Off].)
2 Checking the settings 'Media type' in the [Basic] tab Check the media type set on the main unit
in the print settings at the PC cassette and MP tray and set the media type
differs from the media type of for the main unit in the [Basic] tab in the print
the cassette that is set in the settings at the PC.
main unit.

7-194
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Checking the settings The same media type is set Set the different media types for the cassette
between the main unit and the MP tray at the main unit.
cassette and MP tray.

(6) Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in process in the
error. PC and the main unit. Then, turn off the
power switch and unplug the power cord.
After 5s later, reconnect the power cord and
turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Excel, Word, etc.
resident. is normal, print the font list to check if a font
for special data is resident.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default setting) and
setting) is unselected. print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the printer driver.

(7) Data is output in monochrome

Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo Viewer)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The [Color Mode] setting in Check the color mode in the [Imaging tab] in
the [Imaging] tab in the print the print settings at the PC and change to
settings at the PC is incorrect. 'Full color' if the color mode was set to
'Black'.
2 Checking the settings The option or printer Change the color mode to 'Full Color' at the
properties are not properly set page settings of the unique application or
up. Excel.
3 Changing the printing method The application is Directly print JPEG data instead of pasting it
incompatible. on Excel.

(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the media Check if the paper size detected on the MP
type detected at the main unit tray and the media type of the MP tray set
did not match with the paper via the System Menu (for the main unit)
size and the media type set in matched to the paper size and the media
the printer driver. type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the printer
properties at the PC.
2 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does not Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in the [Basic] tab
match between the main unit in the print settings at the PC.
and printer driver.

7-195
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(9) The same data is printed out endlessly

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Deleting the job The generated data is faulty. Delete the print job spooled in the PC and
print it out again.

(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is displayed on the printer
properties
The main unit is not ready to print

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to Check if the error appears on the operation
print panel or the error lamp blinks. Then if there
is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready to Resolve the problem at the main unit.
print

(11) [Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit while the printer standby message is displayed
The main unit locks up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready to After confirming no error is indicated on the
print main unit's operation panel, cancel all PC
print jobs. Then, turn off the power switch
and unplug the power cord. After passing 5s,
reconnect the power cord and turn on the
power switch.

(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error
([Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit)
The main unit locks up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
version.
2 Changing the sleep level The sleep level is not set to Turn off the power switch and unplug the
Quick Recovery mode. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
After that, set the Sleep Level to Quick
Recovery.

(13) Print stops after printing several pages (machine lock-up)

([Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit.)
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the buttons are not
active, turn off the power switch and unplug
the power cord. After passing 5s, reconnect
the power cord and turn on the power switch.

7-196
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

2 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs when printing the
certain PC is faulty. data from all PCs in the network or from a
certain PC. Then, print out the data from
another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.
3 Checking the settings The application is not properly Check if a problem occurring from a certain
set. application and file (big data like CAD data)
and change application setting and refer to
application's help.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version. version.
5 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and reprint in the
main unit job status.

(14) Print out is not available from the network factor (1)
The network is faulty, or the network settings is not correct.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the memory LED on the operation
network. panel of the main unit is blinking after printing
out from the PC. If not blinking, cancel the
processing job and reprint out.
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the When the printing error appears on the
network. operation panel or the PC screen, clear the
error caused by the toner or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the main unit IP Address in the status
network. page, etc. and then check if Command
Center can be opened using that IP Address.
If not, reconfigure the network again.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the internet is available. Improve the
network. network connection if not available.
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the cable and reset the router or HUB.
network.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit locks Restart the PC or the main unit, and print out
up. again.

(15) Print out is not available from the network factor (2)
The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the cable The cable between the main Check the cable connection between the
unit and the PC is not properly main unit and the PC.
connected.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart the main unit and then restart the
not properly start up. PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit to the PC with
the cross cable, and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

7-197
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(16) Print out is not available from the network factor (3)
The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Restarting up The router or the hub does not Check if the link lamp of the router or hub
properly activate. (concentrator) turns on and restart it.
2 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off, once disconnect
properly connected. the Ethernet cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is faulty. Replace the Ethernet cable.
4 Restarting up The router, hub, PC or main In case of no connection while the link lamp
unit does not start up normally. is lit, restart the router or hub and then restart
up the PC and the main unit.

(17) Print out is not available from the network factor (4)
The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
set. in the status page is the same as the IP
Address in the [Port] tab of [Printer
Properties] at the PC. If not, correct the IP
address at the PC
2 Checking the settings The printer host name is not Check the printer host name by printing out
properly set. the status report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the printer host
name at the [Port] tab in the printer
properties at a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

(18) Print out is not available from the network factor (5)
'Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the internet is available. Improve the
network. network connection if not available.
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When 'Offline' appears on the printer driver,
check if it is used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Checking the settings The application is not properly Check if the other Excel / Word data, etc. can
set. be output and change the setting of the
application.
4 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
set. in the status page is the same as the IP
Address in the [Port] tab of [Printer
Properties] at the PC. If not, correct the IP
address at the PC
5 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if communication via command center
set. or PING is available with IP address set up.
Set up IP address again and restart the main
unit if necessary.
6 Changing the settings The port settings in the printer Remove the checks at the dual-directional
properties at the PC are support and the SNMP status in the [Port]
incorrect. tab of the printer properties in a PC. Then,
restart up the main unit and the PC.

7-198
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

7 Restarting up The main unit does not start Check if the test print is output after the
up properly. printer is ready, and restart up the main unit.

(19) Print out is not available from the network factor (6)
Condition:
• PC OS: Windows 7
• Print file: Test page
• Connecting method: Wireless LAN
Only one among installed PCs is unable to print. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC does Restart up the main unit or the PC.
not properly start up.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection (Check if the
connected. network connection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the ID address is properly set, and
set. correct it if incorrect.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if access via command center or
network. PING is available and then check the hub or
router.
5 Changing the settings The printer port IP address, Correct the IP address and remove the
the SNMP of the printer driver, checks at the SNMP status and the dual-
or the bi-directional support is directional support in the [Port] tab of the
not properly set. printer properties at a PC. Then, restart up
the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the security Check if the printer is available by
software or setting the software causes the uninstalling the security software. Or, set the
exception phenomenon. exception setting.

(20) Print out is not available from the network factor (7)
The main unit IP address is changed.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the Check if a problem occurs with output from
network. all PCs on the network and restart up hub or
router.
2 Checking the cable The wire is not properly Check if there is problem with the cable
connected. connection on the network.
3 Resetting the main power The main unit does not start Turn off the power switch and unplug the
up properly. power cord. After 5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the power switch.
4 Checking the settings IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Address indicated
in the status page is the same as the IP
Address in the [Port] tab of [Printer
Properties] at the PC. If not, correct the IP
address at the PC
5 Changing the settings The system of the main unit is Set the static IP Address in the System
not set to the static IP Menu.
address.

7-199
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(21) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1)
Condition:
• PC OS: Windows 7
• Print file: Test page
• Connecting method: Wireless LAN
[Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen and the print job cannot be output due to this error. (Print is
unavailable.)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining.

(22) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (2)
Condition:
• PC OS: Windows 7
• Print file: Test page
• Connecting method: Wireless LAN
'Please wait' is displayed at the main unit. The Job is retained without outputting printed materials.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains in the printer
remaining. driver and delete the remaining.

(23) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (3)
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon of PC is [Ready].
properly set. (Right click the printer icon and execute the
trouble shooting)
2 Reinstalling the printer driver The printer drive is faulty, or it Uninstall the printer driver and reinstall the
is not the latest version. latest printer driver.
3 Restarting the PC The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.

(24) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (4)
PC operation does not stabilize.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Restarting the PC The printer driver is not Restart PC.
properly set. (In case if many application software are
running or the free space of the PC memory
is low)

7-200
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(25) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (5)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not properly Check if the IP Address indicated in the main
set. unit status report and system menu is same
as the IP address in the port setting of
[Printer Properties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port setting

(26) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (6)
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver is Select the correct printer driver. If it is not in
selected. the PC, install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.

(27) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (7)
Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when reinstalling it

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in the Delete all print jobs spooling inside the
spool inside the printer driver. printer driver.
2 Checking the printer driver There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer driver.
driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer icon and
select [Print resuming]. Then, check the
ready port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects to a local
address is not properly set. network, check the host name and the IP
address on the status report of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/IP There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address in Standard
port Address in the Standard TCP/ TCP/IP port and print Test Page.
IP Port.

(28) A part of the image is missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the application The image data processing When the phenomenon occurs with a certain
with a certain application file only, check if there is an abnormality in
(Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty. the image data.
2 Checking the application The data processing with a Check if the image does not drop out on the
certain application (Excel, print preview, and refer to the Help in the
PDF, etc.) is faulty. application if necessary.
3 Changing the settings The PDL settings is incorrect. Select 'GDI compatible mode' at [PDL
settings] in the print settings at the PC.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the latest Upgrade the main firmware to the latest
version. version.

7-201
Troubleshooting > Print Errors [CONFIDENTIAL]

(29) Paper Mismatch Error' appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Changing the settings The paper size for the MP tray Adjust the MP tray paper size.
is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper width The locations of the MP paper Reset the MP paper width guides to match
guides width guides do not match the the paper size.
paper size.
3 Changing the settings The paper size is not set Register the custom size in [Cassette/MP
properly in the System Menu. Tray Setting] in the System Menu > [Paper
Size] > [Size Entry].
4 Changing the settings Paper Mismatch Error is set to Set [Ignore] at [Common Settings] > [Error
[Ignore]. Handlings] > [Paper Mismatch Error] via the
System Menu.

7-202
Troubleshooting > Error Messages [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

Content of Error Messages

(1) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• MP paper sensor - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the MP paper sensor actuator.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is not Reattach the MP paper sensor, and replace
sensor properly attached or it is faulty. it if it is not fixed.
4 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

7-203
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 8 Abnormal Noise
No. Contents Condition
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic treatment)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the
conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects,
improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy.
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment
failure of the primary paper feed section
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at
the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser
exit section exit roller due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit Rubbing sound between the fuser exit pulley and the shaft due to
section the smudges / foreign matter adhesion
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between
the parts in the fuser section
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Open and close operation failure of the toner supply opening of
the toner container, the lack of toner amount, or the toner
condensation
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in
the developer section
(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste
toner clogging in the drum section
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign
sounds) objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary transfer
section
(16) The driving sound is noisy during printing The operation sounds in the drive section

Content of Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic treatment)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear or Check the rotation of the roller, pulley and
bushing is not enough. the gears, and apply the grease to the gears
and the bushings if not rotating smoothly.
2 Checking the gear and the The parts such as each gear Reattach the gear or the bushing.
bushing or bushing are not properly
attached.

(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and the gears of the
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying related rollers, and apply grease.
them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the conveying
grease worn down. related pulley and apply grease.

7-204
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise [CONFIDENTIAL]

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

3 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the drive gears of the conveying
grease foreign objects are on them. related rollers, and apply grease.
4 Replacing the feed drive unit The feed drive unit is faulty. Replace feed drive unit.

(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the developer unit The developer unit drive is Specify the faulty developer unit by
faulty. executing [Feed] (developer motor (BK)), or
[DLP(CMY)] (developer motor (M/C/Y)) at
U030. Then, check if no developer powder
leaks, the developer unit has no damage,
and the roller can rotate manually. If
necessary, fix them.
2 Replacing the developer unit The developer unit is faulty. Replace the developer unit with faulty color.

(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and the shaft of the DP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on conveying roller and apply the grease to
them. them.
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bushing.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gear for the DP conveying
grease foreign objects are on it. motor or the DP feed-shift motor, and then
apply grease to the gears.
4 Checking the motor The DP conveying motor or Reattach the DP conveying motor or the DP
the DP feedshift motor does feed-shift motor.
not engage with the drive
gear.

(5) Abnormal sound from the exit section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the exit section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and the gear of the exit
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller and apply grease to them.
them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the exit pulley and apply
grease objects are on it. grease to it.
3 Checking the shaft of the feed- The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the feed-shift guide and
shift guide objects are on it. apply grease to it.

(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy.

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the fan motor The blades of the fan motor Isolate the noisy fan motor by executing
are dirty. U037, and clean the fan.
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and reconnect the
connector. If not repaired, replace it.

7-205
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or Reattach the primary paper feed drive
clutch the clutch are not properly components such as the gear or the clutch if
attached. they are not properly attached.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the primary paper feed drive
grease dirty or foreign objects are on components such as the gear or the bushing
them. and apply the grease to them.
3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bushing of the paper
grease dirty or foreign objects are on feed roller and apply the grease to them.
them.

(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear or When the gears or the clutch in the MP
clutch the clutch are not properly paper feed drive section are not properly
attached. attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bushing of the MP
grease dirty or foreign objects are on paper feed roller and apply the grease to
them. them.
3 Checking the MP separation The surface of the MP Clean the MP separation pad. Then, replace
pad separation pad is dirty or worn it if necessary.
down.
4 Reattach the MP lift plate. The MP lift plate is not Reattach the MP lift plate.
attached properly.

(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser exit roller due to the smudges / foreign objects
adhesion

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser exit roller, bushing Clean the fuser exit roller, bushing and the
grease or the stop ring are dirty, or stop ring and apply the lubricant to them.
foreign objects are on them.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.

(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser exit section
Rubbing sound between the fuser exit pulley and the shaft due to the smudges / foreign matter adhesion

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The pulley or the shaft is dirty, Clean the fuser exit pulley and the shaft and
grease or foreign matter is on them. apply the lubricant to them.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.

7-206
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise [CONFIDENTIAL]

(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and gear of the fuser heat
grease dirty or foreign objects are on roller and fuser press roller, and apply
them. grease.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser exit pulley and the shaft and
grease objects are on it. apply the lubricant to them.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear and apply the
grease objects are on it. grease to it.
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease to the press-release cam
and the frame.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser front guide is bent Replace the fuser unit.
and it contacts the press roller.

(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Open and close operation failure of the toner supply opening of the toner container, the lack of toner amount, or the
toner condensation

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the toner supply The spring for opening and Open and close the toner supply opening
opening closing of the toner supply manually to fix the operation.
opening is hooked with the
other parts, or deformed.
2 Checking the toner remaining The toner mixing paddle is Check the toner remaining amount and
amount bent or the toner amount in the replace the toner container if necessary.
toner container is little.
3 Checking the toner container The torque increases due to Shake the toner container enough and
the toner condensation. reinstall it. Or, replace it.

(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the toner supply The spring for opening and Open and close the toner supply opening
opening closing of the toner supply manually to fix the operation.
opening is hooked with the
other parts, or deformed.
2 Checking the developer unit The shaft or the bushing of the Check if the developer roller rotates. If not
developer roller is dirty or rotating smoothly, clean the shaft or the
foreign objects are on them. bushing of the developer roller.
3 Checking the developer unit The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Then, replace it if
developer unit increased due the issue is not resolved.
to the toner condensation, etc.

7-207
Troubleshooting > Abnormal Noise [CONFIDENTIAL]

(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to supply the toner
drum. to the cleaning unit.
2 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check if the drum cleaning screw rotates. If
properly rotate. not rotating smoothly, clean it. If it locks up,
replace the drum unit.
3 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth of the drum drive gear and
grease tooth of the drum drive gear, or apply the grease to them.
the grease is not enough.
4 Checking the drum unit The torque inside the drum Execute the drum refresh. If not repaired,
unit increased due to the replace the drum unit.
waste toner clogging, etc.

(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary
transfer section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste toner Check the opening and closing operation of
toner waste vent vent is not properly opened the shutter of the toner waste vent in the
and closed. transfer cleaning unit, and fix the parts if
necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning screw The cleaning screw does not Check if the cleaning screw in the transfer
properly rotate. cleaning unit rotates smoothly, and clean it if
not rotating smoothly.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the bushing Clean the parts in the primary transfer unit
grease is dirty, or foreign objects are such as the drive gear and the bushing, and
on them. apply the grease to them.
4 Replacing the primary transfer The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer unit.
unit faulty.

(16) The driving sound is noisy during printing

The operation sounds in the drive section

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Changing the settings The Quiet Mode is off. Select [On] at [Adjustment/Maintenance] in
the System Menu > 'Silent mode'.

7-208
Troubleshooting > Malfunction [CONFIDENTIAL]

7 - 9 Malfunction
No. Contents Condition
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power
switch is turned on
(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section. (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

Content of Malfunction
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings [User/Job Account] is valid Set [System Menu] > [User Login/Job
while the card authentication Accounting] > [Card Setting] > [Next] >
kit is not installed. [Keyboard Login] to [On].

(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Measuring the input voltage The power cord has no Plug the power cord into another wall outlet.
continuity.
2 Replacing the power cord The power cord is faulty. Check the continuity in the power cord, and
replace the power cord if there is no
continuity.
3 Replacing the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the continuity between the contacts of
the power switch. Then, replace the power
switch if there is no continuity.
4 Checking the connection The connector is not properly Clean the terminal of the following wire
connected or the wire is faulty. connectors and reconnect the connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace the wire.
• Power switch - Engine PWB
• Low voltage PWB - Engine PWB
5 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is faulty. Replace the low voltage PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB.

(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section.

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Cleaning the developer unit The developer unit or the Clean the developer unit and the drum unit.
and drum unit drum unit is dirty.
2 Executing Developer refresh The toner is deteriorated. Execute the developer refresh twice.
3 Replacing the developer unit The toner is deteriorated. Replace the developer unit.

7-209
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

8PWBs
8 - 1 Description for PWB
(1) Main PWB
(1-1)Connector position

1 YC2014 32 1 YC2001 4

2
1 YC2002 15
YC2011
YC6003 5 1
1

1
YC2007
1 5
YC6004 R10
YC2004
1 9 YC2003
R1

30 4
YC2009
1

5 1
YC2008

2
1
YC19

1
YC6001 YC2000
15
6
YC2005
YC6002 YC2006
1
1 5 1 5
8 YC5 1
1
YC2016 40

(1-2)PWB photograph

8-1
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC5 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 5V3_IL I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input

the engine
PWB 3 GND - - Ground

4 3.3V0 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

5 GND - - Ground

6 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

7 GND - - Ground

8 24V0 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

YC19 1 24V0 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

Connected to 2 FANDRVN O - CONFM: On/Off

the controller
fan

YC2001 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Connected to 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

the operation
panel PWB 3 GND - - Ground

4 GND - - Ground

YC2002 1 GMD - - Ground

Connected to 2 PANEL_STATUS I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal

the operation
panel PWB 3 INT_ENERGY_SAVE I 0/3.3 V DC Energy Saver key: On/Off
R_KEY

4 PANEL_RESET O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel reset signal

5 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal

6 LIGHTOFF_POWER O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

ON

7 SHUTDOWN O 0/3.3 V DC 24V voltage drop signal

8 LED_PROCESSING_ O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal

N

9 LED_ATTENTION_N O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal

10 LED_MEMORY_N O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal

11 SUSPEND_POWER O 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB

12 ENERGY_SAVE O 0/3.3 V DC Energy save signal

13 BEEP_POWERON O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

14 SECOND_TRAY_SW O 0/3.3 V DC JEPS: On/Off

15 GND - - Ground

YC2007 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Connected to 2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal

the USB host
3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal

4 NC - - Not used

5 GND - - Ground

8-2
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2008 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Connected to 2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal

the IC card
reader 3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal

4 NC - - Not used

5 GND - - Ground

YC2011 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Connected to 2 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal

the operation
panel PWB 3 DATA- I/O - USB data signal

4 NC - - Not used

5 GND - - Ground

YC2014 1 12V2 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output

Connected to 2 12V2 O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output

the CCD PWB
3 NC - - Not used

4 5V2_C O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

5 5V2_C O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

6 NC - - Not used

7 GND - - Ground

8 CCDOSR I Analog Image analog signal RED

9 GND - - Ground

10 CCDOSG(EVEN) I Analog Image analog signal GREEN

11 GND - - Ground

12 CCDOSB(ODD) I Analog Image analog signal BLUE

13 GND - - Ground

14 CCDSW O 0/3.3 V DC CCD color/BW switching signal

15 CCDSH O 0/3.3 V DC Shift gate signal

16 GND - - Ground

17 GND - - Ground

18 CCDPH1+ O LVDS CCD shift register clock signal

19 CCDPH1- O LVDS CCD shift register clock signal

YC2014 20 GND - - Ground

Connected to 21 CCDCP- O LVDS CCD clamp gate signal-

the CCD PWB
22 CCDCP+ O LVDS CCD clamp gate signal+

23 GND - - Ground

24 CCDRS+ O LVDS CCD reset gate signal+

25 CCDRS- O LVDS CCD reset gate signal-

26 GND - - Ground

27 NC - - Not used

28 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

8-3
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2014 29 HP_SWN I 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off

30 GND - - Ground

31 M_LED_C I 0 to 2 V DC LED cathode

32 M_LED_A O 3 V DC LED anode

YC2016 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the APC PWB
3 LDERR O Laser power Y

4 Vcont_Y O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage Y

5 GND - - Ground

6 DATA_Y O LVDS+ Video data signal Y

7 DATAB_Y O LVDS- Video data signal Y

8 GND - - Ground

9 ENABLE_Y O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB laser enable signal Y

10 S/H_Y O Sample hold Y

11 Vcont_C O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage C

12 GND - - Ground

13 DATA_C O LVDS+ Video data signal C

14 DATAB_C O LVDS- Video data signal C

15 GND - - Ground

16 ENABLE_C O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB laser enable signal C

17 S/H_C O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold C

18 Vcont_M O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage M

19 GND - - Ground

20 DATA_M O LVDS+ Video data signal M

21 DATAB_M O LVDS- Video data signal M

22 GND - - Ground

23 ENABLE_M O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB laser enable signal M

24 S/H_M O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold M

25 Vcont_K O Analog APCPWB laser power reference voltage K

26 GND - - Ground

27 DATA_K O LVDS+ Video data signal K

28 DATAB_K O LVDS- Video data signal K

29 GND - - Ground

30 ENABLE_K O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB laser enable signal K

31 S/H_K 0 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold K

32 5V O 0/5 V DC Output 5 V DC power to APC/BD PWB

33 5V O 0/5 V DC Output 5 V DC power to APC/BD PWB

34 5V O 0/5 V DC Output 5 V DC power to APC/BD PWB

8-4
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2016 35 5V O 0/5 V DC Output 5 V DC power to APC/BD PWB

36 BD I 0/3.3 V DC BD signal

37 TH I 0/3.3 V DC LSU thermistor

38 GND - - Ground

39 GND - - Ground

40 GND - - Ground

YC6001 1 VBUS1 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IFPWB

Connected to 2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal

the KUIO
relay PWB 3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal

4 GND - - Ground

5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal

6 WAKEUP1 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

7 RESET1 I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal

8 GND - - Ground

9 VBUS0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IFPWB

10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal

11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal

12 GND - - Ground

13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal

14 WAKEUP0 O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

15 RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Reset signal

YC6002 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 5V_CUT0 I 0/5 V DC 5 V DC cut signal/power

the KUIO
relay PWB 3 GND - - Ground

4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to KUIORPWB

5 GND - - Ground

6 5V_CUT1 I 0/5 V DC 5 V DC cut signal/power

YC6003 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 24V2 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

the engine
PWB

YC6004 1 LDERR O 0/3.3 V DC LD overcurrent detection signal

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the engine
PWB 3 LSU_THERM O Analog LSU thermistor voltage

4 GND - - Ground

5 G6_EG_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 clock signal

6 G6_EG_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 data output signal

7 G6_EG_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication direction signal

8 G6_EG_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication busy signal

8-5
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC6004 9 G6_EG_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 data input signal

10 G6_EG_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC G6 interrupt signal

11 GND - - Ground

12 MAIN_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main communication data signal

13 MAIN_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main communication clock signal

14 GND - - Ground

15 HLD_ENG O 0/3.3 V DC Engine stop signal

16 HLD_SCAN O 0/3.3 V DC Scanner stop signal

17 C2E_INT O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

18 PVSYNC I 0/3.3 V DC Vertical synchronizing signal

19 GND - - Ground

20 OFFMODE I 3.3 V DC Off mode signal

21 GND - - Ground

22 SAPPHIRE_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

23 SAPPHIRE_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data output signal

24 SAPPHIRE_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data input signal

25 SAPPHIRE_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

26 SAPPHIRE_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Select signal

27 SAPPHIRE_OVMON I 0/3.3 V DC Sub-scanning monitoring signal

28 SAPPHIRE_PAGEST I 0/3.3 V DC Sub-scanning reference signal

29 JS_LED I 0/3.3 V DC JOB separator LED lighting signal

30 HP_SWN O 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off

8-6
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Engine PWB

(2-1)Connector position
YC25
1 A15
4 A20
A1 YC19 YC20
A1
B20
B1 YC24 B15
1 B1
YC7 4 1 B1
2 A17 19 1
YC30
YC10

A1
B1 A10 B17

YC13 YS1

B10
A1 A15
B1

YC12 YC32
2
B15 1
A1 30
20

YC3
YC14
1
1
4 8
AC17
1
YC4
12
YC18 1
YC15 YC34
6 4
1 YC6 1 7 YC29
13 1 YC21 1
15 1 1
10 2
YC16 YC31 1
YC8 1 9 YC5 1
1 YC23 YC22 12
11 1 2
1

(2-2)PWB photograph

8-7
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 HP_SWN I 0/3.3 V DC HPS: On/Off

Connected to 2 JS_LED O 0/5 V DC JOB separator LED lighting signal

the main PWB
3 SAPPHIRE_PAGEST O 0/3.3 V DC Sub-scanning reference signal

4 SAPPHIRE_OVMON I 0/3.3 V DC Sub-scanning monitoring signal

5 SAPPHIRE_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal

6 SAPPHIRE_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

7 SAPPHIRE_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data output signal

8 SAPPHIRE_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data input signal

9 SAPPHIRE_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

10 GND - - Ground

11 OFFMODE O 0/3.3 V DC Off mode signal

12 GND - - Ground

13 PVSYNC O 0/3.3 V DC Vertical synchronizing signal

14 C2E_INT I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

15 HLD_SCAN I 0/3.3 V DC Scanner stop signal

16 HLD_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC Engine stop signal

17 GND - - Ground

18 MAIN_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main communication clock signal

19 MAIN_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Main communication data signal

20 GND - - Ground

21 G6_EG_IRN O 0/3.3 V DC G6 communication interrupt signal

22 G6_EG_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data output signal

23 G6_EG_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC G6 communication busy signal

24 G6_EG_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC G6 communication direction signal

25 G6_EG_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication data input signal

26 G6_EG_SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) G6 communication clock signal

27 GND - - Ground

28 LSU_THERM I Analog LSU thermistor voltage

29 GND - - Ground

30 LDERR I 0/3.3 V DC LD overcurrent detection signal

YC4 1 24V0 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MPWB

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the main PWB
3 5V0 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB

4 GND - - Ground

5 3.3V0 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from MPWB

6 GND - - Ground

7 5V3_IL O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB

8-8
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC4 8 GND - - Ground

YC5 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PM

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the polygon
motor, 3 POLREM O 0/5 V DC PM remote signal
cleaning 4 POLRDYN I 0/3.3 V DC PM synchronizing signal
motor
5 PDLCLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) PM clock signal

6 LSU_CL_MOT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) CLM drive control signal

7 LSU_CL_MOT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) CLM drive control signal

8 NC - - Not used

9 NC - - Not used

YC6 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 VIBR_MOT_REM O 0/3.3 V DC VIBM remote signal

the drum/
developer 3 TCSENS_Y I Analog TS-Y detection signal
relay PWB 4 TCSENS_C I Analog TS-C detection signal

5 TCSENS_M I Analog TS-M detection signal

6 ERS_CL_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Eraser CL remote signal

7 GND - - Ground

8 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DR/DLPPWB

9 EEP_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

10 EEP_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data I/O signal

11 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DR/DLPPWB

12 GND - - Ground

13 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage

14 TCSENS_Bk I Analog TS-K detection signal

15 ERS_Bk_REM O 0/3.3 V DC Eraser Bk remote signal

YC7 1 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to ES

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the fuser
sensor, fuser 3 FSR_JAM_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC ES: On/Off
release 4 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to FUPRS
sensor, fuser
thermistor 1, 5 GND - - Ground
fuser
thermistor 2, 6 FSR_RLS_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC FUPRS: On/Off
transfer belt 7 GND - - Ground
release
sensor 1, 8 MAIN_TH2 I Analog Non-contact thermistor voltage (detection)
transfer belt
release 9 MAIN_TH1 I Analog Non-contact thermistor voltage
sensor 2 (compensation)

10 GUIDE_TH2 I Analog Contact thermistor voltage

11 GND - - Ground

12 FUS_DET I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser unit connection signal

13 GND - - Ground

8-9
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC7 14 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to TCBRS1

15 GND - - Ground

16 3REJECT_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC TCBRS1: On/Off

17 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to TCBRS2

18 GND - - Ground

19 4REJECT_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC TCBRS2: On/Off

YC8 1 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24V power output

Connected to 2 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24V power output

the high
voltage PWB 3 DACSLD1 O 0/5 V DC DAC load signal 1

4 DACSLD2 O 0/5 V DC DAC load signal 2

5 DACSCLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DAC clock signal

6 SGND - - Ground

7 DACSDI O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DAC data signal

8 HVREM O 0/24 V DC Secondary transfer (reverse) / PB remote

signal

9 HVCLK O 0/10 V DC Developer clock (SLV) signal

10 MISENS I Analog Main charger K current detection

11 GND - - Ground

12 GND - - Ground

YC10 A1 5V2 O 5 V DC 5V power output

Connected to A2 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3V power output

the RFID,
eject fan A3 RFID_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RFID communication clock signal
motor, transfer A4 GND - - Ground
release motor,
waste toner A5 RFID_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC RFID communication data signal
box switch,
waste toner A6 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3V power output
detection A7 GND - - Ground
sensor,
temperature/ A8 SUB_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Communication data signal
humidity
sensor, A9 SUB_SCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Communication clock signal
developer fan A10 BELT_FAN_REM - - Not used
motor 3,
developer fan A11 24V2 - - Not used
motor 4
A12 WTNR_FAN O 0/24 V DC TFM: On/Off

A13 24V2 O 24 V DC 24V power output

A14 DLP_FAN3(BELT) - Not used

A15 24V2 - Not used

A16 24V2 O 24 V DC 24V power output

A17 EXIT_FAN O 0/24 V DC EFM: On/Off

B1 BELT_RLS_REMA O 0/24 V DC TCBRM: On/Off

B2 BELT_RLS_REMB O 0/24 V DC TCBRM: On/Off

B3 GND - - Ground

8-10
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC10 B4 WTNR_SET_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC WTSSW: On/Off

B5 WTNR_LED_3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3V power output

B6 WTNR_LED O 0/3.3 V DC WST(LED): On/Off

B7 WTNR_TR_3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3V power output

B8 WTNR_TR I Analog WST detection voltage

B9 HUMCLK O 0/3.3 V DC TEMS clock signal

B10 HUMOUT I Analog TEMS (humidity) detection voltage

B11 GND - - Ground

B12 AIRTEMP I Analog TEMS (temperature) detection voltage

B13 DLP_FAN3 O 0/24 V DC DLPFM3: On/Off

B14 24V2 O 24 V DC 24V power output

B15 DLP_FAN4 O 0/24 V DC DLPFM4: On/Off

B16 24V2 O 24 V DC 24V power output

B17 NC - - Not used

YC12 A1 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PS

Connected to A2 GND - - Ground

the paper
detection A3 PAPEMP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PS: On/Off
sensor, paper A4 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PGS1
level sensor 1,
paper level A5 GND - - Ground
sensor 2,
paper width A6 PAPVL1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PGS1: On/Off
detection A7 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PGS2
sensor 1,
paper width A8 GND - - Ground
detection
sensor 2, A9 PAPVL2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PGS2: On/Off
paper width A10 CAS_WID0 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
detection
sensor 3, A11 GND - - Ground
duplex sensor,
MP paper A12 CAS_WID1 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
detection A13 GND - - Ground
sensor, lift
sensor, A14 CAS_WID2 I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW3: On/Off
registration
A15 GND - - Ground
sensor, MP
solenoid B1 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DUS

B2 GND - - Ground

B3 DU1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DUS: On/Off

B4 3.3V3_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to MPPS

B5 GND - - Ground

B6 MPF_SET_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC MPPS: On/Off

B7 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to LS

B8 GND - - Ground

B9 CAS_LIFTUP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC LS: On/Off

8-11
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC12 B10 GND - - Ground

B11 REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC RS: On/Off

B12 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to RS

B13 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MPSOL

B14 MPF_SOL_REM O 0/24 V DC MPSOL: On/Off

B15 NC - - Not used

YC13 A1 DEV_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC DLPCL-BK: On/Off

Connected to A2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DLPCL-BK

the developer
clutch, A3 RESIST_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC RCL: On/Off
registration A4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to RCL
clutch,
primary feed A5 FEED_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC FCL: On/Off
clutch, middle
clutch, duplex A6 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FCL
clutch, front ID A7 MID_CL_REM O 0/24 V DC MCL: On/Off
sensor, rear
ID sensor A8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MCL

A9 DU1_REM O 0/24 V DC DUCL: On/Off

A10 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DUCL

B1 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to IDS1

B2 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal

B3 GND - - Ground

B4 REG_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal

B5 REG_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal

B6 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to IDS2

B7 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal

B8 GND - - Ground

B9 REG_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 detection signal

B10 REG_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 detection signal

YC14 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM-Y

Connected to 2 TMOT_Y_DIR O 0/24 V DC TM-Y drive control signal

the transfer
belt fan motor, 3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM-C
container 4 TMOT_C_DIR O 0/24 V DC TM-C drive control signal
motor K,
container 5 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM-M
motor M,
container 6 TMOT_M_DIR O 0/24 V DC TM-M drive control signal
motor C, 7 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TM-K
container
motor Y, 8 TMOT_BK_DIR O 0/24 V DC TM-K drive control signal
container
sensor K, 9 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output CS-Y
container 10 GND - - Ground
sensor M,
container 11 PULSE_SENS_Y I 0/3.3 V DC CL-Y: On/Off
sensor C,
container 12 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to CS-C
sensor Y

8-12
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC14 13 GND - - Ground

14 PULSE_SENS_C I 0/3.3 V DC CL-C: On/Off

15 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to CS-M

16 GND - - Ground

17 PULSE_SENS_M I 0/3.3 V DC CL-M: On/Off

18 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to CS-K

19 GND - - Ground

20 PULSE_SENS_BK I 0/3.3 V DC CS-K: On/Off

YC15 1 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TCM

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the transfer
motor, 3 IMAGE_MOT_REM O 0/5 V DC TCM remote signal
developer 4 IMAGE_MOT_CLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) TCM clock signal
motor K / feed
motor

5 IMAGE_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC TCM synchronizing signal

6 IMAGE_MOT_DIR O 0/5 V DC TCM rotation switching signal

7 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DLPM-K

8 GND - - Ground

9 FEED_MOT_REM O 0/5 V DC DLPM-K remote signal

10 FEED_MOT_CLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DLPM-K clock signal

11 FEED_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DLPM-K synchronizing signal

12 FEED_MOT_DIR O 0/5 V DC DLPM-K rotation switching signal

YC16 1 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DLPM-CMY

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the developer
motor CMY, 3 DLPC_MOT_REM O 0/5 V DC DLPM-CMY remote signal
drum motor K 4 DLPC_MOT_CLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DLPM-CMY clock signal

5 DLPC_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DLPM-CMY synchronizing signal

6 DLPC_MOT_DIR O 0/5 V DC DLPM-CMY rotation switching signal

7 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DRM-K

8 GND - - Ground

9 DRMK_MOT_REM O 0/5 V DC DRM-K remote signal

10 DRMK_MOT_CLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DRM-K clock signal

11 DRMK_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-K synchronizing signal

12 DRMK_MOT_DIR O 0/5 V DC DRM-K rotation switching signal

13 NC - - Not used

YC17 1 FUSER_MOT_B/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) FUM drive control signal

Connected to 2 FUSER_MOT_A/ O 0/24 V DC (pulse) FUM drive control signal

the fuser
motor 3 FUSER_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) FUM drive control signal

4 FUSER_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) FUM drive control signal

8-13
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC18 1 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DRM-CMY

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the drum
motor CMY 3 DRMC_MOT_REM O 0/5 V DC DRM-CMY remote signal

4 DRMC_MOT_CLK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) DRM-CMY clock signal

5 DRMC_MOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DRM-CMY synchronizing signal

6 DRMC_MOT_DIR O 0/5 V DC DRM-CMY rotation switching signal

YC19 1 SCAN_MOT_B3 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal

Connected to 2 SCAN_MOT_A1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal

the scanner
motor 3 SCAN_MOT_B1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal

4 SCAN_MOT_A3 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal

YC20 A1 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPOS

Connected to A2 GND - - Ground

the DP
original A3 DP_SET_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DPOS: On/Off
detection A4 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPFS
sensor, DP
original feed A5 GND - - Ground
sensor, DP
registration A6 DP_FEED_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DPFS: On/Off
sensor, DP A7 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRS
cover sensor,
DP feedshift A8 GND - - Ground
sensor, DP
feed motor, A9 DP_OPEN_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DPRS: On/Off
DP conveying A10 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPCOCS
motor, DP
feedshift A11 GND - - Ground
motor
A12 DP_JHP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DPCOCS: On/Off

A13 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPFSS

A14 GND - - Ground

A15 DP_REG_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DPFSS: On/Off

B1 DP_CONVMOT_/B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal

B2 DP_CONVMOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal

B3 DP_CONVMOT_/A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal

B4 DP_CONVMOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal

B5 DP_FEEDMOT_/B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal

B6 DP_FEEDMOT B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal

B7 DP_FEEDMOT_/A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal

B8 DP_FEEDMOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal

B9 DP_SEPMOT_/B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSPM drive control signal

B10 DP_SEPMOT_/A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSPM drive control signal

B11 DP_SEPMOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSPM drive control signal

B12 DP_SEPMOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DPSPM drive control signal

B13 NC - - Not used

8-14
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC20 B14 NC - - Not used

B15 NC - - Not used

YC21 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DLPFM1

Connected to 2 DLP_FAN1 O 0/24 V DC DLPFM1: On/Off

the developer
fan motor 1, 3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DLPFM2
developer fan 4 DLP_FAN2 O 0/24 V DC DLPFM2: On/Off
motor 2, lift
motor, clutch 5 LIFT_MOT_DR O 0/24 V DC LM drive control signal
fan motor,
cassette 6 LIFT_MOT_RET O 0/24 V DC LM drive control signal
heater PWB 7 CL_FAN O 0/24 V DC CONTFM: On/Off

8 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

9 5V0 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

10 GND - - Ground

YC22 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFPWB

the paper
feeder

YC23 1 PF_CAS_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette open/close signal output

Connected to 2 PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC Pause signal

the paper
feeder 3 PF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

4 PF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

5 PF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

6 PF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

7 PF_SEL2 O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette 3 select signal

8 PF_SEL1 O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette 2 select signal

9 GND - - Ground

10 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PF

11 PF_VER_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFCS1: On/Off

YC24 A1 BRIDGE_FAN O 0/3.3 V DC BRFM: On/Off

Connected to A2 BRIDGE REM O 0/3.3 V DC Bridge motor remote signal

the AK, MT,
inner finisher, A3 BRIDGE CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Bridge motor clock signal
eject motor, A4 BRIDGE_PH0 O 0/3.3 V DC Bridge motor excitation switching signal 1
eject feedshift
solenoid, A5 BRIDGE_PH1 O 0/3.3 V DC Bridge motor excitation switching signal 2
upper eject full
sensor, lower A6 BRIDGE_DET I 0/3.3 V DC Bridge presence detection signal
eject full A7 BRIDGE_SENS1 I 0/3.3 V DC Bridge conveying detection signal 1
sensor, steam
removal fan A8 BRIDGE_SENS2 I 0/3.3 V DC Bridge conveying detection signal 2
motor, JS
paper A9 BREDGE_OPEN_SW I 0/3.3 V DC Bridge open detection signal
detection A10 GND - - Ground
sensor, front
cover switch 1 A11 GND - - Ground

A12 3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to BRMPWB

8-15
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC24 A13 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to BRMPWB

A14 DF_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

A15 DF_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Select signal

A16 DF_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

A17 DF_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

A18 NC - - Not used

A19 DF_DET I 0/3.3 V DC Connection detection signal

A20 DF_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

B1 CON_FAN O 0/24 V DC SFM: On/Off

B2 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SFM

B3 SB_MOT_B1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal

B4 SB_MOT_B3 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal

B5 SB_MOT_A3 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal

B6 SB_MOT_A1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal

B7 24V2 O 0/24 V DC 24V power output to FSSOL

B8 EJE_SOL_PULL O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (actuate)

B9 EJE_SOL_RETURN O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (keep)

B10 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to EFS1

B11 GND - - Ground

B12 EJE_FULL_UP I 0/3.3 V DC EFS1: On/Off

B13 3.3V2_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to EFS2

B14 GND - - Ground

B15 EJE_FULL_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC EFS2: On/Off

B16 3.3V3_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to EPS

B17 GND - - Ground

B18 EXITUP_PAP_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC EPS: On/Off

B19 FCOVOR_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC FCSW2: On/Off

B20 GND - - Ground

YC25 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the MT or
inner finisher 3 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MBMPWB

4 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MBMPWB

YC29 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the power
supply PWB 3 24V0 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB

4 24V0 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB

8-16
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC30 1 POWERSW I 0/3.3 V DC PSSW: On/Off
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the power
switch

YC31 1 24V0 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to RCSW

Connected to 2 24V0IL I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from FCSW

the right cover
switch, front
cover switch 1

YC32 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MPWB

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the main PWB

YC34 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PWBFM

Connected to 2 LVU_FAN O 0/24 V DC PWBFM: On/Off

the power
supply PWB 3 SHREM O 0/3.3 V DC Sub heater control

4 MHREM O 0/3.3 V DC Main heater control

5 RELAYREM O 0/3.3 V DC Power relay control signal

6 ZCROSS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal

7 LVU_SLEEP O 0/24 V DC Sleep signal

8 24V3_IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

8-17
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) High voltage PWB

(3-1)Connector position

1 YC101

(3-2)PWB photograph

8-18
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC101 1 +24V3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

Connected to 2 +24V3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

the engine
PWB 3 DACSLD1 I 0/3.3 V DC DAC load signal 1

4 DACSLD2 I 0/3.3 V DC DAC load signal 2

5 DACSCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DAC clock signal

6 SGND - - Ground

7 DACSDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DAC data signal

8 HVREM I 0/3.3 V DC Secondary transfer (reverse) / PB remote

signal

9 HVCLK I 0/3.3 V DC Developer clock (SLV) signal

10 MISENS O Analog Main charger K current detection

11 PGND - - Ground

12 PGND - - Ground

8-19
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Power source PWB

(4-1)Connector position

YC102
1
YC101
3 2
1

1 TRA31
CN3
6

YC105
5 1
1 CN4 4

(4-2)PWB photograph

120V

200V-240V

8-20
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC101 1 LIVE I Commercial power AC power input
supply voltage

Connected to 2 NEUTRAL I Commercial power AC power input

the inlet supply voltage

YC102 1 NEUTRAL1 O Commercial power AC power output to FH

supply voltage

Connected to 2 NC - - Not used

the fuser
heater 3 LIVE O Commercial power AC power output to FH
supply voltage

4 NC - - Not used

5 NEUTRAL2 O Commercial power AC power output to FH

supply voltage

YC105 1 SHREM I 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off

Connected to 2 MHREM I 0/3.3 V DC FH: On/Off

the engine
PWB 3 RELAYREM I 0/3.3 V DC Power relay signal

4 ZCROSS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal

5 PSLEEPN I 0/24 V DC Sleep signal

6 24V3_IL I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from EPWB

CN3 1 DH_LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output to CH

Connected to 2 DH_LIVE O 100 V AC AC power output to CH

the cassette
heater 3 NC - - Not used

4 NC - - Not used

5 DH_NEUTRAL O Commercial power AC power output to CH

supply voltage

6 DH_NEUTRAL O Commercial power AC power output to CH

supply voltage

CN4 1 24V0 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EPWB

Connected 2 24V0 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EPWB

to the engine
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground

8-21
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Operation panel PWB

(5-1)Connector position

5 YC4 1 15 YC6 1
6 YC17 1
1 YC14 8

18
1

YC8
YC7

1
12

1 2
1
YC9 YC21
2
1 35 1 4

YC2 YC18

(5-2)PWB photograph

8-22
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC2 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 R0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

the LCD

3 R1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

4 R2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

5 R3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

6 R4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

7 R5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

8 GND - - Ground

9 G0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

10 G1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

11 G2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

12 G3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

13 G4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

14 G5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

15 GND - - Ground

16 B0 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

17 B1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

18 B2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

19 B3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

20 B4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

21 B5 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal

22 GND - - Ground

23 DCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD dot clock

24 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to LCD

25 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to LCD

26 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to LCD

27 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to LCD

28 DE O 0/3.3 V DC LCD data enable signal

29 HSYNC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronizing signal

30 VSYNC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronizing signal

31 LED_EN O 0/3.3 V DC LED driver enable signal

32 LED_PWM O 0/3.3 V DC LED driver PWM signal

33 TSC_INT I 0/3.3 V DC Panel interrupt signal

34 I2C_SDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

35 I2C_SCL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Panel clock signal

8-23
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC4 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Connected to 2 DATE- I/O LVDS USB data signal

the main PWB
3 DATE+ I/O LVDS USB data signal

4 NC - - Not used

5 GND - - Ground

YC6 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 SECOND_TRAY_SW I 0/3.3 V DC JEPS: On/Off

the main PWB
3 BEEP_POWERON I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

4 ENERGY_SAVE I 0/3.3 V DC Energy save signal

5 SUSPEND_POWER I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from MPWB

6 LED_MEMORY_N I 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal

7 LED_ATTENTION_N I 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal

8 LED_PROCESSING_ I 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal

N

9 SHUTDOWN I 0/3.3 V DC 24V voltage drop signal

10 LIGHTOFF_POWER I 0/3.3 V DC Sleep recovery signal

ON

11 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal

12 PANEL_RESET I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel reset signal

13 INT_ENERGY_SAVE O 0/3.3 V DC Energy save key: On/Off

R_KEY

14 PANEL_STATUS O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal

15 GMD - - Ground

YC7 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

the operation
panel sub 3 KEYLEFT1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal
PWB 4 LEDLEFT1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal

5 KEYLEFT2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

6 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

7 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

8 SCAN3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

9 KEYLEFT0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

10 LEDLEFT0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal

11 LEDLEFT2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal

12 S LED O 0/3.3 V DC JOBSEPA LED control signal

YC8 1 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

Connected to 2 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

the operation
panel sub 3 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal
PWB 4 SCAN3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

8-24
PWBs > Description for PWB [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC8 5 SCAN4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal

6 LEDRIGHT0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal

7 KEYRIGHT0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

8 KEYRIGHT1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

9 KEYRIGHT2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

10 KEYRIGHT3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

11 KEYRIGHT4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation unit key scan return signal

12 LEDRIGHT1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal

13 P_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Processing LED control signal

14 M_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal

15 A_LED O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal

16 INT_POWERKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off

17 SUSPEMD_POWER O 5.0 V DC 5.0 V DC power output to OPPWB

18 GND - - Ground

YC9 1 SPK+ O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)

Connected to 2 SPK- O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)

the speaker

YC14 1 DAT2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

Connected to 2 DAT3 CO I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

the SD card
3 CMD I/O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

4 VDD - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

5 CLK - 0/3.3 V DC Control signal

6 VSS - - Ground

7 DAT0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

8 DAT1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

YC17 1 NC - - Not used

Connected to 2 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB

the main PWB
3 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB

4 GND - - Ground

5 GND - - Ground

6 NC - - Not used

YC18 1 Y1 I 0 V to 3.3V Touch panel coordinate data

Connected to 2 X2 I 0 V to 3.3V Touch panel coordinate data

the touch
panel 3 Y2 I 0 V to 3.3V Touch panel coordinate data

4 X2 I 0 V to 3.3V Touch panel coordinate data

YC21 1 LED_A O 0/5 V DC LED control signal

Connected to 2 LED_C I 0/5 V DC LED control signal

the LCD

8-25
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

8 - 2 Description for PWB (OPTION)

(1) PF PWB for PF-5120
(1-1)Connector position

1 8
YC4 1 YC12 11 1
YC13 9

3
YC1
YC10
5
1
1

2
YC2
1
4
YC11
1

YC3

15
1 2 6
1 5 1
YC9 YC6 YC8

(1-2)PWB photograph

8-26
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper
detection 3 CAS1_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS: On/Off
sensor, paper 4 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS1
level sensor 1,
paper level 5 GND - - Ground
sensor 2,
paper length 6 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1: On/Off
detection 7 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS2
sensor 1,
paper length 8 GND - - Ground
detection
9 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS2: On/Off
sensor 2,
paper length 10 GND - - Ground
detection
sensor 3 11 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW1: On/Off

12 GND - - Ground

13 CAS1_SIZE2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW2: On/Off

14 GND - - Ground

15 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW3: On/Off

YC4 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the lift upper
limit sensor, 3 ULIM_SW_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS: On/Off
feed sensor, 4 3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS
right cover
switch 5 VER_SENS_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS: On/Off

6 GND - - Ground

7 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFRCSW: On/Off

8 GND - - Ground

YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O 0 V DC PFLM drive control signal

Connected to 2 L_MOT1_DR O 0/24 V DC PFLM drive control signal

the lift motor

YC8 1 +24V O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFM

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper feed
motor 3 START/STOP O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

4 CLOCK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) PFFM drive control signal

5 LD I 0/3.3 V DC PFFM drive control signal

6 CW/CCW O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

YC9 1 VER_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFCCL: On/Off

Connected to 2 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFCCL

the conveying
clutch and 3 FEED_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFFCL: On/Off
paper feed 4 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFCL
clutch

8-27
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

5 VER_CL2 - - Not used

YC10 1 GND - - Ground

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the PF PWB
3 24V2 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PF

YC11 1 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from the main unit

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the engine
PWB

YC12 1 VER_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PFFS: On/Off

Connected to 2 3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from the main unit
the engine
PWB 3 GND - - Ground

4 PF_CAS1_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette select signal 1

5 PF_CAS2_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette select signal 2

6 EH_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

7 EH_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

8 EH_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

9 EH_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

10 PF_PAU I 0/3.3 V DC Pause signal

11 PF_CAS_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette insertion and removal signal

output

YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette insertion and removal signal input

Connected to 2 AN_PF_PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC Pause signal

the PF PWB
3 AN_PF_SDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

4 AN_PF_SDO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

5 AN_PF_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

6 AN_PF_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

7 PF_CAS2_SEL O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette select signal 4

8 GND - - Ground

9 3.3V3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PF

8-28
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) PF PWB for PF-5130

(2-1)Connector position

1 2
YC11
1
1

YC9
YC4
8
YC2 YC1
4 1
5 1
1 14

YC6
1
4

YC12

11

YC8

15 1 16 1
YC3 YC5

(2-2)PWB photograph

8-29
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS1

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper
sensor 1, 3 CAS1_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS1: On/Off
paper level 4 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS1
sensor 1,
paper level 5 GND - - Ground
sensor 2,
paper length 6 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1: On/Off
detection 7 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS2
switch 1,
paper length 8 GND - - Ground
detection
switch 2, 9 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS2: On/Off
paper length 10 GND - - Ground
detection
switch 3 11 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW1: On/Off

12 GND - - Ground

13 CAS1_SIZE2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW2: On/Off

14 GND - - Ground

15 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW3: On/Off

YC4 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS 1

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the lift upper
limit sensor 1, 3 ULIM_SW_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS1: On/Off
feed sensor 1, 4 3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS 1
right cover
switch, lift 5 VER_SENS_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS1: On/Off
upper limit
sensor 2, feed 6 GND - - Ground
sensor 2 7 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFRCSW: On/Off

8 GND - - Ground

9 3.3V5_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS2

10 GND - - Ground

11 ULIM_SW_2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS2: On/Off

12 3.3V5 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS2

13 VER_SENS_2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS2: On/Off

14 GND - - Ground

8-30
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC5 1 3.3V5_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS2
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the paper
sensor 2, 3 CAS2_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS2: On/Off
paper sensor
3, paper 4 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS3
sensor 4,
5 GND - - Ground
paper length
detection 6 CAS2_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS3: On/Off
switch 4,
paper length 7 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS4
detection
8 GND - - Ground
switch 5,
paper length 9 CAS2_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS4: On/Off
detection
switch 6 10 GND - - Ground

11 CAS2_SIZE1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW4: On/Off

12 GND - - Ground

13 CAS2_SIZE2_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW5: On/Off

14 GND - - Ground

15 CAS2_SIZE3_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFPLSW6: On/Off

16 GND - - Not used

YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O 0 V DC PFLM1 drive control signal

Connected to 2 L_MOT1_DR O 0/24 V DC PFLM1 drive control signal

the lift motor
1, lift motor 2 3 L_MOT2_RET O 0 V DC PFLM2 drive control signal

4 L_MOT2_DR O 0/24 V DC PFLM2 drive control signal

YC8 1 +24V O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFM

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper feed
motor 3 START/STOP O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

4 CLOCK O 0/5 V DC(pulse) PFFM drive control signal

5 LD I 0/3.3 V DC PFFM drive control signal

6 CW/CCW O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

YC9 1 VER_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFCCL1: On/Off

Connected to 2 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFCCL1

the conveying
clutch 1, 3 FEED_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFFCL1: On/Off
paper feed 4 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFCL1
clutch 1,
conveying 5 VER_CL2 O 0/24 V DC PFCCL2: On/Off
clutch 2,
paper feed 6 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFCCL2
clutch 2 7 FEED_CL2 O 0/24 V DC PFFCL2: On/Off

8 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFCL2

YC11 1 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PF

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the PF PWB
(PF-5120)

8-31
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC12 1 VER_SENS O 0/3.3 V DC PFFS1: On/Off
Connected to 2 3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from PF
the PF PWB
(PF-5120) 3 GND - - Ground

4 PF_CAS1_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette select signal 4

5 PF_CAS2_SEL - - Not used

6 EH_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

7 EH_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

8 EH_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

9 EH_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

10 PF_PAU I 0/3.3 V DC Pause signal

11 PF_CAS_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette insertion and removal signal

output

8-32
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) PF PWB for PF-5140

(3-1)Connector position

1 YC11 2

1
1

YC9 YC4

5
8

4 1
1
YC2 5 YC1 1

YC6
2 1

YC12

11

YC8

15 1
YC3

(3-2)PWB photograph

8-33
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPS

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper
detection 3 CAS1_EMPTY I 0/3.3 V DC PFPS: On/Off
sensor, paper 4 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS1
level sensor 1,
paper level 5 GND - - Ground
sensor 2,
paper deck 6 CAS1_QUANT1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS1: On/Off
detection 7 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFPGS2
switch
8 GND - - Ground

9 CAS1_QUANT2 I 0/3.3 V DC PFPGS2: On/Off

10 GND - - Ground

11 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS I 0/3.3 V DC PFDDSW1: On/Off

12 GND - - Not used

13 CAS1_SIZE2_SENS - - Not used

14 GND - - Not used

15 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS - - Not used

YC4 1 3.3V4_LED O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFLS 1

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the lift upper
limit sensor, 3 ULIM_SW_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFLS1: On/Off
feed sensor, 4 3.3V4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to PFFS
right cover
switch 5 VER_SENS_1 I 0/3.3 V DC PFFS: On/Off

6 GND - - Ground

7 COVER_OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC PFRCSW: On/Off

8 GND - - Ground

YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O 0/24 V DC (pulse) PFLM drive control signal

Connected to 2 L_MOT1_DR O 0/24 V DC (pulse) PFLM drive control signal

the lift motor

YC8 1 +24V O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFM

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the paper feed
motor 3 START/STOP O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

4 CLOCK O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

5 LD I 0/3.3 V DC PFFM drive control signal

6 CW/CCW O 0/5 V DC PFFM drive control signal

YC9 1 VER_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFCCL1: On/Off

Connected to 2 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFCCL1

the conveying
clutch and 3 FEED_CL1 O 0/24 V DC PFFCL1: On/Off
paper feed 4 24V1 O DV24V 24 V DC power output to PFFCL1
clutch

8-34
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

5 VER_CL2 - - Not used

YC11 1 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PF

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the PF PWB
(PF-5120)

YC12 1 VER_SENS O - PFFS1: On/Off

Connected to 2 3.3V3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from PF

the PF PWB
(PF-5120) 3 GND - - Ground

4 PF_CAS1_SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Cassette select signal 4

5 PF_CAS2_SEL - - Not used

6 EH_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

7 EH_RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal

8 EH_SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

9 EH_SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

10 PF_PAU I 0/3.3 V DC Pause signal

11 PF_CAS_OPEN O 0/3.3 V DC Cassette insertion and removal signal

output

8-35
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) DF PWB for DF-5100

(4-1)Connector position
1 4 12 1 3 1 12 1
1 2

YC21 YC8 YC13 YC9

YC4

1
YC17
3
1

YC5 1

8
YC11
2
13 YC10 1

U3
1 YC1 5
A1
4 A15
YC3
1 B15 YC19 B1
1 5
YC2

(4-2)PWB photograph

8-36
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC3 1 GND - - Ground
(30 ppm 2 GND - - Ground
model)
3 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from the main unit
Engine PWB
4 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from the main unit

YC4 1 24V1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DFSSW

Connected to 2 SET SW I 0/24 V DC DFSSW: On/Off
the DF set (INTERLOCK)
switch
YC5 1 ENG RDY O 0/3.3 V DC Ready signal
Connected to 2 ENG SEL I 0/3.3 V DC Select signal
the engine
PWB 3 ENG DI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal input

4 ENG DO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal output

5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
7 ENG CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial clock signal
8 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 EJECT MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFEM drive control signal
Connected to 2 EJECT MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFEM drive control signal
the eject
motor, slide 3 EJECT MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFEM drive control signal
motor, eject 4 EJECT MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFEM drive control signal
release motor
5 STP MOV MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSLM drive control signal
6 STP MOV MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSLM drive control signal
7 STP MOV MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSLM drive control signal
8 STP MOV MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSLM drive control signal
9 EJE RELS MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFERM drive control signal
10 EJE RELS MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFERM drive control signal
11 EJE RELS MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFERM drive control signal
12 EJE RELS MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFERM drive control signal
YC9 1 PADDLE MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFPDM drive control signal
Connected to 2 PADDLE MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFPDM drive control signal
the paddle
motor, side 3 PADDLE MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFPDM drive control signal
registration 4 PADDLE MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFPDM drive control signal
motor 1, side
registration 5 SIDE REG R MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM2 drive control signal
motor 2
6 SIDE REG R MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM2 drive control signal
7 SIDE REG R MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM2 drive control signal
8 SIDE REG R MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM2 drive control signal
9 SIDE REG F MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM1 drive control signal
10 SIDE REG F MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM1 drive control signal

8-37
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC9 11 SIDE REG F MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM1 drive control signal
12 SIDE REG F MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSRM1 drive control signal
YC10 1 STP MOT OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
Connected to 2 STP MOT OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
the stapler
3 STP MOT OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
4 STP MOT OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
5 STP MOT OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
6 STP MOT OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
7 STP MOT OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
8 STP MOT OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFSTM drive control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 LS I 0/3.3 V DC Staple unit LS signal
11 READY I 0/3.3 V DC Staple unit READY signal
12 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
13 HP I 0/3.3 V DC Staple unit HP signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFTM drive control signal
Connected to 2 TRY MOT OUT1 O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFTM drive control signal
the tray motor

YC13 1 24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

Connected to 2 PAP PRE SOL ACT O 0/24 V DC DFPPSOL: On/Off (actuate)
the paper
pressing 3 PAP PRE SOL KEEP O 0/24 V DC DFPPSOL: On/Off (keep)
solenoid
YC17 1 ENTRY SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFPES
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the paper
entry sensor 3 ENTRY SENS SIG I 0/3.3 V DC DFPES: On/Off

YC19 1 SID REG R HP SENS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFSRS2

A
Connected to 2 GND - - Ground
the side
registration 3 SID REG R HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFSRS2: On/Off
sensor 1, side SIG
registration 4 SID REG F HP SENS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFSRS1
sensor 2, tray A
paper full
sensor 1, tray 5 GND - - Ground
paper full
6 SID REG F HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFSRS1: On/Off
sensor 2,
SIG
bundle eject
sensor, 7 GND - - Ground
adjustment
sensor, slide 8 PAP SENS SIG I 0/3.3 V DC DFMTS: On/Off
sensor 9 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
10 MTRY FULL SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFTS
11 GND - - Ground

8-38
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC19 12 MTRY FULL SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFTS: On/Off
SIG
13 Paddle HP SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFPDS
14 GND - - Ground
15 PADDLE HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFPDS: On/Off
SIG
16 PAP PRE LOW SENS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFPPS2
A
17 GND - Ground
18 PAP PRE LOW SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFPPS2: On/Off
SIG
19 PAP PRE UP SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFPPS1
20 GND - - Ground
21 PAP PRE UP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFPPS1: On/Off
SIG
22 BUNDLE HP SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFBDS
23 GND - - Ground
24 BUNDLE HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFBDS: On/Off
SIG
25 ADJUST HP SENS A O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFADS
26 GND - - Ground
27 ADJUST HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFADS: On/Off
SIG
28 STP MOV HP SENS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DFSLS
A
29 GND - - Ground
30 STP MOV HP SENS I 0/3.3 V DC DFSLS: On/Off
SIG
YC21 1 MIDDLE MOT 1B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFMM drive control signal
Connected to 2 MIDDLE MOT 1A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFMM drive control signal
the DF middle
motor 3 MIDDLE MOT 2A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFMM drive control signal

4 MIDDLE MOT 2B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) DFMM drive control signal

8-39
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) MT PWB for MT-5100

(5-1)Connector position

12
1 4 1
1
1 17
YC3 YC1 YC4

YC2

5 1
4
1
16
YC5 YC6

(5-2)PWB photograph

(5-3)Connector lists
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC1 1 READY I 0/3.3 V DC Mail box ready signal

Connected to 2 SELECT I 0/3.3 V DC Mail box select signal

the engine
PWB 3 SDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Mail box serial communication data signal

4 SDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Mail box serial communication data signal

5 PAUSE O 0/3.3 V DC Mail box pause signal

6 DETECT(GND) - - Ground

7 SCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Mail box clock signal

8 GND (to Engine) - - Ground

9 GND (to LVU) - - Ground

10 GND (to LVU) - - Ground

11 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

12 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input

8-40
PWBs > Description for PWB (OPTION) [CONFIDENTIAL]

Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 1 LED O 0/3.3 V DC LED signal

Connected to 2 GND - - Ground

the MT
overflow 3 EJECT I 0/3.3 V DC TEJS: On/Off
sensor 1, 2, 3 4 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
and 4, MT
eject sensor 1 5 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

6 GND - - Ground

7 OFS1 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW1: On/Off

8 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

9 GND - - Ground

10 OFS2 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW2: On/Off

11 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

12 GND - - Ground

13 OFS3 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW3: On/Off

14 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

15 GND - - Ground

16 OFS4 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW4: On/Off

YC3 1 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

Connected to 2 LED O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TEJS (photo transmitter)

the MT
overflow 3 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
sensor 5, MT 4 GND - - Ground
overflow
sensor 6, MT 5 OFS5 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW5: On/Off
eject sensor 1,
MT feedshift 6 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
HP sensor, 7 GND - - Ground
MT cover
sensor 8 OFS6 I 0/3.3 V DC TOFSW6: On/Off

9 ANODE - - Not used

10 GND - - Not used

11 OFS7 - - Not used

12 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

13 GND - - Ground

14 SHIFT HP SIG I 0/3.3 V DC MHPS: On/Off

15 ANODE O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

16 GND - - Ground

17 COVER OPEN I 0/3.3 V DC MCOS: On/Off

YC4 1 MOTOR _A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MBDM drive control signal

MT drive 2 MOTOR A O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MBDM drive control signal

motor.
3 MOTOR B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MBDM drive control signal

4 MOTOR _B O 0/24 V DC (pulse) MBDM drive control signal

8-41
Appendixes > Repetitive defects gauge [CONFIDENTIAL]

9Appendixes
9 - 1 Repetitive defects gauge

First occurrence of defect

28.1 mm Magnet roller (BK)

28.3 mm Magnet roller (COL)
32.0 mm Sleeve roller (BK)
32.3 mm Sleeve roller (COL)
38.5 mm Chager roller

58.5 mm 2nd Transfer roller

88.1 mm Heat roller

94.1 mm Press roller
96.5 mm Drum

845.0 mm Primary transfer belt

• The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.

9-1
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 - 2 Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed permanently
with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.

Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.

Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parametervalues
before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send theFRPO INIT (FRPO-
INITialize) command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)

The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;

FRPO parameters
J

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inch 0

A2 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0

Left margin A3 Integer value in inch 0

A4 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0

Page length A5 Integer value in inch 13

A6 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 61

Page width A7 Integer value in inch 13

A8 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 61

Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0

1: 600 dpi

Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0

1: Landscape

Default font* C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0

C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0

C5 First two digits of power-up font 0

PCL font switching C8 0: HP compatible mode 0

32: Compatibility mode

Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5

Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6

9-2
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Reduction (100 V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %

Auto linefeed mode (100 V model J7 0: Auto linefeed 0

only) 1: No auto linefeed
(Japanese emulation only)

Horizontal offset (100 V model only) K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0

K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0

Vertical offset (100 V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0

K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0

Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0

(100 V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots

New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0

1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004

Duplex printing mode selection N4 0: OFF 0

1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)

Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 30 ppm model

: 30

Ecoprint mode N6 0: OFF 0

2: ON

Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6

9 : KPDL 9 (120 V
model)

Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1

1: CR
2: CR+LF

Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1

1: LF
2: CR+LF

KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0

1: Auto switching 1 (120 V
model)

KPDL auto switching alternate P5 Same as P1 (except 9) 6

emulation

9-3
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor 10
Page eject command and action alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is 11(120 V
when automatic emulation switching processed in the alternate emulation . model)
(AES) is triggered 0: All page eject commands
1: None
2: All page eject commands and Prescribe EXIT
command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is
processed in KPDL.
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed in the
alternate emulation.

Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)

Stacker setting at start-up R0 1: Inner tray 1

3: When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed
7: When the 3000-sheet finisher is installed

Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0

1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4toA4(100 V model only)
21: A3toA4(100 V model only)
22: A4toA4[98%](100 V model only)
23: STKtoA4(100 V model only)
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II

40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4

9-4
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Default paper source R4 0: MP paper feed section 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4

Sort pin full detection S3 0: Stop at paper full detection 0

1: Output tray change at paper full detection

A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1

1: ON

Host buffer size rate S5 0: 10KB 1

(H8 value and integration) 1: 100KB
2: 1MB

RAM disk size S6 1 to 1024 MB 400

RAM disk mode S7 0: OFF 1

1: ON

Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON

Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6

U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0

Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10

U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0

Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41

1: France
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America

Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53

1: IBM
6: PCL

Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10

U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0

9-5
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09

V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power-up 12

Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99

V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at power-up 0

Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75

ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier

Initial Kanji outline font side at start- V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font size 0
up (100 V model only)* at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 09

V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font size at 10

start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 99

V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font size at 0

start-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75

Initial Kanji outline font name (100 V V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMINCH
model only)* O-W3

Default weight(courier and letter V9 0: Courier = darkness 5

Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular

Color mode W1 0: BW 1
1: Color (CMYK color)

Gloss mode W6 0: OFF 0

1: ON

9-6
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100 V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

Paper type (Paper cassettes 1) X1 1: Plain 1

3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100 V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

Media types X2 1: Plain 1

(Option paper cassette 2 to 4) X3 3: Preprinted
X4 5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8

Cassette selection mode (PCL) X1 0: Paper selection depending on an escape 0

sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000

Auto error clear at an error Y0 0: OFF 0

1: ON

Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6

9-7
Appendixes > Firmware environment commands [CONFIDENTIAL]

Items FRPO Setting value Factory

setting
Paper error detection at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 63
printing 127: Detected
Paper size and type error detection at
fixed paper source

Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0: OFF 0

(Media type is Preprinted, 1: ON
Prepunched and Letterhead only)

PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zoom depending on paper size 0

1: Loads paper which is the same size as the image
2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the
image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in
the current paper size
3: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the
image size
8: Printed in full magnification
9: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the
image size
10: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on the
image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image to fit in
the current paper size
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)

Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3

1: Output the error list
2: Displays the error
3: Displays the error and prints the error report

*: Ignored depending on emulation

9-8
Appendixes> Chart of image adjustment procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 - 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjusting Item and adjust Image Maintenance mode Page Setting procedures Remark
order No. Mode Method Adjustment
1 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray U034 LSU Out Left P.6-32 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the image
(printing adjustment) A
30 ppm 2 Select [Lsu Out Left]. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, moves leftward.
model 3 Press the system menu key. change the setting value. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex
Adjusting the LSU print start timing 4 Press the start key. 2 Press the start key to set the mode.
(output a test pattern) setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Press the system menu key. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
6 Select [MPT].
2 Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-32 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the image
cassettes A
30 ppm 2 Select [Lsu Out Left]. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, moves leftward.
(printing adjustment) model 3 Press the system menu key. change the setting value. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex
4 Press the start key. 2 Press the start key to set the mode.
Adjusting the LSU print start timing (output a test pattern) setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Press the system menu key. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
6 Select [Cass1] to [Cass4].
3 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top Full P.6-32 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the MP tray A
30 ppm 2 Select [LSU Out Top Full]. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(printing adjustment) model 3 Press the system menu key. change the setting value. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex
4 Press the start key. 2 Press the start key to set the mode.
Changes the secondary feed timing. (output a test pattern) setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Press the system menu key. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
6 Select [MPT].
4 Adjusting the leading edge registration U034 LSU Out Top Full P.6-32 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the image
of the cassette A
30 ppm 2 Select [LSU Out Top Full]. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(printing adjustment) model 3 Press the system menu key. change the setting value. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of duplex
4 Press the start key. 2 Press the start key to set the mode.
Changes the secondary feed timing. (output a test pattern) setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Press the system menu key. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
6 Select [Cass].
5 Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-127 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the margin
(printing adjustment) A
30 ppm 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, widens.
model 3 Press the start key. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start (output a test pattern) 2 Press the start key to set the
timing. 4 Press the system menu key. setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Select [Lead]. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
6 Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-127 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the margin
(printing adjustment) $
30 ppm 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, widens.
model 3 Press the start key. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end (output a test pattern) 2 Press the start key to set the
timing. 4 Press the system menu key. setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Select [Trail]. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
7 Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-127 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , *When the setting value is increased, the margin
(printing adjustment) A
C Margin 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, widens.
3 Press the start key. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start/end (output a test pattern) 2 Press the start key to set the
timing. 4 Press the system menu key. setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5 Select [A Margin] or [C Margin]. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
8 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Main Scan P.6-41 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , U065: When using on the contact glass
in the main scanning direction 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
3 Place an original and press the start key change the setting value. widens.
Processes data. to make a test copy. (Test copy output) 2 Press the start key to set the
4 Press the system menu key. setting value.
5 Select [Main Scan]. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
(Original: test copy)

9-9
Appendixes> Chart of image adjustment procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

Adjusting Item and adjust Image Maintenance mode Page Setting procedures Remark
order No. Mode Method Adjustment
9 Adjusting magnification of the scanner U065 Sub Scan P.6-41 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , U065: When using on the contact glass
in the sub scanning direction (scanning 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
adjustment) 3 Place an original and press the start key change the setting value. widens.
U070 Sub Scan(F) P.6-46
to make a test copy. (Test copy output) 2 Press the start key to set the
Sub Scan(B) 30 ppm
Changes the original scanning speed. model 4 Press the system menu key. setting value. U070: When using document processor
Sub Scan(CIS)
5 Select the item to be adjusted. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
*When the setting value is increased, the image get
(Original: test copy) U065: [Sub Scan] or [Rotate] longer.
U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or
[Sub Scan(CIS)]
10 Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-44 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , U067: When using on the contact glass
(scanning adjustment) Rotate 2 Press the system menu key. [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, *Adjustment at the time of rotate copy, select [Rotate].
3 Place an original and press the start key change the setting value. *When the setting value is increased, the image
Scan data is processed. to make a test copy. (Test copy output) 2 Press the start key to set the moves leftward.
U072 Front P.6-49
4 Press the system menu key. setting value.
Back 30 ppm
5 Select the item to be adjusted. 3 Completion: Press the stop key.
CIS model U072: When copying from the document processor
U067: [Front] or [Rotate]
*Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of duplex
(Original: test copy) U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS]
mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
11 Adjusting the leading edge registration U066 Front P.6-43 1 Press the start key. 1 By using the [Left/Right] cursor , U066: When using on the contact glass
(scanning adjustment) Rotate [+/-] cursor, or the numeric keys, *Adjustment at the time of rotate copy, select [Rotate].
1 Press the system menu key.
change the setting value. *When the setting value is increased, the image
2 Place an original and press the start key
Changes the original scan start timing. 2 Press the start key to set the moves forward.
U071 Front Head P.6-47 to make a test copy. (Test copy output)
setting value.
Back Head 30 ppm 3 Press the system menu key.
3 Completion: Press the stop key.
model 4 Select the item to be adjusted. U071: When using document processor
U067: [Front] or [Rotate] *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the time of
(Original: test copy)
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head] duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves forward.

9-10
Appendixes> Chart of image adjustment procedures [CONFIDENTIAL]

When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94340), the Image quality
following adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Using DP: ±2.0%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Magnificaiton Copy: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
MTF correction Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Input gamma in color mode
Copy: 2.0mm or less
Color correction matrix Using DP: 2.5mm or less
Input gamma in monochrome mode Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
(left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94330), the Using DP: 1.5mm /100mm or less
following adjustments are automatically made: Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0 mm or less(cassette)
• When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
positioned against the original. Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
• Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below. Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)

80
65

Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)

Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)

9-11
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 - 4 Wiring diagram
(1) No.1

BRIDGE (AK) EJECT UNIT

YC1 YC24
YC3 FAN_REM 14 14
1 1 2 1 2 FAN_REM BRIDGE_VREF 13 13 1 1 1 20 A1 A1 BRIDGE_VREF CON_FAN B1 B1 15 1 2 1 - Steam removal
BR fan motor 2 2
Relay
1 2 1 24V BRIDGE REM 12 12 2 2 2 19 A2 A2 BRIDGE REM 24V2 B2 B2 14 2 1
Relay
2 + fan motor
BRIDGE CLK 11 11 3 3 3 18 A3 A3 BRIDGE CLK
BRIDGE_PH0 10 10 4 4 4 17 A4 A4 BRIDGE_PH0
YC4 BRIDGE_PH1 9 9 5 5 5 16 A5 A5 BRIDGE_PH1 SB_MOT_B1 B3 B3 13 3 1 4 B
2 2 1 1 GND BRIDGE_DET 8 8 6 6 6 15 A6 A6 BRIDGE_DET SB_MOT_B3 B4 B4 12 4 2 3 B/
BR cover switch 1 1 2 2 BRIDGE_OPEN BRIDGE1_SENS 7 7 7 7 7 14 A7 A7 BRIDGE1_SENS SB_MOT_A3 B5 B5 11 5 3 2 A/ Exit motor
BRIDGE2_SENS 6 6 8 8 8 13 A8 A8 BRIDGE2_SENS SB_MOT_A1 B6 B6 10 6 4 1 A
DF eject paper 3.3V 3 3 3 3 3.3V2_LED OPEN_SENS 5 5 9 9 9 12 A9 A9 OPEN_SENS
GND 2 2 4 4 GND GND 4 4 10 10 10 11 A10 A10 GND
sensor Vout 1 1 5 5 BRIDGE_SENS2 GND 3 3 11 11 11 10 A11 A11 GND 24V2 B7 B7 9 7 3 1 COM Feedshift

Relay
Relay
3.3V2 2 2 12 12 12 9 A12 A12 3.3V2 EXIT_SOL_PULL B8 B8 8 6 2 2 ACT
24V1 1 1 13 13 13 8 A13 A13 24V2 EXIT_SOL_RETURN B9 B9 7 9 1 3 RET solenoid
YC2

Connector Holder
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V2_LED
DF paper entry GND 2 2 2 2 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 6 10 3 3 3.3V
sensor Vout 1 1 3 3 BRIDGE_SENS 1 GND B11 B11 5 11 2 2 GND
Upper eject
EXIT_FULL_UPPER B12 B12 4 12 1 1 Vout full sensor
B 4 4 4 4 BRIDGE_B/

Connector Holder
BR fan motor /B 3 3 5 5 BRIDGE_A/ 3.3V2_LED B13 B13 3 13 3 3 3.3V Lower eject
/A 2 2 6 6 BRIDGE_B GND B14 B14 2 14 2 2 GND
A 1 1 7 7 BRIDGE_A EJE_FULL_DOWNER B15 B15 1 15 1 1 Vout full sensor

Relay
Connector Holder

Connector Holder
3.3V2_LED B16 B16 3 1 3 3 3.3V Eject paper

Relay
GND B17 B17 2 2 2 2 GND
EXIT_PAP_SENS B18 B18 1 3 1 1 Vout sensor
BRIDGE PWB
FCOVER_OPEN B19 B19 2 1 2 1 2 2 Front cover
Relay Relay
GND B20 B20 1 2 1 2 1 1 switch 2

1 1 14 14 14 7 A14 A14 DF_READY

2 2 15 15 15 6 A15 A15 DF_SEL
3 3 16 16 16 5 A16 A16 DF_SDO
4 4 17 17 17 4 A17 A17 DF_SDI
5 5 18 18 18 3 A18 A18 NC
6 6 19 19 19 2 A19 A19 DF_DET
MT-5100 MAIL PWB 7 7 20 20 20 1 A20 A20 DF_CLK
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12 Engine PWB
YC25
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND
3 3
1 4 4 3 3 3 3 24V2
2 5 5 4 4 4 4 24V2
3
4
5
6
DF-5100 INNER PWB 7
8
9
10
11
12

YC23
PF_CAS_OPEN 1 1 11 11
PAUSE 2 B 10 10
PF_SDO 3 3 9 9
PF_SDI 4 4 8 8
PF_RDY 5 5 7 7
PF_CLK 6 6 6 6
PF_SEL2 7 7 5 5 PF MAIN
PF_SEL1 8 8 4 4
GND
3.3V3
9
10
9
10
3
2
3
2
PWB
PF_VER_SENS 11 11 1 1

Drawer Connector

Drawer Connector
YC22
24V2 2 2 1 1 24V 2 2 24V PF-5120
GND 1 1 2 2 GND 3 3 GND

PF-5130

PF-5140
1 AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE

2 AC_NEUTRAL 4 4 AC_NEUTRAL

9-12
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) No.2

MAIN PWB LASER UNIT

YC2016 YC1
GND 1 1 40 40 GND
GND 2 2 39 39 GND
LDERR 3 3 38 38 LDERR APC PWB
Vcont_Y 4 4 37 37 Vcont_Y
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
DATA_Y
DATAB_Y
6
7
6
7
35
34
35
34
DATA_Y
DATAB_Y YC2 PD PWB
GND 8 8 33 33 GND 5V 1 1 1 1 5V
ENABLE_Y 9 9 32 32 ENABLE_Y BD 2 2 2 2 BD
Thermistor
S/H_Y 10 10 31 31 S/H_Y TH 3 3 3 3 TH
Vcont_C 11 11 30 30 Vcont_C GND 4 4 4 4 GND
GND 12 12 29 29 GND
DATA_C 13 13 28 28 DATA_C
DATAB_C 14 14 27 27 DATAB_C
GND
ENABLE_C
15
16
15
16
26
25
26
25
GND
ENABLE_C YC3 THERMISTOR PWB
S/H_C 17 17 24 24 S/H_C TH 1 2 2 TH
Vcont_M 18 18 23 23 Vcont_M GND 2 1 1 GND
GND 19 19 22 22 GND Thermistor
DATA_M 20 20 21 21 DATA_M
DATAB_M 21 21 20 20 DATAB_M
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
ENABLE_M 23 23 18 18 ENABLE_M
S/H_M 24 24 17 17 S/H_M
Vcont_K 25 25 16 16 Vcont_K
GND 26 26 15 15 GND
DATA_K 27 27 14 14 DATA_K
DATAB_K 28 28 13 13 DATAB_K
GND 29 29 12 12 GND
ENABLE_K 30 30 11 11 ENABLE_K
S/H_K 31 31 10 10 S/H_K
3.3V 32 32 9 9 3.3V
3.3V 33 33 8 8 3.3V
5V 34 34 7 7 5V
5V 35 35 6 6 5V
BD 36 36 5 5 BD
TH 37 37 4 4 TH
GND 38 38 3 3 GND
GND 39 39 2 2 GND
GND 40 40 1 1 GND

ENGINE PWB
YC5
+24V2 1 1 7 1 5 5 +24V
PGND 2 2 6 2 4 4 GND
POLREM 3 3 5 3 3 3 START/STOP
POLYGON
POLOCK 4 4 4 4 2 2 LOCKED MOTOR
PDLCLK 5 5 3 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
Relay

LSU_CL_MOT2 6 6 2 6 1 3 CL MOT CLEANING

LSU_CL_MOT1 7 7 1 7 3 1 +24V1
8 8
MOTOR
9 9

9-13
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) No.3

DEVELOPER UNIT (M)

YC7 YC1 PWB DLP M YC1
GND 1 1 DLP_TH 3.3V2 1 1 3.3V2
TCSENS_M 2 2 TCSENS_M TCSENS_M 2 2 TCSENS_M T/C SENSOR
3.3V2 3 3 3.3V2 GND 3 3 GND
EEP_SCL 4 4 EEP_SCL DLP_TH 4 4 NC PWB (B)
EEP_SDA 5 5 EEP_SDA
GND 6 6 GND
VIBR_MOT 5 5 VIBR_MOT
NC 6 6 NC VIBR_MOT_REM 1 1 1 VIBR_MOT_REM PWB
3.3V 2 2 2 3.3V VIBLATION MOTOR

DRUM UNIT (M)

YC3 YC1 DRUM PWB
3.3V2 1 2 3.3V2 YC2
EEP_SCL 2 1 EEP_SCL DRAM_ERASER(+) 1 2 2 DRM1 ERASER (+)
GND 3 4 GND ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 1 ERS1 DR (-) ERASER PWB
EEP_SDA 4 3 EEP_SDA
DA1 5 6 DA1
GND (ERS1 DR (-)) 6 5 GND (ERS1 DR (-))
DA0 7 8 DA0
ERS_CL_REM 8 7 ERS_CL_REM

DEVELOPER UNIT (C)

YC6 YC1 PWB DLP C YC1
GND 1 1 DLP_TH 3.3V2 1 1 3.3V2
TCSENS_C 2 2 TCSENS_C TCSENS_C 2 2 TCSENS_C T/C SENSOR
3.3V2 3 3 3.3V2 GND 3 3 GND
EEP_SCL 4 4 EEP_SCL DLP_TH 4 4 NC
PWB (B)
EEP_SDA 5 5 EEP_SDA
GND 6 6 GND
VIBR_MOT 5 5 VIBR_MOT
VIBR_MOT_REM 1 1 1 VIBR_MOT_REM PWB
NC 6 6 NC
3.3V 2 2 2 3.3V VIBLATION MOTOR

DRUM UNIT (C)

YC2 YC1 DRUM PWB
3.3V2 1 2 3.3V2 YC2
EEP_SCL 2 1 EEP_SCL DRAM_ERASER(+) 1 2 2 DRM1 ERASER (+)
GND 3 4 GND ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 1 ERS1 DR (-)
ERASER PWB
EEP_SDA 4 3 EEP_SDA
DA1 5 6 DA1
GND (ERS1 DR (-)) 6 5 GND (ERS1 DR (-))
DA0 7 8 DA0
ERS_CL_REM 8 7 ERS_CL_REM

DEVELOPER UNIT (K) DEVELOPER UNIT (Y)

YC1 PWB DLP K YC1 YC8 YC5 YC1 PWB DLP Y YC1
3.3V2 1 1 3.3V2 DLP_TH 1 1 DLP_TH GND 1 1 DLP_TH 3.3V2 1 1 1 3.3V2
TCSENS 2 2 TCSENS_Bk TCSENS_Bk 2 2 TCSENS_Bk TCSENS_Y 2 2 TCSENS_Y TCSENS_Y 2 2 2 TCSENS_Y T/C SENSOR
TS-BK GND 3 3 GND 3.3V2 3 3 3.3V2 3.3V2 3 3 3.3V2 GND 3 3 3 GND
DLP_TH 4 4 DLP_TH EEP_SCL 4 4 EEP_SCL EEP_SCL 4 4 EEP_SCL DLP_TH 4 4 4 NC
PWB (B)
EEP_SDA 5 5 EEP_SDA EEP_SDA 5 5 EEP_SDA
GND 6 6 GND GND 6 6 GND
VIBR_MOT 1 1 1 VIBR_MOT VIBR_MOT 7 7 VIBR_MOT VIBR_MOT 5 5 VIBR_MOT
VIBM-BK 3.3V 2 2 2 3.3V NC 8 8 NC NC 6 6 3.3V VIBR_MOT_REM
3.3V
1
2
1
2
1
2
VIBR_MOT_REM
3.3V
PWB
VIBLATION MOTOR

DRUM UNIT (K) DRUM UNIT (Y)

DRUM PWB YC1 YC4 YC1 YC1 DRUM PWB
3.3V2 2 1 3.3V2 3.3V2 1 2 3.3V2 YC2
CL-BK DRM1 ERASER (+) 2 2 1 DRM1 ERASER (+) EEP_SCL 1 2 EEP_SCL EEP_SCL 2 1 EEP_SCL DRAM_ERASER(+) 1 2 2 DRM1 ERASER (+)
ERS1 DR (-) 1 1 2 ERS1 DR (-) GND 4 3 GND GND 3 4 GND ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 1 ERS1 DR (-)
ERASER PWB
EEP_SDA 3 4 EEP_SDA EEP_SDA 4 3 EEP_SDA
DA1 6 5 DA1 DA1 5 6 DA1
GND (ERS1 DR (-)) 5 6 GND (ERS1 DR (-)) GND (ERS1 DR (-)) 6 5 GND (ERS1 DR (-))
DA0 8 7 DA0 DA0 7 8 DA0
ERS_Bk_REM 7 8 ERS_Bk_REM ERS_CL_REM 8 7 ERS_CL_REM

DRUM DLP PWB

YC6 YC9
GND 1 1 15 15 GND
VIBR_MOT_REM 2 2 14 14 VIBR_MOT_REM
TCSENS_Y 3 3 13 13 TCSENS_Y
TCSENS_C 4 4 12 12 TCSENS_C
TCSENS_M 5 5 11 11 TCSENS_M
ERS_CL_REM 6 6 10 10 ERS_CL_REM
GND 7 7 9 9 GND
3.3V2 8 8 8 8 3.3V2
ENGINE PWB EEP_SCL 9 9 7 7 EEP_SCL
EEP_SDA 10 10 6 6 EEP_SDA
24V2 11 11 5 5 24V
GND 12 12 4 4 GND
DLP_TH 13 13 3 3 DLP_TH
TCSENS_BK 14 14 2 2 TCSENS_Bk
ERS_BK_REM 15 15 1 1 ERS_Bk_REM

9-14
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) No.4

YC10
5V2
3.3V2
A1
A2
A1
A2
5
4
1
2
5V2
3.3V2
CONTAINER UNIT YC14
RFID_SCL
GND
A3
A4
A3
A4
3
2
3
4
SCL
GND
RFID PWB Toner motor (Y) 3
1
1
3
1
2
20
19
1
2
1
2
+24V2
TMOT_Y_DR
RFID_SDA A5 A5 1 5 SDA

3 1 3 18 3 3 +24V2
3.3V2 A6 A6 Toner motor (C) 1 3 4 17 4 4 TMOT_C_DR
GND A7 A7
SUB_SDA A8 A8
SUB_SCL A9 A9 3 1 5 16 5 5 +24V2
Toner motor (M) 1 3 6 15 6 6 TMOT_M_DR
BELT_FAN_REM A10 A10
24V2 A11 A11
3 1 7 14 7 7 +24V2
WTNR_FAN A12 A12 Toner motor(K) 1 3 8 13 8 8 TMOT_Bk_DR
24V2 A13 A13

DLP_FAN3(BELT) A14 A14 3.3V 3 3 9 12 9 9 3.3V2_LED

24V2 A15 A15 Container sensor (Y) GND 2 2 10 11 10 10 GND
Vout 1 1 11 10 11 11 PULSE_SENS_Y

Relay
24V2 A16 A16 2 1 2 1 +
EXIT_FAN A17 A17 1
Relay
2 1
Relay
2 GND Eject fan motor
3.3V 3 3 12 9 12 12 3.3V2_LED
BELT_RLS_REMA B1 B1 2
Relay
1 1
Transfer release motor Container sensor (C) GND 2 2 13 8 13 13 GND
Connector Holder

BELT_RLS_REMB B2 B2 1 2 2 Vout 1 1 14 7 14 14 PULS_SENS_C

GND B3 B3 14 1 2 2 3.3V 3 3 15 6 15 15 3.3V2_LED

WTNR_SET_SENS B4 B4 13 2 1 1 Waste toner box switch Container sensor (M) GND 2 2 16 5 16 16 GND
Vout 1 1 17 4 17 17 PULS_SENS_M

WTNR_LED_3.3V2 B5 B5 12 3 12 1 An 3.3V 3 3 18 3 18 18 3.3V2_LED

LED
WTNR_LED B6 B6 11 4 11 2 Ca
Waste toner sensor Container sensor (K) GND 2 2 19 2 19 19 GND
WTNR_TR_3.3V2 B7 B7 10 5 10 3 Co Vout 1 1 20 1 20 20 PULS_SENS_BK
TR
WTNR_TR B8 B8 9 6 9 4 Em

Relay
Relay

HUMID_CLK B9 B9 4 1 8 7 8 5
HUMID_OUT B10 B10 3 2 (No.6) 7 8 7 6
2 TR 3 6 7
GND B11 B11 6 9
AIRTEMP B12 B12 1 4 5 10 5 8 YC31
Conected to Right cover Short 1 1 24V0
P WB THER MI S TER VIA No.5 switch Long
DLP_FAN3 B13 B13 4 11 4 9 -
24V2 B14 B14 3 12 3 10 + Developer fan motor 3
DLP_FAN4 B15 B15 2 13 2 11 -
Developer fan motor 4 Front cover Short
24V2 B16 B16 1 14 1 12 +
B17 B17 switch 1 Long 2 2 24V0_IL

YC7 ENGINE PWB

3.3V2_LED 1 1 13 1 3 3 3.3V FUSER UNIT
GND 2 2 12 2 2 2 GND Eject sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 3 3 11 3 1 1 Vout

3.3V2_LED 4 4 10 4 3 3 3.3V
GND 5 5 9 5 2 2 GND Press-release sensor
FSR_RLS_SENS 6 6 8 6 1 1 Vout

GND 7 7 7 7 1 3 GND
Relay

2 FSR_NCTH1(ROLLE)
Fuser (Center)
MAIN_TH2(ROLLE) 8 8 6 8 2
MAIN_TH1(OUT) 9 9 5 9 3 1 FSR_NCTH2(OUT TEMP) thermistor 1

GUIDE_TH2 10 10 4 10 1 2 Fuser (Edge)

Relay
GND 11 11 3 11 2 1 thermistor 2

FUS_DET 12 12 2 12
GND 13 13 1 13

3.3V_LED 14 14 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 2 2 GND TC belt release sensor 1
3REJECT_SENS 16 16 1 1 Vout

3.3V_LED 17 17 3 3 3.3V
GND 18 18 2 2 GND TC belt release sensor 2
4REJECT_SENS 19 19 1 1 Vout

YC102
SH 5 5
NC 4
LI VE 3 3
NC 2 2 2
MH 1 1 1 1
Fuser heater
3 3
MAIN

Low voltage PWB SUB

9-15
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) No.5

䣛䣅䢳䢹
䢳䢸 䢳
䢳䢷 䢴 䣈䣗䣕 䣇䣔 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣄䢱 䢳 䢳 䢶 䢶 䣄䢱
䢳䢶 䢵 㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 䣈䣗䣕 䣇䣔 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣃䢱 䢴 䢴 䢵 䢵 䣄
㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㼅㻯㻝㻡 䢳䢵 䢶 䣈䣗䣕 䣇䣔 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣄 䢵 䢵 䢴 䢴 䣃䢱
䣈䣷䣵䣧䣴䢢䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴
䣛䣅䢳䢵 䢳䢴 䢷 䣈䣗䣕 䣇䣔 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣃 䢶 䢶 䢳 䢳 䣃
䢳䢳 䢸
䣆䣇䣘䣡䣅䣎䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䣃䢳 䣃䢳 䢳䢲 䢹 䢴 䢴
䣆䣧䣸䣧䣮䣱䣲䣧䣴䢢䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴䢢䢪䣍䢫
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣃䢴 䣃䢴 䢻 䢺 䢳 䢳 䣛䣅䢳䢷
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣡䣋 䣎 䢳 䢳 䢸 䢳 䢭䢴䢶䣘
䣔 䣇䣕 䣋 䣕 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䣃䢵 䣃䢵 䢺 䢻 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䢴 䢴 䢷 䢴 䣉䣐䣆
䣖䣴䣣䣰䣵䣨䣧䣴䢢
䣔䣧䣩䣫䣵䣶䣴䣣䣶䣫䣱䣰䢢䣥䣮䣷䣶䣥䣪 䣋 䣏䣃䣉䣇䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䢵 䢵 䢶 䢵 䣕 䣖䣃䣔 䣖䢱 䣕 䣖䣑 䣒 䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣃䢶 䣃䢶 䢹 䢳䢲 䢳 䢳 䣋 䣏䣃䣉䣇䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣍 䢶 䢶 䢵 䢶 䣅䣎䣑 䣅䣍

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
䣋 䣏䣃䣉䣇䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣆䣛 䢷 䢷 䢴 䢷 䣎䣆
䣋 䣏䣃䣉䣇䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣆䣋 䣔 䢸 䢸 䢳 䢸 䣅䣙䢱 䣅䣅䣙
䣈䣇䣇䣆䣅䣎䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䣃䢷 䣃䢷 䢸 䢳䢳 䢴 䢴
䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣨䣧䣧䣦䢢䣥䣮䣷䣶䣥䣪
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣃䢸 䣃䢸 䢷 䢳䢴 䢳 䢳

䣏䣋 䣆䣡䣅䣎䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䣃䢹 䣃䢹 䢶 䢳䢵 䢴 䢴
䣏䣫䣦䣦䣮䣧䢢䣥䣮䣷䣶䣥䣪
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣃䢺 䣃䢺 䢵 䢳䢶 䢳 䢳 䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣡䣋 䣎 䢹 䢹 䢳䢸 䢳 䢸 䢳 䢭䢴䢶䣘
䣉䣐䣆 䢺 䢺 䢳䢷 䢴 䢷 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣆䣧䣸䣧䣮䣱䣲䣧䣴
䣆䣗䢳 䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䣃䢻 䣃䢻 䢴 䢳䢷 䢴 䢴
䣈䣇䣇䣆䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣇䣏
䣈䣇䣇䣆䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣍
䢻
䢳䢲
䢻
䢳䢲
䢳䢶
䢳䢵
䢵
䢶
䢶
䢵
䢵
䢶
䣕 䣖䣃䣔 䣖䢱 䣕 䣖䣑 䣒
䣅䣎䣑 䣅䣍
䢢䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴䢢䣍

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
䣆䣷䣲䣮䣧䣺䢢䣥䣮䣷䣶䣥䣪 䣈䣇䣇䣆䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣆䣛 䢳䢳 䢳䢳 䢳䢴 䢷 䢴 䢷 䣎䣆
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣃䢳 䢲 䣃䢳 䢲 䢳 䢳䢸 䢳 䢳 䣈䣇䣇䣆䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣆䣋 䣔 䢳䢴 䢳䢴 䢳䢳 䢸 䢳 䢸 䣅䣙䢱 䣅䣅䣙
䢳䢲 䢹
㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌 到 到
㼅㻯㻝㻟 䢳 䢳䢸

䣛䣅䢳䢸
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣡䣋 䣎 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢭䢴䢶䣘
䣉䣐䣆 䢴 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣆䣧䣸䣧䣮䣱䣲䣧䣴䢢
䣆䣎䣒 䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣇䣏
䣆䣎䣒 䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣍
䢵
䢶
䢵
䢶
䢵
䢶
䢵
䢶
䣕 䣖䣃䣔 䣖䢱 䣕 䣖䣑 䣒
䣅䣎䣑 䣅䣍
䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴䢢
䣆䣎䣒 䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣆䣛 䢷 䢷 䢷 䢷 䣎䣆 䣏䢱䣅䢱䣛
䢳䢶 䢳 䣆䣎䣒 䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣆䣋 䣔 䢸 䢸 䢸 䢸 䣅䣙䢱 䣅䣅䣙
䢳䢵 䢴
㻔㻺㼛㻚㻠㻕 䢳䢴 䢵 㻔㻺㼛㻚㻢㻕
䢳䢳 䢶

䢭 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘䢴 䣄䢳 䣄䢳 䢳䢲 䢳 䢳䢲 䢷 䢷 䢷 䢭 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘䢶
䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣈䣡䣎䣇䣆 䣄䢴 䣄䢴 䢻 䢴 䢻 䢸 䢶 䢶 䣎䣇䣆䣔 䣇䣈
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

䣉䣐䣆 䣄䢵 䣄䢵 䢺 䢵 䢺 䢹 䢵 䢵 䣉䣐䣆 䣨䣴䣱䣰䣶䢢䣋䣆䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴 䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣡䣋 䣎 䢹 䢹 䢳 䢳 䢭䢴䢶䣘

䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣕 䣇䣐䣕 䣡䣈䣡䣒 䣄䢶 䣄䢶 䢹 䢶 䢹 䢺 䢴 䢴 䣋 䣆䣕 䣉䣐䣆 䢺 䢺 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣆䣴䣷䣯
䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣕 䣇䣐䣕 䣡䣈䣡䣕 䣄䢷 䣄䢷 䢸 䢷 䢸 䢻 䢳 䢳 䣋 䣆䣒 䣆䣔 䣏䣍 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䢻 䢻 䢵 䢵 䣕 䣖䣃䣔 䣖䢱 䣕 䣖䣑 䣒 䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴䢢䣍
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

䣆䣔 䣏䣍 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣍 䢳䢲 䢳䢲 䢶 䢶 䣅䣎䣑 䣅䣍

䣆䣔 䣏䣍 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣆䣛 䢳䢳 䢳䢳 䢷 䢷 䣎䣆
䢭 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘䢴 䣄䢸 䣄䢸 䢷 䢸 䢷 䢳䢲 䢷 䢷 䢭 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘䢶 䣆䣔 䣏䣍 䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣆䣋 䣔 䢳䢴 䢳䢴 䢸 䢸 䣅䣙䢱 䣅䣅䣙
䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣔 䣡䣎䣇䣆 䣄䢹 䣄䢹 䢶 䢹 䢶 䢳䢳 䢶 䢶 䣎䣇䣆䣔 䣇䣈 䣐䣅 䢳䢵 䢳䢵
䣉䣐䣆 䣄䢺 䣄䢺 䢵 䢺 䢵 䢳䢴 䢵 䢵 䣉䣐䣆 䣴䣧䣣䣴䢢䣋䣆䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴
䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣕 䣇䣐䣕 䣡䣔 䣡䣒 䣄䢻 䣄䢻 䢴 䢻 䢴 䢳䢵 䢴 䢴 䣋 䣆䣕
䣔 䣇䣉䣡䣕 䣇䣐䣕 䣡䣔 䣡䣕 䣄䢳 䢲 䣄䢳 䢲 䢳 䢳䢲 䢳 䢳䢶 䢳 䢳 䣋 䣆䣒

㻌㻵㻰㻌㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞

䣛䣅䢳䢺
䢴 䢶 䣘䢴 䣡䣋 䣎 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢳 䢭䢴䢶䣘
㻯㼍㼟㼟㼑㼠㼠㼑 䣉䣐䣆 䢴 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆
䣆䣴䣷䣯
YC12 䣆䣔 䣏䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣇䣏 䢵 䢵 䢵 䢵 䣕 䣖䣃䣔 䣖䢱 䣕 䣖䣑 䣒 䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴
䣆䣔 䣏䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣅䣎䣍 䢶 䢶 䢶 䢶 䣅䣎䣑 䣅䣍
3 .3 V2 _LED 1 䢳 䢳䢷 䢳 䢳䢷 䢳 䢵 䢵 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘 䣆䣔 䣏䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣔 䣆䣛 䢷 䢷 䢷 䢷 䣎䣆 䣏䢱䣅䢱䣛
GND 2 䢴 䢳䢶 䢴 䢳䢶 䢴 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴 䣆䣔 䣏䣅䣡䣏䣑 䣖䣡䣆䣋 䣔 䢸 䢸 䢸 䢸 䣅䣙䢱 䣅䣅䣙
P AP EMP _S ENS 3 䢵 䢳䢵 䢵 䢳䢵 䢵 䢳 䢳 䣘䣱 䣷 䣶

3 .3 V2 _LED 4 䢶 䢳䢴 䢶 䢳䢴 䢶 䢵 䢵 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘
GND 5 䢷 䢳䢳 䢷 䢳䢳 䢷 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣩䣣䣷䣩䣧䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴䢢䢳
P AP VL1 _S ENS 6 䢸 䢳䢲 䢸 䢳䢲 䢸 䢳 䢳 䣘䣱 䣷 䣶

3 .3 V3 _LED 7 䢹 䢻 䢹 䢻 䢹 䢵 䢵 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘
GND 8 䢺 䢺 䢺 䢺 䢺 䢴 䢴 䣉䣐䣆 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣩䣣䣷䣩䣧䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴䢢䢴
P AP VL2 _S ENS 9 䢻 䢹 䢻 䢹 䢻 䢳 䢳 䣘䣱 䣷 䣶
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

CAS _WI D0 10 䢳䢲 䢸 䢳䢲 䢸 䢳䢲 䢴 䢴 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣮䣧䣰䣩䣶䣪䢢䣵䣹䣫䣶䣥䣪䢢䢳

GND 11 䢳䢳 䢷 䢳䢳 䢷 䢳䢳 䢳 䢳

CAS _WI D1 12 䢳䢴 䢶 䢳䢴 䢶 䢳䢴 䢴 䢴 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣮䣧䣰䣩䣶䣪䢢䣵䣹䣫䣶䣥䣪䢢䢴

GND 13 䢳䢵 䢵 䢳䢵 䢵 䢳䢵 䢳 䢳

CAS _WI D2 14 䢳䢶 䢴 䢳䢶 䢴 䢳䢶 䢴 䢴 䣒䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣮䣧䣰䣩䣶䣪䢢䣵䣹䣫䣶䣥䣪䢢䢵

GND 15 䢳䢷 䢳 䢳䢷 䢳 䢳䢷 䢳 䢳
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼥㼕㼚㼓㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠
3 .3 V2 _LED 16 䢳 䢵 䢳 㻟 㻟 㻟 㻚㻟 㼂
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

GND 17 䢴 䢴 䢴 㻞 㻞 㻳㻺㻰 䣆䣷䣲䣮䣧䣺䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴

DU1 _S ENS 18 䢵 䢳 䢵 㻝 㻝 㼂㼛 㼡 㼠

3 .3 V3 _LED 19 䢶 䢵 䢳 㻟 㻟 㻟 㻚㻟 㼂
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

GND 20 䢷 䢴 䢴 㻞 㻞 㻳㻺㻰 䣏䣒䢢䣲䣣䣲䣧䣴䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴

MP F_S ET_S ENS 21 䢸 䢳 䢵 㻝 㻝 㼂㼛 㼡 㼠

㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼥㼕㼚㼓㻌
3 .3 V2 _LED 22 䢹 䢸 䢳 䢵 䢳 㻟 㻟 㻟 㻚㻟 㼂
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

㼍㼞㼑㼍
GND 23 䢺 䢷 䢴 䢴 䢴 㻞 㻞 㻳㻺㻰 䣎䣫䣨䣶䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴
CAS _LI FTUP _S ENS 24 䢻 䢶 䢵 䢳 䢵 㻝 㻝 㼂㼛 㼡 㼠
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

GND 25 䢳䢲 䢵 䢳 㻟 㻟 䣉䣐䣆
R EG_S ENS 26 䢳䢳 䢴 䢴 㻞 㻞 䣘䣱 䣷 䣶 䣔䣧䣩䣫䣵䣶䣴䣣䣶䣫䣱䣰䢢䣵䣧䣰䣵䣱䣴
3 .3 V2 27 䢳䢴 䢳 䢵 㻝 㻝 䢵 䢰䢵 䣘

2 4 V2 28 䢳䢵 䢴 䢳 Vc c
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻 MP solenoid
MP F_S O L_R EM 29 䢳䢶 䢳 䢴 Vo u t
NC 30 䢳䢷
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠

㻱㻺㻳㻵㻺㻱㻌㻼㼃㻮

9-16
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(6) No.6

ENGINE PWB
YC21
䢴䢶䣘䢴 䢳 䢳 䢸 䢳 䢺 䢳 2 1 +
䣆䣎䣒䣡䣈䣃䣐䢳 䢴 䢴 䢷 䢴 䢹 䢴 1 Relay -
Developer fan motor 1
2

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
䢴䢶䣘䢴 䢵 䢵 䢶 䢵 䢸 䢵 2 1 +
Relay Developer fan motor 2
䣆䣔䣗䣏䢢䣈䣃䣐傍䢴 䢶 䢶 䢵 䢶 䢷 䢶 1 2 -
䢴 䢷
䢳 䢸

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
P WB THER MI S TER

㻔㻾㼑㼒㼑㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㻺㼛㻚㻡㻕
䢶 䢳 䢳䢶 䢳 䢶 䢷 䢶 䢳 䣄䣇 䣊䣗䣏䣋䣆䣡䣅䣎䣍

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
䢵 䢴 䢳䢵 䢴 䢵 䢸 䢵 䢴 䣛䣙 䣊䣗䣏䣋䣆䣡䣑䣗䣖

䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻
㻔㻺㼛㻚㻠㻕 䢴 䢵 䢳䢴 䢵 䢴 䢹 䢴 䢵 䣄䣍 䣉䣐䣆
䢳 䢶 䢳䢳 䢶 䢳 䢺 䢳 䢶 䣉䣐 䣖䣇䣏䣒

㻯㼛㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻱㼚㼓㼕㼚㼑㻌㻼㼃㻮㻌㻔㼅㻯㻝㻜㻕
䣎䣋䣈䣖䣡䣏䣑䣖䢳䣡䣆䣔 䢷 䢷 䢴 䢳 䢵 䢳
䣔䣧䣮䣣䣻 䣎䣋䣈䣖䢢䣏䣑䣖䣑䣔
䣎䣋䣈䣖䣡䣏䣑䣖䢳䣡䣔䣇䣖 䢸 䢸 䢳 䢴 䢳 䢵

䣆䣎䣒䣡䣈䣃䣐䢳 䢹 䢹 2 1 -
䢴䢶䣘䢴 䢺 䢺 1
Relay
2 凝
Clutch fan motor

YC1
䢷䣘䢲 䢻 䢻 2 1 5V0 PWB RELAY
傍䣆䣊䣔䣇䣏 䢳䢲 䢳䢲 1 2 傍DHREM

YC34
24V2
LVU_FAN
1
2
1
2
2
1
Relay 1
2
+
- PWB fan motor Low Voltage PWB
YC105
SHREM 3 3 6 1 SHREM
MHREM 4 4 5 2 MHREM YC101
RELAYREM 5 5 4 3 RELAYREM LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
ZCROSS 6 6 3 4 ZCROSS Black
LVU_SLEEP 7 7 2 5 PSLEEPN INLET
24V3_IL 8 8 1 6 24V 3_IL NEUTRAL 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
White
SRT-51T-4FE

YC30
1 1 2 1 Power SW
PSSW 2
Relay
2 1 2 GND

YC29 CN4
24V0 4 4 1 1 24V0 㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔
24V0 3 3 2 2 24V0
GND 2 2 3 3 GND 㻔㻭㼜㼘㼕㼑㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻷㻾㻕
GND 1 1 4 4 GND

YC1 YC8
GND 12 12 12 12 GND
GND 11 11 11 11 GND
MISENS 10 10 10 10 MISENS
HVCLK 9 9 9 9 HVCLK
Cassette heater
High Voltage PWB HVREM
DACSDI
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
HVREM
DACSDI
PWB YC2 CN3
SGND 6 6 6 6 SGND DH_LIVE 4 4 1 1 DH_LIVE
DACSCLK 5 5 5 5 DACSCLK NC 3 3 2 2 DH_LIVE
DACSLD2 4 4 4 4 DACSLD2 3 3 NC
DACSLD1 3 3 3 3 DACSLD1 4 4 NC
24V 2 2 2 2 24V3_IL NC 2 2 5 5 DH_NEUTRAL
24V 1 1 1 1 24V3_IL DH_NEUTRAL 1 1 6 6 DH_NEUTRAL

YC3
1 1 DH_LIVE
2 2 DH_LIVE
3 3 NC
4 4 NC
5 5 DH_NEUTRAL
6 6 DH_NEUTRAL

1 1
2 2 Cassette heater

1
1 Inter Lock sw
4
2
2 Inter Lock sw PF Drawer
1

9-17
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(7) No.7

IMAGE SCANNER UNIT MAIN PWB ENGINE PWB DOCUMENT PROCESSOR

A A
18 1
17 2
16 3
YC6004 YC3 YC20
HP_SWN 30 30 1 1 HP_SWN 3.3V3 A1 A1 15 4 3 3 3.3V2 DP original
JS_LED 29 29 2 2 JS_LED GND A2 A2 14 5 2 2 GND
YC1 YC2014 SAPPHIRE_PAG 28 28 3 3 SAPPHIRE_PAG DP_SETSW A3 A3 13 6 1 1 DP_SETSW sensor
12V 3_E1 1 1 1 1 12V3 SAPPHIRE_OVM 27 27 4 4 SAPPHIRE_OVM
12V 3_E1 2 2 2 2 12V3 SAPPHIRE_SEL 26 26 5 5 SAPPHIRE_SEL
NC 3 3 3 3 NC SAPPHIRE_RDY 25 25 6 6 SAPPHIRE_RDY 3.3V2 A4 A4 12 7 3 3 3.3V2
5V 3_E2 4 4 4 4 5V3_E SAPPHIRE_SO 24 24 7 7 SAPPHIRE_SO GND A5 A5 11 8 2 2 GND DP feed sensor
5V 3_E2 5 5 5 5 5V3_E SAPPHIRE_SI 23 23 8 8 SAPPHIRE_SI DP_FEEDSW A6 A6 10 9 1 1 DP_FEEDSW
NC 6 6 6 6 NC SAPPHIRE_SCL 22 22 9 9 SAPPHIRE_SCL
GND 7 7 7 7 GND GND 21 21 10 10 GND
CCDPWB CCDOSR 8 8 8 8 CCDOSR OFFMODE 20 20 11 11 OFFMODE 3.3V2 A7 A7 9 10 3 3 3.3V2
DP open/close
GND 9 9 9 9 GND GND 19 19 12 12 GND GND A8 A8 8 11 2 2 GND
CCDOSG(EVEN) 10 10 10 10 CCDOSG(EVEN) PVSYNC 18 18 13 13 PVSYNC DP_OPENSW A9 A9 7 12 1 1 DP_OPENSW sensor
GND 11 11 11 11 GND C2E_INT 17 17 14 14 C2E_INT
CCDOSB(ODD) 12 12 12 12 CCDOSB(ODD) HLD_SCAN 16 16 15 15 HLD_SCAN
GND 13 13 13 13 GND HLD_ENG 15 15 16 16 HLD_ENG 3.3V2 A10 A10 6 13 3 3 3.3V2
DP feedshift
CCDSW 14 14 14 14 CCDSW GND 14 14 17 17 GND GND A11 A11 5 14 2 2 GND
CCDSH 15 15 15 15 CCDSH MAIN_SCLK 13 13 18 18 MAIN_SCLK DP_JHPSW_EXITSW A12 A12 4 15 1 1 DP_JHPSW_EXITSW sensor
GND 16 16 16 16 GND MAIN_SDA 12 12 19 19 MAIN_SDA
YC3 GND 17 17 17 17 GND GND 11 11 20 20 GND
Home position 3.3V
GND
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
2
3.3V-LED
GND
CCDPH1+
CCDPH1-
18
19
18
19
18
19
18
19
CCDPH1+
CCDPH1-
G6_EG_IRN
G6_EG_SO
10
9
10
9
21
22
21
22
G6_EG_IRN
G6_EG_SO
3.3V2 A13
GND A14
A13
A14
3
2
16
17
3
2
3
2
3.3V2
GND
DP registration
sensor Vout 1 1 3 3 HP_SWN GND 20 20 20 20 GND G6_EG_SBSY 8 8 23 23 G6_EG_SBSY DP_TMG_SW A15 A15 1 18 1 1 DP_TMG_SW sensor
CCDCP- 21 21 21 21 CCDCP- G6_EG_SDIR 7 7 24 24 G6_EG_SDIR
CCDCP+ 22 22 22 22 CCDCP+ G6_EG_SI 6 6 25 25 G6_EG_SI

Relay
GND 23 23 23 23 GND G6_EG_SCLK 5 5 26 26 G6_EG_SCLK
CCDDRS+ 24 24 24 24 CCDDRS+ GND 4 4 27 27 GND
CCDDRS- 25 25 25 25 CCDDRS- LSU_THERM 3 3 28 28 LSU_THERM B B
GND 26 26 26 26 GND GND 2 2 29 29 GND 18 1
NC 27 27 27 27 NC LDERR 1 1 30 30 LDERR 17 2
3.3V 3_E1 28 28 28 28 3.3V2 16 3
HP_SWN 29 29 29 29 HP_SWN 15 4
LEDPWB GND
M_LED_C
30
31
30
31
30
31
30
31
GND
M_LED_C
14
13
5
6
M_LED_A 32 32 32 32 M_LED_A YC5 YC4
24V1 8 8 1 1 24V0 DP_CONV_MOT_/B B1 B1 12 7 6 6 DP_CONV_MOT_/B
GND 7 7 2 2 GND
YC2 5V0 6 6 3 3 5V0 DP_CONV_MOT_B B2 B2 11 8 4 4 DP_CONV_MOT_B DP conveying
LED_Cathode 2 2 1 1 LED_Cathode GND 5 5 4 4 GND DP_CONV_MOT_/A B3 B3 10 9 3 3 DP_CONV_MOT_/A
LED_Anode 1 1 2 2 LED_Anode 3.3V0 4 4 5 5 3.3V0
motor
GND 3 3 6 6 GND DP_CONV_MOT_A B4 B4 9 10 1 1 DP_CONV_MOT_A
5.0V3_IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 5V3_IL
GND 1 1 8 8 GND DP_FEEDMOT_/B B5 B5 8 11 6 6 DP_FEEDMOT_/B

DP_FEEDMOT B B6 B6 7 12 4 4 DP_FEEDMOT B
DP_FEEDMOT_/A B7 B7 6 13 3 3 DP_FEEDMOT_/A DP feed motor
YC6003 YC32
24V2 2 2 1 1 24V2 DP_FEEDMOT_A B8 B8 5 14 1 1 DP_FEEDMOT_A
GND 1 1 2 2 GND
DP_SEPMOT_/B B9 B9 4 15 4 4 DP_SEPMOT_/B
DP_SEPMOT_/A B10 B10 3 16 3 3 DP_SEPMOT_/A DP feedshift
DP_SEPMOT_B B11 B11 2 17 2 2 DP_SEPMOT_B
DP_SEPMOT_A B12 B12 1 18 1 1 DP_SEPMOT_A motor
NC B13 B13
NC B14 B14
NC B15 B15
YC19 1 1
2 2
B3 1 1 SCAN_MOT_B3 3 3
Scanner A1 2 2 SCAN_MOT_A1
motor B1
A3
3
4
3
4
SCAN_MOT_B1
SCAN_MOT_A3

9-18
Appendixes> Wiring diagram [CONFIDENTIAL]

(8) No.8

OPERATION PANEL UNIT

YC9

YT
YC18
1 Y1
SPK+
SPK-
1
2
1
2
2
1
Relay 1
2
+
-
Speaker MAIN PWB KUIO relay PWB
XL 2 X2
Touch panel YB 3 Y2
XR 4 X1
YC2
KUIOPWB2
YC6001 VBUS 20 20 VBUS
YC4 YC2011 VBUS1 1 1 1 1 VBUS1 USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN
VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS USB_DN1 2 2 2 2 USB_DN1 USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
DATE- 2 2 2 2 DATE- USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1 GND 17 17 GND
DATE+ 3 3 3 3 DATE+ GND 4 4 4 4 GND RESERVE 16 16 NC
NC 4 4 4 4 NC AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 RESERVE 15 15 NC
GND 5 5 5 5 GND WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 GND 14 14 GND
LockPin1 LP1 6 LP1 LockPin1 RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESETN1 RESERVE 13 13 NC
LockPin2 LP2 7 LP2 LockPin2 GND 8 8 8 8 GND RESERVE 12 12 NC
LockPin3 LP3 8 LP3 LockPin3 VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 GND 11 11 GND
LockPin4 LP4 9 USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 RESERVE 10 10 NC
LCD LockPin5
LockPin6
LP5
LP6
10
11
USB_DP0 11
GND 12
11
12
11
12
11
12
USB_DP0
GND
RESERVE
RESERVE
9
8
9
8
NC
NC
YC2 AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
䣉䣐䣆 䢵䢷 1 1 1 GND WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
䣔䢲 䢵䢶 2 2 2 R0 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESETN0 GND 5 5 GND
䣔䢳 䢵䢵 3 3 3 R1 LockPin(1) LP1 LP1 LockPin VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
䣔䢴 䢵䢴 4 4 4 R2 LockPin(2) LP2 LP2 LockPin RESETN 3 3 RESETN
䣔䢵 䢵䢳 5 5 5 R3 LP3 LockPin GND 2 2 GND
䣔䢶 䢵䢲 6 6 6 R4 LP4 LockPin VDD5 1 1 VDD5
䣔䢷 䢴䢻 7 7 7 R5 YC17 LockPin2 LP2
䣉䣐䣆 䢴䢺 8 8 8 GND +5V 1 1 YC2001 LockPin1 LP1
䣉䢲 䢴䢹 9 9 9 G0 +5V 2 2 1 1 +5V
䣉䢳 䢴䢸 10 10 10 G1 +5V 3 3 2 2 +5V
YC6002 YC4 YC1
KUIOPWB1
䣉䢴 䢴䢷 11 11 11 G2 GND 4 4 3 3 GND
䣉䢵 䢴䢶 12 12 12 G3 GND 5 5 4 4 GND 5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1 VBUS 20 20 VBUS
䣉䢶 䢴䢵 13 13 13 G4 GND 6 6 GND 5 2 5 2 GND USB_DN 19 19 USB_DN
䣉䢷 䢴䢴 14 14 14 G5 5V 4 3 4 3 5V USB_DP 18 18 USB_DP
䣉䣐䣆 䢴䢳 15 15 15 GND GND 3 4 3 4 GND GND 17 17 GND
䣄䢲 䢴䢲 16 16 16 B0 5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 RESERVE 16 16 NC
䣄䢳 䢳䢻 17 17 17 B1 GND 1 6 1 6 GND RESERVE 15 15 NC
䣄䢴 䢳䢺 18 18 18 B2 GND 14 14 GND
䣄䢵 䢳䢹 19 19 19 B3 RESERVE 13 13 NC
䣄䢶 䢳䢸 20 20 20 B4 YC6 YC2002 RESERVE 12 12 NC
䣄䢷 䢳䢷 21 21 21 B5 GMD 15 15 1 1 GND GND 11 11 GND
䣉䣐䣆 䢳䢶 22 22 22 GND PANEL_STATUS 14 14 2 2 PANEL_STATUS RESERVE 10 10 NC
䣆䣅䣎䣍 䢳䢵 23 23 23 DCLK INT_ENERGY_SAVER_KEY 13 13 3 3 INT_ENERGY_SAVER_KEY RESERVE 9 9 NC
䢵 䢰䢵 䣘 䢳䢴 24 24 24 3.3V PANEL_RESET 12 12 4 4 PANEL_RESET RESERVE 8 8 NC
䢵 䢰䢵 䣘 䢳䢳 25 25 25 3.3V AUDIO 11 11 5 5 AUDIO AUDIO 7 7 AUDIO
䢵 䢰䢵 䣘 䢳䢲 26 26 26 3.3V LIGHTOFF_POWERON 10 10 6 6 LIGHTOFF_POWERON WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
䢵 䢰䢵 䣘 䢻 27 27 27 3.3V SHUTDOWN 9 9 7 7 SHUTDOWN GND 5 5 GND
䣆䣇 䢺 28 28 28 DE LED_PROCESSING_N 8 8 8 8 LED_PROCESSING_N VDD5_CUT 4 4 VDD5_CUT
䣊䣕 䣛䣐䣅 䢹 29 29 29 HSYNC LED_ATTENTION_N 7 7 9 9 LED_ATTENTION_N RESETN 3 3 RESETN
䣘䣕 䣛䣐䣅 䢸 30 30 30 VSYNC LED_MEMORY_N 6 6 10 10 LED_MEMORY_N GND 2 2 GND
䣎䣇䣆䣡䣇䣐 䢷 31 31 31 LED_EN SUSPEND_POWER 5 5 11 11 SUSPEND_POWER VDD5 1 1 VDD5
䣎䣇䣆䣡䣒 䣙䣏 䢶 32 32 32 LED_PWM ENERGY_SAVE 4 4 12 12 ENERGY_SAVE
䣖䣕 䣅䣡䣋 䣐䣖 䢵 33 33 33 TSC_INT BEEP_POWERON 3 3 13 13 BEEP_POWERON
䣋 䢴 䣅䣡䣕 䣆䣃 䢴 34 34 34 I2C_SDA SECOND_TRAY_SW 2 2 14 14 SECOND_TRAY_SW
䣋 䢴 䣅䣡䣕 䣅䣎 䢳 35 35 35 I2C_SCL GND 1 1 15 15 GND

YC21
䢷䣘 䢳 2 1 1 LED_A
䣉䣐䣆 䢴 1 2 2 LED_C
䣗䣕䣄䢢䣆䣧䣸䣫䣥䣧䢢䣥䣱䣰䣰䣧䣥䣶䣱䣴
䣛䣅䢴䢲䢲䢻
YC2007 䣘䣄䣗䣕 䢳
YC2 YC8 䣆䣃䣖䣃䢯 䢴
VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
S CAN0 1 1 1 1 SCAN0 DATA - 2 2 2 DATA- 䣆䣃䣖䣃䢭 䢵
䣐䣅 䢶
S CAN1
S CAN2
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
SCAN1
SCAN2
USB host DATA + 3 3
4
3
4
DATA+
NC 䣉䣐䣆 䢷
S CAN3
S CAN4
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
SCAN3
SCAN4
Operation panel GND 4 5 5
LP1
GND
LockPin1
䣎䣱 䣥 䣭䣒 䣫䣰 䢳
䣎䣱 䣥 䣭䣒 䣫䣰 䢴
䣎䣱 䣥 䣭䣒 䣫䣰 䢵
䣎䣒 䢳
䣎䣒 䢴
䣎䣒 䢵
LEDRI GHT0 6 6 6 6 LEDRIGHT0 LP2 LockPin2
K EYRI GHT0
K EYRI GHT1
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
KEYRIGHT0
KEYRIGHT1
PWB LP3 LockPin3

K EYRI GHT2 9 9 9 9 KEYRIGHT2

K EYRI GHT3 10 10 10 10 KEYRIGHT3
11 11 KEYRIGHT4 䣛䣅䢳䢻
K EYRI GHT4 11 11 YC2008
LEDRI GHT1 12 12 12 12 LEDRIGHT1 䢴䢶䣘 䢳 䢴 䢭
P _LED 13 13 13 13 P_LED VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS 䣈䣃䣐䣆䣔 䣘 䢴 䢳 䢯 䣅䣱䣰䣶䣴䣱䣮䣮䣧䣴䢢䣨䣣䣰䢢䣯䣱䣶䣱䣴
M_LED 14 14 14 14 M_LED DATA - 2 2 2 DATA-
A_LED 15 15 15 15 A_LED USB host DATA + 3 3
4
3
4
DATA+
NC
I NT_P O WERK E 16 16 16 16 INT_POWERKEY
S US P EMD_P O 17 17 17 17 SUSPEMD_POW GND 4 5 5 GND
GND 18 18 18 18 GND LP1 LockPin1
LP2 LockPin2
LP3 LockPin3

Operation panel
sub
YC1 YC7 YC14
GND 1 1 1 1 GND DAT2 1
S CAN0 2 2 2 2 SCAN0 DAT3_CO 2
K EYLEFT1 3 3 3 3 KEYLEFT1 CMD 3
LEDLEFT1 4 4 4 4 LEDLEFT1 VDD 4
K EYLEFT2 5 5 5 5 KEYLEFT2 CLK 5
S CAN1 6 6 6 6 SCAN1 VSS 6
S CAN2 7 7 7 7 SCAN2 DAT0 7 SD card
S CAN3 8 8 8 8 SCAN3 DAT1 8
K EYLEFT0 9 9 9 9 KEYLEFT0 LockPin(1) 9
LEDLEFT0 10 10 10 10 LEDLEFT0 LockPin(1) 10
LEDLEFT2 11 11 11 11 LEDLEFT2 LockPin(1) 11
S LED 12 12 12 12 S LED2 LockPin(1) 12

9-19
Appendixes> Wiring diagram (Options) [CONFIDENTIAL]

9 - 5 Wiring diagram (Options)

(1) Paper Feeder (PF-5120)

YC3
3.3V4_LED 1 1 15 1 3 3 3.3V PF paper
GND 2 2 14 2 2 2 GND
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 13 3 1 1 Vout sensor
3.3V4_LED 4 4 12 4 3 3 3.3V
PF paper gauge
GND 5 5 11 5 2 2 GND
YC4 CAS1_QUANT1 6 6 10 6 1 1 Vout sensor 1
3.3V 3 3 1 3 1 1 3.3V4_LED

Relay
3.3V4_LED 7 7 9 7 3 3 3.3V
PF lift sensor GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 GND PF paper gauge

Relay
Vout 1 1 3 1 3 3 ULIM_SW_1 GND 8 8 8 8 2 2 GND
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 7 9 1 1 Vout sensor 2

3.3V 3 3 1 5 4 4 3.3V4 GND 10 10 6 10 2 2 PF paper length

CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 5 11 1 1
PF feed sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 5 5 VER_SENS_1 switch 1

Relay
GND 1 1 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 12 12 4 12 2 2 PF paper length
2 2 4 2 7 7 COVER_OPEN CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 3 13 1 1 switch 2
PF right cover switch 1 1 5 1 8 8 GND
GND 14 14 2 14 2 2 PF paper length
CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 1 15 1 1 switch 3

YC6
1 2 1 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 2 1 2
Relay
1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR

YC1
1 3.3V4
2 TXD
3 RXD Debugger
4 NC
5 GND

YC8
+24V 1 6 1 10 1 1 +24V
GND 2 5 2 9 2 2 GND
PF paper START/STOP 3 4 3 8 3 3 START/STOP
CLOCK 4 3 4 7 4 4 CLOCK
feed motor LD 5 2 5 6 5 5 LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 5 6 6 CW/CCW YC2
3.3V4 1
Flash Writer GND 2
Relay

RESET 3
MODE 4
YC9
2 2 7 4 1 1 VER_CL1
PF conveying clutch 1 1 8 3 2 2 24V1
YC12
2 2 9 2 3 3 FEED_CL1 VER_SENS 1 1 1 1 VER_SENS
PF paper feed clutch 1 1 10 1 4 4 24V1 3.3V3 2 2 2 2 3.3V3
GND 3 3 3 3 GND
5 5 VER_CL2 PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 4 4 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 5 5 PF_CAS2_SEL
EH_CLK 6 6 6 6 EH_CLK
EH_RDY 7 7 7 7 EH_RDY
EH_SDO 8 8 8 8 EH_SDO
EH_SDI
PF_PAU 10
9 9
10
9
10
9
10
EH_SDI
PF_PAU
Engine PWB
PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 11 11 PF_CAS_OPEN

Relay

Relay
YC11
24V1 1 1 2 2 24V2
GND 2 2 3 3 GND

YC13
11 1 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN 4 4 AC_NEUTRAL
10 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
9 3 3 AN_PF_SDI
8 4 4 AN_PF_SDO 1 1 AC_LIVE
7 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
6 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
5
PF-5130 4 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
PF Cassette heater
AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
3 8 8 GND AC_LIVE 1 1
Relay

Relay

2 9 9 3.3V3
1
1 1
YC10 1
PF-5140 3 1
2
1 GND
2 GND
2 2
2
2 3 3 24V2

1 #187
#187 Front cover switch
4

#187
Front cover switch
#187 PF PWB
1

9-20
Appendixes> Wiring diagram (Options) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(2) Paper Feeder (PF-5130)

YC9
PF conveying 2 2 1 1 VER_CL1
clutch 1 1 1 2 2 24V1

PF paper feed 2 2 3 3 FEED_CL1 YC3

clutch 1 1 1 4 4 24V1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 15 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 14 2 2 2 GND PF paper sensor 1
PF conveying 2 2 5 5 VER_CL2 CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 13 3 1 1 Vout
clutch 2 1 1 6 6 24V1
3.3V4_LED 4 4 12 4 3 3 3.3V PF paper gauge
PF paper feed 2 2 7 7 FEED_CL2 GND 5 5 11 5 2 2 GND
clutch 2 1 1 8 8 24V1 CAS1_QUANT1 6 6 10 6 1 1 Vout sensor 1

3.3V4_LED 7 7 9 7 3 3 3.3V
PF paper gauge

Relay
GND 8 8 8 8 2 2 GND
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 7 9 1 1 Vout sensor 2
YC4 GND 10 10 6 10 2 2 PF paper length
3.3V 3 3 1 3 1 1 3.3V4_LED CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 5 11 1 1 PFPLSW1

Relay
switch 1
PF lift sensor 1 GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 3 3 ULIM_SW_1 GND 12 12 4 12 2 2 PF paper length
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 3 13 1 1 PFPLSW2
switch 2
3.3V 3 3 1 5 4 4 3.3V4 GND 14 14 2 14 2 2 PF paper length
PF feed sensor 1 Vout 2 2 2 4 5 5 VER_SENS_1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 1 15 1 1 PFPLSW3
switch 3

Relay
GND 1 1 3 3 6 6 GND

2 2 4 2 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch 1 1 5 1 8 8 GND

YC5
3.3V5_LED 1 1 15 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 14 2 2 2 GND PF paper sensor 2
CAS2_EMPTY 3 3 13 3 1 1 Vout

3.3V4_LED 4 4 12 4 3 3 3.3V
GND 5 5 11 5 2 2 GND
PF paper gauge
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 10 6 1 1 Vout sensor 3
3.3V 3 3 1 3 9 9 3.3V5_LED
Relay

PF lift sensor 2 GND 2 2 2 2 10 10 GND

3.3V4_LED 7 7 9 7 3 3 3.3V PF paper gauge
Vout 1 1 3 1 11 11 ULIM_SW_2
PF PWB

Relay
GND 8 8 8 8 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT2 9 9 7 9 1 1 Vout sensor 4
3.3V 3 3 1 3 12 12 3.3V5
Relay

GND 10 10 6 10 2 2 PF paper length

PF feed sensor 2 Vout 2 2 2 2 13 13 VER_SENS_2
CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 5 11 1 1 switch 4
GND 1 1 3 1 14 14 GND
GND 12 12 4 12 2 2 PF paper length
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 3 13 1 1 switch 5

GND 14 14 2 14 2 2 PF paper length

CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 1 15 1 1 switch 6
GND 16 16

YC2
3.3V4 1
YC6
Flash Writer GND 2
1 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR
RESET 3
MODE 4

1 2 1 Relay 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET
PF lift motor 2 2 1 2 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR
YC12
VER_SENS 1 1 1 1 NC
3.3V3 2 2 2 2 3.3V3
YC1
GND 3 3 3 3 GND
1 3.3V4
2 TXD
PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 4 4 PF_CAS2_SEL PF-5120
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 5 5 NC
3 RXD Debugger
EH_CLK 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
4 NC
EH_RDY 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_RDY
5 GND
EH_SDO 8 8 8 8 AN_PF_SDO
EH_SDI
PF_PAU 10
9 9
10
9
10
9
10
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_PAUSE
PF PWB ࠉ
YC8

Relay

Relay
PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 11 11 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
+24V 1 6 1 1 +24V
GND 2 5 2 2 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PFFM CLOCK 4 3 4 4 CLOCK
YC11
24V1 1 1 2 2 24V2
LD 5 2 5 5 LD
GND 2 2 3 3 GND
CW/CCW 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW

4 4 AC_NEUTRAL

1 1 AC_LIVE

1 1 AC_LIVE
PF Cassette heater
2 2 AC_NEUTRAL

9-21
Appendixes> Wiring diagram (Options) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(3) Paper Feeder (PF-5140)

YC3
3.3V4_LED 1 1 3 1 3 3 3.3V

Relay
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 GND PF paper sensor
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 1 3 1 1 Vout

3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V
PF PWB GND
CAS1_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper gauge sensor 1

Relay
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V
GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND PF paper gauge sensor 2
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout

YC4 GND 10 10 2 2
3.3V 3 3 1 3 1 1 3.3V4_LED CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 1 PF deck detection switch

Relay
PF lift sensor 1 GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 3 3 ULIM_SW_1 GND 12 12
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13

3.3V 3 3 1 5 4 4 3.3V4 GND 14 14

PF feed sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 5 5 VER_SENS_1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15

Relay
GND 1 1 3 3 6 6 GND

2 2 4 2 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch 1 1 5 1 8 8 GND

YC6
2 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR

YC2
3.3V4 1
GND 2
Flash Writer
RESET 3
MODE 4
YC1
1 3.3V4
2 TXD
3 RXD Debugger YC12
4 NC VER_SENS 1 1 1 1 NC
5 GND 3.3V3 2 2 2 2 3.3V3
GND 3 3 3 3 GND
PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 4 4 PF_CAS2_SEL
YC8 PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 5 5 NC
+24V 1 6 1 10 1 1 +24V EH_CLK 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
GND 2 5 2 9 2 2 GND EH_RDY 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_RDY PF-5120
PF paper feed START/STOP 3 4 3 8 3 3 START/STOP EH_SDO 8 8 8 8 AN_PF_SDO
CLOCK 4 3 4 7 4 4 CLOCK
motor LD 5 2 5 6 5 5 LD
EH_SDI 9 9 9 9 AN_PF_SDI
PF_PAU 10 10 10 10 AN_PF_PAUSE
CW/CCW 6 1 6 5 6 6 CW/CCW PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 11 11 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN

Relay

Relay
PF PWB
Relay

YC11
YC9 24V1 1 1 2 2 24V2
2 2 7 4 1 1 VER_CL1 GND 2 2 3 3 GND
PF conveying clutch 1 1 8 3 2 2 24V1

2 2 9 2 3 3 FEED_CL1 4 4 AC_NEUTRAL
PF paper feed clutch 1 1 10 1 4 4 24V1

5 5 VER_CL2 1 1 AC_LIVE

1 1 AC_LIVE
2 2 AC_NEUTRAL PF Cassette heater

9-22
Appendixes> Wiring diagram (Options) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(4) Inner finisher (DF-5100)

YC1 YC8 YC17

1 3.3V EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 ENTRY SENS A 1 1 3 3 DF paper entry
2 TXD EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 GND 2 2 2 2
3 RXD EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF eject motor ENTRY SENS SIG 3 3 1 1 sensor
4 N.C. EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
5 GND
STP MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 1 4 4
YC2 STP MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 2 3 3
1 3.3V STP MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 3 2 2 DF slide motor
2 SWCLK STP MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 4 1 1
3 SWDO
4 RESET EJE RELS MOT 2B 9 9 4 4
5 GND EJE RELS MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 DF eject
EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1
release motor
1 1 1 1 24V1
DF setting switch 2 2 2 2 SET SW (INTERLOCK)

YC5
14 14 1 1 ENG RDY
15 15 2 2 ENG SEL
16 16 3 3 ENG DI
17 17 4 4 ENG DO
18 18 5 5 ENG PAU YC21
19 19 6 6 DET MIDDLE MOT 1B 1 4 1 6
20 20 7 7 ENG CLK 2 5
Engine PWB
8 8 GND MIDDLE MOT 1A 2 3 3 4
MIDDLE MOT 2A 3 2 4 3
DF middle motor
YC3 5 2
1 1 1 1 GND MIDDLE MOT 2B 4 1 6 1
2 2 2 2 GND
4 4 3 3 24V1 YC9
5 5 4 4 24V1 PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 YC19
PADDLE MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 SID REG R HP SENS A 1 1 9 1 3 3
DF paddle motor DF side registration
PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 GND 2 2 8 2 2 2
PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 SID REG R HP SENS SIG 3 3 7 3 1 1 sensor 2

SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 DF side SID REG F HP SENS A 4 4 6 4 3 3 DF side registration

SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 GND 5 5 5 5 2 2
SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 registration SID REG F HP SENS SIG 6 6 4 6 1 1 sensor 1
SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 1 1 motor 2
1 1
SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 4 DF side GND 7 7 3 7 3 3 DF eject paper
SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 PAP SENS SIG 8 8 2 8 2 2
SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 2
registration
3.3V 9 9 1 9 4 4
sensor
SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 motor 1
MTRY FULL SENS A 10 10 3 3
GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor
MTRY FULL SENS SIG 12 12 1 1

PADDLE HP SENS A 13 13 3 3
YC10 GND 14 14 2 2 DF paddle sensor
STP MOT OUT1 1 13 PADDLE HP SENS SIG 15 15 1 1
STP MOT OUT1 2 12
STP MOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1 PAP PRE LOW SENS A 16 16 6 1 3 3 DF paper press
STP MOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 GND 17 17 5 2 2 2
STP MOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3 PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG 18 18 4 3 1 1 sensor 2
STP MOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4
STP MOT OUT2 7 7 PAP PRE UP SENS A 19 19 3 4 3 3 DF paper press
DF staple relay PWB GND 20 20 2 5 2 2
STP MOT OUT2 8 6
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG 21 21 1 6 1 1 sensor 1
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3 10 1
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 BUNDLE HP SENS A 22 22 9 2 3 3 DF bundle eject
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 8 3 2 2
BUNDLE HP SENS SIG 24 24 7 4 1 1 sensor

ADJUST HP SENS A 25 25 6 5 3 3 DF adjusting

GND 26 26 5 6 2 2
ADJUST HP SENS SIG 27 27 4 7 1 1 sensor

STP MOV HP SENS A 28 28 3 8 3 3

GND 29 29 2 9 2 2 DF slide sensor
STP MOV HP SENS SIG 30 30 1 10 1 1

YC11
TRY MOT OUT1 1 1
TRY MOT OUT2 2 2
DF tray motor

YC13
24V2 1 1 3 1 DF paper
PAP PRE SOL ACT 2 2 2 2
PAP PRE SOL KEEP 3 3 1 3 press solenoid

DF PWB

9-23
Appendixes> Wiring diagram (Options) [CONFIDENTIAL]

(5) Mailbox (MT-5100)

Mailbox PWB
YC 2 YC 1
3 3 5 5 AN O D E R E AD Y 1 1 1 1
Tray overflow sensor 1 2 2 6 6 GN D SELEC T 2 2 2 2
1 1 7 7 O FS 1 SD I 3 3 3 3
SD O 4 4 4 4
3 3 8 8 AN O D E P AU S E 5 5 5 5
Tray overflow sensor 2 2 2 9 9 GN D D E TE C T(G N D ) 6 6 6 6 Engine
1 1 10 1 0 O FS 2 SC LK 7 7 7 7
G N D (to E n g in e ) 8 8 8 8 PWB
3 3 11 1 1 AN O D E
Tray overflow sensor 3 2 2 12 12 GN D G N D (to L VU ) 9 9 9 9
1 1 13 1 3 O FS 3 G N D (to L VU ) 10 10 10 10
24V 11 11 11 11
3 3 14 1 4 AN O D E 24V 12 12 12 12
Tray overflow sensor 4 2 2 15 15 GN D
1 1 16 1 6 O FS 4

1 1 LED
2 2 GN D
3 3 E JE C T
4 4 3 .3 V
1 4 1 3

2 3 2 2 YC 3
1 2 1 1 3 .3 V
3 2
4 1 3 1
2 1 2 2 LED

TEJS
3 3 3 3 AN O D E
Tray overflow sensor 5 2 2 4 4 GN D
1 1 5 5 O FS 5

3 3 6 6 AN O D E YC 4
Tray overflow sensor 6 2 2 7 7 GN D MO TO R _A 1 4 1 4
1 1 8 8 O FS 6 MO TO R A 2 3 2 3
Mailbox drive motor
MO TO R B 3 2 3 2
9 9 AN O D E MO TO R _B 4 1 4 1
10 10 GN D
11 1 1 O FS 7
YC 5
3 3 12 1 2 AN O D E 3 .3 V 1
Mail home position
2 2 13 13 GN D GN D 2
switch
1 1 14 1 4 SHIFT H P S IG R ESET 3
MO D E 4
3 3 15 1 5 AN O D E
Mailbox cover switch 2 2 16 16 GN D
1 1 17 1 7 COVER O P E N YC 6
3 .3 V 1
TXD 2
R XD 3
NC 4
GN D 5

9-24
9 - 6 Installation guide [CONFIDENTIAL]

(1) PF-5120

PF-5120
(500 sheets × 1 Paper Feeder)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A B (M3x6) D

1 2

3 4

OFF

5 6

B (M3x6)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
7 C 8

9 10

ON

D
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 2

a b c

English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1. Check the gap between the paper center (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Español
Cómo ajustar la sincronización del borde superior
1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (1) y la línea (2 ) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034y seleccione [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale
1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ࢃㄥሯփ䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW7RS)XOO˹!˷3)˹DŽ

䚐ạ㛨
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OXP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㢌G⢰㢬 OYPG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘GTW””G¥GRXUW””
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›G{–—Gmœ““„GeG‚wm„ ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U

᪥ᮏㄒ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 PP㹼PP
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW7RS)XOO@!>3)@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augm entez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0 mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ E ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ F ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 O‰PGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŠPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ TW””G¥GRXUW””
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ E  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋࠉ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !PP 㹼 PP
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 4

d e f

Adjusting the center line

1. Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (c). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjus t the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±2,0mm.
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] .

Réglage de l'axe
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (c). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] .

Ajuste de la línea central

1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (c). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,0 mm.
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] .

Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (c). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0 mm.
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] .

Regolazione della linea centrale

1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (c). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,0 mm.
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] .

ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVV˹DŽ

㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OZP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㢌G⢰㢬 O[PG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›GsŒ›„GeG‚jˆššY„㡸G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U

ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVV@ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿ ࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (c) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±2.0mm.
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (e) : Augment ez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (c) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0mm max.
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (c) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±2,0mm.
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (c) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0mm.
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (c) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±2,0mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ H ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ I ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 O[P 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŒPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ H  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ I  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆ
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
(2) PF-5130 [CONFIDENTIAL]

PF-5130
(500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A C E G

D (M4x20) F

B (M3x6)

1
A

2 3

PF-5120

4 5

OFF
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
6 7
(B (M3x6):
PF-5120)

B (M3x6)

8 9
C
C

10 (C: PF-5120) 11

12 13
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
14 15

1
1
1 1

E D (M4x20)
D (M4x20) D (M4x20) F E

Select holes (1) and install each stopper (E,F) with 2 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (D) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (E,F) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (D) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (E,F) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (D) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (E,F) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (D) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (E,F) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (D) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴਴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄'˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄()˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOlSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOkPGᴵGYGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල () ࡀᗋ㠃࡟᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺࡟ࠊ✰  ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ0™6ࢱ࢖ࢺ ' ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ

16 17

ON
(D:PF-5120)

G
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 2

a b c

English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1. Check the gap between the paper center (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Español
Cómo ajustar la sincronización del borde superior
1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (1) y la línea (2 ) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034y seleccione [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale
1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ࢃㄥሯփ䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW7RS)XOO˹!˷3)˹DŽ

䚐ạ㛨
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OXP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㢌G⢰㢬 OYPG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘GTW””G¥GRXUW””
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›G{–—Gmœ““„GeG‚wm„ ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U

᪥ᮏㄒ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 PP㹼PP
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW7RS)XOO@!>3)@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augm entez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0 mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ E ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ F ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 O‰PGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŠPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ TW””G¥GRXUW””
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ E  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋࠉ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !PP 㹼 PP
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 4

d e f

Adjusting the center line

1. Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (c). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjus t the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±2,0mm.
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] or [Cass3] or [Cass4].
([Cass*] : Display for 30 ppm model, [Cassette*] : Display for 35 and 40 ppm model)

Réglage de l'axe
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (c). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] ou [Cass3] ou [Cass4].

Ajuste de la línea central

1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (c). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,0 mm.
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] o [Cass3] o [Cass4].

Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (c). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0 mm.
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] oder [Cass3] oder [Cass4].

Regolazione della linea centrale

1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (c). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,0 mm.
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] o [Cass3] o [Cass4].

ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVV˹ᡆ˷&DVV˹ᡆ˷&DVV˹DŽ
˷&DVV ˹˖൘  ᕐᵪಘкⲴᱮ⽪ ˷&DVVHWWH ˹˖൘  ᕐᵪಘ  ᕐᵪಘкⲴᱮ⽪

㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OZP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㢌G⢰㢬 O[PG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›GsŒ›„GeG‚jˆššY„G❄⏈G‚jˆššZ„❄⏈G‚jˆšš[„㡸G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U
O‚jˆššQ„GaGZW——”G⯜⒬㟝G♈㏘䙀⤼㢨 S‚jˆššŒ››ŒQ„GaGZ\——”GⵃG[W——”G⯜⒬㟝G♈㏘䙀⤼㢨 P

ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVV@ࡲࡓࡣ >&DVV@ࡲࡓࡣ >&DVV@ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿ ࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (c) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±2.0mm.
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (e) : Augment ez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (c) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0mm max.
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (c) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±2,0mm.
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (c) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0mm.
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (c) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±2,0mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ H ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ I ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 O[P 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŒPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ H  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ I  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆ
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
(3) PF-5140 [CONFIDENTIAL]

PF-5140
(2000 sheets Paper Feeder)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A C E

D (M4x20) F

B (M3x6)

1 2

3 4

PF-5120

5 6

OFF
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
7 8
(B (M3x6):
PF-5120)

B (M3x6)

9 10
C
C

11 (C: PF-5120) 12

13 14
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
15 16

1
1
1 1

E D (M4x20)
D (M4x20) D (M4x20) F E

Select holes (1) and install each stopper (E,F) with two S Tite screws M4 × 20 (D) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (E,F) avec les deux vis S Tite M4 × 20 (D) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (E,F) con los dos tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (D) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (E,F) mit die beiden S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (D) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (E,F) con le due viti S Tite M4 × 20 (D) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴਴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄'˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄()˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOlSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOkPGᴵGYGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල () ࡀᗋ㠃࡟᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺࡟ࠊ✰  ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ0™6ࢱ࢖ࢺ ' ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ

17 18

ON

(D:PF-5120)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

1 2

a b c

English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1. Check the gap between the paper center (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
2. Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1. Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l écart excède la valeur de référence, le r égler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
2. Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Español
Cómo ajustar la sincronización del borde superior
1. Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (1) y la línea (2 ) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
2. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034y seleccione [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1. Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als de r Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
2. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale
1. Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0mm
2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top Full] > [PF].

ㆶ։ѣᮽ
ࢃㄥሯփ䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW7RS)XOO˹!˷3)˹DŽ

䚐ạ㛨
㉔␜G䇴㢨ⵁG㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OXP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㢌G⢰㢬 OYPG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘GTW””G¥GRXUW””
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›G{–—Gmœ““„GeG‚wm„ ⪰G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U

᪥ᮏㄒ
ඛ➃ࢱ࢖࣑ࣥࢢㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 PP㹼PP
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW7RS)XOO@!>3)@ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> -0mm to +1.0mm
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augm entez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Dimi nuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> -0mm à +1,0mm
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De -0mm a +1,0mm
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> -0 mm bis +1,0mm
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> da -0 mm a +1,0 mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄D˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ E ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ F ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !PP̚PP
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OˆP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 OYP 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 O‰PGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŠPGஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ TW””G¥GRXUW””
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ D ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ E  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋࠉ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ F  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !PP 㹼 PP
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

3 4

d e f

Adjusting the center line

1.Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (c). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±2,0mm.
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] or [Cass3].

Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (c). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] ou [Cass3].

Ajuste de la línea central

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (c). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,0 mm.
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] o [Cass3].

Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (c). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0 mm.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] oder [Cass3].

Regolazione della linea centrale

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (c). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,0 mm.
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cass2] o [Cass3].

ѣᗹ㓵䈹㢸
⺞䇔㓨ᕐⲴѝᗳ˄˅઼⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯˄˅ѻ䰤Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬DŽྲ᷌‫〫ٿ‬٬䎵䗷ḷ߶٬ˈࡉ᤹➗лࡇ↕僔䘋㹼䈳ᮤDŽ
 ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ˷/682XW/HIW˹!˷&DVV˹ᡆ˷&DVV˹DŽ

㉰䉤⢰㢬G㦤㥉
㟝㫴G㩅㚍 OZP ḰG䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㢌G⢰㢬 O[PG㇠㢨㢌Gᷝ㵜⪰G䞉㢬䚌㐡㐐㝘 UG㵜㢨ᴴGὤ㨴㾌G㞬㢌Gᷱ㟤G␘㢀㢌G㍐㉐␴⦐G㦤㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘ U
஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|WZ[ ⪰G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚sz|Gvœ›GsŒ›„GeG‚jˆššY„G❄⏈G‚jˆššZ„㡸G㉔䈑䚝⏼␘ U

ࢭࣥࢱ࣮ࣛ࢖ࣥㄪᩚ
⣬ࡢࢭࣥࢱ࣮  ࡜ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࢆ☜ㄆࡍࡿࠋࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽್እࡢሙྜࠊ ḟࡢᡭ㡰࡛ㄪᩚࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
㸺ᇶ‽್㸼 sPP ௨ෆ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>/682XW/HIW@!>&DVV@ࡲࡓࡣ >&DVV@ࢆ㑅ᢥࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
3. Adjust the values. 6. Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (c) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±2.0mm.
4. Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5. Print the test pattern.

3. Régler les valeurs. 6. Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (e) : Augment ez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (c) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0mm max.
4. Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5. Imprimez le motif de test.

3. Ajuste los valores. 6. Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (c) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4. Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±2,0mm.
5. Imprima el patrón de prueba.

3. Die Werte einstellen. 6. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (c) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4. Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,0mm.
5. Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.

3. Regolare i valori. 6. Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (c) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±2,0mm
4. Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5. Stampare lo schema di prova.

䈳ᮤ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ 䟽༽↕僔 ̚ˈⴤ㠣⍻䈅ṧᕐ˄F˅Ⲵ㓯

⍻䈅മṸ H ˖䈳儈䇮ᇊ٬DŽ ˄˅Ⲵ‫〫ٿ‬٬䗮ࡠḷ߶٬ԕ޵DŽ
⍻䈅മṸ I ˖䈳վ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ  ḷ߶٬ !fPP ԕ޵
䇮ᇊ٬Ⲵањ䈳ᮤঅսਈॆ䟿˖PP
᤹ > ᔰ࿻ @ 䭞ˈԕ⺞ᇊ䇮ᇊ٬DŽ
ᢃঠ⍻䈅മṸDŽ

㉘㥉㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘ U 䊀㏘䏬G䑜䉨 OŠP 㜄㉐G⢰㢬 O[P 㢌Gᷝ㵜ᴴGὤ㨴G

䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OŒPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⋆㢹⏼␘ UG 㢨⇨ᴴG╔G⚀ᾀ㫴GY ␜᷸G¥G\ ␜᷸⪰Gⵌ⸩G㍌
䊀䏬㏘G䑜䉨 OPஔ㉘㥉㾌⪰G⇨⫱⏼␘ U 䚽䚝⏼␘ U
X ㏘䊑␭Gⷴ䞈⣽ஔWUX”” ஖ὤ㨴㾌஘ ·YUW”” 㢨⇨
‚ ⸩㇠ V 㐐㣅 „ 䇘⪰G⌸⪨ḔG㉘㥉㾌⪰G䞉㢬䚝⏼␘ U
㐐䜌G䑜䉨㡸G㢬㋸䚝⏼␘ U

タᐃ್ࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ G ࡢ⥺  ࡢࡎࢀࡀᇶ‽

ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ H  タᐃ್ࢆୖࡆࡿࠋ ್ෆ࡟࡞ࡿࡲ࡛ᡭ㡰 㹼ࢆ⧞ࡾ㏉ࡍࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥ I  タᐃ್ࢆୗࡆࡿࠋ  ᇶ‽್ !sPP ௨ෆ
 ࢫࢸࢵࣉᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸PP
> ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ @ ࣮࢟ࢆᢲࡋࠊタᐃ್ࢆ☜ᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢸࢫࢺࣃࢱ࣮ࣥࢆฟຊࡍࡿࠋ
(4) DF-5100 [CONFIDENTIAL]

DF-5100
(Inner Finisher)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
A C

B (M3x8) D

1 2

OFF

3 4

3
2

5 6

A
B (M3x8)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
7 8

B (M3x8)

9 10

11

ON
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

60.0mm±2.0mm
(120mm)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

(a) (b)
(5) AK-5100 [CONFIDENTIAL]

AK-5100
(Bridge Unit)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A B (M3x16) C

1 2

OFF

B (M3x16)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
5

5 C
(6) MT-5100 [CONFIDENTIAL]

MT-5100
(Mail Box)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
A B (M3x16) E (M3x8 Black) G

C (M3x8) F

H
D

2 3

OFF

4 5

C(M3x8)

B (M3x16)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
6 7

D
D

8 9

1
2

E (M3x8 Black) G

10

H
(7) JS-5100 [CONFIDENTIAL]

JS-5100
(Job separator)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A B C

(M3x8)

1 2

OFF

3 4

5 6
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
7 8

ON

C (M3X8)

9
(30ppm)
EN Set the maintenance mode U211, and set [Inner JobSepa] > [On].

FR Passez en mode maintenance U211 et paramétrer [Inner JobSepa] > [On].

ES Configure el modo de mantenimiento U211 y configure [Inner JobSepa] > [On] .

DE Aktivieren Sie den U-Parameter U211 und [Inner JobSepa] > [On].

IT Accedere al modo manutenzione U211, e selezionare [Inner JobSepa] > [On].

CN 䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ >,QQHU-RE6HSD@!>2Q@DŽ

KR ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚p••Œ™Gq–‰zŒ—ˆ„GeG‚v•„⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U

JP ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSD@!>2Q@ ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ

(35ppm/40ppm)
EN Set the maintenance mode U211, and set [Inner Job Separator] > [On].

FR Passez en mode maintenance U211 et paramétrer [Inner Job Separator] > [On].

ES Configure el modo de mantenimiento U211 y configure [Inner Job Separator] > [On] .

DE Aktivieren Sie den U-Parameter U211 und [Inner Job Separator] > [On].

IT Accedere al modo manutenzione U211, e selezionare [Inner Job Separator] > [On].

CN 䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈᢺ >,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@DŽ

KR ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔG‚p••Œ™Gq–‰GzŒ—ˆ™ˆ›–™„GeG‚v•„⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U

JP ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@ ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ

(8) FAX System 11 [CONFIDENTIAL]

FAX System 11
(FAX Kit)

Installation Guide
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

A C F

G
D
1 ABC DEF

2 GHI JKL MNO

3 PRS TUV WXY H

4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

5 OPER

I
B E

120V 230V 240V 110V 220V 220-240V

North Amer- Europe Australia/ Taiwan China Asia/Korea
ica/Latin New Zealand
America
A 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 - 1 - 1 -
C - - 1 - - -
D 1 1 1 1 1 1
E - - 1 - - -
F - - - - 1 -
G - - - - 1 -
H - - - - 1 -
I - - - 1 - -
J - - - - 1 -
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
1 2

OFF
FAX

(For New Zealand model) (Per il modello Nuova Zelanda)

4
(Modèle pour la Nouvelle-Zélande) ӵ䘲⭘Ҿᯠ㾯‫ޠ‬රਧ
(Para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés) OG⎨㫼⣐☐G㇠㛅⬀GP
B
(Für Neuseeland-Modell)  ࢽ࣮ࣗࢪ࣮ࣛࣥࢻ௙ᵝࡢࡳ

C
B
C

5
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
6 7

DEF
ABC

D 1 ABC DEF

2 GHI JKL MNO

1 MNO
JKL
2 GHI WXY
TUV
3 PRS
TUV
WXYZ 3 PRS TUV WXY
4 PQRS
OPER
5
4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

5 OPER

9 10

11

G J F
H
I

(For China model) (For Taiwan model) (For New Zealand model)
 [CONFIDENTIAL]
12

ON

13
ENG IT
Initialize the FAX circuit board. Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize Eseguire il modo manutenzione U600
the FAX PWBs. per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB.

FR CN
Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX. Ֆⵕ⭫䐥ᶵⲺࡓခौ
Exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser ᢗ㹼㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈࡍ࿻ॆՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯDŽ
les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax.

ES KO
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. mhG 䟀⦐ὤ䑄㢌G 㸼ὤ䞈
Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|]WW㡸G㍌䚽䚌㜠
inicializar los FAX PWB. mhGὤ䑄㡸G㸼ὤ䞈䚝⏼␘U

DE JP
Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. )$;ᇶᯈࡢึᮇ໬
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ
um die FAX-Karte zu initialisieren. )$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࠋ
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Headquarters 13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,
225 Sand Road, New Territories, Hong Kong
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA Phone: +852-2496-5678
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America KYOCERA Document Solutions
8240 NW 52nd Terrace, Suite 301 (China) Corporation
Miami, Florida 33166, USA 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Phone: +1-305-421-6640 Shanghai,200003, China
Fax: +1-305-421-6666 Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Canada (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
Phone: +1-905-670-4425 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Fax: +1-905-670-8116 Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +66-2-586-0278
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Ciudad de Mexico, C.P. 11560 Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone: +52-555-383-2741 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Fax: +52-555-383-7804 Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda. Fax: +65-6748-3788
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP KYOCERA Document Solutions
06543-306, Brazil Hong Kong Limited
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA Fax: +852-3185-1399
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +56-2-2670-1900 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Fax: +56-2-2350-7150 Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Australia Pty. Ltd. Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113, Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 #10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Seoul, Korea
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +822-6933-4050
New Zealand Ltd. Fax: +822-747-0084
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand KYOCERA Document Solutions
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 India Private Limited
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
 [CONFIDENTIAL]

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V. KYOCERA Document Solutions

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, Deutschland GmbH
The Netherlands Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Phone: +31(0)20-654-0000 Germany
Fax: +31(0)20-653-1256 Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
The Netherlands Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Austria
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road, KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS, Borgarfjordsgatan 11, 164 40 Kista, Sweden
United Kingdom Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy, Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Denmark
Belgium Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin Portugal
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, Phone: +351-21-843-6780
France Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A. South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain 90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +34-91-6318219 Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Finland Russia
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +358-9-47805212 Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, United Arab Emirates
Switzerland Phone: +971-04-433-0412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions Czech, s.r.o.
Harfa Office ParkýHVkomoravská 2420/15, Praha 9
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions Phone: +420-222-562-246
Turkey A.S.
Altunizade Mah. Prof. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:45 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
h6.h'$5ø67$1BUL, TURKEY 2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Phone: +90-216-339-0020 Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Fax: +90-216-339-0070 Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2019 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation